NMS5UX-B 6.4.

7
Network Management System 5 UniX - B

User manual

MN.00247.E - 001 Volume 1/1

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation HP, HP OpenView NNM and HP-UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark. Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark. Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

NMS5UX-B Contents

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

17

NMS5UX-B SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 17 MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM .............................................................. 18 MODULARITY OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM.............................................................................. 19 MAPS................................................................................................................................ 21 EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B ................................................................................... 22 Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment) ......................................... 22 Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment) ..................................... 22 RELEASE OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM.................................................................................... 23 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 24 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B ................................................... 25 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS................................................................................. 26 UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW.................................................................................................. 27 MENU BAR......................................................................................................................... 28 TITLE BAR ......................................................................................................................... 29 TOOL BAR ......................................................................................................................... 30 MAP AREA ......................................................................................................................... 32 Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area .................................................... 33 Objects of the Map area ................................................................................................ 33 To display/hide the Map area ......................................................................................... 33 VIEW AREA........................................................................................................................ 34 Passing from one level to the other in the View area.......................................................... 34 Objects of the View area................................................................................................ 34 Background of the View area.......................................................................................... 34 NEW OBJECT AREA ............................................................................................................. 35 OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................... 36 Graphic representation of the object: symbol ................................................................... 36 Symbol items: icon ....................................................................................................... 37 Symbol items: name ..................................................................................................... 38 Symbol items: check sign .............................................................................................. 38 Symbol items: notes ..................................................................................................... 39 Symbol characteristics: behavior .................................................................................... 39 Symbol characteristics: colour ........................................................................................ 40

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

Symbol characteristics: right button function.................................................................... 42 STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................................... 44 PLATFORM STATUS BAR ...................................................................................................... 45 To display/hide the platform status bar............................................................................ 46 EQUIPMENT WINDOW............................................................................................................ 47 ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW....................................................................................................... 48 ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW................................................................................................... 49 RING MANAGER WINDOW...................................................................................................... 50 VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW.............................................................................................. 51 NMS5UX USERS...................................................................................................................... 52 RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER .............................................................. 53 PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER ................................................................................................ 54 CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER ................................................................................ 55 Username.................................................................................................................... 55 Password..................................................................................................................... 55 Map ............................................................................................................................ 56 Profile ......................................................................................................................... 57 Superuser.............................................................................................................. 57 Privileged .............................................................................................................. 57 Advanced .............................................................................................................. 57 Normal .................................................................................................................. 58 Entry .................................................................................................................... 58 Internet ...................................................................................................................... 58 Ring/VLAN ................................................................................................................... 58 EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT) ............................................................................... 60 FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW.......................................... 61 FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER.............................................................................. 62 ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY) .................................................................. 63 UPDATING OF THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MODALITY ................................ 64 PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY .......................................... 65 FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP.......................................................................... 66 MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW ............................................................. 67 MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW .................................................................... 68 MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW........................................................ 69 MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW ................................................. 70

PROCEDURES

71

START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)..................... 71

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE.............................................................................. 72 FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE..................................................................... 75 CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE.............................................................. 76 AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE ............................................ 77 GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................................................. 78 OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION ................................................ 79 Container objects ......................................................................................................... 79 Network Element objects ............................................................................................... 79 Real NE ................................................................................................................. 79 Virtual NE .............................................................................................................. 79 NE of ALplus Node type ........................................................................................... 80 NE of ALCplus2 Node type........................................................................................ 80 NE tipo WEB Generic ............................................................................................... 80 Generic Symbol objects ................................................................................................. 81 Link objects ................................................................................................................. 81 Label objects ............................................................................................................... 81 Ring objects................................................................................................................. 81 VLAN Map objects......................................................................................................... 81 RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS ......................................................................... 82 OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU ........................................................................................ 85 Examples of network graphical representation .................................................................. 85 Network composed by SNMP equipment..................................................................... 85 Network composed by Legacy equipment ................................................................... 88 Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment .................................... 91 Network subdivided into more maps.......................................................................... 95 OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY............................................ 97 To create the file in csv format ....................................................................................... 97 Structure of the csv file ........................................................................................... 97 Rules of the compilation of the csv file ....................................................................... 99 To compile the csv file starting from a model .............................................................100 Example of use of Add Network From File functionality .....................................................101 OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY ........................................................104 Network Scan modality.................................................................................................104 NE Wake Up modality...................................................................................................106 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ................................................................................................... 108 OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS .........................................................................................109 CONNECTION PROCEDURE .................................................................................................111 COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION .....................................................112 Line Test command......................................................................................................112 Connect command .......................................................................................................112 Disconnect command ...................................................................................................112 Alarm Re-alignment command ......................................................................................113 Configuration Upload command .....................................................................................113 Legacy-Reset&Connect command ..................................................................................113 CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT .......................................................................114 Disconnected status .....................................................................................................114 Connected status.........................................................................................................114 Unreachable status ......................................................................................................115

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

Maintenance status ......................................................................................................115 LOM/LCT ..........................................................................................................................116 Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration ..................................116 Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user .........................................117 To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality .....................117 ALARM MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 118 ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS............................................................................................119 Polling........................................................................................................................119 DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS................................................................................120 DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY .....................................121 ALARM CORRELATION ........................................................................................................122 SAVING OF THE ALARMS ....................................................................................................123 ALARM SEVERITY ..............................................................................................................124 ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS ...............................................................................126 FLEETING ALARMS ............................................................................................................127 MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE) ........................................................................128 MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG ..................................................................................................129 PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT ....................................................................... 130 ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES ..............................................................131 ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ..........................................................132 DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES ............................................................133 SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK .....................................................134

MENU AND COMMANDS

135

MAP ..................................................................................................................................... 136 REFRESH..........................................................................................................................137 To update the UX Map Manager window..........................................................................137 MAP PROPERTIES ..............................................................................................................138 To modify the size of the symbols ..................................................................................138 SUBMAP PROPERTIES ........................................................................................................139 To associate/remove the background to a container .........................................................139 IMPORT/EXPORT ...............................................................................................................140 To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container ..................................140 To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container.....................................142 To save the objects of a map/container to a file ...............................................................142 To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container......143 To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/container...........144 CHANGE MAP ....................................................................................................................145 To close the open map and opening another one..............................................................145 To delete a map ..........................................................................................................146 EXIT ................................................................................................................................147

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

To close the UX Map Manager window ............................................................................147 EDIT .................................................................................................................................... 148 ADD ................................................................................................................................149 To create Container objects ..........................................................................................149 To create NE object managed with SNMP protocol ............................................................150 NSAP (Gosip) Address ............................................................................................151 To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol.................................................152 To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol .........................................................152 To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol ...............................................153 To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)..................................................................154 To create Link objects (connection) ................................................................................154 To create Label objects (wordings).................................................................................155 To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file ..........................155 DELETE ............................................................................................................................156 To delete an object from the map ..................................................................................156 MODIFY/VIEW...................................................................................................................157 To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object......................................................157 To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ...........................................157 To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object .............................................158 To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object .............................................................159 To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object............................................................159 INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................160 To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol ...................................................................160 To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol ..............................................161 GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES .......................................................................................162 To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol..............................162 FIND................................................................................................................................163 To search a symbol in the map ......................................................................................163 ARRANGE SYMBOLS...........................................................................................................164 To align the symbols ....................................................................................................164 GENERATE INFO FOR WEB..................................................................................................165 To check the database information necessary to the RAN ..................................................165 SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS.....................................................166 To set the size of the containers windows .......................................................................166 VIEW ................................................................................................................................... 167 SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE ......................................................................................................168 To display/hide the Map area ........................................................................................168 SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS..........................................................................................169 To display/hide the platform status bar...........................................................................169 SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL ....................................................................................................170 To show/hide the names of the Link objects ....................................................................170 PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................... 171 PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ .....................................................................................172 To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment ...............................................172 PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..............................................................................................173 To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

(24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ...................173 To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records 15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters .................176 OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING .......................................................................................177 To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ..............................................177 To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table ...........................................178 EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING ..................................................................................179 To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type ...179 VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS................................................................................................181 To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same type...........................................................................................................................181 To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type .........................................................................................................183 To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type .........................................................................................................183 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................. 184 EQUIPMENT INFO ..............................................................................................................185 To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment ...............................185 RADIO CERTIFICATE ..........................................................................................................187 To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio..............................187 To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio ................................................187 LEGACY-HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY .................................................................................188 To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy equipment present into the open map ............................................................................188 To save/print the list of the objects ................................................................................189 To filter/order the list of the objects ...............................................................................189 LEGACY-PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY ...................................................................................191 To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map ......................191 To save/print the list of the objects ................................................................................192 To modify the identification code of the unit ....................................................................192 To filter/order the list of the objects ...............................................................................193 SNMP-SOFTWARE INVENTORY ............................................................................................194 To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ................194 To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ............................................................................................196 To save/print the list of the equipment/units ...................................................................196 To open the equipment window .....................................................................................197 To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................197 To update the equipment software .................................................................................197 To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller.........................197 To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment .................................198 To filter/order the list of the equipment/units ..................................................................198 SNMP-EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION............................................................................200 To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map .............................................................................................................200 To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment ...............201 To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................202 To executes the Ping of an equipment ............................................................................202 To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different ...............................202 To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa ......................202

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

To filter/order the list of the equipment ..........................................................................202 SNMP-NE PPP INTERFACES .................................................................................................204 To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment ...............204 SNMP-NE ROUTING TABLE..................................................................................................205 To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment ..............................205 To add an element to the Routing Table..........................................................................206 To delete an element from the Routing Table ..................................................................207 To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway..................................................207 To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway ...........................................................207 Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ...............................................................207 SNMP-HW INVENTORY .......................................................................................................209 To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map...........................209 To save the data to file.................................................................................................211 To save periodically the data to file ................................................................................212 To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file ..........................................................212 SNMP-NE BACKUP/RESTORE ...............................................................................................213 To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map .......................213 To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore)......................................................................................................................216 To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) ..................................216 To lock/unlock a backup file ..........................................................................................216 NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info) ...................................................................217 LEGACY-ALARM AVERAGE...................................................................................................219 To display the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B system and sent by the Legacy equipment.......................................................................................219 LOCATE ................................................................................................................................ 220 EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE ...................................................................................................221 To display the list of the equipment................................................................................222 To save/print the list of equipment.................................................................................224 To filter/sort the list of the equipment ............................................................................225 To open the equipment window .....................................................................................226 To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment.............................................226 To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Upload of an equipment ..................................................................................226 To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present...........................................227 To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment ..........................................227 To delete and rewrite the equipment table ......................................................................227 To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment .................................................228 To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type ...229 To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ....................................230 To update the equipment software (SNMP) .....................................................................230 To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................231 To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment..............................................................................................................232 To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment .........................................................233 To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment.............................................233 To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment ...................................233 To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test).....................................................234 To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................234 To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................235 To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................235

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................236 To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type ..........236 To reset and connect one or more equipment (Legacy) .....................................................237 To connect one or more CommServer-S .........................................................................237 To disconnect one or more CommServer-S......................................................................238 To start the Command Executor application ....................................................................238 PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST ....................................................................................................239 To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent ......................................239 To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment ................................240 COMMAND............................................................................................................................ 241 LINE TEST ........................................................................................................................242 To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment ........................................................242 To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ................................242 CONNECT .........................................................................................................................244 To connect one or more equipment ................................................................................244 To connect the equipment of one or more containers........................................................244 DISCONNECT....................................................................................................................246 To disconnect one or more equipment ............................................................................246 To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers....................................................246 SNMP-FORCE NE DISCONNECT............................................................................................248 To force the software disconnection of one or more SNMP equipment .................................248 SNMP-PING ......................................................................................................................249 To executes the Ping of a SNMP equipment .....................................................................249 LEGACY-RESET&CONNECT ..................................................................................................250 To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment .......................................................250 To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers ...............................250 ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT.......................................................................................................252 To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment.............................................................252 To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ....................................252 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ..................................................................................................254 To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment.....................................................254 To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ............................254 SNMP-CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD....................................................................................256 To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP equipment ...................................................................................................256 To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP equipment ...............................................................................................258 COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD.......................................................................................259 To connect one or more CommServer-S .........................................................................259 To disconnect one or more CommServer-S......................................................................259 SNMP-RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ...............................................................................261 To execute the software reset of an SNMP equipment .......................................................261 PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE...................................................................................................262 To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms.......................................................262 FAULT .................................................................................................................................. 263 NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ................................................................................................264 To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map ......................................264 To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................266

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

To copy the alarms list to a text editor ...........................................................................267 To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................267 To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................267 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................268 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................268 To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................269 To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................270 To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................270 To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................271 To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................271 Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................271 Modality of recording of the alarms ................................................................................272 NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS..............................................................................................273 To display alarms active in the equipment of the map.......................................................273 To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................275 To mark the alarms .....................................................................................................275 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data.................................................275 To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................276 To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................277 To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................277 To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................278 Modality of updating of the data ....................................................................................278 OLD ALARM HISTORY.........................................................................................................279 To display the alarm history present in the Old History table .............................................279 To save/print the alarms list..........................................................................................281 To copy the alarms list into a text editor .........................................................................281 To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................281 To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment.........................................................283 To verify the time interval between two different alarms ...................................................283 To sort the alarms list ..................................................................................................284 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm.........................................................284 NE ALARM HISTORY...........................................................................................................285 NE CURRENT ALARMS ........................................................................................................286 SNMP-NE HISTORY LOG .....................................................................................................287 To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment ......................................................287 To create a NE Log ......................................................................................................288 To create more NE Logs at the same time .......................................................................288 To display the content of a NE Log .................................................................................289 To delete a NE Log.......................................................................................................289 To delete all the NE Logs of a SNMP equipment ...............................................................289 To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment.....................................290 SNMP-NE COMMAND LOG ...................................................................................................291 To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment............................................291 To create a Command Log ............................................................................................292 To create more Command Logs at the same time.............................................................293 To display the content of a Command Log.......................................................................293 To delete a Command Log ............................................................................................294 To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment .....................................................294 To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment..................294 NE Command Log (more info) .......................................................................................294

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................................................295 To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the map .................................................................................295 To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................297 To display the alarms stored in the alarm history .............................................................298 To reset the indication of status change..........................................................................299 To set the automatic updating of the data .......................................................................299 SNMP-EVENT STATISTICS ..................................................................................................300 To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval ......................................300 To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment .........................................302 To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ................................................302 To delete the alarms ....................................................................................................303 To filter the alarms ......................................................................................................303 TRANSACTION LOG ...........................................................................................................305 To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users ...................................305 To save/print the list of operations.................................................................................306 To delete the operations ...............................................................................................307 To filter the list of operations ........................................................................................307 Recording modality of the operations .............................................................................308 TOOLS.................................................................................................................................. 311 ALARM NOTIFICATION VIA E-MAIL.......................................................................................312 Alarm Notification via e-mail - Superuser ........................................................................312 To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail .............................................................................................................312 To add an operator ................................................................................................313 To modify the characteristics of the operators............................................................314 To delete an operator .............................................................................................315 To activate/deactivate an operator ...........................................................................315 To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................315 To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via e-mail .......................................................................................315 Alarm Notification via e-mail - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged ....................................316 To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail .................................317 Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality .......................................................................317 SNMP-COMMAND EXECUTOR...............................................................................................318 To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file .........................................................318 To display the content of a file of SNMP commands ..........................................................319 To display the files of scheduled SNMP commands............................................................320 SNMP-NE MONITORING......................................................................................................321 To display the list of the measures .................................................................................321 To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure)...........................322 To display the characteristics of a measure .....................................................................323 To delete a measure ....................................................................................................323 To activate a measure ..................................................................................................323 To deactivate a measure ..............................................................................................323 To display the results of a measure ................................................................................324 To save the results of a measure ...................................................................................324 To display the results of a measure stored into a file ........................................................325 To save the results of a measure stored into a file............................................................325 To delete a file ............................................................................................................325 NE Monitoring functionality ...........................................................................................327

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

10

SNMP-AUTO DISCOVERY ....................................................................................................328 To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality) .................................................................................................328 To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality ...........................330 To deactivate the Network Scan modality........................................................................332 To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality .............................332 To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality..........................................................................333 To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file .........................................................333 To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file .................................................333 To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table).........333 To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table.........................................................335 To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table ........................................335 To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table ..............336 SNMP-RMON .....................................................................................................................337 To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of a SNMP equipment (RMON statistics) ...............337 To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics .......................................339 To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics .................................340 To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ...............................340 To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file .............341 To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ........................................342 To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................345 To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics..............345 To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ...........................................345 To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)...........................................................................................346 To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)...........................................................................................346 To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) ..............................................347 Implementation of the RMON standard in the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B........348 Ethernet counters (RMON) ............................................................................................351 SNMP-XML EXPORT............................................................................................................353 To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file............................................353 To display the active cronjobs (XML Export) ....................................................................355 To create a cronjob (XML Export)...................................................................................356 To delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export) ..................................................................356 To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory ...........................................356 To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ................................357 To display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files ...........................358 To convert a XML file into a HTML file .............................................................................358 To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file.............................................................358 To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files .................................................................360 To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML in attachment ......................................360 Function XML Export (more information).........................................................................361 OPTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 365 LEGACY-NETWORK ALARM HYSTERESIS ...............................................................................366 To display the value of the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (Legacy equipment) .366 To modify the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms ...............................................367 SNMP-NETWORK SEVERITY CODE........................................................................................368 To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type ......368 To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type .....369 SNMP-EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE .....................................................................................370

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

11

To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of a SNMP equipment ...................................................................................................370 To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the alarms of a SNMP equipment ...............................................................................371 To filter the alarms list .................................................................................................372 NMS5UX SYSTEM USERS ....................................................................................................373 NMS5UX System Users - Superuser ...............................................................................373 To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps........................373 To create a new map..............................................................................................374 To add a NMS5UX user ...........................................................................................374 To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users.....................................................375 To delete a NMS5UX user........................................................................................375 To add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the UX Map Manager window - active) .............376 NMS5UX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user.....................................377 To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map ....................................377 To modify the password associated to one's NMS5UX user ..........................................378 NMS5UX LOGGED USERS ...................................................................................................379 To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open ..........................................379 To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ...................................................380 To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user ......................................................381 To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users..........................................................381 To filter the NMS5UX users list ......................................................................................381 To display the list of the active NMS5UX-B applications.....................................................382 To require the closure of an NMS5UX-B application ..........................................................383 To force the closure of an NMS5UX-B application .............................................................383 To filter the NMS5UX-B applications list ..........................................................................383 SNMP-LCT EQUIPMENT USERS ............................................................................................385 To display the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment ...........................................................385 To add a new LCT user .................................................................................................386 To modify the characteristics of the LCT users .................................................................387 To delete a LCT user ....................................................................................................387 User list (more info).....................................................................................................387 SNMP-LCT LOGGED USERS .................................................................................................388 To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment .............388 To force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user .............................................................389 LCT and NMS5UX users (more info) ...............................................................................389 SNMP-REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE ..........................................................................................390 To display the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment ...............................................390 To add a station to the remote equipment list..................................................................391 To rename a station of the remote equipment list ............................................................392 To delete a station from the remote equipment list ..........................................................392 To add an equipment to the remote equipment list...........................................................392 To add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list ..............................394 To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list.........................395 To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list ...................................................396 To move an equipment within the remote equipment list ..................................................396 To save to a file the remote equipment list......................................................................397 To restore from file the remote equipment list .................................................................397 Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................397 Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list ........................398 Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list.....................399 SNMP-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD.............................................................................................400

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

12

To update the equipment software (SNMP) .....................................................................400 To update the WEB LCT application ................................................................................402 Equipment software (SNMP) (more info) .........................................................................403 WEB LCT application (SNMP) (more info) ........................................................................403 SNMP-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS ...................................................................................404 To display the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating ....................404 To delete one or more NEs from the list (SNMP) ..............................................................405 To stop the updating of the software (SNMP)...................................................................406 To save the list of the scheduled equipment ....................................................................406 To re-execute the software update.................................................................................406 To switch the memory bench.........................................................................................407 To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment .............................................................408 SNMP-NE SW/FW RELEASE .................................................................................................409 To display the software version of a SNMP equipment.......................................................409 To update the software of a SNMP equipment..................................................................410 To switch the operation of the memory benches of a SNMP equipment controller..................411 To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a SNMP equipment..........411 FAMXC-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD ...........................................................................................412 To update the equipment software (FAMxc).....................................................................412 Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info) ........................................................................413 FAMXC-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS..................................................................................414 To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating...................................414 To delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc) ....................................................415 FAMXC-NE SW/FW RELEASE ...............................................................................................416 To display the software version of a FAMxc equipment......................................................416 To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc ..............................417 LEGACY-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD..........................................................................................418 To update the equipment software (Legacy) ....................................................................418 Equipment software (Legacy) (more info) .......................................................................419 LEGACY-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS ................................................................................420 To display the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating ..................420 To delete one or more equipment from the list (Legacy) ...................................................421 To stop the updating of the software (Legacy) .................................................................421 MISC .................................................................................................................................... 422 ALARM HISTORY BACKUP ...................................................................................................423 To backup the alarm history..........................................................................................423 ALARM HISTORY RESTORE .................................................................................................424 To restore the alarm history from disk ............................................................................424 To restore the alarm history from tape ...........................................................................424 ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP........................................................................................425 To delete the backup files of the alarm history.................................................................425 PERFORMANCE MONITORING BACKUP..................................................................................426 To save the PM measures (backup) ................................................................................426 PERFORMANCE MONITORING RESTORE ................................................................................427 To restore the PM measures from disk ............................................................................427 To restore the PM measures from tape ...........................................................................427 PERFORMANCE MONITORING DELETE ..................................................................................428 To delete the backup files of the PM measures.................................................................428

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

13

NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE BACKUP ..................................................................................429 To save the database (backup)......................................................................................429 NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE RESTORE.................................................................................430 To restore the database................................................................................................430 RING MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 431 EDIT > RM-ADD RING........................................................................................................432 To create Ring objects..................................................................................................432 EDIT > RM-DELETE RING ...................................................................................................433 To delete a Ring object from the map .............................................................................433 EDIT > RM-MODIFY/VIEW RING ..........................................................................................434 To verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object .............................................................434 FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................435 To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.................................................................................................435 To save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................437 To delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................437 To mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................438 To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Alarm History)......................................................................................................................438 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History) ........438 To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................439 To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................440 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History) ................441 Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Alarm History) ............................................442 Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................442 FAULT > RM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................443 To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system.................................................................................................443 To save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................444 To mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................445 To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................................................................445 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm)........445 To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................445 To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................447 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ................448 Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................448 FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY ............................................................................449 To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings................................................................................449 To filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary).......................................................450 To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................452 To save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ...........................................452 To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)......................................................................................453 To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .................453 To reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ..............................453 To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ........453 FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................454 FAULT > RM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................455

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

14

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM SUMMARY ..............................................................................456 LOCATE > RM-RING BROWSER ...........................................................................................457 To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B ...............................................457 To open the Ring Manager window .................................................................................458 To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring...................................................458 LOCATE > RM-PATH BROWSER ...........................................................................................459 To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ................................459 To save the list of the Path ...........................................................................................461 To delete one or more Paths .........................................................................................461 To delete the protection of a Path ..................................................................................462 To add the protection to a Path .....................................................................................462 To activate the management of a Path ...........................................................................462 To deactivate the management of a Path ........................................................................463 To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection ..............................................463 To display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path....................................463 To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path .......................463 To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path ................................................463 To display/modify the configuration of a Path ..................................................................465 To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected ....................................................468 To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained..............470 To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path .....470 To filter/sort the list of the Path.....................................................................................470 LOCATE > RM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................472 To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ........................472 To filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................473 To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ............474 VLAN MANAGER ................................................................................................................... 475 EDIT > VM-ADD VLAN MAP .................................................................................................476 To create VLAN Map objects ..........................................................................................476 EDIT > VM-DELETE VLAN MAP ............................................................................................477 To delete a VLAN Map object from the map .....................................................................477 EDIT > VM-MODIFY/VIEW VLAN MAP ...................................................................................478 To verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object .....................................................478 FAULT > VM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY ..............................................................................479 To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system.................................................................................................479 To save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................481 To delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................................481 To mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................481 To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Alarm History)......................................................................................................................482 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History) ........482 To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................482 To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................484 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History).................484 Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Alarm History) ............................................485 Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ........................................485 FAULT > VM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM .............................................................................486 To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system.................................................................................................486

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

15

To save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................487 To mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................488 To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................................................................488 To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm)........488 To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................488 To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .........................................................490 To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm) ................490 Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Current Alarm) ...........................................491 FAULT > VM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY ...............................................................................492 FAULT > VM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM...............................................................................493 LOCATE > VM-VLAN MAP BROWSER.....................................................................................494 To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B .......................................494 To open the VLAN Manager Map window .........................................................................495 To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map ...........................................495 To filter the list of the VLAN Map....................................................................................495 LOCATE > VM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER ..................................................................................496 To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map ................496 To filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser) ........................................................497 To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window ....498 HELP .................................................................................................................................... 499 ABOUT NMS5UX-B .............................................................................................................500 LICENSE INFORMATION .....................................................................................................501 To display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system .....................501 DISPLAY LEGEND ..............................................................................................................502 To display the legend of the colours which the objects can assume.....................................502 NMS5UX SOFTWARE MODULE .............................................................................................503 To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package ...............503 To print the list of programs..........................................................................................504 To end possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained appended ...................................................................................................................504 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR ..................................................................................................505 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................506 MANAGER .....................................................................................................................507

APPENDICES

508

MENUS AND COMMANDS ...................................................................................................... 508 OPERATIONS INDEX ............................................................................................................ 514 ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 523

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

16

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The NMS5UX-B system (Network Management System 5 Unix-B) has been developed to monitor and manage telecommunications equipment. The user can communicate to the supervision system by means of a graphic window, called UX Map Manager which represents the NMS5UX-B graphical interface at general level (see Fig.1). The NMS5UX-B system has been developed to be used together with the UNIX operating system and makes use of all the functionalities of this system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

17

MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

Monitoring of the equipment connected to the system; dynamic displaying of the detection of an alarm and recording into the alarm history (resident on the machine disk). The displaying stored into the alarm history are related among them: the date/time of detection and clearing of the alarm are indicated in the same record. The alarm history can be saved and recovered later. Management of the alarm Log stored in the controller of the equipment: storing of the Log on the machine, deletion of the Log from the controller. Management and change of the severity level coupled to each equipment alarm. Notification via e-mail of the alarm detection. Graphic or table representation of the network. The representation of the network is executed by the user by means of a series of predefined objects. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects anytime. The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps. The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map. The creation of the objects can be executed by the user by means of one of the following ways: Creation of each single object by means of a specific command (see Edit > Add menu). Creation of the objects by means of the Add Network From File functionality: automatic creation of the objects described in a file in csv format. Creation of the NE objects by means of the Auto Discovery functionality: detection of the equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system; automatic creation and connection of the discovered NE objects.

Management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of all the equipment connected to the system: Activation/deactivation of the measures also contemporary for more equipment of the same type. Check of the result of the measures in graphic format. Store on disk/tape the results. Then, the data can be restored, displayed and saved (subdivided by month) on a file. The saving operation can be executed for a single measurements of a single equipment or for a measurement of all the equipment of the same type present into the map.

Management of the equipment software: immediate or scheduled updating of the software of the equipment connected to the system, check of the software versions. Management of the equipment configuration: saving of the equipment configuration to file. Then, it will be possible to transfer the configuration to any equipment present in the network. Management of the virtual equipment. Command Executor: program that executes predefined sequences of SNMP commands. The predefined sequences of SNMP commands are provided at customers request by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. List of the application programs (browser, manager, etc.), relevant to the NMS5UX-B system, on progress at the choice of the command. Possibility to require for or to force the closing of an application program on progress (browser, manager, etc.) of the NMS5UX-B system. List of the users connected with the supervisory system. Possibility to require for or to force the disconnection procedure (logout) of an user. Possibility to forward messages to a single user or to all the users connected with the supervisory system. Management of the LCT user list stored for each single equipment. Access to the system with 5 different user profiles which determine the available commands and the functions.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

18

MODULARITY OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The NMS5UX-B supervision system is a modular system. It is composed by a set of main applications which, depending on the type of equipment it must manage or on the type of functionality you wish to implement, one or more applications are added to.

The group of main applications manages the NMS5UX-B graphic interface at general level (UX Map Manager window - Fig.1) through which the user can represent graphically the network, manage the connection, check the operating status, the results of the measures of Performance Monitoring, etc. of the equipment. At this level, the equipment is considered on its whole.

The equipment additional application (called <equipment type> Manager) as the task to provide, to the NMS5UX-B interface, specific commands and functions with respect to the type of equipment that must be managed. Each equipment additional application manages a specific equipment graphic interface (pag.47/pag.48) through which the user can, besides checking the operating status of the equipment, directly intervene in its management checking or modifying the configuration parameters and verifying the quality parameters of the signal. The NMS5UX-B supervision system can be provided with one or more Manager applications according to the equipment types present in its own network. The access to the graphic interface at general level takes place at the opening of the UX Map Manager window, while the access to the graphic interface at equipment level takes place opening the equipment window relevant to the equipment itself. The opening of an equipment window depends on the opening of the UX Map Manager window.

The additional application Ring Manager (RM) has the task to provide the NMS5UX-B interface with the commands and the functions specific for the configuration and the management of the network paths (Path) among the PDH and SDH telecommunications equipment. The Ring Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface NMS5UX-B (menu Ring Manager - pag.431) which allows representing, by means of the Ring objects, the subnetworks of equipment which implement Path directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of the NEs/Links/Paths present in the Ring objects and displaying the list of the objects Ring, Path and NE. At this level, the Ring object is considered as a whole. From the graphical object Ring, you can access the Ring Manager window (pag.50) which allows representing and managing the single equipment, Links and Paths present in a Ring object. The opening of a Ring Manager window depends on the opening of the UX Map Manager window. Moreover a Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application VLAN Manager (VM) has the task to provide the interface NMS5UX-B commands and specific functions for the configuration and the network-level management of virtual LAN paths (VLAN paths) among the radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries. VLAN Manager application is composed by a part integrated in the menus of the graphical interface NMS5UX-B (menu VLAN Manager - pag.475) which allows representing, by means of the VLAN MAP objects, the subnetworks of equipment which implement VLAN paths directly in the maps, verifying the functional status of the NEs present in the VLAN Map objects and displaying the list of the objects VLAN Map and NE. At this level, the VLAN Map object is considered as a whole. From the graphical object VLAN Map, you can access the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) which allows representing and managing the single equipment, Links and VLAN paths present in a VLAN Map object. The opening of a VLAN Manager Map window depends on the opening of the UX Map Manager window. Moreover a VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) allows a NMS5UX user controlling and managing the SNMP equipment connecting, via Internet, to his own NMS5UX-B system through his own PC and using the installed O.S. and the browser.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

19

The servlet RAN carries out the connection with the NMS5UX-B system and displays the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX which allows monitoring/managing the equipment connected to ones supervision system and present in a map. The access to the servlet RAN takes place opening the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX, which can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.55).

The additional application Geographical Redundancy (GR) allows managing the redundancy of the maps among the different NMS5UX-B systems in order to keep the supervision/management of the maps of a malfunctioning system through a different NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system. With map redundancy we mean the management, by a NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX system, of all the equipment associated to that specific map. The GM application has been designed to work as part of the NMS5UX-B, in fact its interface is integrated within the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.

The additional application P.M. Data Export allows exporting the results of the Performance Monitoring measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system. The data are exported directly from the tables of the NMS5UX-B database to a file in TLFF format. This operation can be both manually carried out by the user or set and periodic operation. Moreover the application allows re-importing the data previously saved to file into the Oracle table of PM. The P.M. Data Export application is not provided with a graphic interface but its implementation is executed by typing specific commands in the command line of a terminal window.

The additional application Proxy Agent allows dispatching the alarm traps, relevant to all the equipment managed by ones NMS5UX-B system, to an higher level Central Element Manager. The Proxy Agent application is, in part, integrated into the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (setting, at level of single equipment, of the address of the machine, which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment to) and, in part, integrated in the TMNMENU window (start menu) of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (activation, deactivation and management of the Proxy Agent application).

This manual describes the use of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface at general level (UX Map Manager window). The use of the equipment graphic interface changes depending on the type of equipment which is referred to. It is reported in the relevant user manuals. For the description and use of the additional application: RM, VM, RAN and GR, refer to relevant documentation. PM Data Export, refer to the relevant technical specifications. Proxy Agent, refer to pag.150/pag.152 (setting of the Proxy address of the equipment) and to the administrator manual (management of the Proxy Agent application).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

20

MAPS
The NMS5UX-B system allows associating a map to each single NMS5UX user. More user can be associated to the same map. At the opening of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1), the map associated to the user that executed the operation opens. The whole equipment network or a portion of it can correspond to a map. In this second case, the user which the map is associated to, will receive only notifications coming from the equipment contained in his portion of network. To manage an equipment it is necessary to create a graphic symbol that represents it. The same symbol can be created in more maps (creation of more copies of the symbol). In this way, the equipment data are not duplicated in the database, but all the copies access to the same information. Then, it is possible to save objects of a map into a file and export/import object of a map to another one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

21

EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B

The NMS5UX-B system release 6.4.7 is able to manage at the same time equipment that use as equipmentsupervisory system communication protocol the following one: The SNMP standard protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol). Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment). A proprietary protocol. Into the manual, such equipment are called equipment managed by the Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment).

Equipment managed with the SNMP protocol (SNMP equipment)

ALS series radio with ALS IDU (ALS) ALS series radio with ALS-C IDU (ALS-C) ALS series radio with AL IDU (AL) ALS series radio with ALC IDU (ALC) ALS series radio with AL IDU plus (ALplus) ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus (ALCplus) ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU (ALplus2) ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU (ALCplus2) EL series radio US series radio ELFO radio ALFO radio SDH N+1 radio ALplus node Set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment ALplus interconnected by Nodal Bus. ALCplus2 node Set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment ALCplus2 interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic). FAMxc 5 RU multiplexer FAMxc 2.5 RU multiplexer ADM1 multiplexer EXP63 multiplexer ADMC multiplexer PMP system - Point to MultiPoint By means of a single PMP object, one PMP sector is controlled and managed (together with the master station, the peripheral station and the optional equipment). CommServerS (CS) IPBOX

Equipment managed with the Legacy protocol (Legacy equipment)

G series radio with Legacy interface B series radio (Standard) FAM multiplexer OLTME multiplexer C-FAM multiplexer

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

22

RELEASE OF THE NMS5UX-B SYSTEM

The information contained in this manual refers to the system and the NMS5UX-B graphic interface release 6.4.7. The release can be checked at the opening of the graphic interface (Login window) or selecting the Help > About NMS5UX-B (pag.500).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

23

HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The detail of the hardware and software requirements required by the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the administrator manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

24

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUIPMENT MANAGED BY NMS5UX-B

The maximum number of equipment that can be contemporarily managed by the NMS5UX-B system depends on the codeword required by the customer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

25

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF NMS5UX USERS

The maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1), using the same map or different maps, depends on the codeword required by the customer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

26

UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW

At the start of the NMS5UX-B graphical interface the UX Map Manager window opens. The window is displayed in Fig.1. The elements that compose the window are: MENU bar (pag.28) TITLE bar (pag.29) TOOL bar (pag.30) MAP area (pag.32) VIEW area (pag.34) NEW OBJECT area (pag.35) OBJECTS (pag.36) STATUS bar (pag.44) PLATFORM STATUS bar (pag.45)

First time the UX Map Manager window of a new map opens, the Map and View areas are empty (unless the system has been previously configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA). In this case, before connecting the equipment, it is necessary to graphically represent the network in their own map (pag.78). The NMS5UX-B graphic interface has been developed to be used in Unix environment, therefore it respects the conventions - relevant to the menu arrangement, the window style, the use of the keyboard, of the mouse and so on - typical of this operating system.

Fig.1 UX Map Manager window

TITLE bar MENU bar TOOL bar

OGGETTI

MAP area

STATUS bar

NEW OBJECT area

VIEW area

PLATFORM STATUS bar

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

27

MENU BAR
Menu: Map (pag.136). It contains the commands for the management of the map: to update the data, to resize the symbols, to manage the background, to change/delete the map, to export/import the elements of a map to/from another one and to save on a file all the symbols (container, NE, etc.) present into a map. Edit (pag.148). It contains the commands for the management of the objects: creation, modification, deletion, search, alignment. View (pag.167). It contains the commands to hide/show the elements of the UX Map Manager window. Performance (pag.171). It contains the commands for the management of the measures of Performance Monitoring (PM) of the equipment. Configuration (pag.184). It contains the commands to check the status/operation of an equipment and the configuration of the software/hardware of the equipment. Locate (pag.220). It contains the commands to display and manage, in table format, the equipment. Command (pag.241). It contains the commands for the management of the connection between the equipment and the NMS5UX-B system and for the execution of the download of the configuration of an equipment to another equipment. Fault (pag.263). It contains the commands for the management of the equipment alarms and for the display of the history of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users. Tools (pag.311). It contains the commands to start the Command Executor application, for the management of the alarm notification via e-mail, to manage the periodic monitoring of parameters, to manage the statistics of the Ethernet tributaries, to manage the Auto Discovery and XML Export functionality. Options (pag.365). It contains the commands for the management of the alarm severity, of the NMS5UX-B/LCT users, of the list of remote equipment and the commands for the updating of the equipment software. Misc (pag.422). It contains the commands to save/recover/delete from disk/tape the alarm history, the results of the PM measures and the system database. Ring Manager (pag.431). It contains the commands for the management of the Ring objects. The menu is available only if the Ring Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation. VLAN Manager (pag.475). It contains the commands for the management of the VLAN Map objects. The menu is available only if the VLAN Manager application is installed. For the use, refer to the relevant documentation. Help (pag.499). It contains the commands to open the on-line manuals of the supervisory system and to check the list of the software programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package.

Each item, if selected, opens a cascade menu that lists a series of commands. Some commands immediately execute the action associated to them, others open further cascade menus (items followed by ). When a command is displayed greyed out, instead of white, it means that it is not available. The deactivation of a command can depend on the type of access to the map (pag.63), on the equipment type or one's user profile (pag.57)does not foresee the use of the command or, even, to make the command available it is necessary to execute before another action as, for example, to select a symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

28

TITLE BAR
This bar points out the window name, which can be configured by the superuser. By default, the name is <company name - UX Map Manager>. For description convenience, in this manual the main window of the graphic interface of the NMS5UX-B system is identified by the wording UX Map Manager.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

29

TOOL BAR
Tab.1 shows the description of the push-buttons. Tab.1 Push-buttons (UX Map Manager window) Buttons Description It closes the UX Map Manager window It displays the objects present at Map level in the View area (pag.32) Equivalent command Map > Exit (pag.147) -

It displays the objects present at the previous level (parent level) in the View area (pag.32) It displays the objects present in the last select- ed container (go back push-button) into the View area. It searches a symbol in the map It aligns two or more objects vertically * It aligns two or more objects horizontally * Edit > Find (pag.163) Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical (pag.164) Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal (pag.164)

It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects View > Show/Hide Link Label (pag.170) (pag.81) It hides/displays the Map area (pag.32) It hides/displays (pag.45) the platform status View > Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.168) bar View > Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.169)

It creates a new SNMP equipment

Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed (pag.149) Edit > Add > Container (pag.149) Locate > Equipment List Locate (pag.221)

It creates a new container It displays the list of the equipment

It displays the results of the PM measures for Performance > Performance Monitoring (pag.173) the selected NE ** It displays the alarm history Fault > Network Alarm History (pag.264)

It displays the list of the alarms active on the Fault > Network Current Alarms (pag.273) equipment It executes the Line Test for the selected NE *** Command > Line Test > Network Element (pag.242) It connects the selected equipment *** Command > Connect > Network Element (pag.244) Command > Disconnect > Network Element (pag.246)

It disconnects the selected equipment ***

It re-aligns the alarms and the configuration for Command > Configuration Upload > Network Elethe selected equipment *** ment (pag.254) It re-aligns the alarms for the selected equip- Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Element *** ment (pag.252)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

30

Buttons

Description

Equivalent command

It reduces the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (20 pixel) area (Zoom 40%) It restores the average size of the graphic sym- Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (38 pixel) bol in the View area (Zoom 70%) It enlarges the graphic symbols size in the View Map > Map Properties (pag.138) (50 pixel) area (Zoom 100%) * The push-button is available only if at least two objects are selected. ** The push-button is available only if one equipment is selected. *** The push-button is available only if at least one equipment is selected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

31

MAP AREA
The Map area is the part of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) where the map objects, created by the user to represent the equipment network, are displayed (except for the Link and Label objects).

The displaying of the map is of tree type, in order to represent also the hierarchical links among the different items. The Map: test map level (see Fig.2) represents the highest hierarchical level: Map level. It is automatically created on the creation of the map and its name corresponds to the name assigned by the user to the map. This level cannot be deleted using the commands present in the UX Map Manager window, it is automatically deleted on the deletion of the map. The lower levels are represented by containers that can contain more NE (pag.79), Generic Symbol (pag.81), Link (pag.81), Label (pag.81), Container (pag.79), Ring (pag.81) and VLAN Map (pag.81) objects. The presence of a Container object automatically creates a hierarchically lower level (child level) with respect to the current level (parent level) as shown in Fig.2. The subdivision of the equipment network into containers, and then into levels, allows creating areas where grouping the equipment and items related by some characteristics, for example geographical or other. In this way, when a Container object is selected, in the View area (pag.32) only the elements present in the container will be displayed and not all the network elements. In fact, the selection of a container (or of an element contained in it) changes the content of the View area. All the objects present in the same level are listed in the area Map in alphanumeric order.

Each container (except for the Map level) has the + or - symbol, displayed one alternatively to the other (see Fig.2). Symbol: +. The elements present in the container are not displayed in the Map area under the container itself (collapsed list). -. The elements present in the container are displayed in the Map area under the container itself (expanded list).

It is possible to expand/collapse a list selecting the +/- symbol.

The user (independently from its operating level or access type) can anytime display or hide the Map area (pag.33).

Fig.2 Map area (UX Map Manager window)

Map container

Child level of the Map container Child level of the Map container. Parent level of the Cologno M. container

Lower container

Child level of the Milan container

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

32

Passing from one level to the other one in the Map area
To pass to the: Higher level (parent level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area or select the container that represents the wished higher level. (pag.32) press Lower level (child level), with respect to that selected and represented in the View area, select the container that represents the wished lower level. or select the Map: container.

To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press

Objects of the Map area

The characteristics of the objects present in the Map area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are described in the par. Objects (pag.36).

To display/hide the Map area

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press The Map area is hidden. 2. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

33

VIEW AREA
The View area is the part of the UX Map Manager window where the objects present in the container, selected in the Map area (pag.32), are displayed. For example in Fig.1, if the Venice container is selected in the Map area, the NE objects ADM1, AL E/W, AL-P1 and the possible Link and Label objects (objects that are not displayed in the Map area) will be displayed in the View area.

The selected container, once selected the level displayed in the View area, is indicated above the area itself in the Contents of Map: field. The symbol / separates the levels. For example, in Fig.1, the Contents of Map: test map/Venice field points out that the objects represented in the View area are present in the test map (parent level) and in the Venice container (current level).

Passing from one level to the other in the View area

To pass to the: Higher level (parental level), with respect to that represented in the View area, press . Lower level (child level), with respect to that represented in the View area, double click on the container that represents the level you wish to access. .

To pass to the main window of the map (Map level) press

Objects of the View area

The characteristics of the objects present in the View area: symbol, check sign, note sign, colour, etc. are described in the par. Objects (pag.36).

Background of the View area

It is possible to associate a background to each container, in such a way that, on its selection, the background is displayed in the View area besides the symbols present in the container (pag.139). It is possible to associate a different background to each container of the same map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

34

NEW OBJECT AREA

The new objects are parked in this area after their creation, waiting for their positioning by the user inside the View area (pag.34).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

35

OBJECTS
An object is the representation, in the graphic interface of the NMS5UX-B system, of a network element. The NMS5UX user must consider each part of the network as an object. For example, the network on its whole is an object, the container (sub network, station, sub-station) where the equipment are located is an object, each single equipment is an object. An object can be: Created - see Edit > Add (pag.149), Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery (pag.328), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring (pag.432) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map (pag.476) command. Deleted - see Edit > Delete (pag.156), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring (pag.433) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map (pag.477) command. Modified - see Edit > Modify/View (pag.157), Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring (pag.434) and VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map (pag.478) command. Moved. To move an object, it is sufficient to select it and, keeping pressed the left mouse button, bring it to the new position. In the Map area (pag.32), it is possible to move the objects from a container to the other. In the View area (pag.34) it is possible to put the object in a new position inside the area (container). Furthermore, it is possible to select an object in the View area and drag it into a container of the Map area or vice versa. All the created objects and the relevant values of the parameters are stored into the database of the NMS5UX-B system. They will be stored until the user deletes the object. The NMS5UX-B system has a series of predefined objects, which allow the user drawing his network and providing to the system all the information necessary for the supervision and the monitoring of each single equipment. In details, Container (pag.79), Network Element (NE) (pag.79), Generic Symbol (pag.81), Link (pag.81), Label (pag.81), Ring (pag.81) and VLAN Map (pag.81) objects. On the creation/deletion/modification/move of an object: Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Ring or VLAN Map the object is represented/deleted/changed/ moved both in the Map area and in the View area. Link or Label, the object is represented/deleted/changed/moved only in the View area.

The graphic representation of the object is the symbol (pag.36). A symbol is composed by the following elements: icon (pag.37), name (pag.38), check sign (pag.38), notes (pag.39) and it is characterized by behavior (pag.39), colour (pag.40) and right button function (pag.42).

Graphic representation of the object: symbol

When an object is created, its graphic representation in the map is the symbol. More symbols can correspond to an object. In fact, if the same object is created more times, we do not create a new object but simply a copy of its graphic representation, then a new symbol is created. The symbol of the same object can be created more times in the same map or in other maps as shown in Fig.3. In the system database, on the creation of the object, the relevant parameter are stored. On the creation of the next copies (symbols) of the object, the values of the parameters are not inserted again, but the values already present in the database are used. To execute an operation, often it is necessary to select the symbol (or the symbols) which you wish to operate on. The selected symbol is characterized by a dark grey square. It will remain selected until the user selects another symbol. It is possible to select one or more symbols at the same time pressing the left mouse button and drawing an area containing the interested symbols or keeping pressed the Ctrl key selecting the symbols.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

36

Fig.3 Relation between object and symbol

Map 1 Map 2 Container 1 Map 3 Container 1

Graphical representation of the object A in the maps

Symbol A

Symbol A Symbol A

Symbol A Symbol A

Symbol A

Information relevant to object A in the database

Object A

Symbol items: icon

The icon is the graphic representation of the symbol. All the objects of the NMS5UX-B system, except for the Label object, has a its own icon. Tab.2 points out the symbol and the relevant icons represented in the Map (pag.32) and View (pag.34) areas.

Tab.2 Icon (UX Map Manager window) Symbol Container Map Container ... Icon (Map area) Icon (View area)

Generic Symbol ..... Link -

Label Ring

VLAN Map

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

37

Symbol Network Element

Icon (Map area)

Icon (View area) SNMP equipment

ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU ALS series radio with AL IDU plus ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU

ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU

ALplus node

ALCplus2 node

EL series radio

US series radio

ELFO radio

ALFO radio

SDH N+1 radio

FAMxc 5 RU Mult.

FAMxc 2.5 RU Mult.

ADM-C Multiplexer

ADM-1 Multiplexer

EXP63 Multiplexer

PMP System

COMM. SEVER-S

IPBOX

WEB Generic

LEGACY equipment
FAM/C-FAM Mult. OLTME Multiplexer G series radio B series radio (Std)

Symbol items: name

The name (or label) is the string of characters displayed under the icon (View area - pag.34) or next to the icon (Map area - pag.32). All the objects of the NMS5UX-B system has a name defined on the creation of the object. For all the objects the name can be modified later. For the Link objects, it is possible to hide the name (see pag.154/pag.159). For the Ring objects, the name represents the title of the window opened by the double selection of the relevant symbol. For the VLAN Map objects, the name represents a part of the title of the window which is opened on the double selection of the relevant symbol (window title <VLAN Map object name> - VLAN Manager Map).

Symbol items: check sign

The check sign is an item that characterizes only the Container and Network Element objects, except for the virtual Network Elements.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

38

For the Network Element objects: The presence of the check sign points out that: At least one alarm (current and/or in the alarm history) relevant to the equipment has not been marked (acknowledged). To remove the symbol (pag.267). , mark the current alarms (pag.275) and/or in the alarm history

The LCT program has connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality from the last time that the Equipment window of the equipment has been opened. To remove the symbol , open the NE equipment window. The last operation of Configuration Upload towards the considered equipment is failed or presents some errors. The symbol is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Configuration Upload.

The check sign next to the icon points out that there is at least ONE of the listed condition. It is possible to check the status of each condition in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (Fig.36) and Information window (Fig.23). By default, the symbol points out the status of the condition listed above.

It is possible to modify the list of the conditions associating the presence (or absence) of to two or to only one of the above mentioned conditions. For example, it is possible to associate to the check sign only the condition of failed Configuration Upload. The change can be made only by the Superuser. More information is reported in the administrator manual. The absence of the check sign points out that: All the (current or historic) alarms of the equipment have been marked. LCT has not been connected in Configuration modality from the last time that the NE equipment window has been opened. The last operation of Configuration Upload to the equipment has been successfully executed.

For the Network Element of ALplus Node type or ALCplus2 Node type objects: The presence of the check sign points out that at least an NE with The absence of the check sign points out that no equipment with is present in the node. is present in the node.

For the Container objects: The presence of the check sign points out that at least a NE or Container object with present in the relevant container. The absence of the check sign points out that no NE or Container object with the relevant container. is

is present in

Symbol items: notes

The note symbol ( ) is an item that characterizes only the Network Element objects. With details:

The presence of the note symbol points out that there is an informative note written by the user associated to the symbol. It is possible to see (modify/delete) the note opening the Information window (Fig.23). The absence of the note symbol points out that there is no informative note associated to the symbol.

Symbol characteristics: behavior

The behavior represents the action that is executed when a symbol is selected twice in fast sequence in Map (pag.32) or View (pag.34) area. Tab.3 displays for each object the relevant behavior.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

39

Tab.3 Behavior of symbol (UX Map Manager window) Symbol Container NE (real) NE ALplus Node type Behavior (Map/View area) It displays in the View area the objects present in the container (child level) If connected at least once, the equipment window opens (pag.47) If connected at least once, the ALplus nodal window opens (pag.48)

NE ALCplus2 Node type If connected at least once, the ALCplus2 nodal window opens (pag.49) NE WEB Generic type NE (virtual) Generic Symbol Link Label Ring VLAN Map The WEB page opens (via the default browser) available at the address set for the specific object. The equipment window opens (pag.47) * No action is executed No action is executed No action is executed The Ring Manager window (pag.50) opens The VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51) opens

* For virtual SNMP equipment, the equipment window is opened only if the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type has been transferred to the considered virtual equipment (see pag.79 and pag.256).

Symbol characteristics: colour

The colour of the icon identifies the connection status or the alarm status of the symbols contained in it. Tab.4 displays, for each object, the colours that be assumed by the relevant icon and the description of the condition represented by them. Tab.4 Colour of symbol (UX Map Manager window) Symbol Container * Colour Blue Description In the container: There is no equipment in connected status There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. There is one or more equipment in maintenance status. In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has alarms. In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Warning severity is active. In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Minor severity is active. In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Major severity is active. In the container there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

40

Symbol NE (real) **

Colour Brown Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red Red with X Pink *** White ***

Description The equipment is in disconnected status (pag.114) The equipment is in connected status (pag.114) and does not present any alarm. The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Warning severity is present. The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Minor severity is present. The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Major severity is present. The equipment is in connected status and at least one alarm of Critical severity is present. The equipment is in unreachable status (pag.115) The equipment is in maintenance status (pag.115) The LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to the equipment. All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Warning. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Minor. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Major. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Critical. Or In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.

NE ALplus Node type*

Brown Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red

Red with X Pink *** White *** NE ALCplus2 Node type* Brown Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red

All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status. In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status. In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. All the equipment in the node are in disconnected status All the equipment in the node are in connected status. No equipment has alarm. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Warning. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Minor. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Major. All the equipment in the node are in connected status. The most serious alarm present on the equipment of the node is Critical. Or In the node there is at least one equipment in unreacheable status.

Red with X Pink *** White *** NE WEB Generic type Brown NE (virtual) Generic Symbol Link Brown Blue Black

All the equipment in the node are in unreachable status. In the node there is at least one equipment in maintenance status. In the node there is at least one equipment which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition. The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition. The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition. The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

41

Symbol Label Ring *

Colour Black Blue

Description The colour is fixed and does not point out any status condition. In the Ring: There is no equipment in connected status There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. There is one or more equipment in maintenance status. In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has alarms. In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Warning severity is active. In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Minor severity is active. In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Major severity is active. In the Ring there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status. In the VLAN Map: There is no equipment in connected status There is one or more equipment in connected status which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. There is one or more equipment in maintenance status. In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status. No NE has alarms. In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Warning severity is active. In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Minor severity is active. In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Major severity is active. In the VLAN Map there is at least one equipment in connected status where at least one alarm of Critical severity is active and/or one NE in unreachable status.

Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red VLAN Map * Blue

Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red

* By default the color of the icon always reflects the colour of the (contained) object where the most serious condition is present. ** By default, the colour of the icon always reflects the colour of the most serious alarm present on the equipment. *** This condition is not propagated to the icons of the Containers that contain the NE.

Symbol characteristics: right button function

The Map: container (Map level) present in the Map area (pag.32) of the UX Map Manager window is not provided with the right button function. Selecting a symbol and pressing the right mouse button, a context menu is displayed where the following commands are present: Open. If selected a: Real NE (connected at least once) opens the equipment window (pag.47). NE ALplus Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALplus nodal window (pag.48). NE ALCplus2 Node type (connected at least once) opens the ALCplus2 nodal window (pag.49). NE WEB Generic type opens the WEB page (via the default browser) available at the address set for the specific object. Virtual NE opens the equipment window (pag.47).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

42

Container in the View area (pag.34), displays the objects present in the container in the View area. Ring opens the Ring Manager window (pag.50). VLAN Map opens the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).

Command available only if a NE, Container, Ring or VLAN Map object is selected. Delete. It deletes the selected object (see pag.156). Modify/View. It displays/modifies the configuration parameters of the object (see pag.157). Information. It opens the Information window (Fig.23). Command not available if a Label or Link object is selected. Equipment Information. It opens the Equipment Information window (Fig.26). Command available only if a NE object is selected. NE Current Alarm. It opens the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.41). Command available only if a NE object is selected. NE History Alarm. It opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39). Command available only if a NE object is selected. Ping. It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected equipment. Each Ping command sends the test packet three times. After the selection of the command, the Ping window is displayed, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed. Command available only if a NE object managed by SNMP protocol is selected. The heading of the context menu points out the name of the selected symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

43

STATUS BAR
This bar displays: Name of the currently open map (Map:). Type of access to the map (Read-Write or Read Only). Name of the user who opened the map (User:). Display status of the name of the Link objects. In detail, if: The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links are not displayed. The wording [Link Label Off] is present, means that the names of the Links having the parameter Show Label active are displayed in the View area (see pag.154).

The user (independently from his operating level or from the type of access to the map) can, in any moment, display/hide the names of the Link objects (see pag.170). At the opening of the UX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the display of the names of the Link objects is active (the wording [Link Label Off] is not present).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

44

PLATFORM STATUS BAR

Vertical bar where the following information is displayed. Box: NMS5UX. Status of the processes relevant to the NMS5UX-B system. PROXY. Status of the processes which manage the Proxy Agent. RING. Status of the processes which manage the Ring Manager application. VLAN. Status of the processes which manage the VLAN Manager application. Alr History Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the alarms in the table Alarm History of NMS5UX-B. Transaction Log Usage. Status and occupation percentage of the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users in the table Transaction Log of NMS5UX-B.

The colour of the NMS5UX, PROXY, RING and VLAN box points out the status of the specific process: Green. The process is active and operates correctly. Red. The process is inactive or it does not operate correctly. In this condition, the function implemented by the process will be not execute (for example, the alarms or the PM are not collected for the process relevant to NMS5UX). Call one's network administrator in order to re-activate the process. Gray. The modules for the management of the relevant processes are not installed. A double click of the left mouse button on a box allows checking the status of the relevant process. The colour of the boxes Alr History Usage and Transaction Log Usage points out the occupation status of the records in the relevant tables with respect to the maximum available status. The maximum available status, considered as number of records which can be stored in each table, and the occupation thresholds which determinate the status can be set by the Superuser. With reference to the default values of the thresholds, the meaning assumed by the status colours are the following: Green. The records present in the specific table occupy less than 70% of the available space. Blue. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 70% but less than 75% of the available space. Yellow. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 75% but less than 80% of the available space. Orange. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 80% but less than 90% of the available space. Red. The records present in the specific table occupy more than 90% of the available space. In this condition a message is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and the frequency which it is displayed at can be configured by Superuser. Default: message display active, frequency: 60 seconds. If during the day the following messages is displayed: Alarm History occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been reached for the table Alarm History. In this case, the table stores all the alarms sent by the equipment (even if the limit has been exceeded). At midnight, the system will delete, only among the alarms raised and then cleared, the oldest records. If the table Alarm History contains all alarms active and not cleared yet, the system will NOT delete any record, even if their number exceeds the maximum set number. Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100%, means that the maximum capacity limit has been reached for the table Transaction Log. In this case, all the operations will be stored in the table (even if the limit has been exceeded). At midnight the system will delete the oldest records. The user (independently from its operating level or access type) anytime, can display or hide the platform status bar. At the opening of the UX Map Manager window, independently from its previous setting, the platform status bar is NOT displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

45

To display/hide the platform status bar

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press The platform status bar is displayed. 2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

46

EQUIPMENT WINDOW

The choice of a Network Element object allows accessing to the graphic interface at equipment level, level represent by the equipment window. At this level, the user can enter into the equipment to check and modify the configuration parameters, to execute maintenance and test operations. Each type of equipment, that can be currently managed by the NMS5UX-B system, is characterized by its own equipment window. The detailed description of each single equipment window and of the objects which it contains is reported in the relevant Equipment user manual (see pag.507). The management of each single equipment window is made from a specific application, called <equipment type> Manager. These application are part of the NMS5UX-B system and are provided on request. The equipment window of a NE can be opened by more users at the same time (see pag.67). The first user that opens the window can check/modify the configuration parameters (Read-Write access). The other users can only check the parameters (Read Only access). What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first to open it. In the equipment window with Read Only access, the alarms will not be dynamically updated, it is necessary to require the updating selecting a proper command. The equipment window can be opened only if the NE has been connected at least once. What just said is valid only for the objects that represent real equipment. For the virtual SNMP NEs, the equipment window can be opened after having transferred, at least once, the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE of the same type to the considered virtual equipment. Instead, for the virtual Legacy NEs, the equipment can be always opened (see pag.79). The selection of a NE object of type WEB Generic does not open the equipment window, because this object does not represent a real equipment (see pag.80).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

47

ALPLUS NODAL WINDOW

The selection of a Network Element object of ALplus Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at level of ALplus nodal system. At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equipment constituting the ALplus nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects in the UX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment. Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5UX-B system when the ALplus Node NE object is created. The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation. The nodal window can be opened: By one user at a time (see pag.68). Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALplus nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALplus Node Manager (see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

48

ALCPLUS2 NODAL WINDOW

The selection of a Network Element object of ALCplus2 Node type allows accessing the graphic interface at level of ALCplus2 nodal system. At this level, the user can enter into the node to verify the status and execute operations on the single equipment constituting the ALCplus2 nodal system as some commands, generally available for the NE objects in the UX Map Manager window, are present in the nodal window for the node equipment. Moreover, it is possible to access to the graphic interface of the single equipment only via the nodal window. In fact, it is not possible to create in the map a NE object of an equipment which is part of a nodal system. It is automatically created in the database of the NMS5UX-B system when the ALCplus2 Node NE object is created. The definition of node (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) MUST be carried out at local level via the SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation. The nodal window can be opened: By one user at a time (see pag.68). Only if the node (and then all the node equipment) have been connected at least once.

The detailed description of the ALCplus2 nodal window is reported in the user manual ...ALCplus2 Node Manager (see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

49

RING MANAGER WINDOW

The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the Ring Manager application: Ring Manager window. This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the paths among SDH and PDH equipment. A Path is a bidirectional connection between a source node and a destination node and is identified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node. The Ring Manager application is integrated in the NMS5UX-B system and supports the SNMP equipment (Network Element) already managed by the supervision system. The Ring Manager window, relevant to the same Ring object, can be opened by only one user at a time (see pag.69). The detailed description of the Ring Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507). The Ring Manager application is optional and is provided on demand. Moreover the Ring Manager window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.374/ pag.375).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

50

VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW

The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the graphic interface of the VLAN Manager application: VLAN Manager Map window. This application has been developed to create, configure and manage the virtual LAN paths (VLAN path) among radio equipment with Ethernet tributaries. The VLAN Manager application is integrated in the NMS5UX-B system and supports the SNMP equipment (Network Element) of the ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2) and ALFO series already managed by the supervision system. The VLAN Manager Map window, relevant to the same VLAN Map object, can be opened by only one user at a time (see pag.70). The detailed description of the VLAN Manager window and of the objects contained in it is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507). The VLAN Manager application is optional and is provided on demand. Moreover the VLAN Manager Map window can be opened only by an enabled NMS5UX user (see pag.374/ pag.375).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

51

NMS5UX USERS

The NMS5UX-B graphic interface can be started at the same time on more PCs or terminals connected by an Ethernet connection. In this way, the displaying of the information relevant to the equipment network is contemporaneous for all the terminals and the insertion of the data or the sending of the commands by one user is possible from all the terminals. To open a copy of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface, it is necessary to have a NMS5UX user. The supervision system is provided with a predefined NMS5UX user (see pag.54). In a second moment, it will be possible to create all the wished NMS5UX users (see pag.374).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

52

RELATION BETWEEN UNIX USER AND NMS5UX USER

The NMS5UX-B system has been developed to be used with the Unix operating system. For each NMS5UX user you want to create, it is necessary to create a Unix user. There is a specific connection between them: it is possible to associate a single NMS5UX user to a Unix user. Then, before creating the NMS5UX user, it is necessary to create the relevant Unix user. The username and the password defined at the creation of the Unix user will be automatically used by the supervision system during the creation of the NMS5UX user. It is not necessary to create a Unix user for the Superuser (predefined NMS5UX user provided with the supervision system - pag.54) because during the installation of the NMS5UX-B system a Unix user with nms5ux username and password is created, which a NMS5UX user with nms5ux username and password is associated to.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

53

PREDEFINED NMS5UX USER

During the installation of the system, a NMS5UX user is created with the following characteristics: Username - nms5ux Password - nms5ux map - nms5ux Profile - Superuser Timeout password - Not expired Internet - Active (if required by the user the RAN application (see pag.19). Ring/VLAN - Active (if required by the user the relevant application: Ring Manager/VLAN Manager (see pag.19).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

54

CHARACTERISTICS OF A NMS5UX USER

Each NMS5UX user is characterized by an username (pag.55), a password (pag.55), a map (pag.56), a profile (pag.57), the Internet enabling (pag.58) and the Ring/VLAN enabling (pag.58). The username and the password allow to the system acknowledge the user as NMS5UX user authorized to start the graphic interface. The same NMS5UX user can open more NMS5UX-B graphic interfaces (on different PCs/terminals or on the same) using the same username and password. A map is associated to each user. The supervision system, at the start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface, automatically opens the map associated to the user that executed the operation. The profile allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface and having determinate commands and functions available. The Internet enabling allows the use of the RAN application (optional) (see pag.19). The Ring/VLAN enabling allows the use of the (optional) applications Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager (see pag.19).

Username
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a name. The name of the NMS5UX-B Superuser is defined during the installation of the system. The name of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during their creation: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same name of the Unix user which is associated to. If for ones system the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at the creation of the NMS5UX user, an username different from that of the relevant Unix user can be defined. Moreover, in this condition the name of the NMS5UX user can be modified (operation available only for the Superuser).

Password
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by a password. The password of the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system. The password of the other NMS5UX users is automatically set by the system during the creation of the user: the NMS5UX user is assigned the same password of the Unix user which is associated to. If for ones system the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window is active (pag.61), at the creation of the NMS5UX user the user password must be defined. Then the Superuser can modify its password and the passwords of all other NMS5UX users. If an user should forget his password, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. The privileged, advanced, normal or entry users can modify their own password. If an user should forget his password, the Superuser can define a new one.

Expiry of the password

The expiry of the password is managed by the operating system Unix according to the modes reported in the relevant documentation. Only if, for ones system, the function of manual Login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, the management of the expiry of the password is executed, only for the NMS5UX users, by the NMS5UX-B system as described here below.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

55

The NMS5UX-B system manages the periodic password change, which consists in asking the user the change of his own password each N days (for example, each 6 months). The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator who, if activates the functionality, sets the interval between a password change and the next one. If the functionality is active, 5 days before the expiry of the password, a message is displayed at the opening of the NMS5UX-B interface, which allows the user modifying his own password. In detail, the message: Your Password is going to expire on <date>. Please change it, signals that ones password is expiring. This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each time the user will start the interface, until when he changes the password or this one expires. Password expired. Please change it to login, signals that ones password is expired. To open the NMS5UX-B interface, it is necessary to change the password. The activation of the periodic password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at the same time.

Map
The map corresponds to a network or to the network part graphically represented and managed by the system. It can be arranged by the user according to his needs. Each map has its own UX Map Manager (Fig.1). The NMS5UX-B system can manage more maps at the same time. The map, where he can operate, is associated to each NMS5UX user. The access to a map is made via the start of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface: automatically, the system opens the map associated to the NMS5UX user who required the start of the graphic interface. It is possible to associate, on the creation of the user, to each NMS5UX user, a map that will constitute the default map of the user. The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can open their own default map and, then, change map choosing among those managed by the system (see pag.145). The users with advanced, normal and entry profile can open only one's default map. On the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created. Then, it will be possible to create a new map (see pag.374). More NMS5UX users, who can open and use the map at the same time, can be associated to the same map (more users can have the same default map). In this case, only the first user who access to the map will have the Read-Write access, all the other users will have Read Only access (see pag.63). What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the map, even if they are the first to open it. The max number of NMS5UX users who can access at the same time to the same map depends on the codeword required by the customer. The same NE object can be created in more map and/or more times in the same maps. In this way, on the creation of the first copy of the object in a map, all the parameters of the object must be set. On the creation of the successive copies, it will be sufficient to enter the physical or logical address and, automatically, the system will set the parameter and will associate the status of connection of the twin object already present in the map.

nms5ux map
During the installation of the system, the nms5ux map is created, associated to the Superuser, named nms5ux (the name of the Superuser can be modified by the user itself). This map will result the default map of the nms5ux user but, as all the other maps, it can be opened also by privileged users and be assigned, as default map, to other users.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

56

Profile
The NMS5UX-B system can be started at different operating level. A group of enabling of commands, execution of operations, etc. corresponds to each level (also called profile). The profile that characterizes each NMS5UX user is determined on the creation of the user himself. After his creation, it is possible to modify the profile of each NMS5UX user, except for the Superuser. The NMS5UX-B system has 5 operating levels (profiles): Superuser (pag.57) Privileged (pag.57) Advanced (pag.57) Normal (pag.58) Entry (pag.58)

The availability of the commands of the UX Map Manager window depends on the profile of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. Tab.16 point out, for each command, the profile that the NMS5UX user must own to be able to use it.

Superuser
The Superuser can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the system. In each map, the Superuser can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality and can verify/set/ modify all the parameters. The detail of the operations that the Superuser can execute in the equipment window is reported in the specific equipment User Manual. The NMS5UX-B system manages ONLY one Superuser. It is created during the installation of the system. In a second moment, it will not be possible to delete the user or modify his profile.

Privileged
The privileged user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to all the maps managed by the system. In each map, the privileged user can access both in Read-Write and Read Only modality. The detail of the commands/operations available to the privileged user is reported in Tab.16. The detail of the operations that the privileged user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the specific equipment User Manual. On the installation of the system, there is no privileged user. Then, it is possible to create more privileged users.

Advanced
The advanced user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default map). The advanced user can access to his map both in Read-Write and Read Only modality. The detail of the commands/operations available to the advanced user is reported in Tab.16. The detail of the operations that the advanced user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the specific equipment User Manual. On the installation of the system, there is no advanced user. Then, it is possible to create more advanced users.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

57

Normal
The normal user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default map). The normal user can access to his map only in Read Only modality. The detail of the commands/operations available to the normal user is reported in Tab.16. The detail of the operations that the normal user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the specific equipment User Manual. On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Entry
The entry user can start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the only map associated to his NMS5UX user (default map). The entry user can access to his map only in Read Only modality. In his map, the user can only verify the parameters. The detail of the operations that the entry user can execute in the equipment window is reported in the specific equipment User Manual. On the installation of the system, there is no normal user. Then, it is possible to create more normal users.

Internet
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Internet option. Setting this option determines if the user can use the Remote Access NMS5UX (RAN) application or not (see pag.19) In detail, if the options is: Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX. Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Web page Remote Access NMS5UX.

The setting of the Internet option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system and depends on the presence or not, in the installation packet, of the RAN application. The setting of the Internet option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Internet option of any NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser).

Ring/VLAN
Each NMS5UX user is characterized by the Ring/VLAN option. The setting of this option determines if the user can use the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application or not (see pag.19) In detail, if the option is: Active. The NMS5UX user can open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51). Inactive. The NMS5UX user cannot open the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window.

The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the NMS5UX Superuser user is defined during the installation of the system and depends on the presence or not of the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application in the installation packet.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

58

The setting of the Ring/VLAN option for the other NMS5UX users is defined during the creation of the relevant user. After the creation of the user, it is possible to modify the setting of the Ring/VLAN option of any NMS5UX user (operation available only to the Superuser). The application: Ring Manager, besides the Ring Manager window, is constituted by a part integrated in the menus of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (menu Ring Manager - pag.431). The use of commands of the Ring Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option, can create, delete, etc. a Ring object. VLAN Manager, besides the VLAN Manager Map window, is constituted by a part integrated in the menus of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (menu VLAN Manager - pag.475). The use of commands of the VLAN Manager menu is not affected by the possible use of the Ring/VLAN option: any NMS5UX user, independently from his setting of the Ring/VLAN option, can create, delete, etc. a VLAN Map object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

59

EXPIRY OF A NMS5UX USER (ACCOUNT)

During the creation of a NMS5UX user, it is possible to assign a validity of n days to the relevant user (account) (see pag.374). At the expiry of this period, when the NMS5UX-B graphic interface is started, the system displays the message Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator. The displaying of the message forbids the opening of the UX Map Manager windows. In order to modify ones user or its validity period, contact the Superuser. If the message is displayed when the Superuser opens the UX Map Manager window, it is necessary to call SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

60

FUNCTION OF MANUAL LOGIN TO THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW

As rule, the username and the password of the Unix user with which the terminal is started, determine even the NMS5UX user with which the graphical interface NMS5UX-B is started. In fact, at his creation the NMS5UX user automatically gets the username and the password of the relevant Unix user. This involves the user, in order to access the UX Map Manager window, is asked to enter the username and the password only at the start-up of the terminal (see pag.72). The NMS5UX-B system manages the function of manual login to the UX Map Manager window. This function, is active, allows defining, at the creation of the NMS5UX user, a username and a password different from those defined for the relevant Unix user. In this case, the user shall enter, at the start-up of the terminal, the username and the password of the Unix user and, for the start of the UX Map Manager window, will be asked to enter the username and the password of the NMS5UX user. The function can be activated on demand when the supervision system is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

61

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - USER

The NMS5UX-B system depends on the function Inactivity Check - User. The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5UX-B session, before the suspension of this session for inactivity. Before closing the UX Map Manager window (NMS5UX-B session) due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is displayed. If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed. The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the inactivity message is displayed) and the period during which the warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users. The function Inactivity Check (User and RW Map) can be activated on demand when the supervision system is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

62

ACCESS TO THE MAP (READ-WRITE/READ ONLY)

The NMS5UX-B graphic interface relevant to the same map can be started on more PCs/terminals at the same time. In order to avoid conflicts between the graphic interfaces started on different terminals that use the same map, it is possible to open the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) in two different modalities: Read-Write. The user who accesses the map in this modality can add, delete, move the symbols contained in the map and modify the characteristics of the symbols. Read Only. The user who accesses the map in this modality can control the status of the map and of the contained symbols, but he cannot create, delete or move any symbol or execute any modification on the symbols. The map can be opened in Read Only modality by all the user. The access in Read-Write modality for each map is assigned to one user at a time. This user corresponds to the first authorized NMS5UX user who opens the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (then the associated map) on any of the PCs/terminals. The users who will connect in a second moment to the same map will have the access in Read Only modality. The access modality is displayed in the lower bar of the UX Map Manager window. The map can be opened in Read-Write modality only by the Superuser and by the user with privileged or advanced profile. A normal or entry user, even if he is the first user that access to the map, will open the map in Read Only modality. The availability of the commands of the UX Map Manager window depends on the modality of access to the map. Tab.16 point out, for each command, the access to the map necessary to use it.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

63

UPDATING OF THE UX MAP MANAGER WINDOW IN READ ONLY MODALITY

All the changes executed by Read-Write user in a map, are NOT dynamically displayed also in the UX Map Manager window of the users, who have access to the same map, in Read Only modality. To update the data of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to select the Map > Refresh (pag.137) command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

64

PASSING FROM READ ONLY MODALITY TO READ-WRITE MODALITY

If the user, with access to the map of Read-Write type, closes his UX Map Manager window, the Read-Write access becomes available to all the other users (Read Only) that opened the UX Map Manager window relevant to the same map. The user who wishes to modify his modality from Read Only to Read-Write must select the Map > Refresh (pag.137) command. The first users who executes the updating of the map changes his access from Read Only to Read-Write. The availability of the Read-Write access is not signalled to the Read Only users. It is possible to require (pag.380) or force (pag.381) the disconnection of one user, whose access is ReadWrite. If the user accept the request, his map is closed and the Read-Write access will be available.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

65

FUNCTION OF INACTIVITY CHECK - RW MAP

The NMS5UX-B system is provided with the function Inactivity Check - RW Map. The function, if active, allows defining a continue inactivity period which must pass during a NMS5UX-B session with Read Write access to the map (see pag.63), before the suspension of this session due to inactivity. Before closing the UX Map Manager [Read-Write] window (NMS5UX-B session with access to the RW map) due to inactivity, the message INACTIVITY CHECK!! If you dont acknowledge this dialog in x min your session will automatically be closed is displayed. If the user confirm his presence pressing OK, the session is not closed. The continue inactivity period (frequency with which the RW inactivity message is displayed) and the period during which the RW warning message is displayed on the screen (value x pointed out in the message) can be configured by Superuser. These settings are valid for ALL the NMS5UX users with Read Write access. The function Inactivity Check - RW Map can be activated on demand when the supervision system is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

66

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT WINDOW

The equipment window can be opened by more user at the same time. In this window, the Read-Write access modality is acquired by the first user who opens the window itself (independently if his access to the map is Read-Write or Read Only). All the users, who open later the same equipment window, will have the access in Read Only modality. What just said is valid only for the Superuser and the users with privileged or advanced profile. The normal and entry users has always Read Only access to the equipment window, even if they are the first to open it. The closure of the equipment window is not signalled on video. It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the equipment window in Read-Write modality, but it is possible to require (pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

67

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE NODAL WINDOW

The nodal window (ALplus or ALCplus2) can be opened by one user at the same time. It is not possible to request or to force the closure of the nodal window, but it is possible to require (pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

68

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE RING MANAGER WINDOW

The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time. Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time. It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require (pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

69

MODALITY OF ACCESS TO THE VLAN MANAGER MAP WINDOW

The Ring Manager window relevant to the same Ring object can be opened by only one user at a time. Instead more Ring Manager windows relevant to different Ring objects can be opened at the same time. It is not possible to request or to force the closure of a Ring Manager window, but it is possible to require (pag.383) or force (pag.383) the closure of the relevant Manager application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

70

PROCEDURES

START-UP/CLOSING OF NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE (LOGIN/LOGOUT)

The first time that the NMS5UX-B graphic interface starts, after the installation of the system, refer to the First start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface procedure (pag.75). The next times, refer to the Start-up of the NMS5UX-B interface procedure (pag.72). The start-up of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface corresponds to the opening of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). It is possible to start more NMS5UX-B interfaces on more machines or on the same machine. The maximum number of NMS5UX-B graphic interfaces that can be started at the same time depends on the codeword required by the user.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

71

START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE

The following procedure presumes that the NMS5UX-B system has been already installed on the machine and that the processes necessary for the start-up of the interface. The procedure for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the administrator manual. It is supposed that the Unix user and the corresponding NMS5UX user, which you wish to use for the startup of the interface, have been created. 1. Start the machine up (pc, terminal, etc.). The login window of the Unix operating system opens. 2. Type the name and the password of the Unix user in the relevant box. If you have two or more Unix users, use the name/password of the Unix user associated to the NMS5UX user that you wish to use to open the map. 3. Press the confirmation push-button. If the typed data are correct, one's Unix operating system is started-up. 4. Open a terminal window. 5. On the command line, type: cd /opt/nms5ux/start ./nmsWinMenu 6. Press Enter. The TMNMENU window opens (Fig.4). 7. Double click on the icon: NMS5UX Application Login, to start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface. If the user, used to start the interface, has profile: Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user to access the default map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality. Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user to access to the default map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality. Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.

NMS5UX Application Login R/O, to start the NMS5UX-B graphic interface; the default map, relevant to one's user, is opened in Read Only modality.

The Login window opens and then the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the default map associated to its user. The Superuser and the users with privileged profile can change the map anytime (pag.145). If the system displays the Your Account is expired. Please contact the system administrator message, one's account is expired. Contact the Superuser to set a new user or modify the current validity period.

If the function of Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window it is necessary to: a. Type the username of one's NMS5UX user into the Login box. If you have two or more NMS5UX users, type the username of the NMS5UX user associated to the Unix user used to start the operating system. b. Type the password of the NMS5UX user into the Password box. c. Press OK. The UX Map Manager window opens with the default map associated to its user. If the system displays the message: Incorrect Login, the typed name of the NMS5UX user is incorrect. Wrong Password, the typed password of the NMS5UX user is incorrect. Wrong Unix User, the used NMS5UX user is not compatible with the Unix user used for the start-up of the operating system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

72

Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it, one's password is expiring. To change it: Type, in the Old password box, the current password. Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters). Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.

If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the UX Map Manager window opens. On the next start of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface, the window for the change of the password will be displayed again. This window is displayed 5 days before the expiry of the user password. It will be displayed each time the user starts the graphic interface until the user changes the password or this one expires. Password expired. Please change it to login, one's password is expired. To change it: Type, in the Old password box, the current password. Type, in the New password box, the new password (alphanumeric string, minimum 6 characters and maximum 21 characters). Type again, in the Confirm New Password box, the new password and press Ok.

If the Cancel push-button is pressed, the password is not changed and the UX Map Manager window opens. To change the password and start the graphic interface, execute the procedure of step 7 again. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login, Wrong Password or Wrong Unix User message is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7. The Your Password is going to expire on <data>. Please change it and Password expired. Please change it to login message are displayed ONLY if the periodical password change functionality IS ACTIVE. It consists in requiring to the user to change his own password each N days (for example each 6 months). The functionality can be activated/deactivated by the Superuser, who, if he activates the functionality, sets the interval between a password change and the successive one. The activation of the periodical password change does not influence the expiry date of the user, which can be set during the creation of a NMS5UX user. The two functionalities are independent and can coexist at the same time.

Fig.4 TMNMENU window

Icons for the start of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface (1)

Icons for the management of the database and of the NMS5UX-B platform (2)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

73

Fig.4 notes (1) The selection of the icon: NMS5UX Application Login, allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface. If the user used to start the interface has profile: Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is the first user that access to the default map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read-Write modality. Superuser, privileged or advanced and it is not the first user that access to the default map relevant to one's user, this one is opened in Read Only modality. Normal or entry, the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.

NMS5UX-B Application Login R/O, allows starting the NMS5UX-B graphic interface; the default map relevant to one's user is opened in Read Only modality.

(2)

The description and the use of these icons is reported in the administrator manual of the NMS5UXB system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

74

FIRST START-UP OF THE NMS5UX-B INTERFACE

The following procedure supposes that the NMS5UX-B system has been already installed on the machine and that the processes necessary to the start-up of the interface have been already activated. The procedure for the installation and the start-up of the NMS5UX-B system is reported in the administrator manual. 1. Start-up the machine (PC, terminal, etc.). The login window of the Unix operating system opens. 2. Type the name of the Unix user: nms5ux. 3. Type the password of the Unix user: nms5ux. 4. Press the confirmation push-button. If the typed data are correct, one's Unix operating system is started. 5. Open a terminal window. 6. At the command line, type: cd /opt/nms5ux/start ./nmsWinMenu 7. Press Enter. The TMNMENU window opens (Fig.4). 8. Double click on the NMS5UX Application Login. The Login window opens and then the The UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) opens with the nms5ux map, which is empty if the system has not been pre-configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. The NMS5UX user, which the graphic interface has been started with, is assigned with the Superuser. AS first operation, it is suggested to modify the password associated to this user (pag.375).

If the function of Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, in the Login window it is necessary to: a. Type, in the Login box, the name of the user: nms5ux. b. Type, in the Password box, the user password: nms5ux. c. Press OK. The UX Map Manager window opens with the nms5ux map. The displaying of the Incorrect Login message points out that the typed name or password are incorrect. If, after more attempts, the Incorrect Login message is displayed for three times consecutively, the Login window is automatically closed. To start the graphic interface, it is necessary to execute again the procedure of the step 7.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

75

CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE

The closure of the NMS5UX-B graphical interface corresponds to the closing of the UX Map Manager window (see pag.147). The closure of the UX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open window of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

76

AUTOMATIC CLOSING OF THE NMS5UX-B GRAPHICAL INTERFACE

The UX Map Manager window is automatically closed when: The system displays the WARNING!! Forced Logout from Superuser message. The Superuser user has forced the disconnection of the user from the map (see pag.381). The user closes the operation system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

77

GRAPHIC NETWORK REPRESENTATION

After the installation of the NMS5UX-B system, it is necessary to represent the network graphically. The network configuration can be executed both by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA and by the user. If the network has been configured by SIAE MICROELETTRONICA, pass to the equipment connection (pag.108). Instead, if the network must be represented, follow the indication reported below.

The network representation is made using a series of predefined objects (see pag.79). To create them, some general rules pointed out at pag.82 must be respected. The creation of the objects can be executed using: Specific commands - Edit > Add menu (pag.85) Add Network From File functionality (pag.97) Auto Discovery functionality (pag.104)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

78

OBJECTS PRE-DEFINED FOR THE NETWORK REPRESENTATION

The pre-defined objects, available to the user for the network graphic representation, are: Container objects (pag.79) Network Element (NE) objects (pag.79) Generic Symbol objects (pag.81) Link objects (pag.81) Label objects (pag.81) Ring objects (pag.81) VLAN Map objects (pag.81)

Container objects
These objects are used as containers of equipment, symbols or other containers. No special meaning is assigned by NMS5UX-B to these objects. They have been introduced to help the user to arrange the network to rapidly locate the equipment. In fact the Container objects allow having a better overview of the network, as they allow grouping the items according to criteria that can be geographical or simply logical, for example they group equipment that belong to the same department or are located in the same area. The Container objects can be compared to the directories in the arrangement of the files on a PC.

Network Element objects

These objects are used to identify the real or virtual equipment: Radio SDH, Radio PDH, etc.

Real NE
Real equipment (SNMP or Legacy) means those objects that have the corresponding equipment physically present in the network. A real NE is not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant object is created, but it is necessary to connect it. The only exception is when the created NE is already present in a map and it is in connected status; in this case, the NE just after its creation acquires the condition of the same symbol present in the other map.

Virtual NE
Virtual equipment means those objects that have not the corresponding equipment physically present in the network. Depending on the type of protocol used to manage the equipment, the configuration of a virtual NE changes as pointed out here below. Virtual equipment (SNMP) When a virtual SNMP equipment is created, its configuration database is empty. In order to configure a virtual SNMP equipment, it is necessary to copy the configuration of an equipment of the same type (real or virtual with an already configured database) to the virtual equipment just created by means of the command SNMP-Configuration Download (pag.256).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

79

Select the symbol of the virtual SNMP NE to open the relevant equipment window and set the configuration parameters, the user inputs, the user outputs, the control parameters for the PM measures, etc. More information are reported in the equipment Manual. Then the configuration of the virtual SNMP equipment can be transferred, always by means of the command SNMP-Configuration Download, to any equipment compatible with the considered virtual equipment. Virtual equipment (Legacy) When a virtual Legacy equipment is created, its configuration database is empty. In order to configure a virtual Legacy equipment, it is necessary to select the symbol of the virtual Legacy NE. The equipment window is displayed. Set the parameters and, then, by means of a specific command present in the equipment graphic interface, transfer the new configuration of the virtual NE to other (real or virtual) equipment of the same type. For some equipment types, when the symbol is selected, before opening the equipment window, a window is displayed where the general parameters of the virtual NE you wish to configure can be defined, for example the type of IDU or the number/type of tributaries. More information are reported in the equipment Manual.

NE of ALplus Node type

With NE object of ALplus Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus equipment (nodal matrix) interconnected by Nodal Bus (Node). These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5UX-B system, but are managed as a set represented by the object of ALplus Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the network but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system. The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant ALplus Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically acquire the condition of the same ALplus Node symbol present in the other map.

NE of ALCplus2 Node type

With NE object of ALCplus2 Node type we do not mean a single equipment but a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic). (Node). These equipment are not managed one by one by the NMS5UX-B system, but are managed as a set represented by the object of ALCplus2 Node type, which has not a corresponding real object present in the network but works as container for the equipment of the nodal system. The equipment of a node are not automatically managed by the NMS5UX-B system when the relevant ALCplus2 Node object is created, but it is necessary to connect them. The only exception is if the created node is already present in a map in connected status; in this case, the equipment of the node will automatically acquire the condition of the same ALCplus2 Node symbol present in the other map.

NE tipo WEB Generic

This object is used to identify equipment, not managed by NMS5UX-B, which are provided with a WEB management interface. In fact, these objects can be assigned an IP address and a NSAP address (as for the creation of a normal SNMP NE to manage with the NMS5UX-B system). Selecting them, however, starts the default system browser with the WEB page, available at the set address, active. These objects were born in never connected (disconnected) status and their status do not change for the rest of their life because, differently from other NE objects, the objects of WEB Generic type must not be connected to start the connection. In fact, for this type of object, not all the commands available for the NE objects are meaningful, for example Connect, Disconnect, Network Alarm History, etc.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

80

Generic Symbol objects

These objects are used to graphically represent elements present in the network as, for example: pc, modem, etc. The Generic Symbol objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing the physical element which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.

Link objects
These objects are used to graphically represent a connection between two objects. The Link objects, even if they have a physical match in the network, do not allow managing the connections, which they are referred to, as they are a simple graphical representation.

Label objects
These objects are used to type a text string into the map.

Ring objects
These objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment, managed by the NMS5UX-B system, which implement Paths. The selection of a Ring object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the Ring Manager window (pag.50). The use of the Ring Manager window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507).

VLAN Map objects

These objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Ethernet tributary, managed by the NMS5UX-B system, which implement virtual LAN paths (VLAN path). The selection of a VLAN Map object allows accessing to the relevant graphic interface represented by the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51). The use of the VLAN Manager Map window is reported in the relevant user manual (see pag.507).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

81

RULES FOR THE CREATION OF THE OBJECTS

All the predefined objects must be created by the user. It is possible to add, delete, move or change the configuration parameters of the objects anytime. The network can be represented in a single map, or subdivided in more maps (see pag.21). The objects of a map can be saved to file and, then, imported in a different map (see pag.140). To avoid contemporaneous operations on the same object, only one user at a time can change the network configuration in a map. This one has the access to the map in Read-Write modality: Read-Write user. More users can access to the map at the same time. Only the Read-Write user can modify the network configuration. The changes made by the Read-Write user are not dynamically displayed by the Read Only users. To update the information of a map in Read Only modality, it is necessary to update the UX Map Manager window selecting the Map > Refresh command. Besides the general instructions described above, for some objects the rules described here below must be respected.

NE objects
It is possible to create all the equipment in a network in a single map or to subdivide the network in two or more parts and to associate two or more maps to these parts. In this case, at the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to this map will be visible and manageable. A NE object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that an equipment is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps. If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already existing object. For example, if the NE-1 symbol in connected status is present in the map A, when the NE1 symbol (same IP/Physical address) is created in the map B, the symbol will result connected as it inherits the status of the twin symbol. The same NE object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map. It is possible to create new NE objects even if these have not been physically installed in the network, for example because they are foreseen for a future installation. In this case, it will be possible to open the relevant equipment window only after the first connection; then, only after the equipment has been physically installed in the network and has been connected. It is, instead, possible to create virtual NE objects, that is objects not having a corresponding equipment present in the network, but which can be configured as a normal NE. Then this configuration can be transferred to any (real or virtual) equipment compatible with the virtual NE (see pag.79). The NE objects of WEB Generic type (see pag.80), after their creation, do not require any operation (line test, connection) to be used.

NE objects of ALplus Node type

For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to follow the indications reported here below for their creation: Before creating an ALplus Node object, it is necessary that the ALplus node* has been already defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation. * The ALplus node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 ALplus equipment with nodal matrix interconnected by Nodal Bus.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

82

If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belonging to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the NMS5UX-B system only through the relevant nodal window. After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from the map yet. During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corresponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

As general rule for the node management. All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release). The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present in the equipment composing the node.

NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type

For the NE objects of ALCplus2 Node type, besides the rules defined for the NE objects, it is necessary to follow the indications reported here below for their creation: Before creating an ALCplus2 Node object, it is necessary that the ALCplus2 node* has been already defined (equipment forming the node, relevant IP address, etc.) locally by means of SCT/ LMT application. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation. * The ALCplus2 node term indicates the set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic) If in the map there are already one or more copies of NE objects relevant to equipment belonging to a node, before creating the relevant node it is necessary to DELETE all the copies of these objects. This because the management of an equipment belonging to a node is supported by the NMS5UX-B system only through the relevant nodal window. After the creation of a node, it is not possible to create NE objects relevant to the equipment forming the node. Their management is carried out from the nodal window and not directly from the map yet. During the creation of the node, the system requires the IP address of the node. This corresponds to the IP address of the main equipment forming the node.

As general rule for the node management. All the commands, present in the map menu and executed selecting the node, are automatically executed for all the equipment composing the node (for example Connect, Disconnect, etc.). Instead, the command not available in the map menu but available in the nodal window are executed selecting the single equipment of the node (for example Configuration Download, NE Sw/Fw Release). The connection/alarm status of the node always reflects the most severe status/alarm condition present in the equipment composing the node.

Container objects
The container map windows allow subdividing the network into hierarchical levels in such a way that it is possible to arrive from a general view to the displaying of the single elements, passing through intermediate levels. In fact the network, made by the objects that the supervision system must manage and control, can be considered from different points of view. It can be observed taken as a whole, as distribution of elements in a geographical area (for example sub networks), or you can decide to study a single object to see its configuration; the user can decide at which level, and then which detail, to access to the network information. In this way, subdividing the network in containers, it is possible to easily pass from a general overview to a more and more detailed view. The user is totally free in the creation of the number and type of levels that better fits to the structure of one's network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

83

Ring objects
A Ring object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a Ring is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps. If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of the already existing object. For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol Ring-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links, when the Ring1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant Paths/Links will result configured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol. The same Ring object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map. The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the Ring objects are present in the Ring Manager (pag.431) menu. The menu is present in the UX Map Manager window only if the Ring Manager application, optional and provided on demand, is installed.

VLAN Map objects

A VLAN Map object is displayed ONLY in the map where it has been created. If you wish that a VLAN Map is present in two different maps, it is necessary to create the relevant symbol in both the maps. If the created VLAN Map symbol is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the configuration of the already existing object. For instance, if in the map A there is the symbol VLAN Map-1, where are configured the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links, when the VLAN Map1 symbol (same physical address) is created in the map B, the equipment NE-A, NE-B and NE-C and the relevant VLAN paths/Links will result configured in the symbol because the new symbol inherits the configuration of the twin symbol. The same VLAN Map object can be created in more maps and/or more times in the same map. The commands for the creation/modification/deletion of the VLAN Map objects are present in the VLAN Manager (pag.475) menu. The menu is present in the UX Map Manager window only if the VLAN Manager application, optional and provided on demand, is installed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

84

OBJECTS CREATION - EDIT MENU

By means of the commands available in the UX Map Manager window, it is possible to create all pre-defined objects available in the NMS5UX-B system. In detail for the creation of the objects: Container, NE, Generic Symbol, Link and Label use the Edit > Add menu (pag.149). Ring use the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring command (pag.432). VLAN Map use the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map command (pag.476).

Here below a series of examples of graphic representation of a hypothetic network in one or more maps, using the commands of Edit menu, is reported.

Examples of network graphical representation

Let us suppose to have to graphically display a certain Italia network in such a way to be able to execute its supervisory operations by means of the NMS5UX-B system. According to the equipment type present into his own network, the user has to refer to the specific example: Network composed by SNMP equipment (pag.85). Network composed by Legacy equipment (pag.88). Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment one (pag.91).

Into the example described here below, the entire equipment network will be displayed into the same map and it is assumed that such a map has already been created. It is possible to subdivide the equipment network into two or more parts and to couple to such parts two or more maps. In this case at the opening of each map, it will be visible, and it will be possible to manage it, only the part of the network coupled with the map under examination. An example is pointed out to pag.95.

Network composed by SNMP equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.5, is composed by Radio SDH, Radio PDH and PMP equipment. The NMS5UX-B loaded on a Workstation connected to an equipment by means of an Ethernet LAN. A specific IP address has been locally assigned to each equipment by means of LCT. Fig.5 Example of network (SNMP equipment)
Lan

Radio SDH 10.10.10.20

Radio PDH 10.10.10.30 PMP 10.10.10.40

Equipment type

Radio SDH 10.10.10.21

Radio PDH 10.10.10.31 Radio PDH 10.10.10.32

Local IP address of the equipment

Radio SDH 10.10.10.22

Radio PDH 10.10.10.33

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

85

Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equipment is connected and where they are located on the field. Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indication reported to pag.95. A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.6. Fig.6 Subdivision of the network into objects (SNMP equipment)
Italia (map) Nord Italia (container) Milano (container)
3 1

Torino (container)
9

4 5

Sud Italia (container) Lan

Radio SDH 10.10.10.20

10

Radio PDH 10.10.10.30

6

12

PMP 10.10.10.40

Radio SDH 10.10.10.21

11

Radio PDH 10.10.10.31

7

Radio SDH 10.10.10.22

Radio PDH 10.10.10.32

8

Radio PDH 10.10.10.33

In Fig.6, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is possible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name of the symbol of the container. An IP address and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE object. ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the NSAP (Gosip) address of the equipment. The IP Address and the possible NSAP (Gosip) Address, have to coincide with the IP Address and the NSAP (Gosip) Address locally set (by means of the LCT program) for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment. The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon. Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment. Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374). Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72). Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149). In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality. During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created. The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia. Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

86

In Fig.6, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right corner. In Tab.5, for each object present in Fig.6 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects contained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container. In Tab.5 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation of the object. Tab.5 Subdivision of the network into objects (SNMP equipment) Object 1 2 3 4 5 Type of object that must be created Container Container Container Container Network Element > SNMP Managed Container where the object must be created Italia * Italia * Nord Italia Nord Italia Milano Setting of the values of the main parameters Label: Nord Italia Label: Sud Italia Label: Milano Label: Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.30 Logical Address: PDH 30 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.31 Logical Address: PDH 31 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.32 Logical Address: PDH 32 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.33 Logical Address: PDH 33 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.20 Logical Address: SDH 20 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.21 Logical Address: SDH 21 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.22 Logical Address: SDH 22 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.40 Logical Address: PMP 40 ** Type: PMP

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Milano

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Milano

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Milano

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Torino

10

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Torino

11

Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed

Torino

12

Sud Italia

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name. ** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one. *** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network. The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video. By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment is contained, for example as shown in Fig.7, for the PMP 40 equipment of the Italia network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

87

Fig.7 Example of network (SNMP equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when it will be connected.

Network composed by Legacy equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.8, is composed by FAM, OLTME and G series Radio type equipment. The NMS5UX-B system is loaded on a Workstation which, by means of Ethernet LAN, is connected to a CommServer-S and a IPBOX. The physical address has been locally assigned by means of LOM, to each equipment. The IP Address has been locally assigned to the CommServer-S and IPBOX. The CommServer-S and IPBOX need for defining the connection line that physically couples each single equipment, managed by means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system. Fig.8 Example of network (Legacy equipment)

IP-BOX 143.1.1.1 2

CommServer-S Lan Lan 143.1.1.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RS232 RS485

IP Address Serial ports Equipment type

Radio 10
RS232

RS232

FAM 6
RS485

Oltme 21
Equipment local address

Radio 11
EOC

FAM 8

FAM 7

Radio 12

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

88

Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equipment is connected and where they are located on the field. Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indication reported to pag.95. A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.9. Fig.9 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy equipment)
Italia (map) Nord Italia (container) Milano (container) 3 5
IP-BOX 143.1.1.1 2

Sud Italia 1 (container)

CommServer-S
143.1.1.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Palermo (container) 6 Torino (container) 8

10 11 12

Oltme 21

Radio 10
7

FAM 6

14

13

Radio 12

Radio 11

FAM 8

FAM 7

In Fig.9, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is possible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name of the symbol of the container. An physical or IP address (NE objects: Comm.Server and IPBOX) and a logical address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE object. The physical/IP address, has to coincide with the address locally set (by means of the LOM/LCT program) for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment. The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon. Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment. To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary to allow the equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the Comm. Server-S or of the IPBOX and the number of the used port. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port, it has to be set the IP Address of the CommServer/IPBOX and the number of the port to which it is connected the equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself. The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains. Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374). Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72). Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149). In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

89

During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created. The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia. Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on. In Fig.9, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right corner. In Tab.6, for each object present in Fig.9 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects contained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container. In Tab.6 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation of the object. Tab.6 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy equipment) Object 1 2 3 4 5 Type of object that must be created Container Container Container Container Network Element > SNMP Managed Container where the object must be created Italia * Italia * Nord Italia Nord Italia Milano Setting of the values of the main parameters Label: Nord Italia Label: Sud Italia Label: Milano Label: Torino IP Address: 143.1.1.1 Logical Address: IPBOX ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: IPBOX Physical Address: 10 Logical Address: Radio 10 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Radio G Physical Address: 11 Logical Address: Radio 11 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Radio G Physical Address: 12 Logical Address: Radio 12 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.1 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Radio G IP Address: 143.1.1.2 Logical Address: CS ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Comm. Server Physical Address: 21 Logical Address: Oltme 21 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS/IPBOX Port: 8 Type: Oltme Label: Palermo Physical Address: 6 Logical Address: FAM 6 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Fam

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Milano

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Milano

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Torino

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Sud Italia

10

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed Container Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Sud Italia

11

Sud Italia

12

Palermo

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

90

Object

Type of object that must be created

Container where the object must be created

Setting of the values of the main parameters Physical Address: 7 Logical Address: FAM 7 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Fam Physical Address: 8 Logical Address: FAM 8 ** CS/IPBOX IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS/IPBOX Port: 2 Type: Fam

13

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Palermo

14

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Palermo

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name. ** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one. *** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network. The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video. By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment is contained, for example as shown in Fig.10, for the Radio 12 equipment of the Italia network. Fig.10 Example of network (Legacy equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when it will be connected.

Network composed by Legacy equipment and SNMP equipment

The Italia network shown in Fig.11, is composed by equipment managed with Legacy protocol (FAM) and equipment managed with SNMP protocol (Radio SDH). The NMS5UX-B system is loaded on a Workstation that is connected, by means of Ethernet LAN, to a CommServer-S and to the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

91

To each equipment, it has been locally assigned the specific address (physical/IP) by means of LOM/LCT. The CommServer-S need for defining the connection line that physically couples each single equipment, managed by means of the Legacy protocol, to the supervisory system. Fig.11 Example of network (Legacy/SNMP equipment)

CommServer-S Lan Lan 143.1.1.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RS232 RS485

IP Address Serial ports Equipment type

Radio SDH 10.10.10.20 Radio SDH 10.10.10.21

RS485

FAM 6

FAM 9
Equipment local address

Radio SDH 10.10.10.22

FAM 8

FAM 7

Before creating the objects that will allow to the system the management of the equipment, it is necessary to subdivide the network into containers, objects, etc. Doing this, it is suggested to consider as the equipment is connected and where they are located on the field. Into the subject example, it is supposed that all the Italia network equipment have been created into the same map. If the operator wants to subdivide the equipment into more maps, he has to respect the indication reported to pag.95. A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.12. Fig.12 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy/SNMP equipment)
Italia (map) Nord Italia (container) Torino (container) 3 7 Sud Italia 1 (container) 2

CommServer-S
4
143.1.1.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Radio SDH 10.10.10.20

5

Palermo (container)

8 9 10

FAM 9

Radio SDH 10.10.10.21

6 12

FAM 6

11

Radio SDH 10.10.10.22

FAM 8

FAM 7

In Fig.12, a name identifying a geographic area or a town has been associated to the containers. It is possible to assign any name to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name having a geographic reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name of the symbol of the container. To each NE object, the system has assigned a physical address (IP Address for the SNMP equipment and physical address with the Legacy equipment) and a logic one different for each created NE object. ONLY if the equipment are inserted into an OSI network, it will be necessary to set also the NSAP (Gosip) address of the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

92

The physical/IP/NSAP address, has to coincide with the address locally set (by means of the LOM/LCT program) for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment. The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon. Also in this case, as for the Container objects, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a name that makes easy the acknowledgement of the equipment. To each NE object, during its creation, it is necessary to couple all the information necessary to allow the equipment reaching. Such information are the IP Address of the Comm. Server-S and the number of the used port. For the equipment not directly connected to the serial port, it has to be set the IP Address of the CommServer and the number of the port to which it is connected the equipment installed upstream of the equipment chain to which belongs the equipment itself. The equipment can be connected to the supervisory system, directly or undirectly by means of EOC or other dedicated connection lines creating, in such a way, equipment chains. Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374). Open the UX Map Manager window with a user associated to the Italia map (pag.72). Now proceed in the creation of the objects (pag.149). In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality. During the operation, follow a determinate order because it is not possible to create an object, for example NE, if the Container object that must contain it has not been previously created. The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Nord Italia and Sud Italia. Then open, for example, the Nord Italia container and create the objects present in it, and so on. In Fig.12, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Italia network can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right corner. In Tab.7, for each object present in Fig.12 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which container the symbol must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects respects a possible creation order that assures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects contained in them. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container. In Tab.7 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation of the object. Tab.7 Subdivision of the network into objects (Legacy/SNMP equipment) Object 1 2 3 4 Type of object that must be created Container Container Container Network Element > SNMP Managed Container where the object must be created Italia * Italia * Nord Italia Torino Setting of the values of the main parameters Label: Nord Italia Label: Sud Italia Label: Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.20 Logical Address: SDH 20 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: ** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.21 Logical Address: SDH 21 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.22 Logical Address: SDH 22 ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 143.1.1.2 Logical Address: CS ** NSAP (Gosip) Address: *** Type: Comm. Server

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Torino

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Torino

Network Element > SNMP Managed

Sud Italia

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

93

Object

Type of object that must be created Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed Container Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Container where the object must be created

Setting of the values of the main parameters Physical Address: 9 Logical Address: Fam 9 ** CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS Port: 8 Type: Fam Label: Palermo Physical Address: 6 Logical Address: FAM 6 ** CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS Port: 2 Type: Fam Physical Address: 7 Logical Address: FAM 7 ** CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS Port: 2 Type: Fam Physical Address: 8 Logical Address: FAM 8 ** CS IP Address: 143.1.1.2 CS Port: 2 Type: Fam

Sud Italia

Sud Italia

10

Palermo

11

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Palermo

12

Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed

Palermo

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name. ** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one. *** Set the NSAP (Gosip) Address of the equipment only if it is inserted into a OSI network. The creation of an object implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on video. By means of the Container symbol, it is possible to display the detail of the network where the equipment is contained, for example as shown in Fig.13, for the FAM 9 equipment of the Italia network. Fig.13 Example of network (Legacy/SNMP equipment) (UX Map Manager window)

Now the NMS5UX-B system knows all the information that allows managing each single equipment when it will be connected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

94

Network subdivided into more maps

In this example, we suppose that the Italia network (Fig.5) is subdivided and graphically represented in two map, in such a way that at the opening of the map only the part of network associated to the specific map will be visible and manageable. A possible subdivision of the network is shown in Fig.14. Fig.14 Example of network subdivided in more maps
Nord Italia (map) Milano (container) 1

Torino (container) 7

2 3

Sud Italia (map) Lan

Radio SDH 10.10.10.20

8

Radio PDH 10.10.10.30

4

10

PMP 10.10.10.40

Radio SDH 10.10.10.21

9

Radio PDH 10.10.10.31

5

Radio SDH 10.10.10.22

Radio PDH 10.10.10.32

6

Radio PDH 10.10.10.33

In Fig.14, a name identifying a geographical area or town has been associated to the maps and to the containers. It is possible to assign any name to the maps and to the Container objects, but it is suggested to set a name that has a geographical reference. In this way, it will be possible to determine the position of the equipment just from the name of the map and of the container symbol. An IP address and a logic address, different for each created NE object, have been assigned to each NE. The IP Address must coincide with the locally set IP Address (via LCT program) for the relevant equipment. If the values do not coincide, it will not be possible to activate the connection with the equipment. The logical address corresponds to the name of the equipment that is displayed under the relevant icon. Also in this case, as for the Container object, it is possible to assign any value. It is suggested to assign a name that makes easy the acknowledging of the equipment.

Now proceed in the following way: 1. Create the Nord Italia and Sud Italia maps. Create the Italia map. The Superuser can create the map with a specific command (pag.374) or during the creation of a new user privileged or advanced (pag.374). 2. Open the UX Map Manager window with a user, which the Nord Italia map is associated to (pag.72). 3. Create some objects (pag.149). In order to create the objects, the map must be in Read-Write modality. During the operation, a specific order must be followed as it is not possible to create an object, for example NE, if before the Container object that must contain it has not been created. The first symbols that must be created are the Container objects: Milano and Torino. Then, open the Milano container and create the objects present in it, and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

95

In Fig.14, all the objects that must be created by the user, in such a way that each equipment of the Nord Italia map can be managed by NMS5UX-B, are identified by a number (1, 2, etc.) located in the upper right corner. In Tab.8, for each object present in Fig.14 and identified by a number, some information is reported that allows understanding how and where the symbol must be created. In detail, there is the indication of the type of object that must be created, which values must be assigned to the parameters of the object and in which container the symbols must be inserted. Furthermore, the order of the objects list reflects a possible creation order that ensures the creation of the Container objects before the creation of the objects which these must contain. The Generic Symbol, Link and Label objects can be added in any container. In Tab.8 not all the parameters are indicated, but only those whose setting is necessary for the creation of the object. 4. Close the Nord Italia map. 5. Open the UX Map Manager window with an user which the Sud Italia map is associated to. 6. Create the objects as displayed in Tab.8.

At the opening of each map, only the part of network associated to the open map will be visible and manageable. It is possible to create a NE symbol in two different maps. In this case, it is necessary to create the symbol in both the map, assigning to it the same characteristics (IP address, type, etc.). At the creation of the second symbol, given that the object is already present in a map, it will automatically acquire the status of the already existing twin symbol. Tab.8 Objects of a network subdivided in more maps Map where the object must be created Nord Italia Nord Italia Nord Italia Type of object that must be created Container Container Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Network Element > SNMP Managed Container where the object must be created Nord Italia * Nord Italia * Milano Setting of the values of the main parameters Label: Milano Label: Torino IP Address: 10.10.10.30 Logical Address: PDH 30 ** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.31 Logical Address: PDH 31 ** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.32 Logical Address: PDH 32 ** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.33 Logical Address: PDH 33 ** Type: Radio PDH IP Address: 10.10.10.20 Logical Address: SDH 20 ** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.21 Logical Address: SDH 21 ** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.22 Logical Address: SDH 22 ** Type: Radio SDH IP Address: 10.10.10.40 Logical Address: PMP 40 ** Type: PMP

Object 1 2 3

Nord Italia

Milano

Nord Italia

Milano

Nord Italia

Milano

Nord Italia

Torino

Nord Italia

Torino

Nord Italia

Torino

10

Sud Italia

Sud Italia *

* Main container that represents the map: it is created with the map and automatically acquires its name. ** The user can set any value, different from the displayed one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

96

OBJECTS CREATION - ADD NETWORK FROM FILE FUNCTIONALITY

The Add Network From File functionality allows automatically adding a group of predefined objects whose characteristics have been edited in a file (csv format) to a map of the NMS5UX-B system. The predefined objects, which can be automatically created by the considered functionality, are: Container objects (pag.79) Network Element objects (pag.79) managed with the SNMP protocol Link objects (pag.81) Label objects (pag.81)

The use of the functionality is structured in the following phases: 1. To create the file in csv format (pag.97). 2. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5UX-B system is installed (default directory opt/ nms5ux/data/files). The file must be transferred in ASCII format. 3. To open the UX Map Manager window: Relevant to the map defined in the file (pag.99). The map must be opened in Read-Write mode. With a user whose profile is Advanced, Privileged or Superuser. 4. To open the file (.csv) by means of the Edit > Add > Network From File command. Opening the file involves the automatic creation of the objects in the UX Map Manager window. At the end of the operation, the result of the creation is pointed out for each object. The use of the Network From File command is pointed out at (pag.155). At pag.101 an example is reported of complete use of the Add Network From File functionality.

To create the file in csv format

The Add Network From File functionality supports files in csv format with a predefined structure. The user can create the file in the wished mode, but always respecting: The format (.csv) The file structure described at pag.97. The rules for the compilation of the file, pointed out at pag.99.

At pag.100 the procedure for the creation of the csv file, starting from a model in xls format, is reported.

Structure of the csv file

Tab.9 points out the structure of a row of csv file. The column: Parameter, displays the fields of the row. According to the csv format, each field is separated from the next one by the character ";". Possible values, displays the valid values. Entering a different value or a value not in compliance with what displayed prevents the creation of the object. Fig.17 shows an example of structure of a csv file opened by a text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

97

Tab.9 File structure (Add Network From File functionality) Parameter Category (Category of the object you wish to create) If you wish to create an object: Type Label, type 1 or LABEL Container, type 2 or CONTAINER NE managed with the SNMP protocol, type 3 or NE Link, type 100 or LINK Possible values

(Type of object, within the category, you wish to cre- In detail, if you wish to create a: ate) Container object of type:

The possible values for this parameter change depending on the value set for the Category parameter.

Subnetwork, type 501 or Subnetwork Station, type 502 or Station SubStation, type 503 or Substation Radio Station, type 504 or Radio Station Small Station, type 505 or Small Station EL series radio, type 1 or Radio PDH US series radio, type 2 or Radio SDH PMP system, type 3 or PMP CommServerS equipment, type 4 or CS ADMC multiplexer, type 5 or ADM-C ALS series radio with AL IDU/ALC IDU, type 7 or Radio PDH-AL ELFO radio, type 8 or ELFO ADM1 multiplexer, type 9 or ADM-1 ALS series radio with ALS IDU/ALS-C IDU, type 11 or ALS ALFO radio, type 12 or ALFO ALS series radio with AL IDU plus, type 14 or ALplus SDH N+1 radio, type 15 or SDH N+1 ALS series radio with ALC IDU plus, type 16 or ALCplus ALS series radio with ALplus2 IDU, type 17 o ALplus2 ALS series radio with ALCplus2 IDU, type 18 o ALCplus2 FAMxc 5RU multiplexer, type 22 or FAMxc FAMxc 2.5RU multiplexer, type 24 or FAMxc 2.5 IPBOX equipment, type 40 or IP-BOX EXP63 multiplexer, type 41 or EXP63 ALplus node, type 64 or ALplus Node ALCplus2 node, type 61 or ALCplus2 Node Web Generic, type 94 or WEB Generic Generic line, type 1 or GENERIC Dashed line, type 2 or DASHED Dotted line, type 3 or DOTTED Dotdash line, type 4 or DOTDASH

NE object of type

Link object of type:

Label object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type - IP-ADDRESS (Parameter meaningful only for the NE object) If you are creating a NE object, type the IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment. For the NE object type: ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node. PMP, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master station.

If you are creating a Label, Container or Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type "-"

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

98

Parameter NSAP

Possible values If you are creating a NE object into an OSI network, white the NSAP address (GOSIP) of the equipment.

(Parameter meaningful only for NE objects insert- For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, write the NSAP address of the main equipment of the node. ed in an OSI network) The format of the NSAP address is the following: Legend: 39 or 49 = AFI (2 byte) IIII = ID (4 byte) VV = Ver (2 byte) UUUUUU = Auth (6 byte) RRRR = Reserved (4 byte) DDDD = Domain (4 byte) AAAA = Area (4 byte) SSSSSSSSSSSS = System ID (12 byte) EE = Sel (2 byte) If AFI is 49 (24 byte) 49 DDDD AAAA SSSSSSSSSSSS EE If AFI is different from 49 (40 byte) 39 IIII VV UUUUUU RRRR DDDD AAAA SSSSSSSSSSSS EE

If you are creating a Label, Container, Link or NE object not inserted in an OSI network, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type - Name (Object name) If you are creating an object: Map (Map name) Path NE, type an alphanumeric string of max 32 characters Container, type an alphanumeric string of max 48 characters Link, type an alphanumeric string of max 40 characters Label, type an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters

Type the name of the map where you wish to create the object.

If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the complete path where you wish to create the object. (Position of the map where the object must be creat- Use the symbol / to point out the different level. ed) Example. If you are creating a NE object and you type the path Europe/Italy/Rome, this means that the equipment must be created in the container Rome, contained in the container Italy contained, in its turn, in the container Europe. If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type - x (Position X of the object in the View area. An 10x10 hypothetic grid is taken as reference) y (Position Y of the object in the View area. An 10x10 hypothetic grid is taken as reference) If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position X (range 010) the object must take in the View area of the UX Map Manager window. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area. If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type - If you are creating a NE, Container or Label object, type the position Y (range 010) the object must take in the View area of the UX Map Manager window. If X = 0 and Y = 0, the graphic symbol is created in the New Object area. If you are creating a Link object, compiling this field is not meaningful. Type -

Rules of the compilation of the csv file

Every Container, NE (SNMP), Label or Link object you wish the Add Network From File functionality automatically creates must be inserted in the csv file. Every object corresponds to a row.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

99

All the object parameters (Category, Type, etc.) must be compiled as pointed out in Tab.9. If a parameter is not meaningful for the considered object, type the character - (hyphen) in the relevant field. Besides the general indications described above, some of the rules described below must be respected.

Map parameter All the objects inserted in a file must have the same value for the Map parameter. This means that you must insert into a csv file only the objects you wish to create in a specific map. This map is the map the user shall open (in Read-Write mode) (see step 3 of the procedure described at pag.97). If you wish to create the objects of a network which must be represented in more maps, the objects shall be subdivided according to the belonging map and a csv file shall be created for each map.

Path parameter The Path parameter represents the position, within the map, where the object must be created. To point out the containing levels, use the symbol /. Example. If you are creating a NE object, typing the path: Europe/Italy/Rome, means that the equipment must be created within the container Rome, contained in the container Italy, in its turn contained in the container Europe. /, means that the equipment must be created within the main container (level Map - see Fig.2).

If the container name includes the character / the container name must be enclosed between inverted commas (" ") in the description of the Path. For example, in the description of a path the container Station A/B must be inserted in the following way /Europe/Italy/StationA/B If an object must be created in a container, this container must be already present in the map or must be defined in the csv file (then created) before the object it must contain. Example. Suppose to have to create the object NE1 in the container Italy and this container is not already present in the map. In the csv file, the row defining the container Italy must be placed before the row defining the NE object.

Link object definition For the creation of a Link object, the parameters Category, Type, Name and Map must be pointed out. The parameters IP Address and NSAP are not meaningful. In this case, even the parameters Path, X, Y are not meaningful as the position of a Link object is determined by the position of the two objects Container and/or NE and/or Label which it must end. This position is determined by the following rule: A Link object is created as connection between the two Container/NE/Label objects described in the two previous rows. If an object of Link type is present in the two rows before (e.g., in row 8) the row of a Link (e.g., in row 10), the creation of the Link (e.g. in row 10) will not be carried out.

To compile the csv file starting from a model

A model file, which can be used as starting point for the creation of the file, is available in the server where ones NMS5UX-B system. The considered path/model file is the following: opt/nms5ux/data/files/AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls. The model is in xls format and the user must have an application program supporting this format (e.g., MS Excel) to use it.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

100

For the creation of the csv file through the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls, carry out the following operations: 1. If ones machine is not provided with an application program supporting the xls format, copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls to a PC provided with this application program. 2. Open the AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls file and rename it as you wish. 3. Define every single object you wish insert in the file typing the relevant characteristics in the specified column of the table named TEMPLATE. Each row represents an object. Tab.9 reports, for every column, the list of values you can insert. Before compiling the file, it is suggested to read the rules pointed out at pag.99. The rows, whose first character is #, have been inserted only to help the user in the file compilation. The information present in these rows WILL NOT be considered in the automatic creation of the objects, then it is not necessary to remove them at the end of the compilation of the file. The only information used for the automatic creation of the objects are those present in the TEMPLATE table. Save the file in csv format.

Example of use of Add Network From File functionality

Suppose to wish to graphically represent an hypothetic link ALplus1 - ALplus2 in the map nms5ux using the Add Network From File functionality. Before compiling the csv file, it is necessary to define if the link must be placed at the main level in the UX Map Manager window or if it must be inserted into a container and which auxiliary objects (Link and Label) you wish to create. A possible representation of the link is depicted in Fig.15. Fig.15 Representation of the link (example Add Network From File)
Example (Container) Station A (Container)
ALplus 1 (NE)
ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link) Remote ALplus2 (Label)

Station A- Station B (Link)

Remote ALplus1 (Label) ALplus 1 - ALplus 2 (Link)

ALplus 2 (NE)

Station B (Container)

Fig.15 points out, for every item to insert in the csv file, the object category (between brackets) and the name. At this point, the csv file can be created.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

101

Taking the model AddNetworkFromFile_TEMPLATE.xls (seepag.100) as reference and following the rules pointed out at pag.99 and in Tab.9, the AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file, depicted in Fig.16, has been created. Fig.17 shows the same file opened by means of a text editor. Fig.16 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (Add Network From File example)

Fig.17 AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file (test editor)

At this point, it is necessary to copy the file AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv to the server where the NMS5UX-B system is installed (directory opt/nms5ux/data/files). Then open the UX Map Manager window with the map nms5ux in Read-Write mode using a user with profile Advanced, Privileged or Superuser (pag.72). Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command and open the opt/nms5ux/data/files/ AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv file. The Add From File Report...AddNetworkFromFile_EXAMPLE.csv window, shown in Fig.18 opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

102

Fig.18 Add From File Report window (Add Network From File example)

The automatic creation of each objects implies the displaying of the relevant symbol on UX Map Manager window as shown in Fig.19.

Fig.19 UX Map Manager window (Add Network From File example)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

103

OBJECT CREATION - AUTO DISCOVERY FUNCTIONALITY

The Auto Discovery functionality allows detecting the SNMP equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system. When a new equipment is detected, NMS5UX-B automatically carries out the following actions: It inserts the detected equipment into the Auto Discovery table. It creates the corresponding object in a given map/container (optional operation). It connects the NE object (optional operation).

Moreover the functionality can detect and notify the user if the type of an object, already managed by NMS5UX-B, is changed. The Auto Discovery functionality puts two modalities to detect new equipment present in the network at users disposal: Network Scan modality (pag.104) NE Wake Up modality (pag.106)

In order to work, the two modalities must be configured and activated by the user and can be active at the same time or one at a time.

Network Scan modality

The Network Scan functionality is not available on OSI network. The Network Scan modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network, not managed by NMS5UX-B yet, and equipment whose type is changed (equipment described in the DB of the supervision system, but of a type not corresponding to the real one). The search is executed by a cyclic scanning of the network, executing a SNMP get on all the IP addresses belonging to given intervals (configurable by the user). When an equipment answers to the SNMP get, if the equipment: Is NOT managed by NMS5UX-B yet, it is inserted into the list of the detected equipment and the relevant NE object, if configured by the user, is created and connected. Is already managed by NMS5UX-B but with a type different from that pointed out in the network for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table. Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by NMS5UX-B. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment. If the user activates the Network Scan modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is included in the scanned IP address, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table. The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table. The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54). For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on the detection are pointed out.

In order to work, the Network Scan modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is necessary to define the operating parameters of the modality.

Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating immediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current scanning in progress. Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve it in a second moment (see pag.333).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

104

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan mode
The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the Network Scan modality, are the following: IP addresses which must be scanned. One or more ranges of addresses and/or single IP address can be defined. Scheduling of execution of the cyclic scanning: once per day or continuous each X (hours:minutes) and number of IP addresses which must be scanned at the same time each X (seconds). Example. Suppose that the cyclic scanning is set to be continuous each 3 hours and that, at each scanning, 5 equipment must be scanned each 4 seconds. The IP addresses to scan in total counting groups and single addresses are 15. The scheduling of the cyclic scanning will take place as displayed in the following figure.
Interrogation 5 IP Add. 4s 5 IP Add. 4s 5 IP Add. 3h 5 IP Add. 4s Interrogation 5 IP Add. 4s 5 IP Add.

Action to execute automatically on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose among one of the following actions: Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol. Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol. In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment. Only insertion in the Auto Discovery table. In this case, it will be possible then to create the equipment by means of a command present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.336) or by the command Edit > Add (pag.150) and to connect it.

Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created. When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way: If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically displayed in the map. If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.

Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created. If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container will be automatically created too. The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following path: / <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year> Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24 is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table) and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container: Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009 Fig.20 displays an example.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

105

Fig.20 Path containing the NE (example Auto Discovery)

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the Network Scan modality is reported at pag.330.

Activation (deactivation) of the Network Scan modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the Network Scan modality. The modality is automatically activated if at least one IP address or a group of IP addresses has been set and the configuration has been saved by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.53). The Network Scan modality remains active until when the user deactivates it removing all the values present in the areas Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses (Fig.53) and saving the new setting by means of the command Save as Active Conf. The procedure to activate and deactivate the Network Scan modality is respectively reported at pag.330 and pag.332.

NE Wake Up modality
The NE Wake Up modality has the purpose to detect new equipment in the network not managed yet by NMS5UX-B. In this modality, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notifications sent by the equipment and containing the information necessary to the connection and the management of the equipment itself. When a Wake Up trap is intercepted, the NMS5UX-B system carries out the following actions: It disables the sending of Wake Up traps by the equipment (trap switch-off). If the equipment which sent the trap: Is NOT managed yet by NMS5UX-B, this inserts it in the list of detected equipment and, if configured by the user, creates and connects the relevant NE object. Is already managed by NMS5UX-B but with a type different from that pointed out in the network for the specific IP Address, a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table. Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by NMS5UX-B. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment. If the user activates the NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table. The Wake Up notification is a SNMP trap sent by the equipment to the supervision system to notify its presence in the network. The configuration of the Wake Up trap (activation or not of the trap, IP/NSAP address of the machine which

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

106

the trap must be sent to, modality of trap sending, etc.) MUST be executed by the local management program LCT. For more information, see the relevant documentation. The equipment captured by the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities and the notify of the equipment whose type is changed are inserted in the Auto Discovery table. The table can be displayed any time by the user opening the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54). For the new captured equipment, besides the characteristics, the action automatically executed by the system on the detection are pointed out. In order to work, the NE Wake Up modality must be activated by the user. Before activating it, it is necessary to define the operating parameters of the modality. Then it will be possible to modify, in any moment, one or more parameters and establish if activating immediately the new configuration or, if the modality is already active, waiting for the expiry of the current scanning in progress. Moreover, it is possible to save a given setting of the parameters to a file an retrieve it in a second moment (see pag.333).

Setting of the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up mode

The parameters, which must be defined by the user and must be used by the NE Wake Up modality, are the following: Action which must be automatically executed on the detection of a new equipment. It is possible to choose among one of the following equipment: Insertion in the Auto Discovery table, creation and connection of the relevant NE symbol. Insertion in the Auto Discovery table and creation of the NE symbol. In this case, the equipment can be connected in a second moment. Only insertion into the Auto Discovery table. In this case, the equipment can be created in a second moment by means of the command present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.336) or by the command Edit > Add (pag.150) and connect it. Map where the NE symbol must be possibly created. When the NE is created (automatically or manually by means of command of the Auto Discovery table), if the map where the object must be created (map A) is different from that currently open (map B), the creation of the NE object will take place in the following way: If the map A is open in Read-Write modality, the object is created and dynamically displayed in the map. If the map A is open in Read Only modality, the object is created but not displayed. It is necessary to execute a Refresh command on the map in order to display it.

Container where the NE symbol must be possibly created. If the container is not present in the set map, on the creation of the NE object, the container will be automatically created too. The NE object is not directly created into the container set by the user, but in the following path: / <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year> Example. Suppose to have set the container Station-A. On June 23th 2009 the equipment AL24 is created (automatically or manually by means of the command of the Auto Discovery table) and the corresponding symbol will be created in the container: Station-A / 2009 / 06/2009 / 23/06/2009 Fig.20 displays an example.

The procedure to set the parameters for the execution of the NE Wake Up modality is reported at pag.332.

Activation (deactivation) of the NE Wake Up modality

Once the execution parameters have been defined, it is necessary to activate the NE Wake Up modality. The modality is activated (deactivated) activating (deactivating) the Manage Wake-up trap option and saving the configuration by means of the command Save as Active Conf (Fig.53). The procedure to activate and deactivate the NE Wake Up modality is reported respectively at pag.332 and pag.333.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

107

EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

After having graphically represented the network, it is necessary to activate the connection, then the communication, between the NMS5UX-B system (logic NE objects created by the users) and the peripheral area (physical equipment). For the equipment managed with the: LEGACY protocol the connection procedure (pag.111) is preceded by the opening of the serial ports (pag.109) that are physically connected to the equipment themselves. SNMP protocol execute immediately the connection procedure (pag.111) because it is assumed that the correct operation of the physical connection between the equipment and the supervisory system is ensured by the TCP/IP network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

108

OPENING OF THE SERIAL PORTS

The opening of the serial ports is NECESSARY ONLY for the Legacy equipment. For the SNMP equipment do not execute this operation, but pass immediately to the connection (pag.111). For the Legacy equipment, before starting the connection procedure, it is necessary to activate the management processes of the serial ports to which the equipment themselves are physically connected. This procedure is usually defined to open a serial port. It is possible to connect the Legacy equipment to the supervision centre by means of the serial ports of CommServer-S or the serial port (if properly configured) of IPBOX. According to the hardware elements provided with the system, it will be necessary to open the serial ports of the CommServer-S (represented by the CSB Port symbols present into the Equipment window of the CommServer-S) and/or the serial port of the IPBOX (represented by the Comm Server B Port symbol present into the Equipment window of the IPBOX). It is not necessary to open all the serial ports present into the network but only the ones connected with the equipment to be managed.

Opening modes of the serial ports

Before opening the serial ports, it is necessary to activate the connection of the relevant equipment (Comm. Server-S/IPBOX) and the supervision system. CommServer-S 1. Connect the equipment using the Command > Communication Server Board > Connect command (pag.259). 2. Open the serial ports. The procedure is described into the CommServer-S Manager manual. IPBOX 1. Connect the equipment using the Command > Connect > Network Element command (pag.244). 2. Open the serial port. The procedure is described into the IPBOX Manager manual.

The opening procedure of the serial port involves the management of the polling process relevant to the equipment group connected to the port under examination. The HDLC polling process and the return of the alarms/events will be activated at the connection of the equipment. During the opening of each single port, the user will have to set the values of the T and N parameters that define respectively the time and the transceiving number of a message before that the system would consider an equipment as an unreachable one. The default values are T=10 and N=2. Then, it is possible to define the time range between the polling of an equipment and the next one. Usually the opening procedure of the serial port, if the connection of the relevant Comm. Server or IPBOX object has been successfully ended, is correctly executed. If the connection procedure of the Comm. Server or IPBOX has not been successfully executed, check the following conditions: The IP Address assigned to the NEs object is equal to the one assigned during the local configuration. The equipment is turned on and correctly connected to the supervisory system. ONLY if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, check that the NSAP (Gosip) Address assigned to the NE object coincides with the NSAP (Gosip) Address assigned during its local configuration.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

109

Closing modes of the serial ports

After having opened a serial port, it is possible to close it (it is deactivated the relevant managing process). The operation is not accepted if there is also a single NE in connected status connected to the port to be closed. Closing the serial port, it will not possible longer to connect the equipment physically connected to the port itself. Then, the polling process, relevant to the equipment group connected to the port under examination, is not managed longer. Also the Comm. Server and IPBOX can be always disconnected if any of the serial ports present into them is in open status. A port can be automatically closed by the system after a supervisory loop or for an overflow of alarms on the serial port itself. The automatic closing procedure is executed independently from the connection status of the equipment connected to such ports. At the end of the procedure, the equipment connected to the port under examination will results unreachable, with the exception of the ones that were disconnected before the procedure; Such ones do not change their status. Supervisory loop. The supervisory network is overplaced to the transmission network enabling the proper interfaces. The transmission network can be configured as a loop, on the contrary the supervisory network does not allow this configuration type. In a loop configuration, the propagation mode of a message causes the re-typing of the message itself, after having run into the entire loop, into the same supervisory port from which it has entered. In such a way, it will reach the most upstream equipment present into the propagation chain of the messages, until to reach the serial port from which such a message has been forwarded. Usually, when the supervisory system receives the same message that it has forwarded, it automatically disables the serial port. In such a way, the message forwarded by the centre continues to run into the loop. This situation is called supervisory loop.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

110

CONNECTION PROCEDURE
When the user sends the connection command, the NMS5UX-B system sends a test message to verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test). If the test has result: NEGATIVE, the procedure is stopped: the equipment is not connected. POSITIVE, the system sends the global network parameters and then reads/acquires from the equipment the current configuration and the alarms: the equipment is connected.

At the first connection the system, having no information stored in the database, acquires all the information from the NE. Then, if the equipment is managed with the Legacy protocol, the system will forward the messages relevant to the configuration only when it is changed a parameter. On the contrary, the alarm status is periodically get by means of a polling cycle (pag.119). If the equipment is managed with the SNMP protocol, the equipment itself will spontaneously inform the supervisory system about possible changes concerning the configuration or the status of the alarms (SNMP trap). A polling cycle from the supervisory system is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment. The connection of an equipment causes the automatic insertion of the equipment itself into the specific polling cycle. Only after that an equipment has been connected at least once, it is possible to open the relevant equipment window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

111

COMMANDS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF THE CONNECTION

In order to modify the connection status of an equipment or to execute some tests or to re-align the information stored in the database, the following commands are available: Line Test (pag.112) Connect (pag.112) Disconnect (pag.112) Alarm Re-alignment (pag.113) Configuration Upload (pag.113) Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.113)

Line Test command

The Line Test command checks the real reach ability of the equipment. The check consists in the request of the NMS5UX-B system to an NE of the value of the chosen parameter: if the NE answers, the test has successful result, otherwise it fails. All the NE, independently from their type or connection status, are programmed to answer to the test message. Furthermore, the sending of the command does not influence the connection or alarm status of the Network Element. For the use of the command, refer to the par. Line Test (pag.242).

Connect command
The Connect command activates the connection between the NMS5UX-B system and the remote equipment. At the end of the procedure, if the result is positive, the system will be able to communicate with the NE, it will have all the information relevant to the current status of the alarms and to the configuration and will have sent the network time to the equipment. It is not possible to connect an equipment in connected status. Furthermore, the connection command towards an equipment in unreachable status is automatically sent by the system at regular intervals. For the use of the command, refer to par. Connect (pag.244).

Disconnect command
The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the remote equipment: the system stops the management of the present NE. The disconnection of an equipment does not involve the deletion of the relevant information from the database; they stay stored, even if the equipment is disconnected; the user can open the relevant equipment window where the last acquired configuration is displayed. For the use of the command, refer to par. Disconnect (pag.246).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

112

Alarm Re-alignment command

The Alarm Re-alignment command re-aligns the current alarms of an equipment. The re-aligning procedure involves that the system deletes the information present in the current alarms table, relevant to the NE involved in the operation. Then the system requires to the NE the status of its alarms and stores them in the current alarms table. The content of the current alarms table can be displayed opening the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41). This operation does not influence the connection status of the NE or its configuration. It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX-B system and the real alarm situation present on NE occurred. In fact this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the operating status of an equipment. For the use of the command, refer to par. Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252).

Configuration Upload command

The Configuration Upload command re-aligns the information, relevant to the configuration and the alarms, stored in the database to those really present in the equipment. The execution mode of the procedure is fundamentally equal to the one used for the execution of the realigning procedure on the alarms (pag.113); the only difference is that the system requires to the equipment the status of the alarms and also the configuration information relevant to all the objects known by the equipment itself. Also in this case, the information replace the ones recorded into the database. This operation does not influence the status of connection of the NE. It is suggested to select the command only when you suppose that a misalignment between the alarm information known by the NMS5UX-B system and the real configuration and operating status of the NE occurred. In fact this command does not represent the normal procedure to acquire the information relevant to an equipment. For the use of the command, refer to par. Configuration Upload (pag.254).

Legacy-Reset&Connect command
The command is forwarded only if it has been selected one or more Legacy equipment. For the SNMP equipment the forwarding of the command under examination is not available because it could be equal to the forwarding of the Connect command. The Legacy-Reset&Connect command removes all the information stored into the database, relevant to the equipment configuration and then activates the connection between the supervisory system and the equipment itself. At the end of the procedure, if it has been successfully executed, the system will be able to communicate with the NEs as after a normal connection procedure; it will have get all the information relevant to the configuration and to the functional status of the NEs then the NEs themselves will be automatically inserted into the polling cycle. This command has to be selected only in extreme cases, when the user supposes that it is present a misalignment situation between the alarm information known by the supervisory system and the real situation present into the NEs. The duration of the reset and connection operation is usually longer than the one of a normal connection because the entire configuration of the NE is transferred from the peripheral part to the supervisory centre. It is not possible to forward the Legacy-Reset&Connect command toward an equipment in connected status. For the use of the command, refer to par. Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

113

CONNECTION STATUSES OF THE EQUIPMENT

The connection status of an equipment shows to the user if the equipment is managed by NMS5UX-B and, if managed, its operating status (alarms). The status of an equipment are: Disconnected (pag.114) Connected (pag.114) Unreachable (pag.115) Maintenance (pag.115)

In the UX Map Manager window, the current status of an equipment is represented by the colour of the relevant NE symbol. In fact, one or more colours correspond to each status (pag.40). The colour of the NE symbol influences also the colour of the Container symbols that contain the equipment in the following way. If a container: Contains at least one connected NE, the Container object will assume the colour relevant to the connected status: green (if NE is not alarmed) or light blue/yellow/orange/red (if the NE is alarmed). Contains more connected NEs or other Container objects, the colour of the Container object will be determined by the colour of the NE or Container symbol where the most serious alarm is present.

The colour of the NE icon in maintenance status does not affect he colour if the Container icons where it is present the NE. For instance, if into a Container object there is an equipment in connected status (green colour) and an equipment in maintenance status (pink colour), the Container icon will get the colour relevant to the connected status (green).

Disconnected status
Initial status of an NE just after its creation; then it is the status reached after a disconnection command. In this condition, the equipment is not managed by the system: no message is sent or received and no polling procedure is executed. OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is disconnected Send the Line Test (pag.242), Connect (pag.244) and Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250) (only for the Legacy equipment) command. Delete the NE object (pag.156). It is possible to open the equipment window only if the NE has been connected at least once. The disconnection does not involve the deletion of the database of the information on the equipment configuration. In this case, however, the status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window are not referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER After the sending of the Connect or Legacy-Reset&Connect command: If the operation is successfully, the equipment passes to connected status. If the operation fails, the equipment passes in an unreachable status.

COLOUR of the NE symbol The colour of the icon associated to the disconnected status is BROWN.

Connected status
Status reached after a connection procedure gone well. In this condition, the equipment correctly answers to the system polling. During the period when the equipment is connected, the user can send commands and require information. Only exception to this rule is the presence of LCT in Configuration modality (pag.116). OPERATIONS that the user can execute when an equipment is connected

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

114

Open the equipment window and verify/modify the NE configuration. The configuration/operating status of the NE corresponds to the real situation of the equipment. Send the commands for the management of the equipment.

Condition/commands that determine the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO THE OTHER After: The user sends the disconnection command, the equipment switches to disconnected status. A system polling, if the equipment does not send any answer, the status from connected becomes unreachable.

COLOUR of the NE symbol The colour of the symbol of a connected NE depends on the alarms present in the equipment itself. Depending on the severity of the current alarms, the colour can be: Green. The equipment is not alarmed. Light blue. At least one alarm of Warning level is present on the equipment (simple signalling). Yellow. At least one alarm of Minor level is present on the equipment (alarm). Orange. At least one alarm of Major level is present on the equipment (serious alarm). Red. At least one alarm of Critical level is present on the equipment (very serious alarm).

If there are more alarms of different severity on the equipment at the same time, the colour of the NE symbol will represent the most serious alarm.

Unreachable status
This is the status reached when the equipment, thought the automatic repetition of the messages, does not answer to the polling of NMS5UX-B or sends unknown messages. In this condition, the NE is not managed by the system, which however sends a connection command at regular interval. OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment is unreachable Sending the Disconnect (pag.246), Line Test (pag.242), Connect (pag.244) and Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250) (only for the Legacy equipment) command. The equipment window can be opened only if the equipment has been connected at least once. The status and the values of the attributes of the objects contained in the window will not be referred to the current condition of the equipment but to the last known configuration.

Conditions/commands that cause the PASSING FROM ONE STATUS TO ANOTHER ONE After the user or the NMS5UX-B system has sent the connection command (automatic re-connection): If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to connected status. If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status. If the operation is successful, the equipment passes to disconnected status. If the operation fails, the equipment remains in unreachable status.

After an user has sent the disconnection command:

COLOUR of the NE symbol The colour of the NE icon associated to the unreachable status is RED with an X on the symbol.

Maintenance status
The maintenance status indicates a transient condition. The equipment assumes this status during the execution of an operation, for example during the connection. At the end of the operation, the NE will assume the status associated to its condition (connected, disconnected, unreachable). OPERATIONS executable by the user when an equipment in unreachable When the NE is in maintenance status, no operation can be executed. COLOUR of the NE symbol The colour of the NE icon associated to the maintenance status is RED.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

115

LOM/LCT
LOM/LCT term means the software application, developed to manage/control locally the equipment: Local Operator Manager, Local Craft Terminal, WEB Local Craft Terminal. The operations that can be executed via LOM/LCT are basically those that can be executed via NMS5UX-B. More information on the use of the LOM/LCT program is reported in the specific documentation. Here below only some indications are reported about the relationships between LOM/LCT and NMS5UX-B: Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration (pag.116) Indication of the presence of the LOM/LCT user to the NMS5UX user (pag.117) Enabling/disabling of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality (pag.117)

Types of LOM/LCT-equipment connection: Monitoring, Configuration

The local user can activate the LOM/LCT-equipment connection in Monitoring modality (the user can only verify the equipment configuration) or in Configuration modality (the user can both verify and modify the equipment configuration). The local activation of a LOM/LCT-equipment connection in modality: Monitoring, does not influence the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of commands by the system: the NMS5UX user can open the equipment window and verify/modify the equipment configuration itself. Configuration, if the NE is: Managed with Legacy protocol, it is not possible to change the configuration parameters or to forward commands: the NMS5UX user can not open the equipment window. Managed with SNMP protocol, influences the acquisition of the alarms or the sending of the commands by the system. The NMS5UX user can open the equipment window (except for the equipment of PMP type) but it cannot modify the configuration and send commands with the following exceptions: Execute the software reset of an equipment (pag.261) Transfer the configuration of an equipment to another one of the same type (pag.256) Updating the equipment software (pag.400) Forcing the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user (pag.381)

During the period when the connection is active, no modification relevant to the alarms is signalled to the NMS5UX-B system. When the local LCT-equipment connection is deactivated, the NMS5UX-B system automatically re-aligns the configuration (sending of the Configuration Upload command - pag.113) to control possible changes executed by the local user and to acquire the current alarms. If the local user has changed the configuration of the remote equipment, the new values are acquired and replaced to those previously present stored in the database. For SCT/WEB LCT program, the: Monitoring modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with Read Only user profile. Configuration modality corresponds to the activation of the SCT-equipment connection with Read And Write, Station Operator or System user profile.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

116

Indication of the presence of the LCT user to the NMS5UX user

The activation and the deactivation of the local connection, both in Monitoring and Configuration modality, are spontaneously communicated by the equipment to the NMS5UX-B system and signalled to the user: In the map, a check sign is indicated next to the NE icon ( ) is indicated next to the NE icon. This information is forwarded also to the Container objects containing the NE. Furthermore, the activation of the local connection in Configuration modality is signalled to the user in the map: the NE icon assumes the white colour. This information is not forwarded by the Container objects that contain the NE symbol. For example, if a Container object contains a connected NE (green colour) and an equipment which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected (white colour), the Container symbol will assume the colour relevant to the connection status (green). In the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39), Current Alarms Browser (Fig.41), Equipment Browser [List/Locate] (Fig.36), Information (Fig.23). In the equipment window of the NE.

To enable/disable of the LCT-equipment connection in Configuration modality

The description reported here below can be applied only for the SNMP equipment. The NMS5UX user can enable/disable the LCT user to connect to the equipment in Configuration modality setting the LCT Config. If the parameter has value: Enabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment both in Monitoring and Configuration modality. Disabled, points out that the LCT user can activate the connection with the equipment only in Monitoring modality.

Independently from the previous setting, when the equipment is switched off and switched on or reset, the LCT Config parameter is automatically set to the Enabled value. The command to set the LCT Config parameter is present in the equipment window. Besides the status of the LCT Config parameter is displayed in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] equipment (Fig.36).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

117

ALARM MANAGEMENT

Functionality of primary importance of the NMS5UX-B system is the detection, visual signalling and centralized storing of the alarm/status/event signallings present in the equipment that manages. The alarm term defines the fault signalling generated by an error or by a bad operation of the NE or of any element that composes it. The status and event terms identify the signallings that do not indicate a bad operation but a status change, a running operation or an operation condition. In detail, the signallings of: Status, are communicated spontaneously from the NE to the system, as for example: The activation/deactivation of the LCT-equipment connection. The start/end of the updating of the software of the equipment. The activation/deactivation of the manual operations. The status of active/stand-by of duplicated parts of NE.

Event, are generated by the system itself, as for example the start of an operation of alarm realignment.

In the following of the chapter, the alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

118

ACQUISITION OF THE ALARMS

The acquiring process of the alarms changes according to the type of protocol used by the equipment. With details for the equipment: Managed with the Legacy protocol, the acquiring of the alarms is executed by means of a polling process by the supervisory centre (pag.119), through the serial interfaces of the Comm Server and/or IPBOX, toward all the equipment in connected status. Managed with SNMP protocol, the detection and reset signals of an alarm are spontaneously forwarded to the supervisory centre by the equipment (trap SNMP). A polling process executed by the supervisory centre is kept only to check the reachability status of the equipment.

The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not cyclically subjected to polling. It is possible to force the acquisition of the alarms of an equipment using the Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252) or Configuration Upload command (pag.254).

Polling
The contents of the subject paragraph refer to the Legacy equipment. For the SNMP equipment the polling process executes only the checking of the reachability of the equipment themselves, and does not collect the alarms.

Polling execution
Each CS/IPBOX port autonomously executes the polling process relevant to the local equipment (directly connected) and to the remote ones (connected in cascade by means of EOC, service channels, etc.). In such a way, the acquiring times of the alarms are strongly reduced because for a high dimension network it is not executed a single polling process but as much processes as are the managed and in open status CS/IPBOX ports. The polling process is managed by a properly devoted program, loaded into the CommServer for the CS ports and into the IPBOX for the IPBOX port. Such a programs makes cyclically available the connection line for each single equipment connected to the same CS/IPBOX port. The equipment involved into the polling cycle communicates to the supervisory system all the detected changes, if the alarm status has changed from the last polling time. After having forwarded all the information, the connection line will become available for the next equipment. The duration of the polling cycle changes according to the number of equipment connected to the CS/IPBOX port and to the quantity of the transmitted alarms. Though every alarm is timestamped (by the remote equipment at the occurrence of such an alarm), the duration of the polling cycle or the query sequence of the equipment into such a cycle will not affect the correct displaying of the alarm information for the user.

Polling and command forwarding

The polling procedure, executed between CS/IPBOX and equipment, is completely transparent for the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the operations executed by the NMS5UX user. But since the connection line between the serial port and the relevant equipment group is a single one, the forwarding of a command executed by the centre is a priority one with respect to the cyclic polling process. In fact, when it is forwarded a command (for instance, the change of a parameter), to an equipment A, if the polling process of an equipment B is on progress, the system waits for the end of the polling operation on the equipment A. After that it executes the command and then restart again the polling procedure from the step it has been suspended on the equipment B.

Polling and LOM/LCT activation

The activation of the local connection between the equipment and the LOM/LCT program does not affect the automatic acquiring of the alarms for the equipment under examination.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

119

DYNAMIC DISPLAYING OF THE ALARMS

At each change of the status of the alarms on the equipment present in the network, the NMS5UX-B system informs the user by means of the UX Map Manager window, executing the following operations: If present in the open map, the NE symbol where the alarm has been detected changes colour according to the severity associated to the alarm. If a alarm more serious than the detected one is present on the equipment, the icon does not change colour, because it is determined by the alarm more serious present on the equipment. The NE icon reports also the information that a not yet checked alarm is present. The status of the NE (change of colour and presence of a not yet checked alarm) is signalled also by the Container symbols that have, inside them, this NE (the colour of the Container icons changes). The colour of the Container symbol is determined by the colour of the NE symbol contained inside it, where the most serious alarm is present. If open, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) the record relevant to the detected alarm is added. If open, in the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.41) the record relevant to the detected alarm is added. If open, in the equipment window relevant to the NE, where the alarm has been detected, the NE symbol is graphically modified. If the equipment window has Read Only access the alarm is not signalled, as the window is not dynamically updated. To update the alarms, it is necessary to require a new reading of the table relevant to the current alarms. In the Alarm History Browser and Current Alarm Browser window if: Some filters are active, it is possible that the record is not added as it does not satisfy the set filtering criteria. The freezing of the window is activated, the record is not added.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

120

DISPLAYING OF THE CURRENT ALARMS AND OF THE ALARM HISTORY

The user can anytime display: The history of the alarms relevant to all the equipment (Network Alarm History command pag.264) or only to the selected equipment (NE Alarm History command - pag.285). The alarm history term means the list of alarms, acquired and recorded by the supervision system in the time. The alarm history records both the detection signalling and the clearing signalling of the alarm. In the alarm history, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records (value that can be set by the Superuser) that can be stored. During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and cleared signallings, the oldest records. If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record. When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History occupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and the frequency at which it is displayed can be configured by Superuser. Default: display of the message active; frequency: every 60 seconds. The list of the alarms currently active on all the equipment (Network Current Alarms command - pag.273) or only in the selected equipment (NE Current Alarms command - pag.286).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

121

ALARM CORRELATION
The alarm correlation term means the functionality that puts in relationship, in the alarm history, the activation of an alarm with that of its clearing. In detail, in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) the notification of the activation of the alarm is displayed by a record where the date/time of activation of the alarm activation is displayed. The clearing of the same alarm is indicated adding, to the already existing record, the indication of the deactivation date/time. After a forced alignment of the alarm status, not all the notifications of the alarms active on the equipment are recorded, but only the possible new alarms. Furthermore, after the forced realignment, for the alarms that are not active anymore, the deactivation date/time will be inserted in the relevant record. If an equipment is disconnected, all the (detected and detected/cleared) alarms relevant to that equipment are removed by the alarm history.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

122

SAVING OF THE ALARMS

It is possible to save the alarm history stored in the NMS5UX-B database. In detail, it is possible: To save all the alarm history to tape and/or to disk present in the database (pag.423). Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.424) and display them in the Old History Browser window (Fig.42). To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) present in the database of the system (pag.267). To save to file the whole alarm history (or a part) recovered from tape or disk (pag.281).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

123

ALARM SEVERITY
Each alarm, acknowledged and managed by the NMS5UX-B system, has associated a severity which determines the alarm importance. Each severity is identified by a name and a colour, as indicated in Tab.10. Tab.10 Alarm severity Severity Very serious alarm Serious alarm Alarm Minor alarm Name Critical Major Minor Warning Red Orange Yellow Light blue Color

The alarm severity is the criterion used by NMS5UX-B to represent graphically the operational status of the equipment. When an alarm raises in a connected alarm, the icon that represents the equipment modifies its colour according to the severity of the active alarm present inside it. The colour of the Container symbols containing the NE reflects the condition of current alarm. If more alarms of different severity are present at the same time, the colour of the icon will represent the most serious alarm; the same occurs for the container icons. The severity of an alarm is reported also in the Alarm History Browser (Fig.39) and Current Alarm Browser (Fig.41).

Modification of the alarm severity

The contents of the subject paragraph can be applied only for the SNMP equipment. The NMS5UX-B system allows modifying, for each alarm, the severity of network and the local severity. Network severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when displayed by the NMS5UX-B system. For each alarm, the network severity is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type present in all the maps. To modify the network severity of an alarm, use the SNMP-Network Severity Code command (pag.368 - command available only to the Superuser). Local severity means the severity that characterizes the alarm when stored by the controller of the NE and displayed by the local management system (LCT); this severity is not used by NMS5UX-B. For the same alarm, it is possible to define a local severity different from NE to NE. To modify the local severity of an alarm, use the SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command (pag.370). Example Suppose that two types of SDH Radio are connected to the NMS5UX-B system: NE-A and NE-B. By means of the SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command, it is defined that, locally, the alarm x for NE-A has severity Major, while for the NE-B has severity Minor. Instead, using the SNMP-Network Severity Code command, it is defined that the alarm x for all the NEs of SDH Radio type of Critical severity. In the NE-A, the detection (or cleared) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by LCT with Major severity, while it will be seen by NMS5UX-B with Critical severity. Instead, in the NE-B, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm x will be stored in the controller of the NE and seen by LCT with Minor severity, while it will be seen by NMS5UX-B with Critical severity.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

124

Modification of the severity of the alarms of User Input

What described below is valid for all the alarms (of all the types of SNMP equipment) with the exception of the alarms used by the user input. The severity of the alarms of User Input is defined by means of a specific command present in the equipment window. This severity constitutes both the network and the local severity. For example, if the User Input x alarm for an equipment is defined having a Critical severity, on its detection the alarm will be stored in the controller of the NE, seen by LCT and by NMS5UX-B with Critical severity. The setting of the severity is independent for each alarm of User Input, and local to the NE selected for the operation. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of user Input of each single NE. More information on the user inputs and on the command to modify the severity is reported in the equipment manual of the NMS5UX-B.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

125

ENABLING/DISABLING OF THE ALARMS

The contents of the subject paragraph are valid only for the SNMP equipment. The NMS5UX-B system allows enabling/disabling the alarms and/or the sending of the relevant traps. In detail, it is possible: To disable the alarm; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is not recorded in the controller of the NE and it is not communicated to the supervision program: as the alarm has never occurred. To disable the sending of traps; in this case, the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded in the controller of the NE, but it is not communicated to the supervision system. If the Configuration Upload (pag.254) or Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252) command is sent to NE, also the alarms, whose trap sending is disabled, will be acquired. To enabled the alarm and the sending of trap; in this case the detection (or clearing) of the alarm is recorded in the controller of the NE and communicated to the supervision system (with the sending of the relevant trap) that display it in the current alarms and in the alarm history (default condition).

The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the trap sending is independent for each alarm, and local to the selected NE for the operation. This means that the setting must be made for each single alarm of each single NE. To enable/disable the alarms and the sending of traps of an equipment, use the SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command (pag.370). It is possible to verify the list of the NEs that have at least one disabled alarm/trap opening the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window (Fig.36) and configuring properly the filter.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

126

FLEETING ALARMS
Sometime there can be that, in an equipment, an alarm is detected and is cleared many times in a brief period. The instability that characterizes these alarms, defined fleeting, causes a such number of alarms to saturate the network. In fact, each time the alarm raises/clears, the system records a signalling. For this cause, before recording an alarm, the stability of the alarm itself is verified. The criterion used to determine if an alarm is fleeting or not is the following: an alarm is considered fleeting when NMS5UX-B, during a period of time t, records that the number of activation of the alarm is higher than the thr_in threshold. An alarm will not be considered fleeting anymore if, during the successive period of time t, the number of activation of the alarm is lower than the thr_out threshold.

Example Suppose that the values t=120, thr_in=3, thr_out=1 are set. The alarm A, within 120 seconds, activates and clears twice and, on its third activation, (thr_in=3) the supervision system marks it as fleeting alarm: the successive activation/clearing are not recorded in the Alarm History table. At the successive period of 120 seconds, if the alarm A activates and clears only once (thr_out=1), the supervision system does not consider the alarm A as fleeting anymore. The parameter t and the thr_in and thr_out thresholds can be modified by the Superuser. Their default values are: t = 120 sec., thr_in = 3, thr_out =1.

In the Alarm History Browser window, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling came to the equipment pointed out the deactivation of the alarm, the management of the signalling alarm will take place without differences with respect to a normal signalling of cleared alarm: the alarm is correlated to the previous signalling. Differently, when an alarm exits from the fleeting status and the last signalling came to the equipment pointed out the activation of the alarm, the management will take place in the following way: first a signalling of cleared alarm will be forwarded, which will be correlated with the previous signalling of fleeting alarm, and then a new signalling of active alarm of active alarm will be forwarded: in the Alarm History Browser window, a record of fleeting alarm will be displayed, followed by a record of active alarm. The fleeting condition of an alarm is not deleted at the forced realignment of the status of the alarms (Alarm Re-alignment command - pag.252).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

127

MARKING OF THE ALARMS (ACKNOWLEDGE)

The current alarms and those present in the alarm history can be marked: in the relevant window there is the indication that the user acknowledged the detection or/and the clearing of the alarm. For the alarms stored in the alarm history and listed in the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) or in the Old History Browser (Fig.42), it is possible to mark both the detection and the clearing of the alarm (pag.267). An alarm: Detected and marked is identified by the letter S in the Ack column of the Alarm History Browser or Old History Browser window. Detected/cleared and marked is identified by the letter C in the Ack column of the Alarm History Browser or Old History Browser window.

When the list of alarms is filtered or in the windows where the total number of marked alarms, the rules to define if an alarm is considered marked or not are the following. A marked alarm is: An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has marked the detection (presence of the letter S). An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has marked the clearing (presence of the letter C). An alarm detected and not yet cleared, for which the user has not marked the detection (absence of the letter S). An alarm detected and cleared, for which the user has not marked the clearing (absence of the letter C). In this case, even if the user has marked the detection of the alarm (presence of the letter S), it is considered as not marked because the user has not marked its clearing. For the current alarms, listed in the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41), there is not the above mentioned distinction, because it is possible to mark only the detected alarms (pag.275).

A not marked alarm is:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

128

MANAGEMENT OF NE LOG
With NE Log (Network Element Log) we mean a file where are recorded the signals of alarm/status (alarms) stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment. The Log read by an equipment (NE Log) is stored into the machine disk, available for the next reading by the user. The creation of a NE Log can be manually done by the user and/or automatically by the system. The manual creation of the NE Log of one or more equipment can be done by the user by means of the command Fault > SNMP-NE History Log (pag.287). By means of the commands, it is even possible to manage the NE Logs (delete, display the content) and delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment. The automatic creation of the NE Logs, if the relevant function is active, consists in the automatic creation of the NE Log for the SNMP equipment which pass from the unreachable status to the connected status. The function for the automatic creation of the NE Logs can be activated/deactivated by the system administrator during the installation of the NMS5UX system itself. The NE Logs can be displayed only through the Equipment History Log Management Main Window (Fig.43).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

129

PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT

The quality of the signal of the telecommunication equipment can be controlled via measures of Performance Monitoring (PM). A measure of PM consists in recording, during a set time period (observation period), the values of determinated control parameters (BER, alarm counting, etc). Threshold limits (that can be modified by the Superuser) have been assigned to these parameters. The exceeding of threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm, which is recorded and managed by the equipment and by the NMS5UX-B system as any other alarm. The number and the type of measures of PM and the relevant control parameters are specific for each type of NE. For their description, refer to the relevant equipment Manuals. The considered control parameters changes according to the type of equipment and of measures that this equipment supports. Generally, all the executed measures refer to Recommendations of ITU-T (for example G.826, G.821, etc.).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

130

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF THE PM MEASURES

It is possible to activate/deactivate the measures for a single equipment at a time or for more equipment (of the same type) at the same time. Furthermore, for each equipment, it is possible to activate/deactivate each single measure independently. The command to activate/deactivate singly the PM measures is present in the specific equipment window. The description of the equipment window and the procedure for the activation/deactivation of the PM measures are contained in the equipment Manual relevant to the type of considered NE. The command to activate/deactivate the measures for more equipment (of the same type) at the same time is View/Modify PM Status (pag.181).

When a PM measure is activated, the controller of the equipment begins the storing of the values of the control parameters. The results of the measures are subdivided in records. Each record contains the values recorded in a specific time interval (observation period). If, at the end of the observation period, the measure has not been deactivated, another observation period begins and so on until the measure is not stopped. When the system interrogates the equipment, this will send to it the records (daily and primary) that stored.

The equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B, group the results of the PM measures in observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and 24 hours (daily record). The observation periods are not synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated, but refer, for the primary records, to the quarter (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated). For example, if a measure starts at time 11.40, the first primary record will have, as observation period, 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the interval 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have, as observation period, 11.40...00.00. For each type of measure, the equipment keeps in memory the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last 2 daily records (corresponding to the last 2 days). The previous records are overwritten. If an equipment has PM measures running and it is restarted or switched off, then, when it restarts to it is switched on, the measures active before the switching off will be automatically restarted. The (daily and primary) records relevant to the period when the measure has been interrupted will be empty and, if reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily record, will overwrite the previous ones.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

131

ACQUISITION OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES

The results of the PM measures are acquired by the NMS5UX-B system by means of a polling process (PM polling) that is executed at regular interval that can vary from 1 to 4 h. The frequency for the request of the PM information by the system to the equipment is determined by the function Tx15 minutes. The value T, by default, is 8 (8x15min=2h), but it can be changed by the Superuser from 4 (4x15min=1h) to 16 (16x15min=5h). The process of PM polling is managed by a dedicated program which, besides executing the polling, has the function to determinate which equipment must be polled. The rules that an equipment must satisfy to be polled are the following: Equipment type. Not all the equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system supports the PM function. This equipment are not considered in the PM polling cycle. Equipment status. Only the equipment in connected status are polled. The equipment in disconnected or unreachable status are not polled. Status of the PM measures. Only the equipment that have at least one measure active in progress when the PM polling is executed.

After a PM polling, the polled equipment sends the daily and primary records relevant to the measures in progress. If the measure is deactivated, when the NMS5UX-B system executes the polling, the equipment sends all the (primary and daily) records calculated until that moment, except the last one. For example, if the measure is activated at 9.27 and deactivated at 18.42, the record relevant to the observation period 9.15...9.30 is transferred to the system in incomplete status, while the record relevant to the period 18.30...18.45 is not sent. If the measure is activated and deactivated more times during the same observation period, the record containing the results of the last executed measure will be sent to the NMS5UX-B system. For example, if the measure is activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it is re-activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the results relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be sent.

PM Polling and sending of the commands

The PM polling is totally transparent to the user: it is automatically executed without affecting the operations executed by the NMS5UX user. Being the only connection line between the system and the equipment, the sending of a command by the centre is prioritary with respect to the process of cyclic polling. For example, when a command is sent to an equipment A during the polling of an equipment B, the system waits for the end of the polling in progress. After this, it executes the command towards the equipment A and, then, it restarts the polling procedure from the point it has been suspended on the equipment B.

PM Polling and activation of the LCT-equipment connection

The activation of the local LCT-equipment connection does not affect the automatic acquisition of the results of the PM measures for the considered equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

132

DISPLAYING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES

The NMS5UX user can anytime display the results of the PM measures of a given equipment, subdivided in daily or primary records of the last 180 days. To display the daily and primary records, select the equipment in the map and choose the Performance Monitoring command (pag.173). It is also possible to display the results of the PM measures, previously saved to disk by means of the Old Performance Monitoring command (pag.177).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

133

SAVING OF THE RESULTS OF THE PM MEASURES TO DISK

It is possible to save the results of the PM measures stored in the database of the system. In detail, it is possible: To save to tape and/or disk all the results of the PM measures relevant to a month present in the database (pag.426). Then, it will be possible to recover the data (pag.427) and display them in the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.177). To save on file the results (present into the system database) relevant to a specific measurement for all the selected NEs of the same type (pag.179). During the saving operations, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via e-mail. The data are saved in ASCII format, that can be detected by the great part of the text processing programs and of the electronic sheets.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

134

MENU AND COMMANDS

The commands preceded by the wording: NMS5UX, point out the commands relevant to the management of the NMS5UX-B system. Legacy..., point out the commands relevant to the equipment managed with the Legacy protocol ONLY. Such commands are present into the menus only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed. SNMP..., point out the commands relevant to the equipment managed with the SNMP protocol only.

The commands with the label that does not point out the Legacy or SNMP wording, are relevant to all the equipment. Some commands are optional ones. Therefore, such commands can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX-B system. For each command, the type of access to the system (Read Only, Read-Write) and the user profile (Entry, Normal,...) necessary to use it are described. The Reading terms indicates that it is possible to verify the parameters, the Writing term that it is possible to set or modify them.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

135

MAP

The Map menu contains the following commands: Refresh (pag.137). It updates the UX Map Manager window. Map Properties (pag.138). It changes the dimension of the symbols of the map. Submap Properties (pag.139). It associates/remove the background from a container. Import/Export (pag.140). It compares/imports/exports the objects from a map to another. It saves the objects of a map into a file. Change Map (pag.145). It changes or deletes the map. Exit (pag.147). It closes the UX Map Manager window (NMS5UX-B graphic interface).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

136

REFRESH

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Refresh command update the UX Map Manager window.

To update the UX Map Manager window

1. Select the Map > Refresh command. The UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) is closed and then re-opened.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

137

MAP PROPERTIES

System access User profile

Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Map Properties command modifies the size of the symbols present in the View area (pag.34) of the UX Map Manager window (equipment, containers, etc.).

To modify the size of the symbols

1. Select the Map > Map Properties command. The Map Properties window opens. 2. Select the option relevant to the wished size (in pixel). 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the View area, the symbols of equipment, containers, etc. assume the new size.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

138

SUBMAP PROPERTIES

System access User profile

Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Submap Properties command associates a background to the container in such a way that, on its selection in the View area (pag.34), the background is displayed besides the symbols present in the container. It is possible to associate a different background to each container in the same map.

To associate/remove the background to a container

1. Select, in the Map area (pag.32), the container which you wish to associated the background to. 2. Select the Map > Submap Properties command. The Submap Properties window opens. 3. To add the background, type in the Background Pixmap box, the path/name of the file and press OK. The system acknowledges, as background, the files in GIF format. Press Browse to search the wished file in the disk. The background is displayed in the View area. 4. To remove the background, delete the file specified in the Background Pixmap box and press OK. The background is removed in the View area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

139

IMPORT/EXPORT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Import/Export command imports/exports/compares the objects from a map to another and saves the objects of a map into a file. With details it is possible: To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container (pag.140) To copy the objects, previously saved to a file, into a map/container (pag.142) To save the objects of a map/container to a file (pag.142) To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container (pag.143) To compare the objects, previously saved to a file, with the objects of a map/container (pag.144)

To copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command. The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21). 2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option. 3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option. 4. Set the source map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box. 5. Set the destination map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. The destination map must be different from the source map. c. If you wish that the objects of the source map or container are pasted into a container of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box. 6. Select, in the Mode area, the option: Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the source map/container replace the objects present in the destination map/container. Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the source map/ container to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.

7. Press Apply. The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each deleted and/or created object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

140

Fig.21 Import Export Map window

Menu bar (1)

Parameters to set to import/export the objects (2)

The result of the operation is displayed, according to the executed operation, in this area (3)

Fig.21 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window.

Option: Box: Source. File or map/container from which the objects are copied (source). Destination. File or map/container to which the objects are pasted (destination). Copy data. It copies the objects from a file or map/container to a different file or map/container. Compare data. It compares the objects of a file or map/container to a different map/container. From Map/Submap to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present in a map/container into a different map/container. From File to Map/Submap. It copies/compares the objects present into a file to a map/container. From Map/Submap to File. Copies the objects present in a map/container to a file. Clear and Copy All. It replaces the objects present into a file or map/container with those present into a different file or map/container. Copy Only Differences. It compares the objects present in two different files or maps/containers and copies into the destination map/container only the different objects.

(3)

Each record identifies an object involved in the operation. Depending on the type of executed operation, one or more fields will be present pointing out the type of executed operation, the object involved in the operation and the result of the operation itself.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

141

To copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command. The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21). 2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option. 3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From File to Map/Submap option. 4. Set the file from which you wish to copy the objects: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The File Selection window opens. b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box. The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. c. Press OK. The Source box displays the path/name of the source file. 5. Set the destination map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are pasted into a container of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box. 6. Select, in the Mode area, the option: Clear and Copy All, if you wish that the objects present in the file replace the objects present in the destination map/container. Copy Only Differences, if you wish to add only the different objects present in the file to the destination map/container. The identical objects will not be added.

7. Press Apply. The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each deleted and/or created object.

To save the objects of a map/container to a file

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command. The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21). 2. Select, in the Operation area, the Copy data option. 3. Select, in the Import/Export area, the From Map/Submap to File option. 4. Set the source map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box. 5. Set the file into which you wish to save the objects: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The File Selection window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

142

b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box. The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. c. Press OK. The Destination box displays the path/name of the destination file. 6. Press Apply. The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each saved object.

To compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container

1. Select the Map > Import/Export command. The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21). 2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option. A box opens. 3. Select the wished value in the box: View all data. Compares all the objects present in the source map/container with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the maps/containers. View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the map/container with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in both the maps/containers. View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the source map/container with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.

4. Select the From Map/Submap to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area. 5. Set the source map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. c. If you wish to copy only the objects of a container of the map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The source map/container is pointed out in the Source box. 6. Set the destination map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. The destination map must be different from the source map. c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a container of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box. 7. Press Apply. The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each compared object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

143

To compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/ container
1. Select the Map > Import/Export command. The Import Export Map window opens (Fig.21). 2. Select, in the Operation area, the Compare data option. A box opens. 3. Select the wished value in the box: View all data. Compares all the objects present in the file with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays all the objects present in the file and in the maps/ containers. View aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the objects present in the file and in the map/ container. View not aligned data. Compares the objects present in the file with those present in the destination map/container. The Messages area displays only the different objects.

4. Select the From File to Map/Submap option in the Import/Export area. 5. Set the file containing the objects to compare: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Source box. The File Selection window opens. b. Type the name of the file in the Selection box. The system proposes the files present in the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. c. Press OK. The Source box displays the path/name of the source file. 6. Set the destination map/container: a. Press the Browse push-button next to the Destination box. The Select Submap window opens. b. Select the wished map in the Map area. The destination map must be different from the source map. c. If you wish that the objects stored in the file are compared with the objects present into a container of the destination map, select the container in the Submap area. d. Press OK. The destination map/container is pointed out in the Destination box. 7. Press Apply. The Messages area displays the detail regarding the executed operation. A record is displayed for each compared object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

144

CHANGE MAP

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged *, Superuser

* The Privileged user cannot delete the map. The Change Map command changes or deletes the map. With details it is possible: To close the open map and opening another one (pag.145) To delete a map (pag.146).

To close the open map and opening another one

1. Select the Map > Change Map command. The Change Map window opens (Fig.22). 2. Select a map from the list. If the map has access: Read-Write, press the push-button: Open Map READ/WRITE to open the map in Read-Write access. Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access.

Read, press Open Map READ/ONLY to open the map in Read Only access. The Open Map READ/WRITE push-button is not available.

The current map is closed and the new map is opened. One's user and operating level are kept also in the new map.

Fig.22 Change Map window

List of maps (1)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

145

Fig.22 notes (1) For each map, it is displayed in the column: Map name. Name of the map. Permission. Type of available access: Read/Write; it is possible to open the map with Read-Write or Read Only access. Read; it is possible to open the map only with Read Only access (the Read-Write access is already occupied).

Comment. Additional notes. The wording (Current Map) indicates the currently open map.

To delete a map
Operation available only to Superuser. It is not possible to delete a map with Read access or the current map. 1. Select the Map > Change Map command. The Change Map window opens (Fig.22). 2. Select a map with Read-Write access from the list. 3. Press Delete Map and confirm. The map is removed from the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

146

EXIT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Exit command closes the UX Map Manager window and then the NMS5UX-B graphic interface.

To close the UX Map Manager window

1. Select the Map > Exit command or press A confirmation window opens. 2. Press Ok. The closure of the UX Map Manager window causes the automatic closure of all the possible open window of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History Browser, Equipment Information, etc.). .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

147

EDIT

The Edit menu contains the following commands: Add (pag.149). It creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. Delete (pag.156). It deletes the objects from the map. Modify/View (pag.157). It displays and/or modifies the characteristics of the objects. Information (pag.160). It displays the information of the symbol. Graphical Symbol Properties (pag.162). It displays the graphic parameters of the symbol. Find (pag.163). It searches an object of the map. Arrange Symbols (pag.164). It aligns vertically/horizontally the symbols. Generate Info for WEB (pag.165). It checks the database information necessary to the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers (pag.166). It sets the size of the containers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.

These commands are used to represent graphically the equipment network in the maps and to provide to NMS5UX-B the parameters to manage and control each single object. Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation (pag.78) where the modalities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

148

ADD

System access User profile

Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Add command creates objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. With details it is possible: To create Container objects (pag.149) To create NE objects managed with SNMP protocol (pag.150) To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol (pag.152) To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol (pag.152) To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol (pag.153) To create Generic Symbol objects (pag.154) To create Link objects (pag.154) To create Label objects (pag.155) To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file (pag.155)

Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects (pag.82). For more information about: Container object go to pag.79. NE object go to pag.22 and pag.79 Generic Symbol object go to pag.81 Link object go to pag.81 Label object go to pag.81 Add Network From File functionality go to pag.97.

To create Container objects

It is possible to create all the wished Container objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the container. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Container command or press The Add Container window opens. 3. Type the name of the container (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 48 characters) in the Label box. The name will be displayed under the symbol of the container. 4. In the Type area, select the type of container you wish to create among: Subnetwork, Station, Substation. 5. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The container is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

149

To create NE object managed with SNMP protocol

The maximum number of SNMP equipment objects that can be created depends on one's codeword. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the NE. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed command or press The Add Equipment window opens. 3. Type, in the IP Address box, the IP address of the NE. If you wish to create a: ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node object, type the IP address of the main equipment of the node. PMP object, type the IP address of the Proxy interface used for the connection to the master station. .

The IP address set in this field must CORRESPOND to the IP address of the NE, locally defined. If the address do not coincide, it will not possible to send commands to the NE itself. After the creation of the NE, the IP address cannot be modified. It is not possible to assign the same IP address to two different NEs, even of different type. If a NE object with the IP address is already present in the map, the values assigned to the same object present in the other map will be automatically displayed in all the other fields of the Add Equipment window. 4. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the NE (alphanumeric string of max. 32 characters) The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE. It is possible to assign, as logical address, the same value to the IP Address, while it is not possible to assign the same logical address to two NEs. 5. ONLY if the new NE is inserted into a OSI network, activate the Osi Address box and set the NSAP (Gosip) address of the equipment, as pointed out to pag.151. For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Osi Address box is activated, it is NECESSARY to set the NSAP address of the main equipment of the node. During the first operation of Line Test or Connect of the system towards the main equipment of the node, the NSAP address of the other equipment belonging to the node will be automatically detected. 6. In the Type area, select the type of equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2). After the creation of the NE, the type cannot be modified. 7. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate the Proxy Address box. The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, with which the equipment is acknowledged by Proxy Agent. In order to modify the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment. For the ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node objects, if the Proxy Address box is activated, the addresses by which the equipment belonging to the node are acknowledged by the Proxy Agent are configured. 8. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 9. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area. If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status of the existing object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

150

NSAP (Gosip) Address

The NSAP Address, according to the GOSIP V2, is composed by two parts: IDP (Initial Domain Part) and DSP (Domain Specific Part). Each part is composed by parameters. The values of these parameters, represented by one or more bytes, can be changed. Each byte is represented by means of two characters that are the exadecimal value of the two byte nibbles as pointed out into Tab.11. Tab.11 NSAP (Gosip) address Part IDP Parameter AFI (Authority and Format Identifier) IDI (Initial Domain Identifier) Ver (Version) Auth (Authority) Reserved DSP Domain (Routing Domain) Area System ID (Network Element Identification) Sel (Selector) Byte number 1 2 1 3 2 2 2 6 1 Changeable by the user Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No

To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth, Domain, Area parameters (default part of the NSAP Address)
1. Press Setup Default present into the Add Equipment window. The system opens the Gosip Default Option window. 2. To change the AFI, IDI, VER, Auth parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s. 3. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add a value to the list: a. Press Add. The Domain Settings window opens. b. Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination. c. Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain and press OK. To remove a value form the list: a. Select the value to be removed and press Remove. 4. To change the Area parameter, press the arrow on the side of the box and select the desired value into the list. To add or remove a value from the list, execute the procedures pointed out for the Domain parameter. 5. Press OK.

To change the System ID parameter

1. Press Settings present into the Add Equipment window. The system opens the Settings window. 2. Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose the System ID and press OK. Into the text field on the side of the Settings push-button, the system points out the value of the set System ID.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

151

To create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol

It is possible to create all the wished SNMP virtual NE objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the virtual NE. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > SNMP Managed (Virtual) command. The Add Equipment window opens. 3. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32 characters). The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE. It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs. 4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2). After the creation of the virtual NE, the value cannot be modified. 5. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area.

To create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol

The maximum number of Legacy NE objects that can be created depends on one's codeword. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the NE. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed command. The subject command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed. The Add Equipment window opens. 3. Into the Physical Address box, type the physical address comprised between 2 and 60000 (the value 1 is not allowed), to be assigned to the new NE. After the creation of the NE, the value can not be changed. Press Auto, to set, as value of the parameter, the first available address. It is possible also to set a value into the Physical Address field and then to press Auto; in this case, the system will automatically display the first available address that follows the set value. The physical address set into this field has to CORRESPOND to the NE address, locally defined. If the addresses are not the same one, it will not be possible to forward any command to the NE itself. It is not possible to assign the same address to two different NEs also if they are two different type ones. If into an map there is already a NE object with the same physical Address set into the field, the system will automatically point out, into all the other fields of the Add Equipment window, the values assigned to the same object present into the other map. 4. Into the Logical Address text field, type the logic address (alphanumeric string with maximum 32 characters) to be assigned to the new NE. The logic address will be displayed under the symbol of the equipment. It is possible to assign, as logic address, the same value assigned to the Physical Address parameter, while it is not possible to assign the same logic address to two NEs. 5. Into the CS Ip Address box, type the IP address of the CommServer-S or of the IPBOX to which it is (or it will be) connected the Legacy equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

152

The setting of this parameter is not mandatory but, if it is not set or it is not correctly set, it will not be possible to forward any command (Connect, Line Test, etc.) toward the NE under examination. 6. Into the CS Port box, type the number of the port of the CommServer-S or of the IPBOX to which it is (or it will be) connected the NE. 7. In the Type area, select the type of equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2). After the creation of the NE, the value cannot be modified. 8. ONLY if the equipment is managed by Proxy Agent and the Proxy Agent application is installed, activate the Proxy Address box. The box aside displays the default address, configured by the system administrator, with which the equipment is acknowledged by Proxy Agent. In order to modify the address, type in the box the new address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the equipment. The Proxy Agent manages only G series Radio equipment with Legacy interface. 9. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 10.Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area. If the created NE symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status of the existing object.

To create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol

It is possible to create all the wished Legacy virtual NE objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the virtual NE. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Network Element > Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) command. The subject command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed. The Add Equipment window opens. 3. Type, in the Logical Address box, the logical address of the virtual NE (alphanumeric string of max 32 characters) The logical address will be displayed under the symbol of the NE. It is not possible to assign the same logical address to two virtual NEs. 4. In the Type area, select the type of virtual equipment you wish to create (see Tab.2). After the creation of the virtual NE, the value cannot be modified. 5. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The virtual NE is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

153

To create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols)

It is possible to create all the wished Generic Symbol objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the Generic Symbol. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Generic Symbol command. The Add Generic Object window opens. 3. Type, in the Label box, the name of the generic symbol (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters). The name will be displayed under the generic symbol. It is possible to assign the same name to more graphic symbols even of different type. 4. In the Group area, select the group where the generic symbol is contained. 5. In the Object area, select the generic symbol you wish to create. 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The Generic Symbol is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area.

To create Link objects (connection)

It is possible to create all the wished Link objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the Link. 2. Select the two objects among which you wish to create the connection. The operation is not executed if selected: A container and a NE or Generic Symbol Two containers A single object More than two objects

3. Select the Edit > Add > Link command. The Add Generic Object window opens. 4. Type, in the Label box, the name of the connection (alphanumeric string of max 40 characters). It is possible to assign the same name to more Links even of different type. 5. Activate the Show Label box if you wish that the name of the connection is displayed in the map. The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/Hide Link Label (see pag.170/Tab.12). 6. In the Connection type area, select the type of connection. 7. In the Comment area, type additional information (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 8. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The connection line is displayed between the selected objects. If one of the two object is moved, the line automatically adapted according to the move.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

154

To create Label objects (wordings)

It is possible to create all the wished Label objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the wording. 2. Select the Edit > Add > Label command. The Add Label window opens. 3. Type, in the Label box, an alphanumeric string of max 50 characters. It is possible to insert the wording more times. 4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The object is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area.

To create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file

Before executing the operation, it is necessary: To create the file (csv format) you wish to use for the automatic creation of the objects, as pointed out at pag.97. To copy the file (.csv) to the server where the NMS5UX-B system is installed (default directory opt/nms5ux/data/files).

1. Select the Edit > Add > Network From File command. The Add Network From File window opens. 2. Select the wished file (.csv format) in the Files list. The list points out the files present in the predefined directory (pointed out in the Selection box). Modify the path, if necessary. 3. Press Ok. The Add From File Report - <path/name of the selected file> window is displayed where, for every created object, is pointed out in the column: Category and Type. Object type. Name. Logical address (NE) or name of the object. Message. Self-explanatory message about the result of the object creation. Was successful, the objects described in the file will be present in the UX Map Manager. Was failed, the message SYNTAX ERROR - operation ABORTED is displayed in the Add From File Report... window.

If the total operation of object creation:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

155

DELETE

System access User profile

Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Delete command deletes an object from the map.

To delete an object from the map

1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the object you wish to delete. Object: Container. It can be deleted only if it does not contain objects. Network Element. If present only in one map, can be deleted only if it is in disconnected status (brown symbol). If the object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it is in connected status, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if in disconnected status. The virtual NE and NE WEB Generic type can be always deleted. If the object is managed even by the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager application, first it must be deleted from the Ring Manager and/or VLAN Manager Map window and then it can be deleted from the map. Generic Symbol, Link or Label. It can be always deleted. A connection is automatically deleted even when one of the two symbols, which is connected to, is removed. 2. Select the Edit > Delete command or press the right mouse button, select Delete (command not available if a Link object is selected) and confirm. The object is removed from the map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

156

MODIFY/VIEW

System access User profile

Reading Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only Read-Write Entry, Normal Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Modify/View command displays/modifies the characteristics of the objects. With details it is possible: To verify/modify the parameters of a Container objects (pag.157) To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element objects (pag.157) To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol objects (pag.158) To verify/modify the parameters of a Link objects (pag.159) To verify/modify the parameters of a Label objects (pag.159)

The values of some parameters cannot be changed. If it was necessary to modify these parameters, it is suggested to delete the object and then re-create it assigning the new values to the parameters. If the same object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values of such an object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant to the same object into the other map.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Container object

1. Select the wished Container object. 2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Container command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The Container Properties window opens. Box/area: Label. Container name. Type. Container type. Comment. Additional information

It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.149. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the UX Map Manager window, the container assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object

1. Select the wished NE or Virtual NE object. 2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Network Element command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The Equipment Properties window opens. If a following objects is selected: NE managed with SNMP protocol is displayed in the box/area: IP Address, the IP address of the NE Logical Address, the logical address of the NE

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

157

Osi Address, the NSAP (Gosip) address of NE Type, the type of NE Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the NE. Comment, additional information

It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Type, Proxy Address, Comment parameters while the Osi Address parameter can be changed ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown icon). The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.150. The change of the Logical Address parameter involves the change of the name even for the copies of the same NE present in the additional applications of the supervision system (for example, Ring Manager, VLAN Manager, RAN, etc.). It is not possible to change the Ip Address parameter. Virtual NE managed with SNMP protocol is displayed in the box/area: Logical Address, the logical address of the NE Type, the type of NE Comment, additional information

It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.152. NE managed with Legacy protocol is displayed in the box/area: Physical Address, the physical address of the NE Logical Address, the logical address of the NE CS Ip Address, the IP address of the CS or IPBOX to which it is connected the NE CS Port, the number of the port of the CS or IPBOX to which it is connected the NE Type, the type of NE Proxy Address, address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent sends the traps coming from the NE. Comment, additional information

It is always possible to change the Logical Address, Comment and Proxy Address parameter, while the CS Ip Address, CS Port parameters can be changed ONLY if the NE is in disconnected status (brown icon). The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.152. It is not possible to change the Physical Address, Type parameters. Virtual NE managed with Legacy protocol is displayed in the box/area: Logical Address, the logical address of the NE Type, the type of NE Comment, additional information

It is possible to change the Logical Address and Comment parameter. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.153. It is not possible to change the Type parameter. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window).

To verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object

1. Select the wished Generic Symbol object. 2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Generic Symbol command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The Generic Symbol Properties window opens. Box/area: Label. Generic symbol name. Group. Group containing the symbol. Object. Symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

158

It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.154. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the UX Map Manager window, the generic symbol assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Link object

1. Select the wished Link object. 2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Link command. The Link Properties window opens. Box/area: Label and Show Label. Name of the connection and if this is displayed in the map are respectively indicated. The display of the names of the Link objects is influenced even by the command View > Show/ Hide Link Label (see pag.170/Tab.12). Connection type. Connection type. Comment. Additional information

It is possible to change the all parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.154. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the UX Map Manager window, the connection assumes the new characteristics.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Label object

1. Select the wished Label object. 2. Select the Edit > Modify/View > Label command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The Label Properties window opens. The wording is displayed in the Label box. 3. To modify the parameter, type the new value (alphanumeric string of max 50 characters) in the Label box. 4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The label is modified in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

159

INFORMATION

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Information command displays the information of the symbol. With details it is possible: To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol (pag.160). To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol (pag.161).

The command is not available for the Generic Symbol, Label or Link objects.

To verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol
1. Select the wished object. 2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information. The Information window opens, where the symbol characteristics is displayed (Fig.73). Fig.23 Information window
Marking status of the " alarms", of the signalling of "LCT presence" and "Incorrect Upload" (1)

Symbol informative note (2)

Fig.23 notes (1) If the selection is an object: Network Element. Box: Ack Alarm - active ( ). In the selected NE, there is at least a not marked alarm (current and/or in the alarm history). To mark the alarm, open the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) and/or the Current Alarm Browser window (Fig.41). Ack Alarm - inactive. All the possible alarms are marked. Ack LCT - active ( ). From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE has been opened, the LCT connected to the NE at least once in Configuration modality (LCT presence signalling). To mark the signalling, open the equipment window relevant to the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

160

Ack LCT - inactive. From the last time the equipment window of the selected NE has been opened LCT has not connected in Configuration modality. Incorrect Upload - active ( problems. ). The last Configuration Upload is failed or ended with

The signalling is automatically removed at the first correctly executed operation of Configuration Upload. Incorrect Upload - active. The last Configuration Upload ended successfully. For the virtual NE the Acknowledge Information area is not meaningful. Network Element of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. Box: Ack Alarm - active ( marked alarm. Ack LCT - active ( presence. ). At least a NE of the selected node, has at least one not

Ack Alarm - inactive,. No NE of the selected node, has not marked alarms. ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT

Ack LCT - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of LCT presence. Incorrect Upload - active ( of Incorrect Upload. ). At least one NE of the selected node, has the signalling

Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE of the selected node, has the signalling of Incorrect Upload. Ack Alarm - active ( ). At least a NE, present in the selected container, has at least one not marked alarm. Ack Alarm - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has not marked alarms. Ack LCT - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of LCT presence. Ack LCT - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of LCT presence. Incorrect Upload - active ( ). At least one NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of Incorrect Upload. Incorrect Upload - inactive. No NE, present in the selected container, has the signalling of Incorrect Upload.

Container. Box:

(2)

If selected, an NE object, the Note area reports the possible informative notes inserted by the user.

To add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol

1. Select the wished NE object. 2. Select the Edit > Information command or press the right mouse button and select Information. The Information window opens (Fig.23). 3. In the Note area, add/modify/delete the text (max 50 characters). 4. Press OK. If some notes are present, the symbol , is added next to the equipment symbol.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

161

GRAPHICAL SYMBOL PROPERTIES

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Graphical Symbol Properties command displays the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol. The command is not available for the Link symbol.

To verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol

1. Select the wished symbol. 2. Select the Edit > Graphical Symbol Properties command. The Graphical Symbol Properties window opens. Box: Selection Name. Graphic name of the symbol Object Properties. Graphic parameters of the symbol

The parameters cannot be modified.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

162

FIND

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Find command searches a symbol in the map using, as criterion, an alphanumeric string that constitutes one part or the whole name, the IP address or notes.

To search a symbol in the map

1. Select the Edit > Find command. The Find window opens. 2. Type in the Text to find: box the alphanumeric wording relevant to the NE you wish to find. It is possible to use the asterisk wild-card character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter: p, the equipment with name, address or notes equal to p will be searched. p*, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p will be searched. p*o, the NEs with name, address or notes starting with p and ending with o will be searched. Symbol Name. Name of the symbol. IP Address. IP address of the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects). Note. Additional notes for the symbol (parameter valid only for NE objects).

3. Select, in the Search for area, the field where the alphanumeric string must be searched:

4. Press Find. In the Search result area, there are as many rows as the objects, present in the map, that satisfy search conditions. For each object, the name and the position (map/container/) of the relevant symbol. 5. In order to bring the UX Map Manager window with a a highlighted symbol in foreground, select the relevant row in the Search result area and, then, press Open or double click on the row itself.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

163

ARRANGE SYMBOLS

System access User profile

Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Arrange Symbols command aligns the symbols.

To align the symbols

1. Select the symbols you wish to align. The first selected symbol is taken as reference for the alignment. 2. To align: Vertically the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Vertical command or press . Horizontally the symbols, select the Edit > Arrange Symbols > Horizontal command or press .

According to the selected command/push-button, the symbols are aligned vertically or horizontally.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

164

GENERATE INFO FOR WEB

System access User profile

Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Generate Info for WEB command checks the database information necessary to the RAN. This operation re-alignment the information between the NMS5UX-B and RAN application. For more information about the RAN application refer to the specific documentation.

To check the database information necessary to the RAN

1. Select the Edit > Generate Info for WEB command. The information present in the database is generated. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

165

SET CURRENT WINDOW GEOMETRY FOR ALL CONTAINERS

System access User profile

Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command allows to set the size of the containers windows such as the size of the window where the command is selected.

To set the size of the containers windows

1. To resize the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1) at will. 2. Select the Edit > Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers command. When a container is selected, the UX Map Manager window will keep the size set at step 1.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

166

VIEW

The View menu contains the following commands: Show/Hide Map Tree (pag.168). It hides/displays the Map area. Show/Hide Platform Status (pag.169). It hides/displays the platform status bar. Show/Hide Link Label (pag.170). It hides/displays the labels of the Link objects.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

167

SHOW/HIDE MAP TREE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Map Tree command hides/displays the Map area (pag.32).

To display/hide the Map area

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press The Map area is hidden. 2. Select the View > Show/Hide Map Tree command or press again to display the area again. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

168

SHOW/HIDE PLATFORM STATUS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Show/Hide Platform Status command hides/displays the platform status bar (pag.45)

To display/hide the platform status bar

1. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press The platform status bar is displayed. 2. Select the View > Show/Hide Platform Status command or press again to hide the bar again. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

169

SHOW/HIDE LINK LABEL

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The command Show/Hide Link Label hides/shows the names of the Link objects in the View area of the UX Map Manager window. The display status of the names of the Link objects is pointed out by the presence of the wording [Link Label Off] in the status bar. In detail, if the wording is: Present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE NOT displayed in the View area. Not present, points out that the names of the Link objects ARE displayed in the View area.

The display of the name of a Link object is influenced even by the setting of the relevant parameter Show Label. This parameter is set during the creation of the object (see pag.154). Then, it can be changed in any moment (see pag.159). Tab.12 points out the interaction between the setting of the parameter Show Label and the display status of the names of the Link objects in a map for an hypothetical object Link A. Tab.12 Display of the name of the Link objects in the map Object Link A parameter Show Label Active Inactive Active Inactive Display of the names of the Link objects in the map * Active Active Inactive * Inactive * Display of the name of the object Link A in the map Name displayed Name not displayed Name not displayed Name not displayed

* The wording [Link Label Off] is present in the status bar of the UX Map Manager window.

To show/hide the names of the Link objects

1. Select the command View > Show/Hide Link Label or press .

At each selection of the command/button, the wording [Link Label Off] appears and disappears from the status bar of the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

170

PERFORMANCE

The Performance menu contains the following commands: Performance Monitoring Read (pag.172). It updates the results of the PM measures of an equipment. Performance Monitoring (pag.173). It displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment. Old Performance Monitoring (pag.177). It displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment, saved and restored from tape or disk. Export Performance Monitoring (pag.179). It saves on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type. View/Modify P.M. Status (pag.181). It displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

171

PERFORMANCE MONITORING READ

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Read command updates the results of the PM measures of an equipment. The updating request is sent to the controller of the equipment.

To update the results of the PM measures of an equipment

Operation meaningful only for the NE in connected status. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation is executed for all the equipment of the node. 1. Select the desired NE. 2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring Read command. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

172

PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment. With details it is possible: To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.173). To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters (pag.176).

The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/ pag.49). For more information about the PM measures go to pag.130.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters
1. Select the NE. If the type of selected NE does not support the PM measures, a warning message will be displayed. 2. Select the Performance > Performance Monitoring command or press . The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to verify the results of the PM measures is required. In the boxes: Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is set). Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed.

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values. It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days. Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Performance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed. 4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail: Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step 7). Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter is selected.

5. Press OK. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens. 6. Select the TPC menu. All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points (points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available for the selected equipment are selected. The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

173

Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP. 7. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures. All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters Fig.24 shows an example. When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side. When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs. The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not available (wording of grey colour). In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and, then, select the new parameters. Fig.24 Graphic Performance Monitoring window
Caracteristic of the equipment of the selected time interval and of the graph (1) Menu bar (2) Each column of the graph represents a daily record (3) Characteristics of the records (4)

Characteristics of the selected control parameters and relevant to the record where the mouse is placed (5)

Date of the record where the mouse is placed and which the characteristics of the control parameters below are refered to

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

174

Fig.24 notes (1) In order: (2) Menu: File > Exit. It closes the window. Option > Deselect all TPC. It deselects all the selected control parameters. Option > Thresholds. It displays in the graph a broken line that represents the threshold value of each selected control parameter. Each broken line will have the colour that represents the parameter in the graph. Option > Type image. It modifies the type of graph. In detail: Histogram, graph with histograms. Chart, line graph. Chart Comp., compressed line graph. Type and logical address of the equipment. Start date and End date. Type of displayed record (Daily, Primary). Type of graph (Histogram, Chart, Chart Comp).

TPC. List of the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and of the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected type of equipment. Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

(3)

The window displays the records contained in the set time period. They are displayed from the oldest to the newest one. Use the scrolling bar to move among the records. Each control parameter, within the record column, is identified by a colour. The colour legend is displayed in the Legend and measure.... area

(4)

Each record is identified by the relevant date (day/month/year). The result of all the active measures is pointed out by a coloured wording under the date of the record. In detail: Not available. The record is not available, as in the observation period under examination no measure was active. No error (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measures are not errored. Above Thrs (red). The record has been completely acquired and at least a control parameter has exceeded the relevant threshold value. Besides the record, in this case, the NE sends an alarm of exceeding of the daily record that is stored in the alarm history. Below Thrs (yellow). The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Lost (black). The record is not arrived to the main controller of the NE for example because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before sending the record itself or due to generic hardware/software troubles. Incompl (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The record of measure start is always in this status. The daily record assumes this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always incomplete as the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Restarted (black). The record was lost due to a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and verifies that, for a given measure point, the measure is active, all the records of that measure point will result in this status.

(5)

For each control parameter, the following columns indicate: Value, value of the control parameter. The colour of the number that represents the value indicates the exceeding of the threshold: Red. Value greater than the set threshold value.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

175

Yellow. Value lower than the set threshold value. White. Threshold value not set (threshold inactive).

The dash (-) indicates that the value is not available. Col., colour that represents the parameter within the graph State Rec., status of the record relevant to the control parameter. For the description of the different statuses, see note (4). Threshold, threshold level over which the relevant alarm is activated. The wording Disable indicates that the threshold is inactive. Description, name of the measure point (TP) and relevant to the control parameter. The control parameters changes according to the TP. Their description is reported in the equipment user Manual relevant to the type of NE which the measure is referred to. The window displays contemporarily all the records relevant to the period set at the beginning of the procedure. RLT (dbm), power threshold level. The field is displayed and it is meaningful only for power control parameters (e.g. RLTS, RLTM, etc.).

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters
1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (see pag.173). 2. Double click on the record relevant to the day whose primary records you wish to display. Another Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens. In this window, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the selected day. The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.24, the only difference is that instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes). 3. To return to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

176

OLD PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Old Performance Monitoring command displays the results of the PM measures of an equipment, saved and restored from tape or disk. With details it is possible: To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.177). To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table (pag.178).

The command is not available for the virtual NE objects and the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type. In the Old Performance Monitoring table are stored the results of the PM measures saved (see pag.426) and restored (see pag.427) from tape or disk.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table
1. Select the NE. If the type of selected NE does not support PM measures, a warning message will be displayed. 2. Select the Performance > Old Performance Monitoring command. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the time period, for which you wish to verify the results of the PM measures, is required. In the boxes: Date Reference, the date (day/month/year) of period start (by default the current day is selected) is displayed. Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the period duration is displayed (by default 30 days is set).

3. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values. It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days. Remember that it is possible to display, at most, the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current day). 4. Set the Auto Select box. In detail: Activate the box if you wish, on the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also the other control parameters, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step 7) are automatically selected. Deactivate the box if you wish that, on the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter is selected.

5. Press OK. The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens. If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file saved before the list of the wished measures (see pag.427). They will remain available in the Old Performance Monitoring table and in the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window, until a different list of measures is not restored. 6. Select the TPC menu. All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - wordings in yellow) and the measure points (TP - Termination Point - wordings in orange) available for the selected equipment are listed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

177

The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point. Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP. 7. Select the control parameters for which you wish the display the results of the PM measures. In the same graph not all the control parameters of a TP can be displayed. They have been subdivided according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc. The Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window displays the results of the selected control parameters. The items of the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window and their description are the same shown in Fig.24. When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange it becomes red. The selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left. When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same measure unit present in the same TP or in any of the other TP. The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter will not be available (wording in grey colour). In order to display the results of parameter with measure unit different from the currently selected one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and, then, select the new parameters.

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table
1. Open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (see pag.177). 2. Double click on the record relevant to the day for which you wish to display the primary records. An addition Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window opens. In this, it is possible to verify the results of the PM measures of all the primary records of the selected day. The items of the window and their description are the same shown in Fig.24, the only difference is that, instead of the daily records, each column will represent a primary record (15 minutes). 3. In order to come back to the displaying of the primary records, double click on any point of the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

178

EXPORT PERFORMANCE MONITORING

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Export Performance Monitoring command saves on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type. Then, during the operation, it is possible to forward the file to a user, via e-mail. The command is available for the virtual NE objects. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node equipment.

To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type
1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type. It is possible to select a maximum of 100 equipment. 2. Select the Performance > Export Performance Monitoring command. The Export window opens. Under the window title, it is pointed out the NE type. 3. Position the pointer into the TPclass area and press the right mouse button. The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE. 4. Choose one measurement type from the list. Into the Termination Point (TP) area, the system points out the relevant measuring points. 5. Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved on file. It is possible to select more records. 6. Select the option: Daily, to save on file the daily records relevant to the selected measuring point/s. Primary, to save on file the primary records.

7. Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for the starting (Start Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved. The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant to the last 180 days (6 months). 8. Type the directory and the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name box. The system provides a default directory and name composed by specific information, such as, for instance, the date, the time, the NE logic address. The format of the provided default name can be changed by the Superuser. 9. ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the name of the user into the Remote Address box. If the user positions the pointer on the text field and press the right mouse button, the system displays a pre-defined list of users. Select the desired user. In this case, the file will be as saved into the pre-defined directory as forwarded to the set user. The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the Superuser. To be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail server. 10.Press OK.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

179

The system displays the Preview window that points out the resuming of the executed setting operations. Then, in the lower part of the window, the system points out the total number of records (Total Record Number box) and the number of records that contain errored data (Records with counters box). The system can display an error message that points out that the number of record present into the set time is too high. This situation is caused because the system stores into each file a maximum limit N of records. The limit N can be changed by the Superuser. The data are saved in ASCII format that can be recognized by a great number of text processing programs and databases.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

180

VIEW/MODIFY P.M. STATUS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The View/Modify P.M. Status command displays the status and allows activating/deactivating the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type contemporarily. With details it is possible: To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more equipment of the same type (pag.181) To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type (pag.183) To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type (pag.183)

The command ais not available for the virtual NE objects. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the operations will be executed on all the node equipment.

To verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same type
1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type. 2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command. The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the operating status of the measure points is displayed (Fig.25). If more NE objects of different type are selected, the PM measures relevant to the first type of selected NE are displayed. For example, if selected in order, one NE of SDH type, one NE of FAM type and one NE of PDH type, on the selection of the command, the PM measures that characterize the SDH equipment are displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

181

Fig.25 View/Modify P.M. Status window

In this area, it is possible to filter the measure points displayed in the area are the right side (Termination point area) (1) This area (Termination Point) points out the measure points (2) Menu bar (3) This area points out the detail of the executed operations and their result

Fig.25 notes (1) Area: Equipment. Equipment selected in the map. Select the option: All Equipment, to display the measure points relevant to all the equipment in the Termination Point area. Selected Equipment, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected equipment in the Termination Point area. The option is available only after having selected at least one equipment. Termination Point Class. Types of measures relevant to the type of equipment selected in the map. Select the option: All TP Class, to display the measure points relevant to all the types of measure in the Termination Point area. Selected TP Class, to display the measure points relevant only to the selected types of measure in the Termination Point area. The option is available only after having selected at least one type of measure. Termination Point Instances. Status of the measure point. Activate the box: Running Counters to display the active measure point in the Termination Point area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

182

 (2)

Not Running Counters to display the inactive measure point in the Termination Point area.

For each measure point, the following column points out: Logical Addr., the logical address of the equipment. TP Class, the name of the type of measure. TP Instance, name of the measure point. Status, status of the measure: active (wording: Running), inactive (wording Not running).

(3)

Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Start. It activates the PM measures. Action > Stop. It deactivates the PM measures. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

To activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type
1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type. 2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command. The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.25). 3. To activate: All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action > Start > All command. The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the Action > Start > Filtered command. The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Start > Selected command.

In the Message area, the result of the operation is displayed.

To deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type
1. Select the real NE(s) of the same type. 2. Select the Performance > View/Modify P.M. Status command. The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens (Fig.25). 3. To deactivate: All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action > Stop > All command. The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Stop > Filtered command. The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Stop > Selected command.

In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

183

CONFIGURATION

The Configuration menu contains the following commands: Equipment Info (pag.185). It displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment. Radio Certificate (pag.187). It records the characteristics of the radio equipment. Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory (pag.188). It displays the hardware version and software version of the Legacy equipment present into the open map. Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory (pag.191). It displays the units list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map. SNMP-Software Inventory (pag.194). It displays the software version and the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map. SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration (pag.200). It displays the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map. SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces (pag.204). It displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports of an equipment. SNMP-NE Routing Table (pag.205). It displays the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address of an equipment. SNMP-Hw Inventory (pag.209). It displays the hardware version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map. SNMP-NE Backup/Restore (pag.213). It displays the backup files of the SNMP equipment present into the open map. Legacy-Alarm Average (pag.219). It displays the mean of the alarms per seconds sent by the Legacy equipment and received by the NMS5UX-B system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

184

EQUIPMENT INFO

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Equipment Info command displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment.

To verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment

1. Select the wished NE object. 2. Select the Configuration > Equipment Info command or press the right mouse button and select Equipment Information. The Equipment Information window opens, where the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment are displayed (Fig.26). Selecting more NE symbols and choosing this command, more Equipment Information window open for each selected NE. Fig.26 Equipment Information window

Characteristics and funtional status of the NE (1)

Press this push-button to update the data Press this push-button to close the window

Fig.26 notes (1) Option: Physical Address. Physical address of the NE. Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. Type. Type of NE. Equipment status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system. Alarm status. Functional status (alarms) of the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

185

The severity level of the alarm present on the NE is displayed. If more alarms of different severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm will be displayed. LCT Presence. Status of the connection between the local program and the NE. Value: Absent. The LCT user is not connected to the equipment. LCT Config. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality. LCT Monitor. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality. Total. Total number of alarms. Ack. Number of marked alarms. Not Ack. Number of not marked alarms.

Alarm history. Number of alarms relevant to the NE, stored in the alarm history. Box:

Current alarms. Number of alarms currently present on NE.

If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the displayed information is referred in part to the node (Physical Address, Logical Address and Type) and in part to the sum of the information of the equipment belonging to the node (Equipment status, Alarm status, LCT Presence, Alarm history and Current alarms).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

186

RADIO CERTIFICATE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced *, Privileged *, Superuser *

* The recording data, if modified, can be saved only the Superuser and by the users with privileged and advanced profiles. The Radio Certificate command records the characteristics of the radio equipment. With details is possible: To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio (pag.187) To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio (pag.187)

To verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio

1. Select the radio equipment you wish to record. 2. Select the Configuration > Radio Certificate command. The EqpInfoPage window opens where all the characteristics of the radio (conformity certificate) are displayed. 3. To enter a value or modify the existing one, select the relevant box and type the new value. 4. Press Save. The certificate is saved in the database of the system.

To save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio

1. Select the radio equipment you wish to record. 2. Select the Configuration > Radio Certificate command. The EqpInfoPage window opens. 3. To save to file the data, press Print to File. During the saving, the Printing to file field is displayed which displays the path/filename where the data are saved (default usr/tmn5ux/log/EqpInfo.log). The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor. To print the data, press Print to Printer. The certificate is printed on the default printer.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

187

LEGACY-HW/SW EDITION INVENTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command displays the hardware version and software version of the Legacy equipment present into the open map. With details it is possible: To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy equipment present into the open map (pag.188) To save/print the list of the objects (pag.189) To filter/order the list of the objects (pag.189)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.

To verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command. The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window opens, where the characteristics of the hardware and software are displayed (Fig.27). Fig.27 Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window

Menu bar (1)

Objects list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.27 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints/saves on a file the information. File > Close. It closes the window. View > Set Filter. It filters/orders the objects list. View > Refresh Info. It refreshes the information present into the window. Help > On usage. It opens the on-line manual.

Each NE is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that represent one or more physical parts of the NE itself. More detailed information concerning the objects that characterize each single type of NE are reported into the relevant equipment manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

188

Into the table, one record is dedicated to each object. Such a record contains the following information: Equipment. Legacy equipment type that contains the object. Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object. Object name. Object name. Slot. Topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information. Hw/Sw Edition. Edition number of the hardware and of the software relevant to the physical unit coupled with the object to which it is referred the record.

The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects at the selection of the command. (3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information: The number of the displayed records (xx records). The activation of one or more filters. The date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed the window.

To save/print the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command. The Hw/Sw Edition inventory window opens (Fig.27). 2. To print or save to a file: The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database. A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items command.

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To filter/order the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory command. The Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window opens (Fig.27). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

189

The Set Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options: Match Object Type. Object of a NE. To set the criterion: Select the NE type into the Equipment Type list. Select the desired object into the Object type list. It is possible to set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time choosing the All Objects option. Match Address. NE logic address To set the criterion type the NE address into the text field and press Add. The system inserts the value into the area placed under the Match Address box. The user can delete from the list a single option pressing, after having selected such an option, the Remove push-button or he can delete all the options at the same time pressing Remove All. It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text field: 12 the system will display, into the window, the NE with address12. 12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, etc.). 1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2 (12,102, 112, etc.).

Match Edition. In this section, it is possible to set, as a filter, the edition of the hardware and/or of the software of the unit, executing the following procedure: Type into the first text field (max 2 numbers) the edition number of the hardware and/or type into the remaining 3 boxes (placed under the symbol /) the edition number (max. 2 characters for each box) of the software. To execute a general search, use the wild character asterisk (*). The value 0/0.0.0 points out that the edition of the hardware and/or of the software relevant to the unit under examination is unknown.

Match Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object. The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion. Sort by. To order the records with respect to the parameters:. Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object. Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object. Hw Edition. Edition number of the hardware relevant to the physical unit coupled with the object to which it is referred the record. Object Name. Object name. Sw Edition. Edition number of the software relevant to the physical unit coupled with the object to which it is referred the record.

To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the command) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-buttons. When the Hw/Sw Edition Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

190

LEGACY-PHYSICAL UNIT INVENTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command displays the units list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map. With details it is possible: To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map (pag.191) To save/print the list of the objects (pag.192) To modify the identification code of the unit (pag.192) To filter/order the list of the objects (pag.193)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.

To verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command. The Physical Unit Inventory window opens, where the characteristics of the objects relevant of the Legacy equipment present into the open map are displayed (Fig.28). Fig.28 Physical Unit Inventory window

Menu bar (1)

Objects list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.28 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints/saves on a file the information. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Set Unit Code. It changes the identification code of the object. View > Set Filter. It filters/orders the objects list. View > Refresh Info. It refreshes the information present into the window. Help > On usage. It opens the on-line manual.

Each NE is seen by the supervisory system as an assembly of objects that represent one or more physical parts of the NE itself. More detailed information concerning the objects that characterize each single type of NE are reported into the relevant equipment manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

191

Into the table, one record is dedicated to each object. Such a record contains the following information: Equipment. Legacy equipment type that contains the object. Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object. Object name. Object name. Slot. Topologic position of the object inside the NE, pointed out by a letter and eventually by a number. Some objects are not provided with such an information. Unit Code. Identification code assigned by the manufacturing company to the unit or to the NE part to which corresponds the object.

The information present into the table correspond to the characteristics of the objects at the selection of the command. (3) Into the status bar, the system points out the following information: The number of the displayed records (xx records). The activation of one or more filters. The date and the time when it has been opened or refreshed the window.

To save/print the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command. The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28). 2. To print or save to a file: The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database. A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items command.

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To modify the identification code of the unit

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command. The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28). 2. Select the Action > Set Unit Code. The Set Unit Code window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

192

3. Open the Equipment Type option menu and choose the type of the NE to which belongs the object. 4. Open the Object Type option menu and choose the object. 5. Into the Unit Code box, type the identification code of the object. If after having changed the code, the user wants to reset the preceding one, it is sufficient to press Default. 6. Press Ok.

To filter/order the list of the objects

1. Select the Configuration > Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory command. The Physical Unit Inventory window opens (Fig.28). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Set Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options: Match Object Type. Object of a NE. To set the criterion: Select the NE type into the Equipment Type list. Select the desired object into the Object type list. It is possible to set a single object class at a time or all the classes at the same time choosing the All Objects option. Match Address. NE logic address To set the criterion type the NE address into the text field and press Add. The system inserts the value into the area placed under the Match Address box. The user can delete from the list a single option pressing, after having selected such an option, the Remove push-button or he can delete all the options at the same time pressing Remove All. It is possible to use the wild character asterisk (*). For instance typing into the text field: 12 the system will display, into the window, the NE with address12. 12* the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 12 (12, 120, etc.). 1*2 the system will display the NEs with the address that begins with 1 and ends with 2 (12,102, 112, etc.).

Match Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object. The setting mode of the filter is the same one described for the Match Address criterion. Sort by. To order the records with respect to the parameters: Address. Logic address of the NE that contains the object. Unit Code. Identification codes of the unit or of the NE part to which corresponds the object. Object Name. Object name.

To set the ordering criterion, activate the desired option. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Physical Unit Inventory window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the command) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-buttons. When the Physical Unit Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

193

SNMP-SOFTWARE INVENTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry *, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The user with entry profile cannot switch the operating of the memory benches. The SNMP-Software Inventory command displays the software version and the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment (except FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1) present into the open map. With details it is possible: To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map (pag.194) To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map (pag.196) To save/print the list of the equipment/units (pag.196) To open the equipment window (pag.197) To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.197) To update the equipment software (pag.197) To switch the operating of the memory benches of an equipment controller (pag.197) To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment (pag.198) To filter/order the list of the equipment/units (pag.198)

To verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens. 2. Select the NE Software Inventory option. The window displays the list of the NEs and the detail of the software (Fig.29). Fig.29 Snmp NE Software Inventory window

Menu bar (1) The selected push-button points out the type of data displayed in the table (2)

Equipment/ units list (3)

Status bar (4)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

194

Fig.29 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the information. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment interface. Action > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window. Action > Software Download. It updates the equipment software. Action > Read Data From NE. It sends a request for the updating of the information to the controller of the selected NE. Action > Bench Switch. It switches the operation of the memory benches of the controller of the selected NE. View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

The lists (equipment and units) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed one instead of the other, according to the selected option. In detail, if active, the option NE Software Inventory, the list of the NEs and the detail of the equipment software is displayed. Unit Software Inventory, the list of the units is displayed.

The list points out all the SNMP equipment present in the open map except for FAMxc, ELFO and SDH N+1. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: (3) <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

If active, the NE Software Inventory option, for each equipment, displays in the column: Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment. Type. Type of equipment. Ip Addr. IP address of the equipment. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B. Release Bench 1. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 1. Bench 1 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 1: Running. The software of the considered memory bench is running. Loaded. The software is present on the bench, but is not currently running (standby). Not loaded. The software is not loaded in the memory bench. Downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is running.

Release Bench 2. File name and version of the software present on the memory bench 2. Bench 2 Status. Operating status of the memory bench 2. The detail of the wordings is the same pointed out by the Bench 1 Status parameter. Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment where the unit is present. Type. Type of equipment where the unit is present. Ip Address. IP address of the equipment where the unit is present. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment, where the unit is present, and NMS5UX-B. Unit. Name of the unit. Element. Name of the element, where the software is loaded, present in the unit: controller, programmable logic, etc. Actual Release. Name of the file and version of the software present in the element.

If active, the Unit Software Inventory option displays in the column, for each unit:

The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

195

(4)

Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records. View... Activation of one or more filters. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the Unit Software Inventory option. The window displays the list of the units.

To save/print the list of the equipment/units

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the option: NE Software Inventory, to display the list of the equipment. Unit Software Inventory, to display the list of the units. All the records stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All items command. The displayed records, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the record stored in the database. A group of records, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected Items command.

3. To print or save to a file:

The Output Device Selection window opens. 4. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

196

To open the equipment window

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Press the NE Software Inventory option. 3. Select the equipment. 4. Select the Action > Open Equipment command. The equipment interface opens. Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window at the same time. It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed. The description of the equipment window and of the messages that can be displaying at its opening are reported in the specific equipment user manual. The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the record of the equipment.

To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the NE Software Inventory option. 3. Select the equipment. 4. Select the Action > Equipment Info command. The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26). Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time.

To update the equipment software

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the NE Software Inventory option. 3. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more windows at the same time. 4. Select the Action > Software Download command. The Software Download window opens (Fig.79).

To switch the operation of the memory benches of an equipment controller

The operation is not available for the Entry user. It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress and when the software is not present in the bench. The operation causes an automatic disconnection and reconnection of the NE. If the re-connection fails, the NE assumes the unreachable status and the command of re-connection will be sent, at regular intervals, by the supervision system. 1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

197

2. Select the NE Software Inventory option. 3. Select the equipment. 4. Select the Action > Bench Switch command and confirm. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. If this one was successful, the bench in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa.

To require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the NE Software Inventory option. 3. Select the wished equipment in connected status. 4. Select the Action > Read Data From NE command. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

To filter/order the list of the equipment/units

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Software Inventory command. The SNMP NE Software Inventory window opens (Fig.29). 2. Select the option: NE Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the equipment. Unit Software Inventory, to display and filter the list of the unit.

3. Select the View > Set Filter command. The View Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options: Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field. It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter: p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window. p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed. p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the window.

Match equipment type. Type of equipment. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment. To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wildcard asterisk character (*).

Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. Match Bench Release. Version and/or usage status of the software present in the memory benches of the equipment. To set as criterion the version of the software, select the wished release from the list (the list displays the releases of the software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window). The selected item is displayed in the text field. To set as criterion the usage status of the software, activate the option: Not Loaded, to display the NEs whose memory benches have not the software loaded.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

198

This option is not available if the software release is selected. Loaded, to display the NEs whose version of software corresponds to that set in the box, whose software is in Loaded status (software present in the memory bench, but not used at the moment). Running, to display the NEs whose software version corresponds to that set in the box, whose software is in Running status (software present in the memory bench and used at the moment).

The filter is available only when the NE Software Inventory option is active in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window. Match Object. Unit and/or element of the unit. To set the criterion: Select the unit in the Unit Type list. It is possible to select only one unit or all the units selecting All Units. Select the element (controller, programmable logic, etc.) in the Element Type list. It is possible to set only one element or all the elements of the unit set in the Unit Type box, selecting All Elements. The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window is active. Match Actual Release. Version of the software present in an element (controller, programmable logic, etc.). To set the criteria, select from the list the wished release (the list displays the releases of the software present in the equipment pointed out in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window). The selected item is displayed in the box. The filter is available only when the Unit Software Inventory option in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window is active. 4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Snmp NE Software Inventory window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons. When the Snmp NE Software Inventory window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

199

SNMP-EQUIPMENT PORT CONFIGURATION

System access User profile

Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only, Read-Write Entry Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command displays the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment (except FAMxc and SDH N+1) present into the open map. With details it is possible: To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map (pag.200) To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of an equipment (pag.201) To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.202) To executes the Ping of an equipment (pag.202) To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different (pag.202) To modify the Logical Address of an equipment as its Station Id or vice versa (pag.202) To filter/order the list of the equipment (pag.202)

To verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens, where the list of the NEs and the detail of the communication ports is displayed (Fig.30). Fig.30 Port Communication Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Equipment list (2)

Fig.30 notes (1) Menu: File > Exit. It closes the window. View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only. It displays only the equipment whose equipment identifier (Station Id) is different from the Logical Address. View > Show all equipment. It displays all the SNMP equipment (except from FAMxc and SDH N+1) present in the open map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

200

Commands > NE PPP Interfaces. It displays the PPP communication ports of an equipment. Commands > NE Routing Table. It displays/changes the routing table of an equipment. Commands > Ping Check. It executes the Ping to check the presence and the reachability of an equipment. Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address). It changes the equipment identifier (Station Id). The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Address). Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id). It changes the logical address of an equipment (Logical Address). The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station Id). Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE. Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE. Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type. Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and NMS5UX-B.

(2)

For each equipment, displays in the column: Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment (NE object). Address. IP address of the equipment (NE object). Type. Equipment type. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B. Station Id. Equipment identifier set locally (SCT or WEB LCT - Equipment Id parameter). OSI ip. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router (IP over OSI port). OSI ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (IP over OSI port). ip Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network, of the equipment (LAN port). ip Netmask. Mask for the network address definition (LAN port). Mac Address. Physical address of the equipment. In band. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). Value: Disabled. The in band supervision is not active. Enabled. The in band supervision is active. ---. The considered type of equipment does not support the supervision in band.

The columns OSI... are meaningful only if the equipment is managed with OSI protocol. The information present in the table refers to the moment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed. The list points out all the SNMP equipment in connected or unreacheable status present in the open map except for FAMxc and SDH N+1. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume only the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume only a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > NE PPP Interfaces command. The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

201

To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32).

To executes the Ping of an equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Ping Check command. The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed. Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.

To display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30). 2. Select the View > Show mismatched (Station Id - Logical Address) only command. The window displays only the equipment whose value in the column Station Id is different from that present in the column Logical Address.

To modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the: Commands > Set Station Id (like Logical Address) command. The value present in the column Station Id is changed. The new value corresponds to the logical address of the equipment (Logical Address). Commands > Set Logical Address (like Station Id) command. The value present in the column Logical Address is changed. The new value corresponds to the equipment identifier (Station Id).

To filter/order the list of the equipment

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration command. The Port Communication Browser window opens (Fig.30).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

202

2. To ORDER the list, select the command: Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE. Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the NE. Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type. Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.

When the Port Communication Browser window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the NE type. 3. To FILTER the list, select the View > Filter command. The Filter Selection window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, depending on the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the following options: Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. To set the criterion, type the address of the NE in the text field. It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter: p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window. p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed. p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the window.

Match IP Address. IP address of the equipment. To set the criterion, type the wished IP Address in the text fields. It is possible to use the wildcard asterisk character (*).

Match equipment type. Type of equipment. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Match Station Id. Local identifier of the equipment. To set the criterion, type the NE identifier in the text field. It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character (*). For example, typing in the box the letter: p, the NE with identifier p will be displayed in the window. p*, the NEs whose identifier start with p will be displayed. p*o, the NEs whose identifier starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the window.

4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Port Communication Browser window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed ones and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons. When the Port Communication Browser window closes, the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

203

SNMP-NE PPP INTERFACES

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces command displays the settings relevant to the PPP communication ports available for an equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal. The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus2 Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49).

To display the settings of the PPP communication ports of the selected equipment
1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces command. The PPP Interface Browser window opens, where the setting of the PPP communication ports available for the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal is displayed (Fig.31). Fig.31 PPP Interface Browser window

Menu bar (1) Equipment info (2)

PPP communication ports (3)

Fig.31 notes (1) (2) (3) Menu: File > Exit. It closes the window. This area lists in order: NE logical address (NE type - NE IP address) - connection status of NE. The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. For the detail of all the available ports for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation. The window displays the more meaningful characteristics for each communication ports. In details, the column: Interface. PPP communication ports name. IP Address. IP/PPP address of the port. IP Netmask. Mask for the network address definition. Mode. Functioning mode of the PPP protocol. Speed. Transmission rate of the port. Signal Input. Type of signal in input to the port (e.g. E1, STM-1, etc.). 2Mbit Selector, Slot Selector and 16Kbit Map. Respectively setting of the tributary 2Mb, timeslot and 16Kbit (channel EOC E1).

The symbol - points out that the value is not meaningful for the considered type of port. If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not present in the database of the supervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

204

SNMP-NE ROUTING TABLE

System access User profile

Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only, Read-Write Entry Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Routing Table command displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by an equipment (Routing Table Running and Default Gateway). With details it is possible: To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment (pag.205) To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.206) To delete an element from the Routing Table (pag.207) To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.207) To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.207)

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). For more information about the Routing Table and Default Gateway go to pag.207.

To display the Routing Table and the Default Gateway of an equipment

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens, where the setting of the Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment is displayed (Fig.32). Fig.32 Routing Table window
Menu bar (1) Equipment info (2)
Elements of the routing table IP address of the destination IP network or element IP NetMask of the destination IP network or element IP address of the equipment which acts as Gateway Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected to (3) Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the specific port (Interface) and the destination IP network (4) IP address of the equipment which acts as Gateway Supervision port of the local equipment which the equipment acting as Default Gateway is connected to (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

205

Fig.32 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Exit. It closes the window. Commands > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window. Commands > Add New Route. It adds an element to the Routing Table. Commands > Delete Route. It deletes an element from the Routing Table.

This area points out in order: Logical address of the NE (Type of NE-IP Address of NE) - connection status of NE. If the equipment is in disconnected status because it has been just created and the first connection has not been executed yet, the window will result empty because the required information is not present in the database of the supervision system.

(3)

The available values change depending on the type of selected equipment. Here below are reported the ports generally present in all the equipment. For the detail of all the ports available for each type of equipment, refer to the equipment documentation. Wording: Lan. Communication port with the LAN network. Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI. Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT. RS232. Serial port for the connection with other network elements. Radio. Communication port represented by the radio signal. 2Mb/s. E1 communication port (2Mb/s). - . Inner port (internal loopback).

(4)

Wording: Direct. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software. Indirect. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable by the equipment interface. The IP network or the element have been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol (dynamic element).

To add an element to the Routing Table

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32). 3. Select the Commands > Add New Route command. The Add Route window opens. 4. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 7. Press Add. The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

206

To delete an element from the Routing Table

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32). 3. Select the element(s) of the Routing Table. Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Direct protocol) cannot be deleted. 4. Select the Commands > Delete Route command and confirm. The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

To set or modify the IP address used as Default Gateway

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32). 3. Into the Default Gateway area, type, into each one of the four available spaces, a number comprised between 0 and 255. The supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment is automatically pointed out between brackets. 4. Press Apply and confirm. The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.

To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway

1. In the UX Map Manager window, select the equipment. 2. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Routing Table command. The Routing Table window opens (Fig.32). 3. In the Default Gateway area, press Delete and confirm. The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic. The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.

Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other one.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

207

Routing Table (Running) Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal). These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port. If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up. If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones. The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment start-up. The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up. Stored Routing Table The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface. The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table used by the equipment. The Stored Routing Table can be displayed/modified through the local management program of the equipment (SCT/LMT and/or WEB LCT).

Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

208

SNMP-HW INVENTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-HW Inventory command displays the hardware version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map (Hw Inventory functionality). With details it is possible: To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map (pag.209) To save the data to file (pag.211) To save periodically the data to file (pag.212) To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (pag.212)

The Hw Inventory functionality is optional and available only for the SNMP equipment of type EL, US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

To display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command. The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33). 2. Select, in the Equipment Type area, the NE types for which you wish to display the hardware data. 3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of records you wish to display. 4. Press Read. The window displays the hardware data relevant to all the types of NE selected present in the open map. 5. If you wish to display a specific detail of the data, execute one or more of the following settings, according to the filter criteria you wish to use: Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. To set the criterion, type the logical address of the NE in the text field and press Add. It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string. The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field. It is possible to delete an item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, Del. IP Address. IP address of the NE. To set the criterion, type the wished IP address. It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot be before a numeric field). For example, the values 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed, while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed. Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address. Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment. The filter is available and meaningful only if the Expansion display modality is selected. To set the criterion, select the wished units. It is possible to select a maximum of three units. To select the units, press the Ctrl key and the unit. Moreover it is possible to define, for each type of equipment, which units must not be used in the Unit Type in the following way: Press Not managed unit type. The FilterUnitType window opens. In the Select equipment type area, select the type of equipment for which you wish to hide the units. In the area below, the detail of the relevant units is displayed. The highlighted units are already hidden.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

209

In the Select not managed unit area, select the units you do not want to display in the Unit Type list for the selected equipment type. Select the Select All option to select all the units or the Deselect All option to deselect all the units.

Press Apply.

Part Number. Part Number of the unit. To set the criterion, type a 10 characters alphanumeric string in the text field. HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit. To set the criterion, type a 3 characters alphanumeric string in the text field. Bar Code. Bar code of the unit. To set the criterion, type a 24 characters alphanumeric string in the text field.

6. Press Read. The hardware data relevant to all the NEs, present in the open map, satisfying the set criteria are displayed. 7 Select the option: Expansion to display the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware characteristics of all the units are displayed. Compact to display the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteristics of the controller unit are displayed.

8. To delete all the set option filter, press Reset Filter. Fig.33 Hw Inventory page
Filter criteria of hardware data (1) Data display modality (2) List of hardware data (3) Toolbar (4)

Select the arrow to sort the list (5)

Fig.33 notes (1) In detail, the available filters are: Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the hardware data. The setting of all the other data is optional. Logical Address. Logical address of the NE.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

210

 (2)

IP Address. IP address of the NE. Unit Type. Type of unit of the equipment. The filter is available only if selected the Expansion display modality. Part Number. Part Number of the unit. HW Edition. Hardware version of the unit. Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

The option: Expansion, displays the data in expanded format: for each equipment, the hardware characteristics of all the units are displayed. Compact, displays the data in compact format: for each equipment, the hardware characteristics of the controller unit are displayed.

To switch from a display modality to the other, select the relevant option. In case of compact display, it is also possible to switch to the expansion modality pressing the Exp push-button next to each row of the table. In this case, the table will display only the hardware data relevant to the expanded equipment (the IP address field is automatically set, as filter, the IP address of the expanded equipment). The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed records. The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria. To display all the records that satisfy the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total number of records in the Max Rows box. (3) The displayed hardware parameters are: (4) Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. Eq. Type. Type of equipment. Description. Description of the equipment. Hw Edition. Hardware version of the unit. Part Num. Part Number of the unit. Serial Num. Serial number of the unit. Bar Code. Bar code of the unit.

Push-button: Read. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system and display them according to the set filter. Reset Filter. It deletes the filter setting. Export timer. It periodically saves the displayed data to file. Export manual. It saves the displayed data to file.

(5)

Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed. Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column. When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.

To save the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command. The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33). 2. Filter the data you wish to save to file (see pag.209). 3. Press Export manual. The Export window opens, where an hypertextual link is present with the name/extension of the file where the data will be saved.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

211

By default, the name of the file has the following format HwInv <day-month-year> <hour-minute-second>.zip. The name and the extension of the file can be configured by the Superuser. The formats of the managed files are: csv, xml, zip (cvs zipped or xml zip). 4 Select the hypertextual link.

5. Set the path where you wish to save the file. 6. Confirm the operation. The system saves in the file all the hardware data which satisfy the set filter criterion and not only those relevant to the displayed records.

To save periodically the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command. The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33). 2. Filter the data you wish to periodically save to file (pag.209). 3. Press Export timer. The ExpTimer window opens. In the Filter description area, the filter criteria are displayed which will be applied to each periodic saving. 4. Type the name of the filter into the Filter Name box. 5. Type, in the Export periodicity day box, the periodicity in days of the data export and, in the Hour box, the time when the export is executed. 6 Press Insert. At the first set time interval, a file will be saved containing the hardware data of the equipment that satisfy the criteria present in the filter. The file will be saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/ExpHwInv, in the format .cvs and .xml, and will ba named HwInv-filtername-<date_time>. The files will be saved until when the user does not remove the filter (pag.212).

To deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-HW Inventory command. The Hw Inventory page opens in the default browser (Fig.33). 2. Press Export timer. The ExpTimer window opens. The Delete Filter area lists the filters defined by the user. 3. Select the filter you wish to deactivate. The Select filter to be deleted area points out the detail of the filter. 4 Press Delete. The filter is removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

212

SNMP-NE BACKUP/RESTORE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command displays the backup files of the SNMP equipment present into the open map. With details it is possible: To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map (pag.213) To transfer the configuration present in a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore) (pag.216) To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) (pag.216) To lock/unlock a backup file (pag.216)

The equipment list for which the NE Backup/Restore functionality is configurable. Default: EL, US, ADM1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2). The supervision system periodically saves to disk the configuration of the equipment (backup files). For more information about the backup and restore modalities go to pag.217.

To display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command. The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser. 2. If you wish to display a specific detail of the files, execute one or more of the following basic settings, according to the filter criteria you wish to use: Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. It is possible to set the logical addresses in one of the following ways: Type the logical address of the NE into the text field and press Add. Press Tree. A window opens, where are displayed the containers and the equipment present in the map. Select the wished equipment. The equipment is pointed out in the text field. Press Add. The Tree push-button is only available in the page open with the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser. It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string. The values set in this way are inserted in the list above the text field. To delete a record from the list, select the address and press Del. IP Address. IP address of the NE. In order to set the criterion, type the wished IP address. It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only for the final fields (the asterisk cannot precede a field with numbers). For example, the value 172.18.54.* or 172.18.*.* are allowed, while the value 172.18.*.215 is not allowed. Pressing IP Clear to delete the IP Address. File lock. Status of the file. Selecting the option: All, the list will display all the backup files. Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files. Locked, the list will display only the locked files. Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules: Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists. The backup file must not contain errors.

To set the criterion select the wished option.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

213

3. Type, in the Max Rows box, the maximum number of files you wish to display. 4. Press Apply Filter. The window displays the backup files of the NEs, present in the open map, which satisfy the set criteria (Fig.34). 5. Press the Info push-button, relevant to a backup file to display its detail. The File Property window opens with the following information: Logical Address. Logic address of the NE. IP Address. IP address of the NE. Eq. Type. Type of equipment. File Name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equipment ID> <hours minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku. File Date. Date/time of saving of the backup file. Backup Result. Result of the operation of file saving. Restore Date. Date/time when the operation of file restore has been executed. Restore Result. Result of the operation of file restore.

The presence of the symbol - signals that the information is not available. For the Backup Result and Restore Result the background color: Green, points out that the operation was successful. Red, points out that the operation is failed.

Fig.34 NE Backup/Restore page

Filter criteria for the backup files (1) File display modality (2) List of the backup file (3) Push-buttons bar (4)

Select the arrow to sort the list (5)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

214

Fig.34 notes (1) In detail, the available filters are: Equipment Type. Type of equipment. The selection of this filter is mandatory to display the backup file. The setting of all the other filters is optional. Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. IP Address. IP address of the NE. File lock. Status of file. If active the option: All, the list will display all the backup files. Unlocked, the list will display only the unlocked files. Locked, the list will display only the locked files. Eligible, the list will display only the files matching all the following rules: (2) Last backup file of a NE for which no locked backup file already exists. The backup file must not contain errors.

The Max Rows box points out the maximum number of displayed files. The x of y Rows field points out the number of displayed records (x) with respect to the number of total records (y) which satisfy the set filter criteria. In order to display all the records satisfying the set criteria, it is necessary to type the total number of records into the Max Rows box.

(3)

Each record identifies a backup file. For each file, is pointed out in the column: Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. IP Address. IP address of the NE. Eq. Type. Type of equipment. Backup Date. Date/time of creation of the backup file. Lock. Status of the file: Locked, <empty box> (unlocked). Backup file name. Name of the backup file. The format of the name of the file is the following: <Equipment ID> <hour minutes seconds> <days months years>_U.bku. Operations available. Push-button: Info. It displays the characteristics of the file. If the color of the box backgrounds: Green, there are not errors in the backup file. Red, there are errors in the backup file.

Restore. It transfers the configuration stored in the file to the relevant equipment present in the map. Backup. It saves the current equipment configuration to file. Lock/Unlock. It locks/unlocks the file. The push-buttons are displayed one in alternative to the other, depending on the status of the file.

When a push-button is disabled, it means that the relevant function is not available. (4) Push-button: Apply Filter. It reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system and displays them according to the set filters. Switch to Equipment. It displays all the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality, present in the map. The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved. Switch to Backup File. It displays the backup files of the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality, present in the map. Reload. It re-reads the data stored in the database of the NMS5UX-B system. Lock All. It locks all file present in the list.

The Switch to Equipment and Switch to Backup File push-buttons are displayed one in alternative to the other. (5) Selecting the heading of a column, a red arrow is displayed. Select the arrow to sort the rows in alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column. When the arrow is selected, the list is re-sorted in increasing order. At the next selection, the list is re-sorted in decreasing order and so on.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

215

To transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore)
1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command. The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34). 2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (pag.213). 3. Press the relevant Restore push-button. The NE Restore window opens with the following information: Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. IP Address. IP address of the NE. File Name. Name of the backup file.

4. Press Confirm. The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

To save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup)

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command. The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34). 2. Continue in one of the following ways: a. Display the backup file/files of the equipment whose configuration you wish to save (pag.213). b. Press Backup near the file/files. Or: a. Press Switch to Equipment. All the equipment, managed by the NE Backup/Restore functionality and present in the map, are displayed. The records with the available Backup push-button correspond to the equipment in connected status, whose configuration can be saved. b. Press the Backup push-button relevant to the equipment whose configuration you wish to save. The NE Backup window opens with the following information: Logical Address. Logic address of the NE. IP Address. IP address of the NE. Eq. Type. Type of equipment.

3. Press Confirm. The operation is scheduled to the process which manages the procedure of periodic file saving.

To lock/unlock a backup file

1. Select the Configuration > SNMP-NE Backup/Restore command. The NE Backup/Restore page opens in the default browser (Fig.34). 2. Display the backup file you wish to transfer to the equipment (pag.213). 3. To LOCK the file, press the relevant Lock push-button. The file is locked (label Locked - column Lock). It is possible to lock all the files present in the NE Backup/Restore page pressing Lock All. To UNLOCK a file, press the relevant Unlock push-button. The file is unlocked (column Lock empty).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

216

NE Backup/Restore functionality (more info)

The NE Backup/Restore functionality allows saving to file the complete configuration of an equipment (Backup operation), displaying the list of the available backup files and transferring the configuration stored in a file to the relevant equipment (Restore operation). The list of equipment for which the NE Backup/Restore function is configurable. Default: equipment of type EL, US, ADM-1, EXP63, ALFO and ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2).

Backup operation
The saving of the backup files is automatically executed by the supervision system or it can be forced in any moment (pag.216). The saving modalities by the supervision system are the following: NMS5UX-B periodically verifies if, for each equipment, one of the following conditions has occurred: No backup file is available. A change (set) has been executed to the equipment configuration. A connection in Configuration modality has been activated between LCT and the equipment. The connection between the supervision system and the equipment has been activated or reactivated. A new operation has been stored in the Command Log stored in the equipment controller.

For each equipment, which at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred for, the system saves the complete configuration into a file. At the successive check, if at least one of the above mentioned conditions has occurred again, the complete configuration of the equipment will be saved into a different file and so on. With complete configuration of an equipment we mean: Configuration of the equipment. Configuration of the communication port (IP Ethernet, PPP RS-232, etc.) of the routing tables and of the possible OSPF parameters. List of remote equipment (Remote Element Table).

The periodicity of the control by NMS5UX-B can be configured by the Superuser. A maximum of N files (N configurable - default=3) for each equipment is saved on the disk of the machine where the supervision system is installed. The file successive to the maximum number will overwrite the oldest backup file. It is possible to lock one or more files in such a way that the system does not overwrite them (pag.216). These files will not enter in the count of the maximum number of files saved for each managed equipment. This means they will not be overwritten until the user unlocks them. For example, suppose that the system saves a maximum of 3 files for each equipment. For the equipment A, the files A1, A2 and A3 are automatically saved in this order. If the oldest file (A1) is locked, when the fourth file is generated, this will not overwrite the file A1, but a new file (A4) will be created. If no other file is locked, when a new file (A5) is generated, this will overwrite the oldest file (A2). In this way, the locked files + the last three saved files will be always available to the user. It is possible to lock as many files as you wish. The files will remain locked until the user unlocks them. Two files with the same content will be available for each backup file in the system disk, one for each formatting compatible with the O.S.: UNIX. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_U.bku. WINDOWS. The path, where the file is saved, can be configured. The name of the file has the following format: <Equipment ID> <hour minute second> <day month year>_W.bku. This file is compatible with the applications SCT, WEB LCT, SCT BKU Builder and is available on the disk of the machine where ones supervision system is installed. By means of the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application, it is possible to copy a backup file to a different machine or external disk by means of a proper push-button present in the NE Backup/Restore page.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

217

Restore operation
The Restore operation (pag.216), transfers to the equipment ONLY the configuration parameters present in the backup file. The restore of the communication parameters (IP Address, routing tables, etc.) can be executed only through the SCT o WEB LCT application. The restore of the Remote Element Table can be configured through the SNMP-Remote Element Table command (pag.390) or through the SCT/WEB LCT application.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

218

LEGACY-ALARM AVERAGE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Alarm Average command displays the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B and sent by the Legacy equipment. The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.

To display the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B system and sent by the Legacy equipment
1. Select the Configuration > LegacyAlarm Average command. The shAverage window opens where the mean of the alarms received by NMS5UX-B and sent by the Legacy equipment is displayed as pointed out (Fig.35). The information present into the window refer to the average value of the alarms at the window opening time. To update the data, press Refresh. At the choice of the push-button, the system will update the date/ time and it will point out the time of the refresh execution. Fig.35 shAverage window

Average value of alarms for second received during the LAST HOUR Average value of alarms for second received during the CURRENT HOUR Average value of alarms for second received during the LAST MINUTE

Date/time relevant to the window opening or to the window updating

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

219

LOCATE

The Locate menu contains the following commands: Equipment List Locate (pag.221). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system. Proxy Equipment List (pag.239). It displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and their Proxy address.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

220

EQUIPMENT LIST LOCATE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced *, Privileged *, Superuser *

* Only the Superuser can verify in which maps is present the symbol of an equipment and can reset and rewrites the equipment table. The Command Executor application can be started only by the Superuser or by the user with privileged or advanced profile. The recording data of the conformity certificate of a radio equipment, if modified, can be saved only by the Superuser and by the users with privileged and advanced profiles. The Equipment List Locate command displays the list of the equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B. With details it is possible: To display the list of the equipment (pag.222) To save/print the list of the equipment (pag.224) To filter/sort the list of equipment (pag.225) To open the equipment window (pag.226) To verify the configuration/operation status of an equipment (pag.226) To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Upload of an equipment (pag.226) To verify in which maps the symbol of an equipment is present (pag.227) To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment (pag.227) To delete and rewrite the equipment table (pag.227) To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment (pag.228) To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type (pag.229) To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time (pag.230) To update the equipment software (SNMP) (pag.230) To update the equipment software (FAMxc) (pag.231) To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment (pag.232) To verify/modify the LCT user list of an equipment (pag.233) To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment (pag.233) To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment (pag.233) To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) (pag.234) To connect one or more equipment (pag.234) To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.235) To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.235) To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.236) To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type (pag.236) To reset and connect one or more equipment (pag.237) To connect one or more CommServer-S (pag.237) To disconnect one or more CommServer-S (pag.238) To start the Command Executor application (pag.238)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

221

To display the list of the equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press .

The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, where the list of the equipment is displayed (Fig.36). If the profile of the user who has selected the command is: Superuser, the information is referred to the equipment present in ALL the map managed by NMS5UX-B. Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged, the information is referred ONLY to the equipment present in the open map.

At the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, it is possible that a warning window opens, where it is pointed out that the database contains a number of equipment higher than N. For this cause, the user is asked if he wishes that the information about the active measures of PM is made available (operation that can take a lot of time). To press the push-button: Yes, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens and, for each NE in the list, it will be possible to verify the activation status of the PM measures (Perf. column). No, the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens, but the information relevant to the active measures of PM will be not available.

The N limit is, by default, 100. The value can be modified by the Superuser. Fig.36 Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window

Menu bar (1)

List of equipment (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.36 notes (1) Menu: File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the information. File > Close. It closes the window. Actions > Open Equipment. It opens the equipment window. Actions > Equipment Info. It displays the configuration/operation status of an equipment. Actions > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window. Actions > Performance Monitoring. It displays the results of the PM measures of an NE. Actions > Export Performance Monitoring. It saves on file the results of the PM measures.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

222

Actions > View/Modify PM Status. It activates/deactivates one or more PM measures at the same time. Actions > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (SNMP). Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download. It updates the equipment software (FAMxc). Actions > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code. It displays/changes the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment. Actions> LCT Equipment User. It displays/changes the LCT user list of an equipment. Actions > Location. It adds/removes a prefix to the logic address of the equipment. Actions > Map Structure Rebuild. It deletes and rewrites the table where the information relevant to the equipment present in the map is present (equipment table). Actions > Radio Certificate. It displays the certificate of conformity of a radio. Commands > Line Test. It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment. Commands > Connect. It activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the equipment. Commands > Disconnect. It deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and the NE. Commands > Alarm re-alignment. It forces the acquisition of the equipment alarms. Commands > Configuration Upload. It forces the acquisition of the equipment configuration Commands > SNMP-Configuration Download. It transfer the configuration of an equipment to another NE of the same type. Commands > Legacy-Reset&Connect. It resets the information, stored into the database of the NMS5UX-B system, relevant to the configuration of the NE and then activating the connection between the system and the NEs themselves. Commands > Communication Server Board. It activates/deactivates the connection between the NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S equipment (CS objects). Commands > SNMP-Command Executor. It executes series of SNMP commands stored to file. View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. View > Acknowledge Status. It displays the marking status (acknowledge) of the alarms (current and/or alarm history), of the presence of LCT in Configuration modality and of the not correctly executed Configuration Upload operation. View > Equipment Location (Map). It lists the maps where the symbol of the selected NE is present. View > SNMP-LCT Logged Users. It displays the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an NE. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

(2)

For each equipment, the following columns report: Logical Addr. Logical address of the equipment. Type. Type of equipment. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B. Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment. The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of different severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed. Alr Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms and of the sending of the equipment traps to the supervision system. Symbol: X. At least an alarm or the sending of an equipment trap is disabled. To verify the disabled alarms and the disabled sending of traps, open the Equipment Severity Code window (Fig.67). -. The equipment has not alarms or sending of traps disabled. ABSENT. The LCT user is not currently connected to the equipment. CONFIGURING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Configuration modality. MONITORING. The LCT user is connected to the equipment in Monitoring modality. Enabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment both in Monitoring and in Configuration modality. Disabled. The LCT user can activate the connection to the equipment only in Monitoring modality. X. At least one measure of PM is active. -. No measure of PM is active. Lct Presence. Status of the connection between the LCT program and the equipment:

Lct Config. Enabling status of the LCT for the possible connection to the equipment:

Perf. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures. Symbol:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

223

. . . Information is not available. In the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been selected. Alarm (current and/or in the alarm history). Presence of LCT in Configuration modality. Operation of Configuration Upload not correctly executed. X. At least one not marked signalling is present. -. Not marked signallings are not present.

Ack. Marking status (acknowledge) of the following signalling:

Symbol:

IP/Ph Address. Physical address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. points out that the record refers to a virtual NE. Board Addr. IP Address of the CS/IPBOX that is physically connected with the NE. This information is available and significant only for the Legacy equipment. Port Nb. Number of the CS/IPBOX port that is physically connected with the NE. This information is available and significant only for the Legacy equipment.

The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window has been opened or updated. The presence of the - symbol points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for the status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to. (3) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. View... Activation of one or more filters. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To save/print the list of equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. To print or save to a file: All the equipment stored in the database, select the File > Print/Save > All Items command. The displayed equipment, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered Items command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. A group of equipment, select the record and, then, the File > Print/Save > Selected Items command. .

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

224

To filter/sort the list of the equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The View Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: Match Logical Address. Logic address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field. It is possible to use the wild-card asterisk character. For example, typing in the box the letter: p, the NE with logic address p will be displayed in the window. p*, the NEs whose logic address start with p will be displayed. p*o, the NEs whose address starts with p and ends with o will be displayed in the window. .

Match IP/Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and address of equipment. To set as criterion the equipment: Real managed with SNMP protocol, activate the SNMP Equipment option, and type the IP address of the wished NE in the text fields. Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option. Real managed with Legacy protocol, activate the Legacy Equipment option, and type the physical address of the wished NE in the text field.

Match connection status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. Match equipment type. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Match performance. Activation status of the Performance Monitoring (PM) measures. To set the criterion, select the option: Enabled, the NEs with at least one PM measure will be displayed. Disabled, the NEs with no active PM measures will be displayed.

The box is not available if in the warning window, displayed at the opening of the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window, the No push-button has been pressed. Match Alarm. Severity level of the alarms of the NE. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished severity. Match Alarm Disabled. Enabling status of the alarms/trap sending of the equipment to NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option: Enabled, the NEs that have not alarms or enabled trap sending will be displayed. Disabled, the NEs that have at least one alarm or one disabled trap sending will be displayed.

Match Gosip Address. Parameters that compose the NSAP (Gosip) address of the equipment. To set the criterion, select the: Domain box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes, (Domain parameter - default part of the NSAP Address). Area box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 2 bytes (Area parameter - default part of the NSAP Address). System ID box and type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding 6 bytes (System ID parameter).

Match location. Physical position of the equipment. This criterion is significant only for Legacy equipment. To set the criterion, select the option: Board and select the IP Address of the CommServer-S or IPBOX which the NE is physically connected to. Port and select the number of the serial port which the NE is physically connected to.

Sort by. Sorts the records.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

225

To set the criterion, select the option: Logical Address, the equipment will be listed in alphabetical order, with respect to the logic address. Type, the equipment will be listed according to the type of equipment.

To expand/compress a filter criterion without affecting its activation/deactivation status, use the up/ down arrows on the right side. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-buttons. When the Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically deleted.

To open the equipment window

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more equipment window contemporarily. 3. Select the Actions > Open Equipment command. The equipment window opens. It is possible that, on the selection of the command, a message is displayed. The description of the equipment window and of the message that can be displayed at its opening is described in the specific equipment User Manual. The equipment window can be opened also by a double click on the equipment record. .

To verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Equipment Information window at the same time. 3. Select the Actions > Equipment Info command. The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26). .

To verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Upload of an equipment
1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the wished equipment, with marked signalling (symbol x in the column Ack - see Fig.36). 3. Select the View > Acknowledge Status command. The Information window opens (Fig.23). .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

226

To verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present

Operation available only for the Superuser. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the View > Equipment Location (Map) command. The Equipment Location window opens. Box/column: Type. Type of NE. Ip/Ph Address. IP or physical address of the NE. Logical Address. Logic address of the NE. Map name. Maps where the equipment is present. .

To add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. To add a prefix: a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to add the same prefix. b. Select the Actions > Location > Assign command. The Location window opens. c. Type, in the New Location Name box, the prefix you wish to add to the logical address of the equipment (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 10 characters). d. Press Apply. In the Logical Addr column of the selected equipment, the prefix is added (prefix - logic address). The prefix is furthermore added in all the windows where the <logic address> field is present. The only exception is the label of the icon that represents the equipment in the map, where the prefix is not pointed out. If the equipment was already provided with prefix, the new value replaces the previous one. 3. To remove a prefix: a. Select one or more equipment which you wish to remove the prefix to. b. Select the Actions > Location > Remove command. The prefix is removed from the logic address of the equipment. .

To delete and rewrite the equipment table

Operation available only for the Superuser. The command must be used only in case of a supposed misalignment between the information present in the equipment table and the equipment represented on video in the maps. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the Actions > Map Structure Rebuild command. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

227

To verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment

Operation not available for virtual NE objects and virtual NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type (for the equipment of a nodal system, the command is present in the nodal window - pag.48/pag.49). 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records, it is possible to open more Graphic Performance Manager window at the same time. 3. Select the Actions > Performance Monitoring command. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens, where the period of time for which you wish to verify the results of the PM measures is required. In the boxes: Date Reference, the start date (day/month/year) is displayed (by default, the current day is set). Day Previous, the number of days, previous to the set date, that constitute the duration of the period (by default, 30 days is set) is displayed. .

4. Set the Date Reference and Day previous boxes to the wished values. It is possible to set a value within 10 and 180 days. Remember that it is possible to display at most the daily records relevant to the last 180 days (starting from the current day). The results of the PM measures are stored in the database of the system (Performance Monitoring table). They are available for a period of 6 months, then they are automatically removed. 5. Set the Auto Select box. In detail: Activate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter of a measure point, also the other control parameters are automatically selected, compatible with the measure unit of the selected item (see step 7). Deactivate the box if you wish that, at the selection of a control parameter, no other parameter is selected.

6. Press OK. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window opens. 7. Select the TPC menu. All the types of measure (TPC - Termination Point Class - yellow wordings) and the measure points (points where the control parameters are really measured) (TP - Termination Point - orange wording) available for the selected equipment are selected. The control parameters are contained in the pop-up menu that opens on the side of the measure point. Generally, more control parameters refer to the same TP. 8. Select the control parameters, for which you wish to display the results of the PM measures. All the control parameters of a TP can be displayed in the same graphic. They have been subdivided according to the measure unit used for their counting: seconds, blocks, dBm, etc. The Graphic Performance Monitoring window displays the results of the selected control parameters Fig.24 shows an example. When a parameter is selected, the name of the relevant TP changes colour: from orange, it becomes red. While the selected control parameter is characterized by a led on its left side. When a control parameter is selected, it is possible to select all the parameters that have the same measure unit present in the same TP or in anyone of the other TPs. The control parameters that have not the same measure unit of the selected parameter are not available (wording of grey colour). In order to display the results of the parameters with measure unit different from the currently selected one, it is necessary to deselect all the control parameters (Option > Deselect all TPC command) and, then, select the new parameters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

228

To save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type
Operation not available for the virtual NE objects. It is possible to select a maximum of 100 equipment. For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node equipment. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to save on file the PM measures of all the selected NEs at the same. 3. Select the Actions > Export Performance Monitoring command. Under the window title, it is pointed out the NE type. 4. Position the pointer into the TPclass area and press the right mouse button. The system displays the list of the measurements foreseen for the selected type of NE. 5. Choose one measurement type from the list. Into the Termination Point (TP) area, the system points out the relevant measuring points. 6. Choose one or more measuring points for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved on file. It is possible to select more records. 7. Select the option: Daily, to save on file the daily records relevant to the selected measuring point/s. Primary, to save on file the primary records. .

8. Set the date (into the Date boxes) and the time (into the Time boxes) respectively for the starting (Start Date Time box) and for the ending (Stop Date Time box) of the time for which the results of the PM measurements have to be saved. The supervisory system has at disposal the results of the PM measurements relevant to the last 180 days (6 months). 9. Type the directory and the file name, for which the operator wants to save the data, into the File Name box. The system provides a default directory and name composed by specific information, such as, for instance, the date, the time, the NE logic address. The format of the provided default name can be changed by the Superuser. 10.ONLY if the user wants to forward the file to another user, it is necessary to set the name of the user into the Remote Address box. If the user positions the pointer on the text field and press the right mouse button, the system displays a pre-defined list of users. Select the desired user. In this case, the file will be as saved into the pre-defined directory as forwarded to the set user. The predefined list of users has to be set and later it can be changed by the Superuser. To be able to forward the file, the system administrator has to configure properly the mail server. 11.Press OK. The system displays the Preview window that points out the resuming of the executed setting operations. Then, in the lower part of the window, the system points out the total number of records (Total Record Number box) and the number of records that contain errored data (Records with counters box). The system can display an error message that points out that the number of record present into the set time is too high. This situation is caused because the system stores into each file a maximum limit N of records. The limit N can be changed by the Superuser. The data are saved in ASCII format that can be recognized by a great number of text processing programs and databases.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

229

To activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time

Operation not available for the virtual NE objects. For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the operation will be executed on all the node equipment. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to activate/deactivate the PM measures of all the selected NEs at the same. 3. Select the Actions > View/Modify PM Status command. The View/Modify P.M. Status window opens, where the status of the measure points is displayed (Fig.25). 4. To activate: All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action > Start > All command. The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area select the Action > Start > Filtered command. The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Start > Selected command. All the PM measures of all the NE of the same type selected in the map, select the Action > Stop > All command. The measures relevant to the measure points present in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Stop > Filtered command. The measures relevant to the measure points selected in the Termination Point area, select the Action > Stop > Selected command. .

To deactivate:

In the area Message, the result of the operation is displayed.

To update the equipment software (SNMP)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the SNMP equipment, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. Selecting two or more records of the same type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the equipment at the same type. 3. Select the Actions > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Software Download window opens (Fig.79). 4. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory. To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file. 5. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option: Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller. Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or operating code). .

6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

230

7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is: Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box. It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected. Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time for Download area.

8. Press Start Dwl. If in the previous step, it has been: Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic address and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Waiting, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed. The operation takes some minutes. Before starting the updating of the controller of the NE, it executes a compatibility check between the software that must be sent and the one present in the controller itself. The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (pointed out by the first 2 characters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the specific type of NE. If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the updating of the software will not be executed. If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.82), in the Release box relevant to the updated memory bench, the new version of the software is pointed out. If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old version or the wording not loaded. Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment list for download area.

To update the equipment software (FAMxc)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the wished FAMxc. Selecting two or more records of the FAMxc type, it is possible to execute the operation for all the NEs at the same type. 3. Select the Actions > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Insert window opens (Fig.83). 4. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/tftpdir directory. 5. Set the date/time when you wish to schedule the operation in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download box. 6. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switch of the memory bench and a restart of the equipment are executed. The setting is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If you wish to execute a different setting for an equipment of the list: a. Select the equipment. b. Select the Action > Bench Info command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85). c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

231

d. Press Ok The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment. During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same parameter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered. 7. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box. If the Superuser has defined the equipment password in the configuration file of the system, it is not necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default box. The set password is valid for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If an equipment has a different password, it is necessary to set in the following way: a. Select the equipment. b. Select the Action > Bench Info command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85). c. Type the equipment access code in the Password box. d. Press Ok The wording Modified (Equipment List area) is displayed in the record of the selected equipment. During the execution of the operation for the selected equipment, the setting of the Switch Bench and Restart parameter in the Insert window will not be considered; instead, the setting of the same parameter if the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered. 8. Press OK. The Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment List.

To verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment
Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Actions > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command. The Equipment Severity Code window opens pointing out the list of the alarms relevant to the selected equipment. For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the transmission status of the relevant trap from the NE to the NMS5UX-B system and the local severity level of the alarm are displayed (Fig.67). In the list are not present the alarms of the user inputs, which have a different management of the severity (see pag.124). 4. To modify the characteristics of an alarms double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then the Action > View/Modify Severity command. The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is pointed out in the box/area: Alarm Description. Name of the alarm. Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option: Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled. Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled. Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled. .

Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm. The label (NMS5UX-B default) points out the default setting associated to that alarm by the supervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

232

5. To modify the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area. If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area) the severity level associated to the alarm cannot be modified. 6. Press Modify. The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is pointed out in the Equipment Severity Code window.

To verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment

Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Actions > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command. The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.72). 4. The procedures to modify the list of the LCT users are the same pointed out at par. To add a new LCT user (pag.386) To modify the characteristics of the LCT users (pag.387) To delete a LCT user (pag.387) .

To verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment

Operation available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the View > SNMP-LCT Logged Users command. The Logged Users window opens, where the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE when the command is selected is displayed (Fig.73). .

To display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment

The recording data, if modified, can be saved only by the Superuser and by the users with privileged and advanced profiles. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the radio equipment. 3. Select the Actions > Radio Certificate command. The EqpInfoPage window opens where all the characteristics of the radio (conformity certificate) are displayed. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

233

4. To enter a value or modify the existing one, select the relevant box and type the new value. 5. Press Save. The certificate is saved in the database of the system.

To verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Line Test command. The LINE TEST command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 4. Press Execute. Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Connect command. The CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 4. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status. Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms present on the NE. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

234

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Disconnect command. The DISCONNECT command window opens. 4. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status. Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address field, logic address. Type field, type of NE. Status field, result of the operation: OK, the operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current colour, it becomes brown. FAILED! ...., the operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Alarm Re-alignment command. The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 4. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

235

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Configuration Upload command. The UPLOAD command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 4. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another UPLOAD command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type

Command available only if the SNMP equipment is selected, except for ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment. 3. Select the Commands > SNMP-Configuration Download command. The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38). 4. Depending on the operation you wish to execute, follow (from the step 3) the procedure: To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP equipment (pag.256) To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP equipment (pag.258) .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

236

To reset and connect one or more equipment (Legacy)

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the wished Legacy equipment. 3. Select the Commands > Legacy-Reset&Connect command. The RESET&CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 4. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status. Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect one or more CommServer-S

1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be connected. 3. Select the Commands > Communication Server Board > Connect command. The CONNECT BOARD command window opens. Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following information: IP address and name. To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. 4. Press Execute. The connection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in disconnected status. Another CONNECT BOARD command window opens where, for each CS, there is the indication of: CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS. CS Name column. CS name. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-button that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure. The user can print the displayed information pressing Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

237

To disconnect one or more CommServer-S

It is not possible to disconnect a CS if it has at least one port in open status. In this case, first close the port and then disconnect the CS. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be disconnected. 3. Select the Commands > Communication Server Board > Disconnect command. The DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens. Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following information: IP address and name. To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. 4. Press Execute. The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in connected or unreachable status. Another DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens where, for each CS, there is the indication of: CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS. CS Name column. CS name. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-button that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure. The user can print the displayed information pressing Print.

To start the Command Executor application

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the user with privileged or advanced profile. 1. Select the Locate > Equipment List Locate command or press The Equipment Browser [List/Locate] window opens (Fig.36). 2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the series of SNMP commands stored on file. 3. Select the Commands > SNMP-Command Executor command. If the message No Command available for the selected equipment is displayed, the supervision system is not provided, for the selected equipment type, with files containing the sequences of SNMP commands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP commands. The Execute Command window opens. 4. Into the Select Command area, select the desired action. 5. Press Start Command Executor. The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.49). 6. Press Start Command. In the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed. It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK, present in the Command Executor window displayed at the activation of the operation. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

238

PROXY EQUIPMENT LIST

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Proxy Agent function is an optional one. The function and the subject command are available if requested by the customer only. The Proxy Equipment List command displays the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent and their Proxy address. With details it is possible: To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent (pag.239) To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment (pag.240)

To display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent

1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command. The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens, where the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent is displayed (Fig.37). Fig.37 Equipment Managed by Proxy window

Menu bar (1)

Equipment list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.37 notes (1) Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Actions > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window. Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters. It displays/changes the Proxy configuration parameters of the selected equipment. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

239

(2)

One record is devoted to each equipment. Such a record provides the following information: Logical Addr. Logic address of the equipment. Type. Equipment type. Eq. Proxy Addr. Address of the equipment that is acknowledged by the Proxy Agent: Proxy address of the equipment (parameter defined by the user during the creation phases of the equipment - pag.149).

The information correspond to the characteristics of the equipment at the selection of the command. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: (3) <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

Into the status bar, the system points out the following information: The activation of the filter. With details, if it has been activated: The Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equipment managed by Proxy Agent. The Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the equipment that are not managed by the Proxy Agent. The Managed by Proxy Agent and Not Managed by Proxy Agent box, the system displays into the window the all equipment.

The number of the displayed records and the total number of records (xx of yy). If it has not been activated any filter, the number of the displayed records corresponds to the total number of records.

To verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment

1. Select the Locate > Proxy Equipment List command. The Equipment Managed by Proxy window opens (Fig.37). 2. Select the wished equipment. 3. Select the Actions > Modify Proxy Parameters command. The Modify Proxy Parameters window opens. Box: Equipment Proxy Address. Address used by the Proxy Agent to acknowledge the equipment. Primary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of the machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment. Secondary IP Address Trap Destination. Address of an additional machine to which the Proxy Agent forwards the traps coming from the equipment.

4. To modify one or more parameter, type the new value into the relevant boxes. If a NE of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the addresses used by Proxy Agent to recognize the equipment belonging to the node are automatically configured. 5. Press Apply.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

240

COMMAND

The Command menu contains the commands: Line Test (pag.242). It verifies the real reach ability of the equipment. Connect (pag.244). It activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment. Disconnect (pag.246). It deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment. SNMP-Force NE Disconnect (pag.248). It forces the software disconnection of the SNMP equipment. SNMP-Ping (pag.249). It executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected SNMP equipment. Legacy-Reset&Connect (pag.250). It resets the information, stored into the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the configuration of one o more Legacy equipment and activates the dialogue between the equipment and the system itself. Alarm Re-alignment (pag.252). NMS5UX-B acquires the alarm status present on the equipment. Configuration Upload (pag.254). NMS5UX-B acquires the current configuration of equipment. SNMP-Configuration Download (pag.256). It transfers the configuration of an SNMP equipment to another SNMP equipment of the same type. Communication Server Board (pag.259). It activates/deactivates the connection between the NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller (pag.261). It executes the software reset of the SNMP equipment. PMP Clear Alarm Table (pag.262). It transfers to the PMP the alarm default table stored in the NMS5UX-B database.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

241

LINE TEST

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Line Test command verifies the real reach ability of the equipment. With details it is possible: To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment (pag.242) To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers (pag.242)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To execute the Line Test for one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, for which you wish to execute the test. 2. Select the Command > Line Test > Network Element command or press The LINE TEST command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The test was successful. FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers
1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish to execute the test. 2. Select the Command > Line Test > Container command. The LINE TEST command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. Another LINE TEST command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

242

Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The test was successful. FAILED!... The test is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

243

CONNECT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Connect command activates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment. With details it is possible: To connect one or more equipment (pag.244) To connect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.244)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To connect one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to connect. 2. Select the Command > Connect > Network Element command or press The CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status. Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms present on the NE. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To connect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs you wish to connect. 2. Select the Command > Connect > Container command. The CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

244

3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in disconnected or unreachable status. Another CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from brown it becomes green, light blue, yellow, orange or red depending on the severity of the alarms present on the NE. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

245

DISCONNECT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Disconnect command deactivates the connection between NMS5UX-B and equipment. With details it is possible: To disconnect one or more equipment (pag.246) To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers (pag.246)

For more info about the command go to pag.112.

To disconnect one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to disconnect. 2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Network Element command or press The DISCONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status. Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current colour it becomes brown. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) containing the NEs you wish to disconnect. 2. Select the Command > Disconnect > Container command. The DISCONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

246

3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected or unreachable status. Another DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

247

SNMP-FORCE NE DISCONNECT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Force NE Disconnect command forces the software disconnection of the SNMP equipment. With software disconnection we mean that the NMS5UX-B system set graphically the equipment in disconnected status (brown icon), but it does not communicate the operation to the equipment itself. The use of this command is necessary if the equipment remains graphically blocked in maintenance status (pink icon).

To force the software disconnection of one or more SNMP equipment

1. Select the SNMP NE or the group of SNMP NEs for which you wish to disconnect. 2. Select the Command > SNMP-Force NE Disconnect command. The FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected, unreachable or maintenance status. Another FORCED DISCONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current colour it becomes brown. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

248

SNMP-PING

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Ping command executes the Ping in order to check the presence and reachability of the selected SNMP equipment.

To executes the Ping of a SNMP equipment

1. Select the wished NE object managed by SNMP protocol. If an object of type ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node is selected, the ping will be sent to the IP address of the main equipment of the node. 2. Select the Command > SNMP-Ping command or press the right mouse button and select Ping. The Ping window opens, where the operation progress and the final statistics (number of sent and received packets, percentage of lost packet, etc.) are displayed. Each Ping command sends the test packet three times.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

249

LEGACY-RESET&CONNECT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Reset&Connect command resets the information, stored into the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the configuration of one o more Legacy equipment and activates the dialogue between the equipment and the system itself. With details it is possible: To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment (pag.250) To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers (pag.250)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment

1. Select the Legacy equipment that you wish to reset and connect. 2. Select the Command > Legacy-Reset&Connect > Network Element command. The RESET&CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The reset and connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list and in disconnected or unreachable status. Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes colour: from the current colour it becomes brown. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) containing the Legacy equipment that you wish to reset and connect. 2. Select the Command > Legacy-Reset&Connect > Container command. The RESET&CONNECT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

250

To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The reset and connection request will be forwarded only to the NEs present into the list and in disconnected or unreachable status. Another RESET&CONNECT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful, the symbol of the NE changes its current colour brown. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

251

ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm Re-alignment command acquires the alarm status present on the equipment. With details it is possible: To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment (pag.252) To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.252)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To re-align the alarms of one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs for which you wish to re-align the alarms. 2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Network Element command or press The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens where, for each NE, there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs for which you wish the re-align the alarms. 2. Select the Command > Alarm Re-alignment > Container command. The ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

252

The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another ALARM RE-ALIGNMENT command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

253

CONFIGURATION UPLOAD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Configuration Upload command acquires the current configuration of equipment. With details it is possible: To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment (pag.254) To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers (pag.254)

For more info about the command go to pag.113.

To acquire the configuration of one or more equipment

1. Select the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration. 2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Network Element command or press The UPLOAD command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute. The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets. .

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

To acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers

1. Select the container symbol(s) that contain the NEs, which you wish to acquire the configuration. 2. Select the Command > Configuration Upload > Container command. The UPLOAD command window opens. In the Command Scope area, the selected NEs, for which the operation will be execute, are displayed. Each NE has a dedicated record, which reports in order: logic address and type. To delete one or more NEs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. To filter the NEs according to the type, to activate/deactivate the boxes present in the Filter On Type area. 3. Press Execute.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

254

The request will be sent only to the NEs in connected status. Another UPLOAD command window opens, where for each NE there is the indication of: Address column. Logic address. Type field column. Type of NE. Status column. Result of the test: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation, the Stop push-button is available, which stops the procedure, if selected. For example, if the execution of the operation has been required for ten NEs, the system sends the command to the first NE, then it will pass to the next one. If, during the execution of the command for the second NE, the user presses Stop, the system will terminate the operation in progress and then will terminate the procedure. So, the list will display only the first two NEs. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

255

SNMP-CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Configuration Download command transfers the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type. With details it is possible: To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP equipment (pag.256). To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP equipment (pag.258).

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCPlus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). For more info on the real and virtual NE objects go to pag.79.

To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP equipment
1. Select the SNMP equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the SNMP equipment wished for the transferring of the configuration. 2. Select the Command > SNMP-Configuration Download command. The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38). 3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer. 4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Real Equipment (download) option. 5. Press Parameter Selection to define the configuration parameters you wish to transfer. The View Download Parameter window opens. In the area: Group, the logic groups, which the configuration parameters of the type of the considered equipment are subdivided in, are displayed. Attributes, the attributes relevant to the selected group in the Group area are displayed.

Each group and parameter is characterized by a check box. If the box is active, it points out that the group/parameter will be transferred during the download. If the box is inactive, it points out that the group/parameter will not be transferred during the download. 6. Activate the check boxes relevant to the groups/parameters that you do not wish to transfer. The activation of one group is prioritary with respect to the setting of the parameters contained in it. For example, if the group A is activated, when the configuration will be transferred, the values of the parameters associated to the group A will be transferred, even if the box of the single parameters is not active. In order to activate all the check boxes at the same time, press Select all. In order to deactivate all the check boxes at the same time, press Deselect all. 7. Select, in the Destination area, the NE or the group of NEs to which you wish to transfer the configuration. 8. Select the Command > Download Configuration command and confirm. In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

256

Fig.38 Configuration Download window

Menu bar (1)

List of (real and/or virtual) NEs, present in the map, with the same characteristics (type and values of the configuration parameters) of the selected NE, from which it is possible to COPY the configuration to transfer (2)

List of (real and/or virtual (3)) NEs, present in the map, with the same characteristics (type and values of the configuration parameters) of the selected NE, to which it is possible to TRANSFER the configuration (4)

This area displays, in form of messages, the operations in progress

Fig.38 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Command > Download Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE to one or more real NEs. Command > Copy Configuration. It transfer the configuration of a (real or virtual) NE to one or more virtual NEs. Action > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

In the list, it is possible to display real and virtual NEs at the same time. For the first ones, it is necessary to activate the Real Equipment box, for the second ones the Virtual Equipment box.

(3)

In the list, it is possible to display only real NEs or only virtual NEs. To display the real ones, it is necessary to select the Real Equipment (download) option, to display the virtual ones the Virtual Equipment (copy) option.

(4)

The list will not contain the (real or virtual) NE selected in the Source area, as the NE, which the configuration to be transferred from is taken, is automatically excluded by the list of the NEs which the configuration can be transferred to.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

257

To transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP equipment
1. Select the SNMP equipment whose type/configuration correspond to the characteristics of the wished SNMP equipment for the transfer of the configuration. 2. Select the Command > SNMP-Configuration Download command. The Configuration Download window opens (Fig.38). 3. Select, in the Source area, the (real or virtual) NE having the configuration you wish to transfer. 4. Activate, in the Destination area, the Virtual Equipment (copy) option. 5. Select from the list the NE or the group of NEs, which you wish to transfer to configuration to. 6. Select the Command > Copy Configuration command and confirm. In the Messages area, the start and the end of the operation are displayed as messages.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

258

COMMUNICATION SERVER BOARD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Communication Server Board command activates/deactivates the connection between the NMS5UX-B and the CommServer-S. With details it is possible: To connect one or more CommServer-S (pag.259) To disconnect one or more CommServer-S (pag.259)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed.

To connect one or more CommServer-S

1. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be connected. 2. Select the Command > Communication Server Board > Connect command. The CONNECT BOARD command window opens. Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following information: IP address and name. To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. 3. Press Execute. The connection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in disconnected status. Another CONNECT BOARD command window opens, where for each CS there is the indication of: CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS. CS Name column. CS name. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-button that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure. To print the displayed information press Print.

To disconnect one or more CommServer-S

It is not possible to disconnect a CS if it has at least one port in open status. In this case, first close the port and then disconnect the CS. The modalities to open/close the ports of the CommServer-S are reported in the equipment manual. 1. Select the CS or the group of CSs, to be disconnected. 2. Select the Command > Communication Server Board > Disconnect command. The DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

259

Into the Command Scope area, the system points out all the selected CSs for which it will be executed the operation. One record is devoted to each CS. Such a record orderly points out the following information: IP address and name. To delete one or more CSs from the list, select the equipment and press Remove From List. 3. Press Execute. The disconnection request will be forwarded only to the CSs present into the list and in connected or unreachable status. Another DISCONNECT BOARD command window opens, where for each CS there is the indication of: CS Board Address column. IP address of the CS. CS Name column. CS name. Status column. Result of the operation: OK. The operation was successful. FAILED!... The operation is failed; a message explaining the cause of the failure is displayed among brackets.

During the operation (in the Status field there is the wording Working) is available the Stop push-button that, when it is pressed, stops the procedure. To print the displayed information press Print.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

260

SNMP-RESET EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller command executes the software reset of the equipment. The operation consists in the re-initialization of all the communication channels (for example, with the supervision system) of the equipment. Its execution causes a temporary disconnection of the equipment from NMS5UX-B. The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc.

To execute the software reset of an SNMP equipment

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Command > SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller command. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

261

PMP CLEAR ALARM TABLE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The PMP Clear Alarm Table command transfer to the PMP equipment the default table of the alarms stored in the NMS5UX-B database. The files, which contains the tables of the default alarms relevant to each type of NE managed by the NMS5UX-B, are copied in the database during the installation of the system.

To transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms

1. Select the PMP. 2. Select the Command > PMP Clear Alarm Table command. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

262

FAULT

The Fault menu contains the following commands: Network Alarm History (pag.264). It displays/manages the alarm history stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map. Network Current Alarms (pag.273). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment of the open map. Old Alarm History (pag.279). It displays/manages the alarm history previously saved to file. NE Alarm History (pag.285). It displays/manages the alarm history of an equipment. NE Current Alarms (pag.286). It displays/manages the alarms active in an equipment. SNMP-NE History Log (pag.287). It displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of a SNMP equipment. SNMP-NE Command Log (pag.291). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the users, stored on the controller of a SNMP equipment. Alarm Summary (pag.295). It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map. SNMP-Event Statistics (pag.300). It displays the alarm statistics of all SNMP equipment present in the network. Transaction Log (pag.305). It displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users, who have modified the configuration of the network, of the supervision system and of an equipment.

The alarm generic term indicates the alarm/status/event signalling.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

263

NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map. With details it is possible: To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map (pag.264) To save/print the alarms list (pag.266) To copy the alarms list to a text editor (pag.267) To delete the alarms (pag.267) To mark the alarms (pag.267) To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.268) To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.268) To filter the alarms list (pag.269) To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.270) To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.270) To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.271) To sort the alarms list (pag.271)

As help to the description of the command, see: Modality of the updating of data (pag.271) Modality of recording the alarms (pag.272)

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press .

The Alarm History Browser window opens, where the alarm history of the equipment present in the open map is displayed (Fig.39). At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms greater than N. For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the newest to the oldest one, until N. The N limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to N, it is sufficient to delete some records. The N limit can be modified by the Superuser.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

264

Fig.39 Alarm History Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.39 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the alarms list. File > Export. It copies into a text editor the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the databases. Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the automatic updating of the data, the second one reactivates it. Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval between the recordings of two different alarms. View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map the symbol of the NE which the selected record is referred to. View > ClearHighlights. It removes the highlighted condition from all the symbols marked by the HighLight Equipment On Map command. View > Equipment Info. It displays the characteristics and the operating status of the NE which the selected record is referred to. View > Sort Mode. It sorts the alarms list. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event and if the signalling has been detected or is cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red No background No background No background No background No background No background Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Description Detected event signalling Detected status signalling Detected alarm with Warning severity Detected alarm with Minor severity Detected alarm with Major severity Detected alarm with Critical severity Cleared event signalling Cleared status signalling Cleared alarm with Warning severity Cleared alarm with Minor severity Cleared alarm with Major severity Cleared alarm with Critical severity

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

265

Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if the character is present: S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again. C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected and cleared.

Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing. Address. Logic address of the Network Element. Type. Type of Network Element. Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings is not provided with this information. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. (3) The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. Sort:... Order used to list the alarms. , indicates that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , indicates that the data are dynamically updated. , indicates that the displayed data are misaligned with respect to those stored in the database; to re-align them, select the symbol itself.

To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. To print or save to a file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. .

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

266

To copy the alarms list to a text editor

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. To copy into a text editor: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command. The list of displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. .

The default text editor window opens. For the use of the text program, refer to the specific documentation.

To delete the alarms

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. The operation is not available if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign. 1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. To delete from the list and from the NMS5UX-B database: A group of alarms, select the records and the Action > Delete > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Action > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Delete > All Alarms command. .

The records are deleted.

To mark the alarms

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. The operation is not executed if the symbol is present in the status bar of the Alarm History Browser window. To execute the operation, it is necessary first to update the window, selecting the check sign. After a record has been marked, the operation cannot be undone. 1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command. .

It is possible to mark an alarm also by a double click of the mouse button. The Acknowledged Info window opens. The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed. 3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max 16 characters); it can be used later as search criterion. The setting of this parameter is optional. 4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press Ok. If the selected record refers to an alarm:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

267

Detected, but not cleared yet, the record will be marked with the letter S. Detected and cleared, the record will be marked with the letter C.

Only for the records marked with the letter S, when the relevant alarm is cleared, it will be possible to mark, by means of the present procedure, the record again. After the second marking, the letter S will be replaced by the letter C.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge info of the alarm is displayed (Fig.40). Fig.40 Ack Info window .

Identification code (1)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected and cleared (2) (3)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected (2) (3)

Fig.40 notes (1) (2) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge. Option: (3) User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record. Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minutes:seconds>. Comment. Additional information.

If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in detected-cleared status, the data present in the SET Ack Info and CLEAR Ack Info areas are the same. If the alarm has never been acknowledged, all the fields will be empty.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or the symbol . 3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window command or the symbol . The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

268

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Filters Setting window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: <Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed. Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed. .

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match Address. Logical address of the Network Element. It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the map and press Add From Map. Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Address box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and choose the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one class of object at a time or all the class contemporarily selecting the All Objects item. Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message field) of the selected record. To set the criterion, select a record in the Alarm History Browser window. The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are selected. Match Message String. Description of the alarm. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made. Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to specify:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

269

The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Alarm History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the Alarm History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation. Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight. 3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command. In the map, the symbol of the NE is highlighted. To deselect the symbol, select the command View > ClearHighlights. .

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. To determinate the time interval that separates: The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command. The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command. The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different adjacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First Set->Last Clear command. The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different adjacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time >Clear ->Set command. .

A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

270

To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment. Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the specific Equipment Information windows. 3. Select the View > Equipment Info command. The Equipment Information window opens which displays the characteristics and the operating status of the equipment (Fig.26). .

To sort the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Alarm History command or press The Alarm History Browser window opens (Fig.39). 2. Select the View > Sort Mode command. The Sort Mode window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time. * CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order. .

4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Address (second sorting criterion). 6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not execute the sorting and closes the window). If pressed Apply, the Alarm History Browser window will list the records in the set order.

Modality of updating of the data

The information present in the Alarm History Browser window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the automatic updating is active (pag.268). At the opening of the Alarm History Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating of the information is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser). The presence of the symbol in the status bar of the window points out that the displayed information are misaligned with respect to those stored in the database of NMS5UX-B. This occurs when: Two or more NMS5UX users (each one on a different terminal) have opened the Alarm History Browser window for the same map and, in a window, some records have been marked or deleted, the system does not update all the open windows. This is necessary to avoid that the windows must be continuously refreshed while the users are using them. One or more records are marked in a Current Alarms Browser window. The record is not automatically marked also in the Alarm History Browser window, if open.

To update the window, it is sufficient to click on the symbol . It is possible to refresh the window also modifying the order of the displaying of the records (pag.271) or applying a filter (pag.269).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

271

The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a Alarm History Browser window does not influence the displaying of the information in the other open Alarm History Browser windows or in the Current Alarms Browser window.

Modality of recording of the alarms

The alarms are stored in the database of NMS5UX-B (Alarm History table). They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default 90 days), after which they are automatically deleted. Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Alarm History table (value that can be set by the Superuser) that can be stored. During the day, all the alarms sent by the equipment are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete, only among the raised and cleared signallings, the oldest records. If the alarm history contains all active and not cleared alarms and their number exceeds the maximum set value, the system will NOT delete any record. When the maximum number of record in the table is exceeded, the message Alarm History occupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed, warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser. In any moment, it is possible: To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the platform status bar (see pag.45). To manually delete the alarms (pag.267). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

272

NETWORK CURRENT ALARMS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Network Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) active in the equipment of the open map. With details it is possible: To display alarms active in the equipment of the map (pag.273) To save/print the alarms list (pag.275) To mark the alarms (pag.275) To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.275) To filter the alarms list (pag.276) To highlight, in the map, the symbol of an equipment (pag.277) To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.277) To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment (pag.278)

As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of updating of the data (pag.278).

To display alarms active in the equipment of the map

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press .

The Current Alarms Browser window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment in the map is displayed (Fig.41). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. Fig.41 Current Alarms Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

273

Fig.41 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarm list. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, so that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Action > Freeze Window/Unfreeze Window. The commands are displayed alternatively: the first one stops the automatic updating of the data, the seconds re-activates it. Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Elapsed Time. It determines the time interval that separates the recording of two different alarms. View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights, in the map, the symbol of the NE which the selected record is referred to. View > ClearHighlights. It deletes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked by the HighLight Equipment On Map commands. View > Equipment Info. It displays characteristics and the functional status of the NE which the selected record is referred to. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column: Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event; for the alarms the severity is pointed out too. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Description Event signalling Status signalling Alarm with Warning severity Alarm with Minor severity Alarm with Major severity Alarm with Critical severity

Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the Y character is present, the alarm has been marked.

Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. Address. Logic address of the Network Element. Type. Type of Network Element. Object. Name of the physical or logic object which the alarm is referred to. The event signallings are not provided with this information. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: (3) <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. , points out that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , points out that the data are dynamically updated.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

274

To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. To print or to save to file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database. .

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. Option available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged profile. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To mark the alarms

After having marked a record, the operation cannot be cancelled. 1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Action > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Action > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Action > Acknowledge > All Alarms command. .

It is also possible to mark an alarm, by means of a double click over it.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). At the opening of the window, the automatic updating of the information is, by default, inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Unfreeze Window command or the symbol . .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

275

3. To deactivate newly the automatic updating of the data, select the Action > Freeze Window command or the symbol . The Freeze Window and Unfreeze Window commands are displayed alternatively.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Filters Setting window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing the following operation: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. .

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box: Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one second. Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determinate a time interval. Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element. The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press Add From Map. Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.

The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box. It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting the All Objects item. Match Message String. Description of the selection. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases; deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

276

Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record. To set the criterion, select a record in the Current Alarms Browser window. The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are selected.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the box: Match Acknowledged, the list will display only the marked records. Match Unacknowledged, the list will display the not yet marked records.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays, in the Current Alarms Browser window, only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are displayed, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the Current Alarms Browser window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically cancelled. The window contains the push-buttons: Save.... It saves to file the set criteria. On the selection of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file into the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained. On the selection of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK. Delete.... It deletes the file where a specific previously saved set of filters is contained. On the selection of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file into the Files list and press OK. Clear Filters. It cancels the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation. Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight. 3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command. The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map. To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command. .

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. Select two different adjacent or not adjacent records 3. Select the View > Elapsed Time command. A window with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds opens. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

277

To verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Network Current Alarms command or press The Current Alarms Browser window opens (Fig.41). 2. Select the alarm relevant to the wished equipment Selecting two or more records relevant to different equipment, it is possible to open contemporarily the specific Equipment Information windows. 3. Select the View > Equipment Info command. The Equipment Information window opens (Fig.26) that displays the characteristics and the functional status of the equipment. .

Modality of updating of the data

The information present in the Current Alarms Browser window are dynamically updated only if the procedure of automatic updating is active (pag.268). At the opening of the Current Alarms Browser window, the procedure of automatic updating is, by default, inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

278

OLD ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Old Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) previously saved to file. With details it is possible: To display the alarm history present in the Old History table (pag.279) To save/print the alarms list (pag.281) To copy the alarms list into a text editor (pag.281) To filter the alarms list (pag.281) To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (pag.283) To verify the time interval between two different alarms (pag.283) To sort the alarms list (pag.284) To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.284)

In the Old History table is stored the alarm history saved by the Alarm History Backup (pag.423) command and restored by the Alarm History Restore (pag.424) command.

To display the alarm history present in the Old History table

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens, where the alarms history present in the Old History table of the equipment present in the open map is displayed (Fig.42). If, at the opening of the window, the table is empty, it is necessary to restore from the backup file saved before, the list of wished alarms (pag.424). These alarms will remain available in the Old History table and in the Old History Browser window, until a different list of alarms is restored. Fig.42 Old History Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

279

Fig.42 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints or save to file the alarms list. File > Export. It copies in a text editor the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Re-read Database. It updates the data present in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Elapsed Time. It determinates the time intervals that separates two different alarms. View > HighLight Equipment On Map. It highlights in the map, the symbol of the NE which the selected record refers to. View > ClearHighlights. It removes the condition of highlighted from all the symbols marked by the HighLight Equipment On Map command. View > Sort Mode. It sorts the list of records. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

For each alarm, it is pointed out in the column: Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status or event and if the signalling has been detected or cleared; for the alarms the severity is pointed out too. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red No background No background No background No background No background No background Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Description Detected event signalling Detected status signalling Detected alarm with Warning severity Detected alarm with Minor severity Detected alarm with Major severity Detected alarm with Critical severity Cleared event signalling Cleared status signalling Cleared alarm with Warning severity Cleared alarm with Minor severity Cleared alarm with Major severity Cleared alarm with Critical severity

Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked, if the character is present: S, means that the record has been marked when the alarm has been detected but not cleared yet. In this case, if the alarm is cleared, it is possible to mark the record again. C, means that the record has been not marked when the alarm has been detected and cleared.

Set Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. Clear Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing. Address. Logic address of the Network Element. Type. Type of Network Element. Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the alarm refers to. The event signallings is not provided with this information. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. (3) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If filters are not active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. Sort:... Order used to list the alarms.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

280

To save/print the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. To print or to save to a file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Print/Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To copy the alarms list into a text editor

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. To copy into a text editor: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Export > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Export > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

The default text editor window opens. For the use of the text editor program, refer to the specific documentation.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Filters Setting window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing the following options:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

281

<Severity>. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. Active Alarms, the detected alarms will be displayed. Cleared Alarms, the detected and cleared alarms will be displayed.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box: Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one second. Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determinate a time interval. Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element. The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press Add From Map. Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.

The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box. It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting the All Objects item. Match Selected Alarm. Description (Message) field of the selected record. To set the criterion, select a record in the Old History Browser window. The criterion is not available if no record has been selected or if two or more records are selected. Match Message String. Description of the selection. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases; deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made. Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it is possible to specify: The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

282

The system displays in the Old History Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the Old History Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the <Severity>, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation. Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. Select the alarm relevant to the equipment you wish to highlight. 3. Select the View > HighLight Equipment On Map command. The symbol of the equipment is highlighted in the map. To deselect the symbol, select the View > ClearHighlights command.

To verify the time interval between two different alarms

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. To determinate the time interval that separates: The detection of an alarm from its clearing, select a single detected/cleared alarm and then the View > Elapsed Time > Set->Clear Time command. The detection of two alarms, select two different adjacent or not adjacent records and then the View > Elapsed Time > Time between Set command. The detection of the oldest alarm with the clearing of the newest alarm, select two different adjacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > First Set->Last Clear command. The clearing of the oldest alarm with the detection of the newest alarm, select two different adjacent or not adjacent detected/cleared alarms and then the View > Elapsed Time > Clear>Set command

A window opens with the interval expressed in days/hours/minutes/seconds.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

283

To sort the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. Select the View > Sort Mode command. The Sort Mode window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Set Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time. * CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Ascending; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Descending; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order.

4. Select in the Sort by area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the box Group by Address (second sorting criterion). 6. Press Apply (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Set (it stores the setting, but does not execute the sorting and closes the window). If pressed Apply, the Old History Browser window will list the records in the set order.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm

1. Select the Fault > Old Alarm History command. The Old History Browser window opens (Fig.42). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. The Ack Info pop-up window opens, where the acknowledge information of the alarm is displayed. The description of the window is the same reported in Fig.40.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

284

NE ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The NE Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/event/status signallings (alarms) relevant ONLY to the selected equipment. The choice of the command opens the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39). The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. Network Alarm History (pag.264). Into the Alarm History Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter. If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Alarm History Browser window displays the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

285

NE CURRENT ALARMS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The NE Current Alarms command displays/manages the alarm/event/status signallings (alarms) active in the selected equipment. The choice of the command opens the Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41). The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. Network Current Alarms (pag.273). Into the Current Alarms Browser window to display the alarm relevant to other equipment, deactivate the Match Address filter. If a NE object of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type is selected, the Current Alarms Browser window displays the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

286

SNMP-NE HISTORY LOG

System access User profile

Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only, Read-Write Entry Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE History Log command displays/manages the alarm list stored on the controller of an equipment (NE Log). With details it is possible: To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment (pag.287) To create a NE Log (pag.288) To create more NE logs at the same time (pag.288) To display the content of a NE Log (pag.289) To delete a NE Log (pag.289) To delete all the NE logs of a SNMP equipment (pag.289) To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment (pag.290)

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, PMP. For more information about the NE Log go to pag.129.

To display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens. 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log. The area on the right displays the list of the NE Logs (Fig.43). If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no NE Log is available for the specific equipment. Fig.43 Equipment History Log Management Main Window

Logic address of the equipment which the NE logs present in the area below are referred to List of equipment selected in the map (1) List of the NE logs, stored in the disk, relevant to a single equipment (2)

List of the selected NE Logs for which it is possible to display the detail of the signallings (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

287

Fig.43 notes (1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains: The symbol representing the type of equipment. IP address of the equipment. Logic address of the equipment.

When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: (2) <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

Each NE Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time (hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation are contained. When a Log is inactive, it means that it has been selected to be displayed. When the NE Log is removed from the Selected Files List area, the record that represents it is reactivated.

(3)

Each NE Log is identified by a record that contains: The symbol that represents the type of the equipment. The IP address of the equipment. The logic address of the equipment. The date_time when the file has been created

To create a NE Log
1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log. 4. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the command: Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the NE Log and delete the alarms stored in the controller of the equipment. Send Read File Request, to create the NE Log, without deleting the alarms.

The created NE Log is displayed in the...history log file area. NE Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when it has been created. If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no alarm is stored in the equipment controller.

To create more NE Logs at the same time

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a NE Log. 4. Press Read log Files from Equipment. The created NE Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when they have been created. If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no alarm is stored in the equipment controller.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

288

To display the content of a NE Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to verify the NE Log. In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be pointed out. 4. Double click on the NE Log for which you wish to verify the content. The NE Log is displayed in the Selected files list area. The file, in the ...history log files area, is disabled. 5. Repeat the previous step, to insert all the wished NE Logs in the Selected files list area. 6. It is possible to remove from the Selected files list area: A single file selecting the icon that characterize the file and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up menu is displayed. Press Remove From List. All the files, pressing Clear selections.

7. Press Show selected files records. The NE Logger Browser window opens, where all the alarms stored on the selected NE Logs are listed. The elements present in the window are the same of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39), except for some commands, present in the Alarm History Browser window, but not in the NE Logger Browser window.

To delete a NE Log
1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete a NE Log. In the ...history log files area, the list of the NE Log relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed. 4. Select the NE Log and press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Delete File command and confirm. The file is deleted. A deactivated file cannot be deleted.

To delete all the NE Logs of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the NE Logs. 4. Select the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm. All the NE Logs of the equipment are deleted.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

289

To delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE History Log command. The Equipment History Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.43). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the alarms. 4. Select the NE Log command and press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Send Delete File Request command. It is possible to delete the alarms stored in the controller of an equipment also during the creation of a NE Log (pag.288).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

290

SNMP-NE COMMAND LOG

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Command Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the users, stored on the controller of an equipment (NE Command Log). With details it is possible: To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment (pag.291) To create a Command Log (pag.292) To create more Command Logs at the same time (pag.293) To display the content of a Command Log (pag.293) To delete a Command Log (pag.294) To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment (pag.294) To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment (pag.294)

The command is available only for the SNMP equipment except for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc. For more information about the NE Command Log go to pag.294.

To display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main window opens. 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log. The area on the right displays the list of the Command Logs (Fig.44). If the message No files available for equipment ... is displayed, no Command Log is available for the specific equipment. Fig.44 Equipment History Command Log Management Main window

Logic address of the equipment which the NE logs present in the area below are referred to List of equipment selected in the map (1) List of the NE logs, stored in the disk, relevant to a single equipment (2)

List of the selected NE Logs for which it is possible to display the detail of the signallings (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

291

Fig.44 notes (1) Each equipment is identified by a record that contains: The symbol representing the type of equipment. IP address of the equipment. Logic address of the equipment.

When the record is selected, the border of the symbol becomes red. (2) Each Command Log is identified by a record, where the date (day-month-year) and the time (hour:minutes:seconds) of the file creation are contained.

To create a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log. 4. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the command: Send Read/Delete File Request, to create the Command Log and delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of the equipment. Send Read File Request, to create the Command Log, without deleting the list of the operations. The Command Log Filter Win opens. To save on Command Log: All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment. A group of operations, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then, press Read log Files from Equipment. The available criteria are the following ones: Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation. To set the criterion type a IP address. Occurred date. Execution date of the operations. To set the criterion, activate the box: Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one. After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the operations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.

Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible to set a time interval. User. Name of the user who has executed the operation. To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name. Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the operation refers. To set the criterion type into the box the desired object. The created Command Log is displayed in the...history log file area. Command Log is automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when it has been created. If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no operation is stored in the equipment controller.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

292

To create more Command Logs at the same time

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to create a Command Log. 4. Press Read log Files from Equipment. The Command Log Filter Win opens. 5. To save on Command Logs: All the operations, press Read log Files from Equipment. A group of operation, set one or more parameters present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use to determine the group of operations to save in the Log and, then, press Read log Files from Equipment. The available criteria are the following ones: Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation. To set the criterion type a IP address. Occurred date. Execution date of the operations. To set the criterion, activate the box: Before and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the operations whose execution date is equal to or older than the set one. After and type the wished date in the boxes below. The Log will save only the operations whose execution date is equal to or more recent than the set one.

Activating the boxes at the same time and property setting the dates, it is possible to set a time interval. User. Name of the user who has executed the operation. To set the criterion type into the box the desired use name. Object Identifier. Name of the physical or logic object of the equipment to which the operation refers. To set the criterion type into the box the desired object. The created Command Logs are automatically saved by the system with the name corresponding to the date_time when they have been created. If the Uploaded file is empty. File is not saved message is displayed, the Log file is not created, as no operation is stored in the equipment controller.

To display the content of a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to verify the Command Log. In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Logs relevant to the selected equipment will be pointed out. 4. Double click on the Command Log for which you wish to verify the content. The Commands Log File Information window is displayed where, for each operation, is pointed out in the column: Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. Source Address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation. User. Name of the user who has executed the operation. Object. Object to which the operation refers. Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers. Value Set. Set value.

The presence of the symbol points out that the information is not available because it is a not significant one for the type of operation to which it refers.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

293

To delete a Command Log

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Double click, in the Selected Equipment area, the NE for which you wish to delete a Command Log. In the ...history log files area, the list of the Command Log relevant to the selected equipment will be displayed. 4. Select the Command Log and press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Delete File command and confirm. The file is deleted.

To delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment

1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete all the Command Logs. 4. Select the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Delete All Files command and confirm. All the Command Logs of the equipment are deleted.

To delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment
1. Select one or more SNMP equipment. 2. Select the Fault > SNMP-NE Command Log command. The Equipment History Command Log Management Main Window opens (Fig.44). 3. Select, in the Selected Equipment area, the equipment for which you wish to delete the list of the operations. 4. Select t the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Send Delete File Request command. It is possible to delete the list of the operations stored in the controller of an equipment also during the creation of a Command Log (pag.292).

NE Command Log (more info)

NE Command Log is a file where the system records the operations executed by the SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user stored into the controller of the selected equipment. The Log read from equipment (Command Log) is stored on the disk of the machine and it remains available for subsequent consultations done by the user. The list of the Command Log and their contents can be displayed only through the Equipment History Command Log Management Main window (Fig.44).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

294

ALARM SUMMARY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm Summary command displays/manages the summary of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the NMS5UX-B database, relevant to the equipment of the open map. With detail it is possible: To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the map (pag.295) To filter the alarms list (pag.297) To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (pag.298) To reset the indication of status change (pag.299) To set the automatic updating of the data (pag.299)

To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the map
1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command. The Siae Alarm Summary window opens, where the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the map is displayed (Fig.45). Fig.45 Siae Alarm Summary window

Activation status of the filters (1)

Automatic updating of data (2) Data refresh time (3)

Indication of "Status" change (4)

Number of alarms subdivided according type and severity (5)

Number of alarms detected but not cleared yet (8) Criterion used to subdivide the alarms (6) Push-buttons (9) Number of alarms detected and cleared (7)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

295

Fig.45 notes (1) Label: Filters: NONE. There are not filters active. Filters: <applied filters>. There are indicated filters active.

It is possible to insert a description in this area (pag.297). (2) If the box is: Active, it means that the window is automatically updated each N seconds. The parameter N is displayed in the Timeout (sec) box. In this condition the Refresh push-button is not available. Inactive, it means that the window is not automatically updated. To update it, it is necessary to press Refresh.

(3)

Interval (in seconds) between an automatic update of the data and the next one The parameter is meaningful only when the Auto Refresh box is active.

(4)

The presence of the asterisk next to the record points out that, from when the Siae Alarm Summary window has been opened or from the last selection of the Clear Alert push-button, a change occurred: an alarm has been detected or cleared. It is possible that, in the Siae Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records relevant to the type of signallings/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters. When the box is deactivated, relevant to a type of signalling/severity, the Filtered record appears in the Siae Alarm Summary window. This record displays the total alarms of the only records present in the window. For example, if in the window there are only the Critical (Cleared 20 - Active 15) and Major (Cleared 5 - Active 3) records, the Filtered record will indicate the sum of their alarm (Cleared 25 - Active 18). In detail, the option: Cleared (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected/cleared alarms relevant only to the records present in the window. Active (Filtered record), points out the total number of detected but not cleared alarms relevant only to the records present in the window.

(5)

(6)

Record: Critical. Alarms with Critical severity. Major. Alarms with Major severity. Minor. Alarms with Minor severity. Warning. Alarms with Warning severity. Status. Status signallings. Normal. Event signallings. All. All the signallings (alarms, status, events).

(7)

Option: Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity. Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity. Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity. Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity. Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signallings. Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signallings. Cleared (All record). Total number of detected/cleared signallings.

(8)

Option: Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity. Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity. Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity. Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity. Active (Status record). Detected status signallings. Active (Normal record). Detected event signallings. Active (All record). Total number of detected signallings.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

296

(9)

Push-button: Refresh. It updates the data. The push-button is not available when the Auto Refresh box is active. Clear Alert. It resets the signallings of status change. Filter. It filters the alarms list.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command. The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45). 2. Press Filter. The Filters Setting window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing the following option: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, if active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed.

The deactivation of a box causes the deletion of the relevant record from the Siae Alarm Summary window and the displaying of the Filtered record (Fig.45). Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box: Occurred After, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list will display only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, choosing the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time by steps of one hour, while choosing the Fine Granularity item by steps of one second. Activating contemporary the boxes and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determinate a time interval. Match Address. Logic address of the Network Element. The logic addresses can be set by one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the interested NEs, directly in the map and press Add From Map. Type the logic address of the NE in the Source box and press Add.

The values set in this way will be inserted in the area located next to the Match Address box. It is possible to delete from the list a single item pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove push-button, or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one class of objects at a time or all the classes contemporarily selecting the All Objects item.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

297

Match Message String. Description of the selection. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. Activating the Case Sensitive box, there will be a distinction between upper and lower cases; deactivating the box, instead, no distinction will be made.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the list will display the marked record. Furthermore it is possible to specify: The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the records not marked yet will be displayed. Description. Description displayed in the Filters:... area of the Siae Alarm Summary window (Fig.45). To set or modify the description, type an alphanumeric string in the box (minimum 1 maximum 128 characters). 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Siae Alarm Summary window only the record that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the Siae Alarm Summary window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete.... It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear Filters. It clears the activation of all the filters, except for the Match Severity, Match Acknowledged, Match Unacknowledged criteria. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation. Help. It opens the on-line manual.

The path indicated in the Selection box cannot be changed.

To display the alarms stored in the alarm history

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command. The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45). 2. Select the option relevant to the type/severity of signalling, for which you wish to display the relevant list stored in the alarm history. The Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) opens, where only the alarms of the selected type and severity are displayed. For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the Alarm History Browser window opens, with displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity. To display the remaining of the alarm, it is sufficient to change the filter.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

298

To reset the indication of status change

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command. The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45). 2. Press Clear Alert. The asterisks are removed.

To set the automatic updating of the data

1. Select the Fault > Alarm Summary command. The Siae Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.45). 2. To ACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, activate the Auto Refresh box. The data are automatically refresh each N seconds, displayed in the Timeout (sec) box. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (numeric value between 30 and 999 seconds). It is possible to modify the value also when the automatic refresh is active. In this case, at next refresh after the modification of the timeout, the new value will be acquired as valid. 3. To DEACTIVATE the automatic refresh of the window, deactivate the Auto Refresh box.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

299

SNMP-EVENT STATISTICS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Event Statistics command displays the statistics of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) of the SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval (pag.300) To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment (pag.302) To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms (pag.302) To delete the alarms (pag.303) To filter the alarms (pag.303)

The statistics refer to the alarms occurred on all the SNMP equipment present in the network.

To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command. The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46). 2. Select the Graphics > Networks Event Counters command. An histogram graph opens. Each histogram identifies a day. For each day, the number of detected alarms of all the SNMP equipment present in the network, is pointed out. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed. The parameters can be configured by the Superuser. 3. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that day in periods of 15 minutes. Each histogram identifies a quarter of hour. For each quarter, the number of alarms, detected by all the SNMP equipment present in the network, is displayed. Only the 15 minute periods, where alarms are present, are displayed. Press Up to return to the previous display. 4. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the statistics of the alarms of that day/quarter, subdivided by single equipment. Each histogram identifies an equipment. For each equipment, the logic address, between brackets, the equipment type and the number of detected alarms are pointed out. Press Up to return to the previous display. 5. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equipment in the specific day/quarter. Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of time that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are pointed out. The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41). 6. Press Up to return to the previous display.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

300

Fig.46 NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window

Menu bar (1) Type of visualization (2) Push-buttons (3)

Fig.46 notes (1) Menu: (2) (3) File > Close. It closes the window. Graphics > Network Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by days. Graphics > Equipment Event Counters. It displays the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment. Graphics > Event Frequency. It display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms. Maintenance > Filtered Delete. It deletes the specific group of the alarms stored into the statistics database. Maintenance > Delete All. It deletes all alarms stored into the statistics database. Help > On Usage. It opens the help on-line. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

The wording changes depending on the displayed type of statistics. Push-button: Up. It returns to the immediately previous display Reload. It updates the data present in the window. Filter. It filters the list of the alarms. When one or more filter criteria are active, an asterisk is present in the push-button.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

301

To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command. The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46). 2. Select the Graphics > Equipment Event Counters command. An histogram graph opens. Each histogram identifies a SNMP equipment. For each NE, the logic address, between brackets, the equipment type and the number of alarms, detected and stored in the statistics database, are pointed out. The equipment are listed in decreasing order according to the number of detected alarms and only for the SNMP equipment of the network that have generated alarms. 3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment to display the statistics of the relevant alarms subdivided in days. Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed. The parameters can be configured by the Superuser. Press Up to return to the previous display. 4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistics of the alarms of that equipment/day subdivided in periods of 15 minutes. Each histogram identifies a quarter. Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed. Press Up to return to the previous display. 5. Double click on the histogram of a quarter to display the detail of the alarms detected by the equipment in the specific day/quarter. Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm, the description of the alarm and the number of times that the alarm has been detected in the specific period are detected. The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41). Press Up to return to the previous display.

To display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command. The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46). 2. Select the Graphics > Event Frequency command. An histogram graph opens. Each histogram identifies an alarm. For each alarm is pointed out: Logical address and, between brackets, type of SNMP equipment where the alarm has been detected. Description of the alarm. The description of the alarm is the same reported in the Message field of the Alarm History Browser window (Fig.39) and Current Alarms Browser window (Fig.41). Number of times that the alarm has been detected and stored in the statistics database. The alarms are listed in decreasing order according to the number of times the alarm has been detected. 3. Double click on the histogram of an equipment/alarm to display the statistics of the alarm detection subdivided in days. Each histogram identifies a day. By default, the last 30 days, where alarms are present, are displayed. The parameters can be configured by the Superuser. Press Up to return to the previous display. 4. Double click on the histogram of a day to display the statistic of the detection of the subject alarm/day, subdivided in periods of 15 minutes. Each histogram identifies a quarter. Only the 15 minutes periods, where alarms are present, are displayed. Press Up to return to the previous display.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

302

To delete the alarms

This operation allows deleting ONLY the alarms stored in the statistics database and not in the general database of NMS5UX-B (for this operation, refer to pag.267). 1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command. The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46). 2. To delete from the statistics database: All the alarms, select the Maintenance > Delete All command and confirm. The records are deleted from the database. A group of alarms, select the Maintenance > Filtered Delete command. The Filtered Delete window opens. Select one or more of the boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use to determine the group of alarms to delete. The activation of each box expands the window, displaying a section containing the options: Match Date. Date/time. From the pop-up menu, select the value: ==, to delete the alarms detected at the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right. >=, to delete the alarms detected in the days after the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself. <=, to delete the alarms detected in the days before the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself. <>, to delete the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time pointed out by the cursor on the right.

To modify the date/time pointed out by the cursor, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or select the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of one quarter). Match Source. Logic address of the equipment. To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok. The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box. It is possible to delete all the items from the list pressing Reset. Match Object. Physical/logical objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time selecting the All Objects item. Containing string. Description of the alarm. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. Press Delete. The records are deleted by the database.

To filter the alarms

1. Select the Fault > SNMP-Event Statistics command. The NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window opens (Fig.46). 2. Press Filter. The Filtered Graph Creation window opens. 3. Press the push-button relevant to the statistics which you wish to apply the filters to: Network Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by days. Event Frequency, statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarms.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

303

Equipment Event Counters, statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment.

4. Select one or more of the boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use to filter the alarms. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the options: Match Date. Date/time. From the pop-up menu, select the value: ==, to display the alarms detected at the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right. >=, to display the alarms detected in the days after the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself. <=, to display the alarms detected in the days before the day/time pointed out by the cursor on the right and in the day/time itself. <>, to display the alarms detected in the days between the two dates/time pointed out by the cursor on the right.

To modify the date/time pointed out by the cursor, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or select the arrows placed next to the bar (the value is moved at steps of a quarter). Match Source box. Logic address of the equipment. To set the criterion press Select. Select the wished equipment from the list and press Ok. The selected equipment is inserted in the area below the Match Source box. It is possible to delete all the items from the list pressing Reset. Match Object box. Physical/logical objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Open the Equipment Type menu and select the type of NE. Open the Object menu and set the wished object.

It is possible to set only one object class at a time or all the classes at the same time selecting the All Objects item. Containing string box. Description of the alarm. To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field. 5. Press OK. For the selected statistics, only the records that satisfy the activated criteria are displayed. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both displayed and hidden. When the type of displayed statistics is changed or the NMS5UX Alarm Statistics window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically removed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

304

TRANSACTION LOG

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete the operations. The Transaction Log command displays/manages the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users, who have modified the configuration of the network, of the supervision system and of an equipment. With details it is possible: To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users (pag.305) To save/print the list of the operations (pag.306) To delete the operations (pag.307) To filter the list of the operations (pag.307)

As help to the description of the command, see par. Recording modality of the operations (pag.308)

To display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users

1. Select the Fault > Transaction Log command. The Transaction Browser window opens, where the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users is displayed (Fig.47). If the user profile of the user who selected the command is: Superuser, the list points out the operations executed by the NMS5UX users of all the existing maps. Privileged, Advanced, Normal or Entry the list points out the operations executed by the NMS5UX users of one's map.

In order to speed up the reading from database and not to display too much old records, at the opening of the window only the operation executed in the last N days (default N=10 days, configurable by Superuser) are displayed. This does not mean that the oldest records cannot be displayed, but that a filter is automatically applied. Fig.47 Transaction Browser window

Menu bar (1)

List of operations (2)

Status bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

305

Fig.47 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Print/Save. It prints or saves to file the list of the operations. File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Delete Records. It deletes the operations. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the data present in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the list of operations. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality. Operation. Type of operation (see Tab.13). Time. Date/time when the operation has been executed. Map Name. Name of the map where the operation has been executed. User Name. Name of the user who executed the operation. Element. Network Element involved in the operation. Object. Name of the physical or logical object which the operation is referred to. Information. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the operation.

For each operation, the column indicate:

The presence of the symbol - points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for the type of operation which it is referred to. The information present in the window corresponds to the operations executed until the command is selected or the updating has been executed. (3) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. View... Activation of one or more filters. Date and time when the window has been opened or refreshed.

To save/print the list of operations

1. Select the Fault > Transaction Log command. The Transaction Browser window opens (Fig.47). 2. To print or to save to a file: All the operations stored in the DB, select the File > Print/Save > All records command. The displayed operations, select the File > Print/Save > Filtered records command. If no filters are active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. An operations group, select the records and the File > Print/Save > Selected records command.

The Output Device Selection window opens. 3. To print the data: a. Select the Output To Printer option. In the Printer Name box, the default printer is automatically set (Default Printer). If you want to print to another peripheral device, type in the box the name of the printer you wish to use. b. Choose the layout of the page, selecting the Landscape or Portrait option. c. Press OK. The format used to print the information corresponds to the format used to display it. To save the data to a file: a. Select the Output To File option. b. Type, in the File Name box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. Typing only the filename, this will be saved in the /opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name> directory. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

306

To delete the operations

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. 1. Select the Fault > Transaction Log command. The Transaction Browser window opens (Fig.47). 2. Select the operations you wish to delete 3. Select the Action > Delete records command and confirm. The records are deleted.

To filter the list of operations

1. Select the Fault > Transaction Log command. The Transaction Browser window opens (Fig.47). 2. Select the View > Set Filter command. The View Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: Match user. NMS5UX user who executed the operation. To set the criterion, select the name of the user from the list. Match date. Time interval when the operation has been executed. To set the criterion, move the indicators of the Events occurred on or ... scrolling bars to set the wished time interval. In the Transaction Browser window, the operations whose execution date is after that displayed in the Events occurred on or after field and before that displayed in the Events occurred on or before field are displayed. Activating the Granularity boxes located next to the bars (Coarse wording), it is possible to modify the date/time by step of one hour, while deactivating the boxes (Fine wording) by steps of one seconds. Match operation. Category or single operation. To set the criterion: Select the wished category in the Categories list. In the Operations list, the operations associated to the category are displayed. Select the wished operation. If no operation is selected in the Transaction Browser window, the records relevant to all the operations of the category will be displayed. The categories and the relevant operations are described in Tab.13. Match Object. Physical/logic objects that compose the NE. To set the criterion: Select the type of NE in the Element area. Select the wished object in the Objects area.

If no object is selected in the Transaction Browser window the records relevant to all the objects of the NE will be displayed Not all the Network Elements have a list of objects. Match Field String. Alphanumeric string: in the Transaction Browser window all the records containing the set wording are displayed, in the Element, Object or Information field. To set the criterion: Select the option relevant to the field of the Transaction Browser window where you wish the filter is applied: Element, Object or Information.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

307

Type the string of characters in the text field. Pressing Get Selected Transaction, in the text field the value present in the field of the record highlighted in the Transaction Browser window will be displayed (Element, Object or Information). Activating the Exact Match box, only the records containing in the field exactly the set wording will be considered; deactivating the box the operations that contain in the field a value, where the set wording is contained too, will be displayed.

Match map. Map which the NMS5UX user who executed the operation is associated to. To set the criterion, select the name of the map from the list. The filter is available only by the Superuser.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays, in the Transaction Browser window, only the records that satisfy some activated criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden one. The window contains also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-buttons. When the Transaction Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically cleared.

Recording modality of the operations

The list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users records all the operations that have involved any modification of the network configuration (for example, addition of a NE), of the configuration of the supervision system (for example, addition of a user) or of the configuration of a NE (for example, change of a parameter). The detail of the operation is reported in Tab.13. The operations are stored in the database of NMS5UX-B (Transaction Log table). They remain stored for a certain number of days (which can be configured by the Superuser - by default 90 days), after which they are automatically deleted. Also, it is possible to configure the maximum number of records in the Transaction Log table (value that can be set by the Superuser) that can be stored. During the day, all the operations are stored in the table (even if their number exceeds the maximum value of records). At midnight, the number of record is checked; if this exceeds the maximum set number, the system will delete the oldest records. When the maximum number of records in the table is exceeded, the message Transaction Log occupation exceeded 100% is periodically displayed warning about the critical situation. The display of the message and the frequency with which it is displayed can be configured by the Superuser. In any moment, it is possible: To display the occupation status of the table Transaction Log in the platform status bar (see pag.45). To manually delete the operations (pag.307). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

308

Tab.13 Operations (Transaction Log) Category Access (operation of access to NMS5UX-B) Login Logout Operation Access Not Authorized Description Failed attempt of access to the system (wrong password) Login of an user to the system Logout of an user from the system Connection of one or more NEs Disconnection of one or more NEs Reset and connection of one or more NEs Creation of an equipment Deletion of an equipment Modification of the characteristics of an equipment Modification of the severity of the alarms for as type of NE Saving of the current configuration of an equipment in its backup configuration Operation executed within CrossConnect Manager Transfer of a configuration created before into an equipment Creation of an object within an equipment Deletion of an object within an equipment It modifies the sending status of the alarms/trap for an equipment Download of software of a peripheral unit of NE Reset of the main controller of an equipment Modification of the operating parameters of an equipment Download of the equipment software Special operation executed on an equipment Meaningful operation executed inside the Time Slot Manager Saving to disk of the system database Deletion of one or more records from the Alarm History Browser window Restore from disk of a file of Alarm History Restore from disk of a file of Performance Monitoring database Saving to disk of the Alarm History database Saving to disk of the Performance Monitoring Closing of one or more ports of CommServer-S Connection of a CommServer-S (CS) Disconnection of a CommServer-S (CS) Opening of one or more ports of CommServer-S Creation of a NMS5UX user Deletion of a NMS5UX user Modification of the characteristics of a NMS5UX user Creation of an equipment in a Ring Creation of a Link in a Ring Creation of a Path in a Ring Deletion of an equipment in a Ring Deletion of a Link in a Ring Deletion of a Path in a Ring Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a Ring Modification of the characteristics of a Link in a Ring Modification of the characteristics of a Path in a Ring Scheduling of a Path in a Ring Deletion of one or more records from the RM - Alarm History window of a Ring Alignment of a Path in a Ring Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a Ring

Connect Eq NMS - Commands (operations relevant to the Disconnect Eq connections to NE) Reset-Connect Eq Add Element NMS - Edit (operations relevant to the Delete Element map) Modify Element Network Severity Change Backup Config NMS - Eq. Manager (operations relevant to the configuration of the NE) Cc Operation Config Download Create Object Delete Object Equipment Severity Change Periph Download Reset Eq. Controller Set Attributes Software Download Special Action Ts Operation Database Backup NMS - Log (operations relevant to the Delete Alr History NMS5UX-B database) Restore Alr History Restore Perf Save Alr History Save Perf Close Port NMS - Special (operations relevant to the Connect CS CS equipment) Disconnect CS Open Port Create User NMS - User (operations relevant to the Delete User NMS5UX users) Modify User RM - Edit (operations relevant to a Ring configuration) RM - Add Equipment RM - Add Link RM - Add Path RM - Delete Equipment RM - Delete Link RM - Delete Path RM - Modify Equipment RM - Modify Link RM - Modify Path RM - Schedule Path RM - Delete Alr History RM Log (operations relevant to the Ring Manager database) RM - Path alignment RM Special (operations relevant to the RM - Set attributes Path and NE)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

309

Category VM - Edit (operations relevant to a VLAN Map configuration)

Operation VM - Add Equipment VM - Add Link VM - Add VLAN VM - Delete Equipment VM - Delete Link VM - Delete VLAN VM - Modify Equipment VM - Modify Link VM - Modify VLAN

Description Creation of an equipment in a VLAN Map Creation of a Link in a VLAN Map Creation of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map Deletion of an equipment in a VLAN Map Deletion of a Link in a VLAN Map Deletion of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a VLAN Map Modification of the characteristics of a Link in a VLAN Map Modification of the characteristics of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map Deletion of one or more records from the VM - Alarm History window of a VLAN Map Alignment of a VLAN path in a VLAN Map Modification of the characteristics of an equipment in a VLAN Map

VM - Delete Alr History VM Log (operations relevant to the VLAN Manager database) VM - Path alignment VM Special (operations relevant to the VM - Set attributes VLAN path and NE)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

310

TOOLS

Tools menu contains the following commands: Alarm Notification via e-mail (pag.312). It displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail. SNMP-Command Executor (pag.318). It executes series of SNMP commands stored on file. SNMP-NE Monitoring (pag.321). It executes, for the SNMP equipment, the periodic monitoring of parameters. SNMP-Auto Discovery (pag.328). It manages the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system; the automatic creation and the connection of the discovered NE objects. SNMP-Rmon (pag.337). It displays/manages, for the SNMP equipment, the RMON standard (groups: Statistics, History and Alarm). SNMP-XML Export (pag.353). It manages the export of the configuration data of the SNMP equipment in XML format.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

311

ALARM NOTIFICATION VIA E-MAIL

Depending on specific user profile, follow the specific description: Superuser (pag.312) Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged (pag.316)

Alarm Notification via e-mail - Superuser

System access User profile Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The Alarm Notification via e-mail command displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail. With detail for the Superuser, it is possible: To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via email (pag.312) To add an operator (pag.313) To modify the characteristics of the operators (pag.314) To delete an operator (pag.315) To activate/deactivate an operator (pag.315) To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (pag.315) To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via e-mail (pag.315)

For more information on the functionality of alarm notification via e-mail go to pag.317.

To display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens, where the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail is displayed (Fig.48). Fig.48 Alarm notification - Operator Management window

Menu bar (1)

Operators list (2)

Push-buttons bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

312

Fig.48 notes (1) Menu: (2) Edit > Exit. It closes the window. Edit > Filters. It creates a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via e-mail. Edit > Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window. Operator > Create. It adds an operator. Operator > Modify. It modifies the characteristics of an operator. Operator > Delete. It deletes an operator. Alert > Clear. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the information that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail. Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

For each operator, is reported in the column: Operator Name. Name of the operator. Status. Status of the operator. Active. The operator is active: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail. Not Active. The operator is not active: he does not receive the alarm notifications via e-mail. Active. The operator has received an e-mail and has not acknowledged yet its reception. Not Active. The operator has not received an e-mail.

Alert. Acknowledge status of the operator.

(3)

Email. E-mail address which the alarm notifications are sent to.

Push-button: Exit. It closes the window. Refresh. It adds the information contained in the window. Clear Alert. It acknowledges an operator, in such a way that the system stores the information that the operator has read the e-mail and reactivates him to receive e-mail.

To add an operator
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Select the Operator > Create command. The New operator insert window opens. 3. Type, in the Name box, the name you wish to assign to the operator (alphanumeric string of maximum 30 characters). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different operators. Moreover, after the creation of the operator, the name cannot be modified. 4. Select the Active box, according to the status you wish to assign to the operator: Active box ( ). Active operator: he receives the alarm notifications via e-mail. Inactive box. Inactive operator: he does not receive the alarm notifications via e-mail.

5. Type, in the Password box, the access code relevant to the new operator (alphanumeric string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters). For safety reason, an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character. The name/password of the operator will be required by the system to the NMS5UX user with privileged, advanced, normal or entry profile who selects the Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The correct setting of the parameters will allow these NMS5UX users acknowledging the possible reception of e-mails by the specific operator and re-enable him to the e-mail reception.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

313

6. Set the time interval during which the operator, if enabled, must receive the alarm notification via email. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the criteria you wish to use: In the Date area, select the option: Disabled. The date criterion is disabled. From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the day/month/year pointed out in the relevant field in the window on the right. Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the day/month/year pointed out in the relevant field in the window on the right. From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the day/month/ year pointed out in the relevant field in the window on the right. Disabled. The criterion is disabled. From. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from the hour/minute pointed out in the relevant fields on the right. Until. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails until the hour/minute pointed out in the relevant fields on the right. From-To. The operator will be enabled to receive e-mails from and until the hour/minute pointed out in the relevant fields on the right.

In the Hour area, select the option:

In the Days of week area, activate the boxes relevant to the days of the week for which you wish the operator receives e-mails. The Festivity box refers to all the days of the year corresponding to the festivity days in ones country. Parameter configurable by Superuser.

7. Set a possible filter relevant to the type of alarm, whose detection must be notified to the operator email: a. Press Select Filter. The Select Filter window opens. b. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to retrieve. The list points out the files present in the predefined directory (pointed out in the Selection box). Modify the path, if necessary. c. Press OK. If you wish to create a new filter, press Filter. The Filter window opens. The modalities of filter creation are the same described at pag.315 from step 3. 8. Type the e-mail address of the operator in the EMail box. 9. In the Secondary Operator area, set the data for the reception of the e-mail by a second operator if the main operator does not acknowledge the reception of the mail: Type, in the Notification delay box, the time interval (expressed in minutes) elapsed which, if the main operator has not acknowledge the reception of the mail, this one is forwarded also to the second operator. Type, in the Email box, the e-mail address of the second operator.

10.Press Ok.

To modify the characteristics of the operators

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Act in one of the following ways: Select the operator you wish to modify and then the Operator > Modify command. Double click on the record relevant to the operator.

The Operator Modify window opens, where the characteristics of the operator are displayed. 3. Make the wished changes. The modality to set the parameters are the same described at pag.313. It is not possible to modify the name of the operator. 4. Press Ok.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

314

To delete an operator
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Select the operator you wish to delete. 3. Select the Operator > Delete command. The Operator delete window opens, where the characteristics of the operator are displayed. 4. Press Ok. The operator is removed from the list.

To activate/deactivate an operator
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Select the wished operator. 3. Select the Operator > Modify command. The Operator modify window opens. 4. To ACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, activate the Active box ( 5. Press Ok. The new status of the operator is displayed in the Status column. ). To DEACTIVATE the operator to the reception of the alarm notifications via, deactivate the Active box.

To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Select the operator you wish to acknowledge. 3. Select the Alert > Clear command or the Clear Alert. The operator is acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.

To create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via e-mail
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alarm notification - Operator Management window opens (Fig.48). 2. Select the Edit > Filters command. The Filter window opens. 3. Type the name of the new filter in the Filter Name box.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

315

4. Set one or more of the following parameters according to the filter criteria you wish to use: Severity of the alarm. In the Severity area, select the option: All alarms. The detection of all the alarms will be notified to the operator. Minor Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Minor, Major or Critical severity will be notified to the operator. Major Critical. The detection of the alarms with Major and Critical severity only will be notified to the operator. Critical. The detection of the alarms with Critical severity only will be notified to the operator.

Type of equipment. In the Equipment Type area, activate the Disabled box and select the type or the types of equipment for which you DO NOT wish that the alarm detection is communicated to the operator. Equipment of a map. In the Map area, activate the Disabled box and select the map/maps. The detection of the alarms of all the selected equipment present in the maps WILL NOT be notified to the operator. Logic address of the equipment. In the Logical address area, activate the Disabled box and set the logical address of the NEs whose alarm detection WILL NOT be notified to the operator. To set a logical address, type the address into the text field and press Add Address. The value is inserted in the area above. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Del Address push-button.

5. Press Save to save the set criteria into a file. When the push-button is selected, the SelectFilter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Insert name file box. The system suggests the default directory. Modify the path, if necessary. Press OK. 6. Press OK. In the window there are also the push-buttons: Load.... It opens the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting. When the push-button is selected, the SelectFilter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete.... It delete the file containing a previously saved specific filter setting. When the push-button is selected, the SelectFilter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK.

Alarm Notification via e-mail - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged

System access User profile Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged

The Alarm Notification via e-mail command displays/manages the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail. With detail for the user with entry, normal, advanced and privileged profile, it is possible: To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (pag.317)

For more information on the functionality of alarm notification via e-mail go to pag.317.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

316

To acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail

The operation can be executed by the NMS5UX user only if this knows the name and the password of the operator. 1. Select the Tools > Alarm Notification via e-mail command. The Alert Clear window opens. 2. Type the name of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Operator field. 3. Type the access code of the operator you wish to acknowledge in the Password field. 4. Press Ok. If the entered data are not correct, the message Alert has been acknowledged and reactivated is displayed, pointing out that the operator has been acknowledged and re-enabled to receive e-mail.

Alarm Notification via e-mail functionality

The NMS5UX-B system manages the sending of e-mail after the detection of an alarm of any equipment present in the network. The sending of the e-mails is subordinated to the definition of the operators who must receive the e-mails and to the setting of the sending criteria: enabling for the reception of the e-mails, type of equipment/ alarm, period when the operator is enabled to the reception of the e-mails, etc. When an operator is enabled, at the first detection of an alarm that corresponds to the sending criteria set for that operator, he receives an e-mail pointing out: Equipment type Logical address Alarm description No more e-mail will be sent to this operator, even if new alarms raise, until when the operator himself (or the NMS5UX Superuser) does not communicate to the system to have received the e-mail (acknowledge of the operation) and re-enables the operator himself to receive new e-mails. An operator can be created/modified/deleted and acknowledged by the NMS5UX Superuser (see pag.312). The NMS5UX entry, normal, advanced or privileged user can only, knowing the name and the password of an operator, acknowledge him in such a way that the system memorizes that the operator has read the email and re-enables him to receive e-mails (pag.316).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

317

SNMP-COMMAND EXECUTOR

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Command Executor command executes series of SNMP commands stored on file. With details it is possible: To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file (pag.318) To display the content of a file of SNMP commands (pag.319) To display the file of scheduled SNMP commands (pag.320)

If you select an equipment in the map and then the considered command, it is possible that the system displays the message No Command available for the selected equipment. This means that ones supervision system, for the type of selected equipment, is not provided with files containing sequences of SNMP commands. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files containing specific sequences of SNMP commands.

To execute series of SNMP commands stored on file

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Command Executor command. The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.49). 2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box, type the new path in the box or use the Change Directory push-button. 3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file. 4. Set the possible parameters, displayed in the and Command File Description area, on the choice of the file. The list of parameters changes according to the selected file. Some file do not need the setting of the parameters. 5. Select the option: Immediate, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands present in the file is immediately executed. Scheduled, if you wish that the sequence of SNMP commands present in the file is executed later. On the choice of the push-button, the boxes for the setting of the data (Day, Month, Year) and of the time (Hour, Min), where you wish to execute the sequence of the commands, are displayed. 6. Press Start Command. If, in the previous step, the activated box is: Immediate, in the Message area, the progress of the operations is displayed. It is possible to stop the procedure pressing OK, present in the Command Executor window displayed at the activation of the operation. Scheduled, a message is displayed informing that the file has been scheduled and will be automatically started at the set date/time.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

318

Fig.49 SNMP Command Executor window

Menu bar (1)

Path where files are stored

List of available files

Parameters to set for the execution of the SNMP commands relevant to the file selected in the FILES area Operations executed during the execution of the selected file (2)

Fig.49 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Edit > View Command File. It displays the content of a file of SNMP commands. Move the pointer in the Messages area and press the right mouse button. A context menu opens. Select the Clear command.

To delete the content of the area:

To display the content of a file of SNMP commands

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Command Executor command. The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.49). 2. If the wished file is not in the directory specified in the Directory box, type the new path in the box or use the Change Directory push-button. 3. Select, in the Files area, the wished command file. 4. Select the Edit > View Command File command. The View File - window opens where the list of the SNMP commands is displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

319

To display the files of scheduled SNMP commands

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Command Executor command. The SNMP Command Executor window opens (Fig.49). 2. Press View Scheduled. The View Scheduled Command window opens, where the scheduled files are listed. In detail, for each file, it is indicated in the field: File. Name of the file. Par 1...Par 5. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file. Status. Status of the operation: Waiting. The file has not been executed yet. It is possible that, in the Sched Time field, there is a scheduled date/time previous to the current one. This means that the NE, when the operation was scheduled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the file (for example, the NE was disconnected or unreachable). In this case, the system attempts to re-execute the file at regular intervals. Running. The execution of the file is in progress. Completed. The sequence of SNMP commands present in the file has been executed successfully.

Sched Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the execution of the file has been scheduled. Start Time. Date (day-month-year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the execution of the sequence is started. Stop Time. Possible values set for the parameters required for the execution of the file.

3. To delete a file, select the relevant record and then press Delete Command. The file is deleted from the list 4. To display the progress of the executed operation by a file, select the relevant record and then press View Detailed Information. The View File - window opens displaying the list of the displayed operation. 5. To update the information present in the window, press Refresh. The date/time displayed in the status bar of the window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

320

SNMP-NE MONITORING

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Monitoring command allows assigning a set of parameters to monitor periodically to a SNMP equipment. The SNMP equipment - parameters to monitor is defined measure. With details it is possible: To display the list of the measures (pag.321) To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure) (pag.322) To display the characteristics of a measure (pag.323) To delete a measure (pag.323) To activate a measure (pag.323) To deactivate a measure (pag.323) To display the results of a measure (pag.324) To save the results of a measure (pag.324) To display the results of a measure stored into a file (pag.325) To save the results of a measure stored into a file (pag.325) To delete a file (pag.325)

For more info about the NE Monitoring functionality go to pag.327

To display the list of the measures

1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment start the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). If an equipment managed by SNMP protocol has been selected before opening the window, the window lists only the measures relevant to the selected equipment. Otherwise, the window lists all the measures executed by the users. Fig.50 NE Monitoring window

Menu bar (1) List of the set measures (2)

Status bar (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

321

Fig.50 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Load Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure saved to file. File > Load Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure saved to file. File > Delete File. It deletes the files where the results of the measures are stored. File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Add Measure. It assigns the parameters to monitor to an equipment (creation of a measure). Options > Delete Measure. It deletes a measure. Options > Start Measure. It activates a measure. Options > Stop Measure. It deactivates a measure. Options > Measure Properties. It displays the measure properties. Options > View Graphics. It displays, in graph format, the results of a measure. Options > View Exported File. It displays, in table format, the results of a measure. Measure. Name of the measure. NE Logical Address. Logical address of the NEs relevant to the measure. NE IP-Address. IP address of the NEs relevant to the measure. Status. Status of the measure: (3) Started. The measure is active. Stopped. The measure is inactive. Interrupted. The measure is interrupted. The Messages area displays a message specifying the cause of the interruption. Message. Self-explanation message specifying possible errors. If, before opening the NE Monitoring window, an SNMP equipment has been selected, the logical address of the selected equipment is displayed in the status bar of the window. If the check-box is active, the window will list only the measures relevant to the selected equipment. If the check-box is inactive, the window will list all the measures defined by the user.

For each group of parameters, are pointed out:

To assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure)

1. It is possible to set the SNMP equipment which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor to, selecting it in the UX Map Manager window. Otherwise, it will be possible to set the equipment during the procedure of measure creation. 2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the Options > Add Measure command. The Add Measure window opens. 4. Set the equipment, which you wish to assign the parameters to monitor to, in one of the following ways: Select the NE Logical Address option and type the logical address of the wished NE in the box below. Select the NE IP-Address option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the box below.

If, at step 1, a specific NE has been selected in the box, the IP address of this equipment is automatically pointed out. 5. Type, in the Timeout box, the time interval, expressed in seconds, between a reading of the value of each parameter and the next one. 6. Select, in the Measure Type area, the wished group of parameters. The user can select predefined groups of parameters. The SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files with specific groups of parameters. 7. Press Ok. The measure is added to the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

322

To display the characteristics of a measure

1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, start the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure you wish to display the characteristics. 4. Select the Options > Measure Properties command. The Measure Properties window opens pointing out in the: <First box>. The logical address of the NE which the set of parameters has been assigned to. Timeout. Time range, expressed in seconds, between two consecutive reading of the same parameter. Measure Type. Group of parameters.

To delete a measure
1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, start the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to delete. 4. Select the Options > Delete Measure command. The measure is deleted from the list.

To activate a measure
1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to activate. 4. Select the Options > Start Measure command. The measure is activated.

To deactivate a measure
1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

323

The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure, in status Stopped or Interrupted, you wish to deactivate. 4. Select the Options > Stop Measure command. The measure is deactivated.

To display the results of a measure

1. If you wish to display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure for which you wish to display the results. 4. To display the result in format: Graphic, select the Options > View Graphics command. The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.51 shows an example. Table, select the Options > View Exported File command. The Preview:... window opens. Fig.52 shows an example.

To save the results of a measure

1. To display: Only the measures relevant to a given SNMP equipment, select the wished equipment in the UX Map Manager window. All the measures relevant to all the SNMP equipment, starts the procedure from step 2.

2. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 3. Select the measure for which you wish to save the results. 4. To save the result in graphic format: a. Select the Options > View Graphics command. The <name of parameters group> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.51 shows an example. b. Select the File > Save as command. The Save as window opens. c. Type the file name into the Selection box. The system proposes as path the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. d. Press OK. 5. To save the result in table format: a. Select the Options > View Exported File command. The Preview:... window opens. Fig.52 shows an example. b. Select the File > Save as command. The Save as window opens. c. Type the file name into the Selection box. The system proposes as path the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. d. Press OK.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

324

To display the results of a measure stored into a file

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 2. To display the results in format: Graphic, select the File > Load Graphics command. Table, select the File > Load Exported File command.

The Load...window opens. 3. Select the wished file in the Files area. The format of the name of the file is the following: <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv 4. Press OK. 5. If at step 2 has been selected the command: File > Load Graphics. The <parameters group name> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.51 shows an example. File > Load Exported File. The Preview:... window opens. Fig.52 shows an example.

To save the results of a measure stored into a file

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 2. To display the results in format: Graphic, select the File > Load Graphics command. Table, select the File > Load Exported File command.

The Load...window opens. 3. Select the wished file in the Files area. The format of the name of the file is the following: <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv 4. Press OK. 5. If at step 2 has been selected the command: File > Load Graphics. The <parameters group name> - <NE logical address> window opens. Fig.51 shows an example. File > Load Exported File. The Preview:... window opens. Fig.52 shows an example. 6. Select the File > Save as command. The Save as window opens. 7. Type the file name into the Selection box. The system proposes as path the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. 8. Press OK.

To delete a file
1. Select the Tools > SNMP-NE Monitoring command. The NE Monitoring window opens (Fig.50). 2. Select the File > Delete File command. The Delete File window opens. 3. Select the wished file in the Files area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

325

The format of the name of the file is the following: <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv 4. Press OK. The file is deleted from the disk of the machine. Fig.51 Graphic display of the data (NE Monitoring)

Menu bar (1)

Display of the result in graphic format (2)

Monitored parameter

Parameter value

Parameters present in the specific group of measures (3)

Fig.51 notes (1) Menu: File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the wished name and path to. File > Close. It closes the window. View > Zoom Minutes > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 5, 15 or 30 minutes. View > Zoom Hours > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 3, 6 or 12 hours. View > Zoom Days > ... It displays the results subdivided by intervals of 1, 2, 5, 15 or 30 days. View > Zoom 100%. It displays the results subdivided by the time interval stored in the file until the selection of the command.

Into the View menu the asterisk next to a value points out the current setting. (2) For each parameter selected in the area below, a graph is displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

326

(3)

Each value points out a different monitored parameter. To display the results relevant to a parameter, activate the relevant check-box. It is possible to activate the display of more parameters at the same time. Fig.52 Table display of the data (NE Monitoring)

Menu bar (1) Display of the result in table format

Date/time when the parameter value has been recorded Monitored parameters present in the specific group of measures

Fig.52 notes (1) Menu: File > Save as. It saves the results of the measure to a file which the user can assign the wished name and path to. File > Close. It closes the window.

NE Monitoring functionality
The NE Monitoring functionality allows assigning to an SNMP equipment a group of parameters to monitor. The SNMP equipment - parameters to monitor is defined measure. For a single equipment, it is possible to define more measures. The user can assign to an equipment only PREDEFINED groups of parameters. SIAE MICROELETTRONICA provides, on demand, files with specific groups of parameters. After having created the measure (pag.322), it is necessary to start it (activation of the monitoring of the parameters - pag.323). Periodically, the system will read the parameters and will record the results until when the measure is not interrupted (pag.323). At the start of a measure, a file is automatically created where are recorded the results of the measure itself. At next start, a new file will be automatically created. The system stores the file in a predefined directory (default /opt/nms5ux/tools/nms5NeMonitoring/data) and assigns a name formed by the following parameters <name of the parameters group>-<NE logical address>-<yearmonthday>_<hourminuteseconds>.csv. For each measure, a maximum of N files are kept in memory (default N=10, configurable by Superuser). The system allows, moreover, the contemporary start of N files (default N=10, configurable by Superuser). The results of the measures can be displayed in graphic or table format (pag.324/pag.325). Moreover, it is possible to save the results of the measures to a file which the user can assign the wished name and path (pag.324/pag.325).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

327

SNMP-AUTO DISCOVERY

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The command SNMP-Auto Discovery allows managing the Auto Discovery functionality for the detection of the equipment present in the network and not managed yet by the supervision system, the automatic creation and connection of the discovered NE objects. With details it is possible: To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality) (pag.328) To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality (pag.330) To deactivate the Network Scan modality (pag.332) To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality (pag.332) To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality (pag.333) To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file (pag.333) To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file (pag.333) To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table) (pag.333) To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table (pag.335) To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table (pag.335) To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table (pag.336)

For more info about the Auto Discovery functionality ago to pag.104.

To verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality)
1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window, where is pointed out the activation status of the two modalities available for the automatic detection of the equipment (Network Scan and NE Wake UP) and the configuration of the parameters used by the two modalities (Fig.53).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

328

Fig.53 Scan Configuration window

Menu bar (1) Activation status of NE Wake Up mode (2)

Activation status and configuration parameters of Network Scan mode (3)

Configuration parameters of the Network Scan and NE Wake Up modes (4) Immediate apply status of the new configuration (5)

Push-buttons (6)

Fig.53 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It close the window. Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window. Command not meaningful for the considered window. Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

If the check-box is: Active, the NE Wake Up modality is active. Inactive, the NE Wake Up modality is inactive.

(3)

Parameter/area: Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses. Respectively groups of IP addresses and single IP addresses cyclically scanned by the Network Scan modality. The presence or not of values in the two areas causes even the activation or not of the Network Scan modality. In detail, the Network Scan modality is: Active, when at least one value is present in the Range IP Addresses or Specific IP Addresses areas

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

329

Inactive, when the Range IP Addresses e Specific IP Addresses areas are empty. One Time At Day. The scanning is executed once at a day at the time pointed out in the Start Time box. Continuous. The scanning is cyclically executed each hour:minute pointed out in the Timeout Between Scan Cycle box.

Scan Repetition. Execution modality of the cyclic scanning:

The Start Time and Timeout Between Scan Cycle boxes are displayed alternatively depending on the value set for the Scan Repetition parameter IP Managed Simultaneously. Number of IP addresses scanned at the same time. Timeout Between Simultaneous IP. Time range (in seconds) between a simultaneous scanning of a group of IP addresses and the next one.

(4)

Parameter: Action When Found. Type of action NMS5UX-B must execute at the detection of a new equipment: Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it. Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and creates the relevant NE symbol in the map. Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.

Selected Map. Map where the equipment symbol must possibly be created. Selected Container. Name of the container where you wish to create the possible NE object. Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created> Fig.20 shows an example.

(5)

If the option is: Active, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration will be transmitted and immediately carried out by the daemon managing the operations of detection of new equipment. Inactive, when the Save as Active Conf push-button is selected, the current configuration will be stored and carried out by the daemon at the end of the current scanning.

(6)

Push-button: Save as Active Conf. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Discovery as new active configuration. Save As. Saves the current setting of the execution parameters of Auto Discovery to a file. Load Active Conf. Updates the data present in the window loading those stored as current configuration. Load. Opens the file containing a specific setting of the execution parameters of Auto Discovery previously saved.

To set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality
1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Set the IP addresses you wish to periodically scan. A group of IP addresses can be set in the following way: a. Type, in the First IP and Last IP boxes, the IP addresses determining the range of values which will be scanned each cycle.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

330

The range of values is displayed in the Range IP Addresses area. b. Press Add. c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert all the wished ranges of addresses. It is possible to delete, from the Range IP Addresses area, a single item pressing the Delete pushbutton after having selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All. It is possible to set a single IP address in the following way: a. Type the IP address which will be scanned each cycle into the IP box. The value is displayed in the Specific IP Addresses area. b. Press Add. c. Repeat the steps a. and b. to insert more IP addresses. It is possible to delete, from the Specific IP Addresses area, a single item pressing the Delete pushbutton after having selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All. 4. Set the execution modality of the cyclic scanning. It is possible to set the scanning takes place once at a day in the following way: a. Set the value One Time At Day in the Scan Repetition box. b. Set the hours:minutes, within 24 hours, when you wish the Auto Discovery scanning takes place in the Start Time box. It is possible to set the scanning takes place continuously in the following way: a. Set the value Continuous in the Scan Repetition box. b. Set the interval (expressed as hour:minute) between two successive scan operations in the Timeout Between Scan Cycle box. 5. Type the number of IP addresses (numeric value between 1 and 100) you wish to scan at the same time in the IP Managed Simultaneously. 6. Type the interval (expressed in seconds) between the simultaneous scanning of a group of IP addresses and the next one in the Timeout Between Simultaneous IP box. 7. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5UX-B must execute at the detection of a new equipment: Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it. Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and creates the relevant NE symbol in the map. Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.

8. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created: a. Press ... The Select a Map window opens. b. Select the map from the list. c. Press Ok. 9. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible NE object. If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will be automatically created. Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created> Fig.20 shows an example. 10.If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated: Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active Conf. At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.

The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the NE Wake UP modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

331

To deactivate the Network Scan modality

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Remove all the values present in the Range IP Addresses and Specific IP Addresses areas. It is possible to delete, from every area, a single item pressing the Delete push-button after having selected the item, or all the items at the same time pressing Delete All. 4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is deactivated: Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active Conf. At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.

To set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Activate the Manage Wake-up Trap option. 4. Set, in the Action When Found box, the type of action NMS5UX-B must execute at the detection of a new equipment: Manage. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table, creates the relevant NE symbol in the map and connects it. Create Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table and creates the relevant NE symbol in the map. Log Only. The system automatically inserts the equipment in the Auto Discovery table.

5. Set, in the Selected Map box, the map where the equipment symbol must be possibly created: a. Press ... The Select a Map window opens. b. Select the map from the list. c. Press Ok. 6. Type, in the Selected Container box, the name of the container where you wish to create the possible NE object. If the container is not present in the set map, when the NE object is created, even the container will be automatically created. Remember that the NE object is not created directly in the container but in the path <container set by the user> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/month/year when the object is created> Fig.20 shows an example. 7. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated: Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active Conf. At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.

The parameters Action When Found, Selected Map and Selected Container are in common with the Network Scan modality. A change to them affects even the execution of this modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

332

To deactivate the NE Wake Up modality

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Deactivate the Manage Wake-up Trap option. 4. If you wish the Network Scan modality is activated: Immediately, activate the Apply Configuration Immediately option and press Save as Active Conf. At the end of the scanning process in progress, press Save as Active Conf.

To save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Set or modify the execution parameters and the operating status of Network Scan and NE Wake Up modalities as depicted at pag.330 and pag.332. 4. Press Save As. The filesb_popup window opens. 5. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with .cfg extension) where you wish to save the Auto Discovery configuration. 6. Press Ok.

To retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Scan Configuration command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Scan Configuration window (Fig.53). 3. Press Load. The filesb_popup window opens. 4. Select the file (with .cfg extension) where the wished Auto Discovery configuration is stored. 5. Press Ok. In the Scan Configuration window, the configuration stored in the file is displayed.

To display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table)
1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Network Element Captured command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window where the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or Wake Up modality) is pointed out (Fig.54).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

333

Fig.54 Network Element Captured window

Menu bar (1)

List of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table) (2)

Pushbuttons (4)

Characteristics of the selected equipment (3)

Fig.54 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It close the window. Manager > Scan Configuration. It displays the Scan Configuration window. Manager > Network Element Captured. It displays the Network Element Captured window. Command not meaningful for the considered window. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

For every equipment, is pointed out in the column: ID. Progressive index on insertion in the table. IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment. Customer ID. Logic address of the equipment. Type. Equipment type. Action. Action which has been automatically executed by Auto Discovery at the detection of the new equipment besides the registration of it in the Auto Discovery table: None. No action has been executed. Create. The corresponding NE object has been created. Create and Connect. The corresponding NE object has been created and connected. Change Type Info. No other action has been executed. Auto Discovery notifies that the considered equipment is already managed by NMS5UX-B but with a type different from that detected in the network for the specific IP Address. The new type assumed by the equipment is that pointed out in the Type column. Example. Suppose that an EL series equipment with address 172.22.13.6 is managed by NMS5UX-B. At a given moment, the EL equipment in the network is replaced by an ALplus equipment. The address 172.22.13.6 is assigned to the new equipment. If the user activates the Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality and defines that the address 172.22.13.6 is included in the scanned IP addresses, on the detection of the 172.22.13.6 address a notify of type change is inserted in the Auto Discovery table.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

334

Status. Status of the action: In Progress. An action is in progress. Done. No action is in progress.

The update of the Auto Discovery table is dynamic. This means that the detection of a new equipment is immediately pointed out in the window, if this is open. (3) If an equipment, for which the action of creation/connection of the symbol (column Action, value Create or Create and Connect) has been executed, the system points out in the filed: NSAP. NSAP address (GOSIP) of the equipment. Value available and meaningful only for equipment inserted in an OSI network. Create Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been created. Connection Date. Date/time when the corresponding NE object has been connected. Value available and meaningful only for created and connected NE objects (column Action, value Create and Connect). (4) Map. Map where the corresponding NE object has been created. Path. Path (containers) where the corresponding NE object has been created.

Push-button: Find. Searches one or more equipment in the list. Reload. Updates the data present in the window. Delete. Deletes the selected equipment. Create. Creates the NE object of an equipment for which no action has been executed yet (column Action, value Done).

To search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Network Element Captured command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54). 3. Type, in the text field next to the Find push-button, an alphanumeric string (case sensitive) corresponding to the value or to part of the value present in the ID, IP Address, Customer ID, Type, Action or Status column relevant to the equipment you wish to search. 4. Press Find. The list highlights the first line matching the set searching criterion. If the list contains more equipment matching the search criterion, the Find push-button is replaced by the Next push-button. 5. Press Next to display the next equipment.

To delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Network Element Captured command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54). 3. Select the equipment you wish to delete. 4. Press Delete. The equipment are removed from the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

335

To create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table
Operation available only for equipment detected by Auto Discovery for which no action has been executed yet (column Action, value Done - see Fig.54). 1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Auto Discovery command. The Network Discovery Manager window opens. 2. Select the Manager > Network Element Captured command. The Network Discovery Manager window is replaced by the Network Element Captured window (Fig.54). 3. Select the equipment for which you wish to create the relevant NE object. 4. Press Create. During the operation, the Status column points out the wording In progress. At the end of the operation, the Action column points out the wording Create. The NE object is created in the following path: <map set by the user*> / <container set by the user*> / <year> / <year/month> / <day/ month/year when the object is created> * Map/container currently set for the Auto Discovery functionality (Fig.53).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

336

SNMP-RMON

System access User profile

Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only, Read-Write Entry Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Rmon command manages, for the SNMP equipment, the RMON standard (groups: Statistics, History and Alarm). With details it is possible: Statistics group To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of a SNMP equipment (RMON statistics) (pag.337) To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics (pag.339) To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics (pag.340) To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant (pag.340) To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file (pag.341) To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port (pag.342) To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics (pag.345) To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics (pag.345) To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port (pag.345) To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) (pag.346) To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) (pag.346) To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) (pag.347)

History group

Alarms group

The operations are available only for SNMP equipment in connected status (which LCT/WEB LCT is NOT connected to in Configuration modality) where the equipment software supports the RMON standard. For more info on the implementation of the RMON standard in the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B go to pag.348.

To verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of a SNMP equipment (RMON statistics)

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. In any moment, it is possible to insert one or more equipment in the Network Elements area selecting the relevant symbols in the map and pressing Add From Map or to delete all the equipment in the list pressing Clear All. For all the NE objects of ALplus Node e ALCplus2 Node type, the Network Elements area points out the detail of the equipment of the nodal system. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

337

Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics. If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see pag.339) 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port which you wish to verify the counters for. For each counter, the relevant value is reported in the Value column. The description of the counters changes according to the type of selected equipment (see pag.351). In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data are automatically update every second). Fig.55 Rmon Statistics Viewer window

Menu bar (1) List of SNMP NEs (2)

LAN ports of the selected equipment currently active for the count of the RMON statistics (3)

Alarms enabled for the selected port (4) Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN port (5)

Data refresh mode (6)

Fig.55 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Help > About Application. It opens the manual.

For each equipment, the relevant logic address is pointed out. It is possible to insert one or more equipment selecting the relevant symbols in the map and pressing Add From Map or to delete all the equipment in the list pressing Clear All. For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type in the list, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

338

 (3)

<node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The number/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type. For each port, is pointed out in the column: Index. Value identifying univocally the port in the table of the RMON statistics of the database. Interface. Name of the Ethernet port. Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to the equipment, then nms5ux user.

(4)

For each alarm, is pointed out in the column: Index. Value identifying univocally the table in the RMON alarms in the database. Variable. Counter to monitor which the alarms refers to. Type. Modality used to compare the counter value with the threshold: Absolute. The value reported in the last instant of sampling of the selected counter is directly compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds. Delta. The value compared with the set (raising and falling) thresholds is the difference between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the end of the interval.

Interval (s.). Interval in seconds after which the data are compared with the thresholds. Rising. Rising threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter. Falling. Falling threshold used for the comparison of the values with the selected counter. Owner. User who has enabled the alarm. User means the user used for the connection to the equipment, then nms5ux user.

(5)

For each counter, the relevant value is pointed out in the Value column. The wording n/a points out that the value is not available. The description of the counter changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.351).

(6)

In order to refresh the data press Refresh or activate the Auto Refresh box (the data are automatically update every second).

To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics. 3. In the Interface Definition... area press the right mouse button and select Add. The Nms5ux Statistics Enable window opens. 4. Select the Ethernet port you wish to activate in the Interface box. 5. Press Add. The port is added to the Interface Definition... area. If the selected port is already active, the message Unable to Perform Operation. Selected Port Already Used is displayed. The port will remain active until the user will deactivate it (see pag.340).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

339

To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics. 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the port you wish to activate. 4. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Delete command and confirm.

To capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The Interface Definition... area defines the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics. If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see pag.339) 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port. 4. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Capture command. The Captured Statistics window, depicted in Fig.56, opens. 6. Set, in the Interval (1-60min) box, the time interval (number between 1 and 60 minutes) at the end of which the values of the counters must be displayed in the Captured Statistics window. 7. Press Start. The status of the capture operation changes from Ready to Running. To stop the operation press Stop. Once elapsed the set time interval, the status of the capture operation changes from Running to Complete and the Captured Statistics window displays the values of the counters in the instant when the time interval is elapsed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

340

Fig.56 Captured Statistics window

Equipment logical adddress Ethernet port

Status of the captured operation (1)

Counters values (2)

Fig.56 notes (1) Wording: (2) Ready. Operation not in progress. Running. Operation in progress. Complete. Capture operation complete. Aborted. Operation stopped by the user.

The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected NE (see pag.351).

To save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file
1. Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant (see pag.340). 2. In the Captured Statistics window, press The SelectExportFile window opens. 3. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with extension .txt) where you wish to save the information. 4. Press Ok. The file is saved in text format and can be opened by any text editor. .

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

341

To display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View. The Rmon History View window opens. In the Addresses area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View command. The Rmon History View window opens. The Addresses area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.57 shows an example of Rmon History Viewer window. 2. In the Addresses area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics. If the wished port is not active, it can be activated (see pag.345) 3. Select the port, press the right mouse button and select Graph. The graph of the statistics history is displayed. By default, the starting display mode is the following: Packets box. Counters displayed in the graph: Packets. The graph displays the counters whose measure unit is the packet: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events. To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again in the graph, re-activate the relevant box. Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in the graph. To modify the counters represented in the graph set, in the Packets box, the Utilization option (percentile estimate of the real bandwidth used) or Octets (total number of octets). The description of the counters change depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.351). Grap Type box. Type of graph: Histogram. Each bar within the observation period has a color corresponding to the color of the relevant counter pointed out in the Graph Summary area. To modify the type of graph set, in the Graph Type box, the Line option: the values are represented by lines; even in this case, the color of the lines represents the counter which the line itself refers to. Data type box. Value of the represented counter: Mean of the values sampled within the time interval represented on abscissa axis (Average option). To modify the parameter set, in the Graph Type box, the Measured option (value represented on the abscissa axis at the last sampling of the time interval) or Maximum (maximum value, represented on the abscissa axis, sampled within the pointed out time interval). Abscissa axis. Time interval: Days (date format month/day/year). The graph displays the last 30 days. If the port is enabled by less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed. The parameter can be configured by the Superuser. A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the counters of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to the previous view. A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the counters of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to the previous view. The display of the message No data available points out that no information is available for the selected time interval. Ordinate axis. Measure unit of the counter: number of packets. The measure unit changes depending on the type of parameters represented in the graph (see setting of the Packets box in figure).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

342

Fig.57 Rmon History View window

Statistics display mode (2) Index value of the LAN port which the graph below refers to Graphic representation of the history statistics (3) Use the bar to display the whole graph

Menu bar (1)

List of the SNMP NEs (4)

Values of the counters relevant to the selected LAN port (5)

LAN ports, of the current equipment, currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics (6)

Fig.57 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Help > About Application. It opens the manual.

The first box points out the counters represented in the graph: Packets. The graph displays the values of the following parameters (if enabled in the Graph Summary area): Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events. Utilization. The graph displays the value of the Utilization parameter only. Octets. The graph displays the value of the Octets parameter only. Histogram. Histogram graph. Line. Line graph. Measured. Value, at the last sampling instant of the time interval, represented on the abscissa axis.

The Graph Type box points out the type of graph:

The Data type box points out the value of the displayed counter:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

343

Average. Mean of the values sampled within the time interval represented on the abscissa axis. Maximum. Maximum value, sampled within the displayed time interval, represented on the abscissa axis.

(3)

The graph can be represented by histograms or by lines (setting of the Graph Type parameter). The graph does not represent all the counters at the same time. They have been subdivided depending on their own measure unit (setting of the Packets parameter). To hide a counter, deactivate the relevant box in the Graph Summary area. To display it again in the graph, re-activate the relevant box. Each counter is identified by a color corresponding to the color of the relevant bar (or line) in the graph. At the first display of the data relevant to a window, the last 30 last days are represented. If the port is enabled from less than 30 days, only the available days are displayed. The parameter can be configured by the Superuser. A double click on the area representing one day in the graph displays the statistics of the counters of the selected day, subdivided in 1-hour period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to the previous view. A double click on the area representing one hour in the graph displays the statistics of the counters of the selected day/hour, subdivided in 1-minute period. Pressing the central mouse button, you return to the previous view. It is possible to display, into a dynamic window, the detail of the counters relevant to the time interval where the pointer is placed, keeping pressed the right mouse button.

(4)

For each equipment, the relevant logic address is displayed. It is possible to insert in the list one or more equipment selecting the relevant symbols in the map and pressing Add From Map or deleting all the equipment in the list pressing Clear All. For the NE objects of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type in the list, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

(5)

For each counter, is pointed out in the column: Variables. In order: A box whose activation points out that the counter is currently displayed in the graph, while its deactivation points out that the counter is not represented in the graph. What just said is subjected to the setting of the type of parameters represented in the graph (see setting of the Packets box in figure). Counter name. The color of the wording points out the color of the bar (or line) which represents the counter inside the graph. The description of the counter changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.351). Min. Minimum value sampled in the time interval currently pointed out in the graph. Max. Maximum value sampled in the time interval currently pointed out in the graph.

The wording n/a points out that the value is not available. (6) The number/type of Ethernet ports changes depending on the equipment type. For each port, is pointed out in the column: Index. Value identifying univocally the port in the table of the history of the RMON statistics of the database. Port. Name of the Ethernet port. Interval. Sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. Value set to 60 seconds. Samples. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a rotation buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Value set to 240 samplings, which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment. Owner. User who has activated the port. User means the user used for the connection to the equipment, then nms5ux user. Status. Status of the entry in the table of the history of the RMON statistics of the database.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

344

To activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View. The Rmon History View window opens. In the Addresses area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View command. The Rmon History View window opens. The Addresses area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.57 shows an example of Rmon History Viewer window. 2. In the Addresses area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics. 3. In the area where the ports are listed, press the right mouse button and select Add Rmon. The New Control Entry window opens. 4. Select, in the Port box, the Ethernet port you wish to activate. The remnant parameters present in the window cannot be modified. For their description, refer to Fig.57. 5. Press Apply. The port is added to the list. The port will remain active until the user will not deactivate it (see pag.345).

To deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics
1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View. The Rmon History View window opens. In the Addresses area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View command. The Rmon History View window opens. The Addresses area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.57 shows an example of Rmon History Viewer window. 2. In the Addresses area, select the equipment that manages the wished Ethernet ports. The area below defines the ports currently active for the count of the history of the RMON statistics. 3. Select the port you wish to deactivate. 4. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Disable Rmon command and confirm.

To save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port

1. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX History View command. The Rmon History View window opens (Fig.57). 2. Display the data you wish to save to file (see pag.342). 3. Press . The SelectExportFile window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

345

4. Set the path and type, in the Selection box, the name of the file (with .csv extension) where you wish to save the information. 5. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor. The data displayed in the window are saved to file.

To verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)
1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment which manages the wished Ethernet ports. In the Interface Definition... area, the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics are displayed. If the wished port is not active, it is possible to activate it (see pag.339) 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port. In the Alarm Definition... area, the alarms currently enabled for the selected port are displayed. Fig.55 shows an example.

To enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)
More alarms can be defined for the same counter. Each alarm will be identified by a different value of Index (Fig.55). 1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment which manages the wished Ethernet ports. In the Interface Definition... area, the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics are displayed. If the wished port is not active, it is possible to activate it (see pag.339) 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port. 4. In the Alarm Definition... area, press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 5. Select the Add command. The Alarm Statistics Creation window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

346

6. Set, in the Statistics Value box, the counter to monitor and which you wish to associate the alarm to. 7. Set, in the Measure Type box, the mode to compare the counter value with the threshold: Absolute Value. The value reported in the last sampling instant of the selected counter will be directly compared with the set (rising and falling) thresholds. Delta Value. The value compared with the set (rising and falling) threshold will be the difference between the counter value at the beginning of the interval and the value at the end of the interval.

8. Set, in the Startup box, the alarm activation mode used for the first comparison between the counter value and the thresholds set after that the alarm has been enabled by the user: Rising, Falling and Rising or Falling. The description of the values available for this parameter and its interaction with the parameters Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349. 9. Set, in the Alarm Interval (minutes) box, the interval (in minutes) after which the data are compared with the thresholds. 10.Set, in the Alarm Rising Threshold box, the rising threshold used for the comparison of the counter values with the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to this threshold and the value of the previous comparison is lower, an alarm is generated. For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the parameters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349. 11.Set, in the Alarm Falling Threshold box, the lower threshold used for the comparison of the values of the selected counter: when the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal to this threshold and the value of the previous comparison is greater, an alarm is generated. For the first comparison, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the alarm activation is affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. The description of the interaction among the parameters Startup, Alarm Rising Threshold and Alarm Falling Threshold is reported at pag.349. 12.Press Ok. The alarm is added to the Alarm Definition... area. The Alarm Statistics Creation window remains open. To close it, press Cancel. The alarm will remain enabled until when it is not deactivated by the user (see pag.347).

To disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics)

1. Continue in one of the following ways: Select a SNMP equipment in the map and, then, the command Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. In the Network Elements area, only the selected equipment is present. Select the Tools > SNMP-Rmon > NMS5UX Statistics command. The Rmon Statistics Viewer window opens. The Network Elements area displays all the SNMP equipment present in the map and supporting the RMON standard. Fig.55 shows an example of Rmon Statistics Viewer window. 2. In the Network Elements area, select the equipment which manages the wished Ethernet ports. In the Interface Definition... area, the ports currently active for the count of the RMON statistics are displayed. 3. In the Interface Definition... area, select the wished port. 4. In the Alarm Definition... area, select the alarm you wish to disable. 5. Press the right mouse button. A pop-up menu opens. 6. Select the Delete command and confirm. The alarm is removed from the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

347

Implementation of the RMON standard in the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B

RMON Standard
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count, monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network. These services can be accessed through the SNMP protocol and defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any further detail.

Outline on the operation of RMON standard

The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote management station). The agent saves the data within its own RMON tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers, etc.). The RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the device to monitor. The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent using the SNMP protocol to obtain and correlate the RMON data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and the analysis of the collected RMON data.

Implementation of the RMON standard in the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B

The Rmon functionality available in NMS5UX-B allows monitoring the status of the Ethernet interface present on the SNMP equipment in compliance with the RMON standard. With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality acts as client which, through the commands present in the NMS5UX-B graphic interface, allows the analysis and the management of the data collected by the probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the SNMP equipment. The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment. In any moment, it is possible to activate (and deactivate) an Ethernet port for the storing of these data by NMS5UX-B. Currently, the SNMP equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system implement the following RMON MIB groups and, as a consequence, the Rmon functionality offers, through the graphic interface, the following functionality: Statistics measured by the RMON probes for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group: Statistics). History of the statistics for each monitored Ethernet port (RMON MIB group: History). Management of the alarms associated to the counters of the RMON statistics (RMON MIB group: Alarm).

Here below a brief description is reported for each group/functionality.

Statistics (Statistics group)

The Rmon functionality can display to the user some statistic information (counters), which allows evaluating the traffic development in input and in output for each single port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment (see pag.337). To display the counters of a port, it is necessary to activate the port (see pag.339). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see pag.340). Moreover it is possible to capture the values of the counters at the end of a time interval set by the user (see pag.340) and then to save them to file (see pag.341). The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.351).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

348

When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant window (Fig.55) only when the selected equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected in Configuration modality to the equipment. The update of the data can be carried out automatically (activating the Auto Refresh option) or manually (pressing the Refresh push-button).

History of the statistics (History group)

The Rmon functionality can present the time development (history) of the statistics relevant to the counters in input/output at level of single port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment (see pag.342). At equipment level, the statistics history stores the value of the counters of the Ethernet counter each 60 seconds (sampling interval). The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when full, the new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 240 samples which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment). In order to store in the NMS5UX-B database and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the port (see pag.345). This port will remain active until when the user does not deactivate it (see pag.345). At the activation of the port, the supervision system starts storing the data relevant to the statistics and makes them available to the user, in form of graph (histogram or line), subdivided by single Ethernet port of each single equipment. For each port, it is possible to display, at the same, time, the counters having the same measure unit (packets: Packets, Multicasts, Broadcasts, CRC Errors, Undersize, Oversize, Fragments, Collision, Jabber, Drop Events; Octets: Octets; Usage percentage: Utilization). The user can choose the type of value of the represented counter: Average (mean of the values sampled within a time interval), Measured (value at the last sampling of a time interval) or Maximum (maximum value sample within a time interval). The values of the counters are represented grouped by time intervals (minutes, hour, days). In the graph, the last 30 days from the activation of the port can be displayed. In any moment, it is possible to save the data to file (see pag.345). The description of the counters changes depending on the type of selected equipment (see pag.351). When a port is active, the data are displayed in the relevant window (Fig.57) only when the selected equipment is in connected status and the local management program is not connected in Configuration modality to the equipment.

Management of the RMON alarms (group: Alarm)

By means of the Rmon functionality, one or more alarms can be associated to each counter, of each single port of the Ethernet switch of a SNMP equipment. The activation of the alarm is caused by the exceeding of a (rising or falling) threshold of absolute values or at relative differences. In detail, at the definition of the alarm by the user (see pag.346), statistic samples of the counters are periodically collected from the RMON probe. These samples are compared with some previously set thresholds. If the monitored counter exceeds a threshold, an alarm is generated and pointed out in the current alarm table and in the alarm history of NMS5UX-B. The description of the alarm in the list of the current alarms and in the alarm history is RMON Alarm <index>, where <index> is the value which univocally points out the alarm in the RMON alarm table of the database (Fig.55). In order to limit the generation of alarms, an hysteresis mechanisms is implemented which generates an alarm each time a threshold is exceeded in the proper direction and does not generate other alarms until when the opposite threshold is exceeded as described in Fig.58.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

349

Fig.58 RMON alarms management

Counter value Rising Threshold Falling Threshold

Alarm Counter value (SNMP trap) compared with (3) the thresholds (2)

Trend of the counter value in time

Sampling interval (1)

Fig.58 notes (1)

Time

The sampling intervals are not synchronized with the instant when the alarm is defined by the user, but refer to the time of the solar day (00.00, 01.00, 02.00, etc). For example, if an alarm is defined at 11.40 and the sampling interval defined by the user is 30 minutes, the first usable sampling interval of the counter will be 12.00...12.30.

(2)

At the expiry of a sampling interval, depending on the type of mode set by the user for the comparison with the thresholds, as value of the counter is taken: The value assumed by the counter at the end of the sampling interval (comparison method Absolute). The difference between the value of the counter at the end of the sampling interval and the value of the counter at the beginning of the sampling interval (comparison method Delta).

For the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B, when the user enables an alarm, the system starts the activities to monitor the sampled value with respect to the thresholds. The result of this activity will be, possibly, the activation or the deactivation of the associated alarm according to the following modalities.

If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value greater than the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold), the alarm is activated if the sampled value is greater than or equal to the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold. The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes lower than or equal to the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold. For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the Startup parameter. In detail, if the parameter Startup is set to the value: Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal to the Rising threshold, the alarm is generated. Falling and the value of the compared value is greater than or equal to the Rising threshold, the alarm is not generated.

What just described is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the next comparison, the rule described above applies. Example. Suppose that, for a given alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThreshold=100 and the parameter AlarmFallingThreshold=50. If the Startup parameter has the value: Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is immediately activated. Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is not activated. At the end of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore; therefore, if in that moment the value is greater than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm is immediately generated. Rising or Falling. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is immediately activated.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

350

If the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold is set to a value lower than the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold, the alarm is activated if the sampled value is lower than or equal to the threshold AlarmRisingThreshold. The alarm is deactivated when the sampled value becomes greater than or equal to the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold. For the first comparison at the end of the first usable sampling interval, after that the alarm has been enabled by the user, the activation of the alarm is affected by the setting of the parameter Startup. In detail, if the parameter Startup is set to the value: Rising or Rising or Falling and the value of the compared counter is lower than or equal to the threshold Rising, the alarm is generated. Falling and the value of the compared counter is greater than or equal to the threshold Falling the alarm is not generated.

What just said is valid only for the first comparison after the enabling of the alarm. For the next comparisons, the general rule described above applies. Example. Suppose that, for an alarm, we have set the parameter AlarmRisingThreshold=150 and the parameter AlarmFallingThreshold=200. If the parameter Startup has value: Rising. At the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is immediately activated. Falling. At the end of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is not activated. At the end of the expiry of the next interval, the constraint has not meaning anymore; therefore, if in that moment the value is lower than the threshold Rising yet, the alarm is immediately generated. Rising or Falling. At the end of the expiry of the first usable sampling interval, the sampled value is 120: the alarm is immediately activated.

Keeping in mind what described in this chapter, consider however that the operating logic of the alarms on the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B foresees that the alarms (SNMP traps) are generated only on the alarm transitions, that is from Off to On and, then, from On to Off, and that the initial status of the alarms is however Off. Therefore, the exceeding of a threshold AlarmFallingThreshold will have, as consequence, the generation of an alarm only if the event takes place after a transition on the corresponding threshold AlarmRisingThreshold or the combination of the values of the thresholds is such that the exceeding of the threshold AlarmFallingThreshold corresponds to the activation of the alarm.

Ethernet counters (RMON)

The description of the counters changes according to the type of selected equipment. This description is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from an Ethernet port (LAN Statistics) contained in the user manual of the Manager application relevant to each single equipment type. The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters with respect to the LAN Statistics counters. Tab.14 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - Statistics counters. Tab.15 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters - History counters. The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON (History) counter and has the following description: the best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

351

Tab.14 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - Statistics) Ethernet counters denomination RMON - Statistics Octects Packets Multicasts Broadcasts CRC Errors Undersize Oversize Fragments Collision Jabber Drop Events Pkts 64 Octets Pkts 65 to 127 Octets Pkts 128 to 255 Octets Pkts 256 to 511 Octets Pkts 512 to 1023 Octets Pkts 1024 to 1518 Octets Ethernet counters denomination LAN Statistics Total Bytes Received Total Frames Received Multicast Frames Received Broadcast Frames Received CRC Align Errors Undersize Frames Oversize Frames Fragments Collision Jabber Dropped Frames Frames 64 Octects (Sent+Received) Frames 65-127 Octects (Sent+Received) Frames 128-255 Octects (Sent+Received) Frames 256-511 Octects (Sent+Received) Frames 512-1023 Octects (Sent+Received) Frames 1024... (Sent+Received)

Tab.15 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON - History) Ethernet counters denomination RMON - History Packets Multicasts Broadcasts CRC Errors Undersize Oversize Fragments Collision Jabber Drop Events Octects Utilization Ethernet counters denomination LAN Statistics Total Frames Received Multicast Frames Received Broadcast Frames Received CRC Align Errors Undersize Frames Oversize Frames Fragments Collision Jabber Dropped Frames Total Bytes Received -

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

352

SNMP-XML EXPORT

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The command SNMP-XML Export manages the export of the configuration data of SNMP equipment in XML format (function XML Export). In detail, it is possible: Manual saving of data (single creation of a XML file) To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file (pag.353)

Periodical saving of data (definition of cronjobs which automatically creates the XML files) To display the active cronjobs (pag.355) To create a cronjob (pag.356) To delete one or more cronjob (pag.356) To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory (pag.356) To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files (pag.357) To display the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of the XML files (pag.358) To convert a XML file to a HTML file (pag.358) To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file (pag.358) To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files (pag.360) To send email with attached one or more XML, Log or HTML files (pag.360)

Management of XML, Log and HTML files

The function XML Export is optional and available only for SNMP equipment of type ALFO and series ALS (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2). For more information about the function XML Export go to pag.361.

To save the complete equipment configuration into a XML file

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML Export Mgmt. The XML Configuration Data Export window is displayed. 2. Select the command Action > Load Equipment. The XML Configuration Data Export window displays all the SNMP equipment, managed by NMS5UX-B, which support the function XML Export. Fig.59 reports an example. 3. Define the equipment which the saving of the configuration is required for: All the SNMP equipment (which support the function XML Export) managed by NMS5UX-B, select the command Action > Export > All Network. The equipment selected in the window XML Configuration Data Export: Select the equipment. A maximum of 100 equipment can be selected. Select the command Action > Export > Selected NE. Select the command View > Set Filter. The Selected Filter window is displayed. Select the boxes relevant to the criteria you wish to use to display a specific group of NEs in the XML Configuration Data Export window: A group of equipment:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

353

Match Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. To set the criterion, type the NE address into the text box. The jolly character asterisk can be used. Match Physical Address. IP address of the equipment. To set the criterion, type the IP address of the NE in the text boxes. Match Equipment Type. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the NE type. Match Status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status.

Press OK. The XML Configuration Data Export window displays only the records which match the activated criteria.

Select the command Action > Export > Filtered.

The Files_popup window is displayed. 4. Type, in the Selection box, the name of the xml file where the data must be exported. The system suggests, as path, the default directory. Change the path, if necessary. 5. Press Ok. The XML file saves the complete configuration only of the equipment in connected status. In the file, this equipment is listed in alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the NE. Fig.59 XML Configuration Data Export window

Menu bar (1)

Equipment list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.59 notes (1) Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Load Equipment. It displays all the SNMP equipment supporting the function XML Export. Action > Export > All Network. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete configuration of all the SNMP equipment in connected status, managed by the system and supporting the function XML Export. Action > Export > Selected NE. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete configuration of all the SNMP equipment in connected status, selected from a list. Action > Export > Filtered. It saves into a single file (in XML format) the complete configuration of all the equipment in connected status, present in the filtered list. Action > Schedule Backup. It displays the currently active cronjobs. View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered function.

(2)

For each equipment, it is pointed out in the column: Logical Address. Logical address of the NE. IP/Ph Address. IP address of the NE. Type. Type of NE. Status. Status of the connection between the NE and the supervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

354

The SNMP equipment supporting the function XML Export is equipment of ALFO type and equipment of ALS series (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2). For the NE ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node objects in list, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logical address: (3) <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

The status bar points out: The number of displayed records (Elements:). The number of selected records (Selected:). The activation of one or more filters (Filter: active).

To display the active cronjobs (XML Export)

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML Export Mgmt. The XML Configuration Data Export window is displayed. 2. Select the command Action > Schedule Backup. The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed showing the currently active cronjobs. Fig.60 displays an example. More information about the cronjobs are reported at pag.361. Fig.60 Scheduled Cron Jobs window

Menu bar (1)

Crojob list (2)

Fig.60 notes (1) Menu: (2) Actions > Add > Daily. It creates a cronjob with daily frequency. Actions > Add > Weekly. It creates a cronjob with weekly frequency. Actions > Add > Monthly. It creates a cronjob with monthly frequency. Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more cronjobs. Actions > Quit. It closes the window.

For each cronjob, it is pointed out in the column: Time. Hour (023) : minute (059) when the cronjob must be executed. Date. Day of the month when the cronjob must be executed. Wording: Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob). None. Not meaningful (identifies a weekly cronjob). 131. Day of the month (identifies a monthly cronjob). Every. Every day (identifies a daily cronjob). Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Day of the week (identifies a monthly cronjob). None. Not meaningful (identifies a monthly cronjob).

Day. Day of the week when the cronjob must be executed. Wording:

Command. Command line for the execution of the cronjob, path where the XML file and the type of cronjob (#Differential Backup, #Incremental Backup, #Full Backup) must be saved.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

355

To create a cronjob (XML Export)

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML Export Mgmt. The XML Configuration Data Export window is displayed. 2. Select the command Action > Schedule Backup. The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed (Fig.60). 3. To create a cronjob which is executed with frequency: Daily, select the command Actions > Add > Daily. The Add daily job window is displayed. Weekly, select the command Actions > Add > Weekly. The Add weekly job window is displayed. Set, in the Day of the week box, the day of the week when you wish the XML file is saved. Monthly, select the command Actions > Add > Monthly. The Add monthly job window is displayed. Set, in Day of the month (1-31) box, the day of the month when you wish the XML file is saved. 4. Set, in the Time (hh:mm) box, the hour when you wish the cronjob is executed using the following format hour (0-23) : minute (0-59). 5. Set, in the Export type box, the saving type you wish to execute: Full Backup. At each saving, the system generates a single XML file which contains the complete configuration of all the SNMP equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which, at the moment of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.362). Differential Backup. A XML file is generated for each SNMP equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which, at the moment of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.363). Incremental Backup. A single XML file is generated with all the SNMP equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which, at the moment of the saving, is in connected status (see pag.363). (the Directory Selection window is opened) and

6. The Export Directory box points out the default directory for the saving of the file. To modify the path, type the new value or press select the new directory. 7. Press OK. The cronjob is inserted within a list. More information about the cronjobs and the files created automatically are reported at pag.361.

To delete one or more cronjobs (XML Export)

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML Export Mgmt. The XML Configuration Data Export window is displayed. 2. Select the command Action > Schedule Backup. The Scheduled Cron Jobs window is displayed (Fig.60). 3. Select the cronjobs to delete. 4. Select the command Actions > Delete and confirm. The selected records are removed from the list.

To display the list of the XML files present in a given directory

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Select the command File > List XML Files. The Directory Selection window is displayed. The Selection box points out the default directory.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

356

3. Change the path, if necessary. 4. Press OK. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into XML Files where are currently displayed all the files with extension xml present in the selected directory and into the relevant subdirectories, if present. Fig.61 reports an example. Fig.61 XML Files window

Menu bar (1)

Files list (2)

Fig.61 notes (1) Menu: File > List Log Files. It displays the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files. File > List XML Files. It displays the list of the XML files present in a given directory. File > List HTML Files. It displays the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files. File > Open... It displays the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html). File > Open. It displays the content of the selected file. File > Delete. It deletes the selected files. File > Convert to HTML. It converts the selected XML file to a HTML file. File > Send email. It sends an email with the selected files in attachment. File > Close. It closes the window. Help > About Application. Version of the module for the management of the considered function.

(2)

For every file, are pointed out: Date. Date of the file creation, in the following format: <day of the week> <month> <day of the month> <hour:minute:second> <year> File Name. Position and name of the file.

To display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files
1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Select the command File > List Log Files. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into Log Files where are displayed all the files with log extension present in the default directory where the log files are automatically saved. The description of the Log Files window is the same reported in Fig.61 except for the command File > Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context. More information about the Log files are reported at pag.361.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

357

To display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files
1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Select the command File > List HTML Files. The Directory Selection window is displayed. The Selection box points out the default directory. 3. Change the path if necessary. 4. Press OK. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into HTML Files where are displayed all the files with html extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories, if present. The description of the HTML Files window is the same reported in Fig.61 except for the command File > Convert to HTML which is not meaningful and available in the considered context.

To convert a XML file into a HTML file

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Select the command File > List XML Files. The Directory Selection window is displayed. The Selection box points out the default directory. 3. Change the path if necessary. 4. Press OK. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is renamed into XML Files where are displayed all the files with xml extension present in the selected directory and in the relevant subdirectories, if present (Fig.61). 5. Select the xml files you wish to convert. 6. Select the command File > Convert to HTML. The XML to HTML Conversion window is displayed. The XML File(s) area points out the selected files which will be converted. 7. Set, in the Stylesheet File box, the path/name of the file you wish to use as style sheet for the conversion (file XSL - eXtensible Stylesheet Language). It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press opened) and select the file among those available. To change the path, type the new value or press select the new directory. 9. Press Convert!. For each XML file, a html file is created in the set directory with the same name of the source file. For example, the file ALplus2_205.xml is converted into the file ALplus2_205.html. (the Directory Selection window is

8. The Export Directory box points out the default directory for the saving of the converted files. (the Directory Selection window is opened) and

To display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

358

2. Execute one of the following operations: Select the command: File > List Log Files to display the list of the Log files (see pag.357). File > List XML Files to display the list of the XML files (see pag.356). File > List HTML Files to display the list of the HTML files (see pag.358).

The ... Files window is displayed. Select the wished file and then the command File > Open. Select the command File > Open... The Files_popup window is displayed. Select the wished file (.log, .xml or .html) in the Files list and press OK. The content of the file is displayed. Fig.62 shows an example of Log file. Fig.63 shows an example of XML file. Fig.64 shows an example of HTML file. Fig.62 Display of the content of a file .log

Fig.63 Display of the content of a file .xlm

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

359

Fig.64 Display of the content of a file .html

To delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files

1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt. The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Execute one of the following operations: Select the command: File > List Log Files to display the list of the Log files (see pag.357). File > List XML Files to display the list of the XML files (see pag.356). File > List HTML Files to display the list of the HTML files (see pag.358).

The ... Files window is displayed. 3. Select the wished files. 4. Select the command File > Delete and confirm. The selected files are removed from the list and from the system disk.

To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML in attachment

In order to send the files, it is necessary that the system administrator has properly configured the mail server. 1. Select the command Tools > SNMP-XML Export > SNMP-XML File Mgmt.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

360

The NMS5UX Data Export File Manager window is displayed. 2. Select the command: File > List Log Files to display the list of the Log files (see pag.357). File > List XML Files to display the list of the XML files (see pag.356). File > List HTML Files to display the list of the HTML files (see pag.358).

The ... Files window is displayed. 3. Select the wished files you wish to attach to the email. 4. Select the command File > Send email. The Send Mail window is displayed. The File(s) to Send area displays the files selected in the previous step. It is possible to delete all the files pressing Clear Files List. 5. Set the email address in the Destination box. 6. Set the object of the email in the Subject box. 7. Write the text of the email in the Message box. 8. Set the modality to send the files activating/deactivating the options Use tarball file and/or Use gzip Compression according to what pointed out here below. Use Use gzip Modality to send the files tarball file Compression Inactive Active Inactive Active 9. Press Send. Inactive Inactive Active Active A mail is sent for each file present in the area File(s) to Send. Each file keeps its original format (.log, .xml or .html) A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball (.tar) which contains all the files present in the area File(s) to Send A mail is sent for each file present in the area File(s) to Send. Each file is compressed with method gzip (.gz) A single mail is sent with attached a file of type tarball compressed with method gzip (.gz)

Function XML Export (more information)

The function XML Export allows saving the complete configuration of the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B into a file in XML (eXtensible Markup Language) format.

SNMP equipment supporting the function XML Export

The types of SNMP equipment this function are: ALFO ALS series equipment (AL, ALC, ALS, ALS-C, ALplus, ALCplus, ALplus2, ALCplus2)

Data saved in XML file

In the XML file is saved the complete equipment configuration which consists in the following data: Logical address IP address (LAN and PPP ports) and Routing Table Equipment configuration: General parameters: radio protection, IDU type, etc. Radio parameters. Switch Ethernet parameters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

361

Parameters of Tributaries (E1, STM1, LAN) Cross connections

User Input User Output Version of the equipment sw/fw modules and of the WEB LCT software (only for the equipment supporting it) Hardware configuration (Part Number, Serial Number and Hw edition of the equipment units).

Modality of creation of XML files

The saving of the equipment data into a XML file can be manually executed by the user (creation of a single XML file) or automatically by the system (creation of periodical XML files through the definition of cronjobs). Manual saving In this modality, the user can save in a single XML file: The complete configuration of all the SNMP equipment managed by NMS5UX-B, which support the function XML Export and which are in connected status at the moment of the creation of the file. The complete configuration of a group of SNMP equipment which are in connected status at the moment of the creation of the file. The complete configuration of a single SNMP equipment in connected status.

The saving can be executed in any moment. For this purpose, a wished name and path can be assigned. If the XML file contains the data of more equipment, these will be listed in the file in alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the NE. Automatic saving The function XML Export manages the periodic saving in XML format of the configuration of all the SNMP equipment managed by the NMS5UX-B system and which support the function XML Export. The periodic saving is managed and automatically executed by the supervision system. The only operation required to the user is to define the modality used to execute the periodic saving through the creation of a cronjob. Cronjob The cronjobs are commands executed by a crontab, that is a system command which allows scheduling the operations to repeat in time. For the function XML Export, the parameters for the creation of a cronjob are: Frequency with which the cronjob must be executed: Daily. The user must define the time within the 24 hours when the cronjob must be executed. For example, if the value 23:45 is set as time, the cronjob will be executed everyday at 23:45. Weekly. The user must define the day of the week (monday, tuesday, etc) and the time when the cronjob must be executed. For example, if the value Sun is set for the day and 4:22 is set for the time, the cronjob will be executed every sunday at 4:22. Monthly. The user must define the day of the month (1, 2, etc) and the time when the cronjob must be executed. For example, if the value 1 is set for the day and 4:42 is set for the time, the cronjob will be executed every sunday at 4:42 of the first day of every month. Type of saving you wish to execute: Full Backup. At each saving a single XML file is generated containing the complete configuration of all the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

362

At each saving the new file will overwrite the previous one. Differential Backup. A XML file is generated for every SNMP equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which is connected status at the moment of the saving. For each equipment, the complete equipment configuration is saved in the first file generated after the creation of the relevant cronjob. At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is changed with respect to the previous one. If this: Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one. In the new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect to the previous configuration will be marked by the field Status*. Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid and available.

Incremental Backup. A single XML file is generated with all the SNMP equipment (supporting the function XML Export) which is in connected status at the moment of the saving. The complete equipment configuration is saved in the first file generated after the creation of the relevant cronjob. At every next saving, the system will check if the equipment configuration is changed with respect to the previous one. If this: Is changed, a new file is generated which will overwrite the previous one. In the new file, the differences (changes, deletions, additions) with respect to the previous configuration will be marked by the field Status*. Is not changed, the file is not generated; the previous file remains valid and available.

For the XML containing the data of more equipment, the data will be listed in the file in alphabetical order with respect to the equipment type and, within the equipment type, with respect to the logical address of the NE. * In files of type Differential Backup and Incremental Backup, the differences will be highlighted by the Status field which, depending on the type of executed change, will assume the value: Modified. Change of configuration Not present. Deletion of a NE Present. Addition of a NE

Path where the files must be saved. The system proposes a default path. It is suggested to set a different path for each type of saving. Moreover, even for the same type of saving, it is suggested to create a new directory for every new cronjob.

Once the cronjob is defined, it will start saving the files. To stop the operation, it is necessary to delete the cronjob. Saving the XML files generated by cronjobs All the XML files automatically generated by cronjobs are saved in the directory set by the user for the relevant cronjob. Default: /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/Backup. The file is automatically assigned a name which, depending on the type of saving set for the relevant cronjob, has the following format: Type Full Backup. The name FullBackup.xml is assigned to every generated file. Type Differential Backup. The name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_<ID NE>.xml Type Incremental Backup. For the first generated file, after the creation of the relevant cronjob, the name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_Full_<date>_<time>.xml For the files generated later, after the detection of changes in the equipment configuration, the name format is: NMS5_<hostname>_Incr_<date>_<time>.xml where <hostname> points out the name of the server where NMS5UX-B is running. <date> and <time> correspond to the moment when the XML file has been saved and are pointed out in the following format: YYMMDD_HHMM (for example 20100509_1310 means 9 may 2010 time 13:10).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

363

Log File
When a XML file is created (manually or automatically), the relevant log file is automatically created where are stored the actions executed by the user or by the cronjob. The log file are saved in the directory /opt/nms5ux/tools/nmsConfigDataExport/log. A name with the following format is assigned to the log file: nmsConfigDataExport_<day>_<month>_<year>_<time>_<minute>_<second>.log Where date and time correspond to the moment when the relevant XML file has been generated.

Management of XML files

The function XML Export is provided with a series of commands for the management of XML files which allow to: Display the list of the XML file present in a given directory. Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files Convert a XML file into a file in HTML format. Display the list of the HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files. Display the content of a file (.log, .xml or .html). Delete one or more files (.log, .xml or .html). Send an email with one or more files attached (.log, .xml or .html)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

364

OPTIONS

The Options menu contains the following commands: Legacy-Network Alarm Hysteresis (pag.366). It displays/sets the hysteresis parameters that characterizes the ringing alarms of the Legacy equipment. SNMP-Network Severity Code (pag.368). It displays/manages the network severity level associated to the alarms of a SNMP equipment type. SNMP-Equipment Severity Code (pag.370). It displays/manages the alarm status, the sending status of the traps and the local severity level of the alarms of a SNMP equipment. NMS5UX System Users (pag.373). It displays/manages the NMS5UX users. NMS5UX Logged Users (pag.379). It displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervision system and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.). SNMP-LCT Equipment Users (pag.385). It manages/displays the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment. SNMP-LCT Logged Users (pag.388). It displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment. It forces the disconnection (logout) of one or more users. SNMP-Remote Element Table (pag.390). It manages/displays the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment. SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download (pag.400). It updates the software of one or more SNMP equipment. SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (pag.404). It displays the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating. SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release (pag.409). It displays the software version of a SNMP equipment. FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download (pag.412). It updates the software of one or more FAMxc. FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (pag.414). It displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating. FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release (pag.416). It displays the software version of a FAMxc. Legacy-NE Sw/Fw Download (pag.418). It updates the software of one or more Legacy equipment. Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status (pag.420). It displays the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

365

LEGACY-NETWORK ALARM HYSTERESIS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The Legacy-Network Alarm Hysteresis command displays/sets the hysteresis parameters that characterizes the ringing alarms of the Legacy equipment. With details it is possible: To display the value of the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (pag.366) To modify the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (pag.367)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed. For more info about the fleeting alarms go to pag.127.

To display the value of the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (Legacy equipment)
1. Select the Options > Legacy-Network Alarm Hysteresis command. The Fleeting Alarms Manager window opens, where the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms are displayed (Fig.65). The hysteresis parameters are common for all the Legacy equipment (network global parameters). Such parameters are periodically forwarded from the central part toward the peripheral one through a broadcast message. Fig.65 Fleeting Alarms Manager window

Observation time expressed by means of minutes

Number of transitions during the t time range

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

366

To modify the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms

1. Select the Options > Legacy-Network Alarm Hysteresis command. The Fleeting Alarms Manager window opens (Fig.65). 2. To increase or to decrease the value of the parameter: t (observation time), select the arrows placed on the side of the box. It is possible to set a value comprised between 1 and 10. n (number of transitions during the t time range), select the arrows placed on the side of the box. It is possible to set a value comprised between 2 and 32.

Press Default to reset the default values (t=1, n=10). 3. Press Apply (it implements the new settings and it does not close the window) or Close (it closes the window and does not execute the operation). The Help push-button opens the on-line manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

367

SNMP-NETWORK SEVERITY CODE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The SNMP-Network Severity Code command displays/manages the network severity level associated to the alarms of a SNMP equipment type. With details it is possible: To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type (pag.368) To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type (pag.369)

For more info about the network severity level go to pag.124.

To verify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type
1. Select the Options > SNMP-Network Severity Code command. The Siae Events Manager window opens. 2. Select the type of SNMP equipment in the Equipment area. The area below displays the detail of the alarms and the relevant severity as described in Fig.66. The alarms of the user inputs, which have a different severity management (pag.124), are not present in the list.

Fig.66 Siae Events Manager window

Menu bar (1)

Type of NEs managed by NMS5UX-B system

Alarms that characterize the type of selected NE (2)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

368

Fig.66 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Apply Changes. It confirms the modification to the level of alarm severity. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

For each alarm, the following columns point out: Object. Name of the logic group which the alarm belongs to. The asterisk (*) points out that the severity level of the alarm has been modified and not definitive yet. Event Name. Name of the alarm. Severity. Severity level currently associated to the alarm. Default. Default severity level associated to the alarm. New. Severity level selected during the modification of the value.

To modify the network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type
The modification of the severity level associated to an alarm is COMMON to all the NEs of the same type. 1. Select the Options > SNMP-Network Severity Code command. The Siae Events Manager window opens (Fig.66). 2. Select the type of SNMP equipment in the Equipment area. 3. In the area below, double click on the alarm. The Modify Event window opens. Box: Category. Type of NE. Trap ID. Identifying code of the trap associated to the alarm. Event Name. Name of the alarm. Severity. Severity level of the alarm.

4. Select the Severity box and choose the new severity level from the list. The value of the Category, Trap ID and Event Name parameters cannot be modified. Pressing Default, the current setting is restored. 5. Press OK. The new severity level is pointed out in the New column of the Siae Events Manager window. 6. Select the Action > Apply Changes command. The new value is removed from the New column and displayed in the Severity column. The network severity level is not communicated to the NE as the new setting influences only the alarm indication in the NMS5UX-B supervision system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

369

SNMP-EQUIPMENT SEVERITY CODE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command displays/manages the alarm status, the sending status of the traps and the local severity level of the alarms of a SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of a SNMP equipment (pag.370) To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the alarms of a SNMP equipment (pag.371) To filter the alarms list (pag.372)

The command is available only if a single SNMP equipment in connected status has been selected, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). For more info about the: Enabling/disabling of the alarms go to pag.126. Alarm severity go to pag.124.

To verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of a SNMP equipment
1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command. The Equipment Severity Code window opens, where the list of the alarms relevant the selected equipment is displayed. For each alarm, the status (enabled/disabled), the sending status of the relevant trap from the NE to the NMS5UX-B system and the local severity level are specified (Fig.67). The alarms of the user inputs, which have a different severity management (see pag.124), are not present in the list. Fig.67 Equipment Severity Code window

Menu bar (1) The selected push-button points out the criteria used to list the alarms (2)

List of alarms (3)

Status bar (4)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

370

Fig.67 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Exit. It closes the window. Action > View/Modify Severity. It displays and modifies the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level associated to the selected alarm. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window. View > Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

Option: Description, sorts the list according to the name of the alarm. Object, sorts the list according to the object which the alarm is associated to. Status, sorts the list according to the status of the alarms and of the traps.

(3)

For each alarm, the column reports: Alarm Description. Name of the alarm. Object. Name of the object (that represents one or more physical or logical parts of the NE) which the alarm is associated to. Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system: Enabled. The alarm and the sending of trap is enabled. Trap Disabled. The sending of trap is disabled. Alarm Disabled. The alarm is disabled.

The information present in the window corresponds to the status of the alarm in the moment when the command or the refresh is executed. (4) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If they are not active filters, the number of displayed records corresponds to the total number of records. Customer Id. Logic address of the selected NE. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the alarms of a SNMP equipment
1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command. The Equipment Severity Code window opens (Fig.67). 3. Double click on the wished alarm or select the alarm and then the Action > View/Modify Severity command. The View/Modify Severity Code window opens, where it is pointed out in the box/area: Alarm Description. Name of the alarm. Status. Status of the alarm and of the trap sending by the NE to the system. If active the option: Enabled, the alarm and the sending of trap is enabled. Trap Disabled, the sending of trap is disabled. Alarm Disabled, the alarm is disabled.

Severity. Severity level associated to the alarm. The label (NMS5UX-B default) points out the default setting associated to that alarm by the supervision system.

4. To modify the enabling status of alarm/trap sending and/or the severity level, select the push-button relevant to the wished value respectively in the Status and/or Severity area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

371

If the Alarm Disabled option is selected (Status area) the severity level associated to the alarm cannot be modified. 5. Press Modify. The possible modification of the enabling status of alarm/trap sending is pointed out in the Equipment Severity Code window.

To filter the alarms list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Equipment Severity Code command. The Equipment Severity Code window opens (Fig.67). 3. Select the View > Filter command. The View Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section that contains the options: Match Object. Objects which the alarm belongs to. To set the filter, select the wished object. Match Status. Sending status of the trap/alarms. Activating the control box: Enabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is enabled will be displayed. Trap Disabled, the enabled alarms whose trap sending is disabled will be displayed. Alarm Disabled, the disabled alarms will be displayed.

It is possible to activate more control boxes at the same time. 4. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Equipment Severity Code window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window, there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the activation of the filters and displays the complete list), Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) and Help (it opens the on-line manual) push-button. When the Equipment Severity Code window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

372

NMS5UX SYSTEM USERS

Depending on specific user profile, follow the specific description: Superuser (pag.373) Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged (pag.377)

NMS5UX System Users - Superuser

System access User profile Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The NMS5UX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users. With details for the Superuser it is possible: To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps (pag.373) To create a new map (pag.374) To add a NMS5UX user (pag.374) To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users (pag.375) To delete a NMS5UX user (pag.375)

Only if, for ones system, the function Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active, use the procedure depicted at pag.376 for the creation of a NMS5UX user.

To display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps
Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens, where the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing map is displayed (Fig.68). Fig.68 User Management window (Superuser)

Menu bar (1)

List of users (2)

Fig.68 notes (1) Menu: Edit > Exit. It closes the window. Edit > Create Map. It creates a new map. Users > Create. It creates a new NMS5UX user.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

373

 (2)

Users > Modify. It modifies the characteristics of a NMS5UX user. Users > Delete. It deletes a NMS5UX user. Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

For each user, it is displayed in the column: Name. Username of the NMS5UX user. Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Superuser, Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry (pag.57) Map name. Name of the map where the NMS5UX user is present. User. Unix user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to. Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account). The Not expired wording points out that no expiry date is associated to the user. Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is: Present, the user is enabled. Absent, the user is not enabled.

Ring/VLAN. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is: Present, the user is enabled. Absent, the user is not enabled.

Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system, used by the user, is installed.

To create a new map

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.68). 2. Select the Edit > Create Map command. The Create new map window opens. 3. Type in the Map Name box the name of the new map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters). 4. Press OK.

To add a NMS5UX user

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.68). 2. Select the Users > Create command. The Insert new users window opens. 3. Select, in the Operation System Users list, the Unix user whom you wish to associate the new NMS5UX user. For each Unix user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user. The list displays only the Unix users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet. 4. The name of the selected Unix user is automatically set in the Login box. The value cannot be modified. 5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user. The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile. 6. Activate the box:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

374

Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application. Ring/VLAN, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application: Ring Manager and allows then the opening of Ring Manager window (pag.50). VLAN Manager and allows then the opening of VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).

For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation. 7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes. A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to modify it typing the day (Day box), the month (Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time check box. The default setting can be modified by the Superuser. 8. Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to. All the available maps are listed. The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box. If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map. To execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters) 9. Press OK. The user is added to the list of the User Management window. The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.

To modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.68). 2. Select the user. 3. Select the Users > Modify command. The Modify users window opens where the user characteristics are displayed. 4. Make the wished changes. The modalities for the parameters setting are the same described in the procedure for the creation of an user. If the Superuser is selected, the profile cannot be modified. 5. Press OK.

To delete a NMS5UX user

Operation available only to Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.68). 2. Select the user. The Superuser cannot be deleted. 3. Select the Users > Delete command. The Deleted users window opens where the user characteristics are displayed. 4. Press OK. The user is deleted from the list: he cannot use the NMS5UX-B system anymore.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

375

To add a NMS5UX user (manual login to the UX Map Manager window - active)
Operation available only to Superuser. The following procedure must be used when the function Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active. In fact, in this condition during the creation of the user, it is possible to assign to the NMS5UX user a name different with respect to the relevant Unix user. Moreover, it is necessary to define the password because the password of the Unix user is not automatically assigned to the NMS5UX user. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.68). 2. Select the Users > Create command. The Insert new users window opens. 3. Select, in the Operation System Users list, the Unix user whom you wish to associate the new NMS5UX user. For each Unix user, it is possible to associate only one NMS5UX user. The list displays only the Unix users whom no NMS5UX user has been associated yet. 4. Type, in the Login box, the name of the new user. The name of the Unix user, selected in the previous step, is automatically displayed; it is possible to modify it typing in the box an alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters. 5. From the Level list, select the push-button relevant to the profile you wish to associate to the new user. The Superuser option is not available, as it is not possible to create a second user with this profile. 6. Activate the box: Internet, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the RAN application. Ring/VLAN, if you wish that the new user is acknowledged also by the application: Ring Manager and then allows the opening of the Ring Manager window (pag.50). VLAN Manager and then allows the opening of the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51).

For more information about the application refer to the specific documentation. 7. Define an expiry date for the NMS5UX user (account) in the Expiration data boxes. A default date is automatically displayed; it is possible to modify it typing the day (Day box), the month (Month box) and the year (Year box) or it is possible not to associate any date activating the Life time check box. The default setting can be modified by the Superuser. 8. In the Write box (Password area) type the access code you wish to assign to the new user (alphanumeric string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters). 9. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character. 10.Select from the Map list, the map which you wish to associate the user to. All the available maps are listed. The name of the selected map is displayed in the Map associate box. If the user you are creating has Advanced or Privileged profile, it is possible to create a new map. To execute the operation, it is sufficient to type in the Map associate text field the name of the map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters) 11.Press OK. The user is added to the list of the User Management window. The limit of users who can be created is determined by one's codeword.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

376

NMS5UX System Users - Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged user

System access User profile Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged

The NMS5UX System Users command displays/manages the NMS5UX users. With details for the user with entry, normal, advanced and privileged profile it is possible: To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map (pag.377)

The following operation is available only if for ones system the function of Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active. In this condition, the password can be changed because the password of the Unix user is not automatically assigned to the NMS5UX user. To modify the password associated to ones NMS5UX users (pag.378)

To display the characteristics of the user who opened the map

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens, where the characteristics of the user who opened the map is displayed (Fig.69). Fig.69 User Management window (Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged)

Menu bar (1)

User characteristics (2)

Fig.69 notes (1) Menu: (2) Edit > Exit. It closes the window. Users > Modify. It modifies the password of the NMS5UX user. Help > Index. It opens the on-line manual.

Column: Name. Username of the NMS5UX user. Level. Profile of the NMS5UX user: Privileged, Advanced, Normal, Entry (pag.57) Map name. Name of the map. User. Unix user whom the NMS5UX user is associated to. Expiration time. Expiry date/time of the NMS5UX user (account). The Not expired label points out that no expiry date is associated to the user. Int. Enabling of the user to use the RAN (Remote Access NMS5UX) application. In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is: Present, the user is enabled. Absent, the user is not enabled.

Ring/VLAN. Enabling of the user to open the Ring Manager window (pag.50) and/or VLAN Manager Map window (pag.51). In detail, if the symbol * (asterisk) is:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

377

Present, the user is enabled. Absent, the user is not enabled.

Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system, used by the user, is installed.

To modify the password associated to one's NMS5UX user

Operation available only if for ones system the function Manual login to the UX Map Manager window (pag.61) is active. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX System Users command. The User Management window opens (Fig.69). 2. Select the record relevant to one's user. 3. Select the Users > Modify command. The Modify users window opens. 4. In the Write box (Password area) type the new access code (alphanumeric string of minimum 6 and maximum 21 characters). 5. In the Rewrite box, type again the access code. For safety reason, in both the text fields an asterisk (*) is displayed for each typed character. 6. Press OK.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

378

NMS5UX LOGGED USERS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry*, Normal*, Advanced*, Privileged*, Superuser

* The Entry, Normal, Advanced or Privileged user cannot force the user logout or the application closure. The NMS5UX Logged Users command displays the list of the NMS5UX users connected to the supervision system and the list of active application (browser, manager, etc.). With details it is possible: To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open (pag.379) To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user (pag.380) To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user (pag.381) To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users (pag.381) To filter the NMS5UX users list (pag.381) To display the list of the active NMS5UX-B application (pag.382) To require the closure of a NMS5UX-B application (pag.383) To force the closure of a NMS5UX-B application (pag.383) To filter the NMS5UX-B applications list (pag.383)

To display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open
1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Logged Users option. The window displays the user having a map open (Fig.70). Fig.70 Nms5ux Logged Users window (users list)

Menu bar (1) The selected option points out the type of the data displayed in the table (2) List of the users (3)

Number of displayed records with respect to the total number

Fig.70 notes (1) Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Request Logout. It requires the disconnection of the selected user. Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user in Running status.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

379

 (2)

Action > Send Message. It sends a message to the selected user or to all the users in Running status. Action > Request Exit. Not available/meaning when the user list is displayed. Action > Forced Exit. Not available/meaning when the user list is displayed. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

The list (users and applications) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed alternatively according to the selected option: View Logged Users. In the windows there is the users list. View Running Application. In the windows there is the applications list. Time. Date and time when the user has connected to the system (opening of the UX Map Manager window). User Name. Name of the user. Map. Name of the map used by the user. Permission. Type of access to the map: Read Only, Read/Write. Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5UX-B interface, used by the user, is running. Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system is installed. Status. Status of the user. In detail, the wording: Running. The user has been registered by the NMS5UX-B system (normal operating status of the user). Out of NMS5UX. The user has opened the TMNMenu or Login window, but he has not executed the login yet for the access to NMS5UX-B (transient status of the user).

(3)

For each user the column displays:

For the users in Running status, the information present in the table are dynamically updated. For the users in Out of NMS5UX status it is necessary to require the updating pressing Refresh Info.

To require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Logged Users option. The window displays the connected users (Fig.70). 3. Select the user you wish to disconnect. 4. Select the Action > Request Logout command. In the map opened by the selected user (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated that the user (user A) has required his disconnection. In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons. If the user B, within 30 seconds from the closure of the window, press: OK, agrees the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the user B has been disconnected. Cancel, it does not agree the request. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the user B has not agreed to his disconnection from the system.

If the user B, within 30 seconds from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two pushbuttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts as follows: Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B. The user is automatically disconnected. Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B. The user is not disconnected.

In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that points out the result of the operation. If the result of the operation is the disconnection of the selected user (user B), this involves the removal of the user from the list and the automatic closure of the relevant map (closure of the NMS5UX-B graphic interface).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

380

To force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user

The operation can be executed only by Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Logged Users option. The window displays the connected users (Fig.70). 3. Select the user you wish to disconnect. 4. Select the command Action > Forced Logout. The user is removed from the list and the relevant map is automatically closed (closure of the NMS5UXB graphic interface).

To send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Logged Users option. The window displays the connected users (Fig.70). 3. Select the user you wish to send a message to. 4. Select the Action > Send Message command. The Send Broadcast Message window opens. 5. Select the option: Selected Users, to send the message only to the selected user. Broadcast, to send a message to all the users present in the list.

6. Type the message in the available text area (alphanumeric string of maximum 150 characters). 7. Press Send Message. The video of the users, whom the message has been sent to, displays the window with the following text Message from <user>: <text of the message>.

To filter the NMS5UX users list

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Logged Users option. The window displays the connected users (Fig.70). 3. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Running Process Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: User Name. NMS5UX user. To set the filter, select the name of the wished user. Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to. To set the filter, select the wished map. 4. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Nms5ux: Logged Users window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

381

In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons. When the Nms5ux: Logged Users window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically cleared.

To display the list of the active NMS5UX-B applications

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Running Application option. The window displays the NMS5UX-B system applications (manager, browser, etc.) active when the command is selected (Fig.71). Fig.71 Nms5ux Logged Users window (applications list)

Menu bar (1) The selected option points out the type of the data displayed in the table (2) List of the application (3) Number of displayed records with respect to the total number

Fig.71 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window. Action > Request Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected. Action > Force Logout. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected. Action > Send Message. Not available/meaningful when the application list is selected. Action > Request Exit. It requires the closure of the selected application. Action > Forced Exit. It forces the closure of the selected application. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information displayed in the window. View > Set Filter. It filters the list according to specific criteria. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual.

The list (users and applications) are not displayed contemporarily in the window. They are displayed alternatively according to the selected option: View Logged Users. In the windows there is the users list. View Running Application. In the windows there is the applications list. Application Name. Name of the running application. Logical Addr. Logic and physical address of the equipment, which the relevant equipment window has been opened for (information valid only for the Manager application). User Name. Name of the NMS5UX user who are using the operation. Map Name. Name of the map that the user is using. Terminal. Address of the terminal where the NMS5UX-B interface used by the user is running. Server. Name of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system is installed.

(3)

For each application the column displays:

The information present in the table corresponds to the applications running when the command is selected or the refresh is executed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

382

To require the closure of an NMS5UX-B application

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Running Application option. The window displays the open applications (Fig.71). 3. Select the application you wish to close. 4. Select the Action > Request Exit command. In the map where the application is opened (user B), a confirmation window opens where it is indicated that the user (user A) has required the closure of the application yyy. In the confirmation window, there are the OK and Cancel push-buttons. If the user B, within 30 seconds from the opening of the window, press the push-button: OK, agrees to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the application of the user B has been closed. Cancel, it does not agree to close the application. The screen of the user A displays a message which informs that the user B has not agreed to close the application.

If the user B, within 30 sec from the opening of the window, does not press any of the two buttons, the system, according to the operating level of the user which sent the request (user A), acts as follows: Operating level of the user A equal of higher than that of the user B. The application is automatically closed. Operating level of the user A lower that of the user B. The application is not automatically closed. In both cases, the screen of the user A displays a message that points out the result of the operation.

To force the closure of an NMS5UX-B application

The operation can be executed only by Superuser. 1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Running Application option. The window displays the open applications (Fig.71). 3. Select the application you wish to close. 4. Select the Action > Forced Exit command. The application is deleted from the list.

To filter the NMS5UX-B applications list

1. Select the Options > NMS5UX Logged Users command. The Nms5ux: Logged Users window opens. 2. Select the View Running Application option. The window displays the open applications (Fig.71). 3. Select the View > Set Filter command. The Running Process Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: Application Name. Group or single application. To set the filter:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

383

In the Application Group area, select the wished group. In the Application Name area the application associated to the group are listed. Select the wished application. If no application is selected in the Nms5ux: Logged Users window, the records relevant to all the applications in the group will be displayed.

The groups where the applications are grouped are: Application, browser (for example, Alarm history, Current Alarm, etc.) and various applications (for example Software Download, etc.). Manager, equipment Manager applications.

User Name. NMS5UX user. To set the filter, select the name of the wished user. Map Name. Map which the NMS5UX user is associated to. To set the filter, select the wished map.

4. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the Nms5ux: Logged Users window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons. When the Nms5ux: Logged Users window is closed, the possible activation of filters is automatically cleared.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

384

SNMP-LCT EQUIPMENT USERS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command manages/displays the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To display the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment (pag.385) To add a new LCT user (pag.386) To modify the characteristics of the LCT users (pag.387) To delete a LCT user (pag.387)

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALFO, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/pag.49). For more information about the users list go to pag.387.

To display the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command. The LCT User Manager window opens, where the LCT user list of the equipment is displayed (Fig.72). Fig.72 LCT User Manager window

List of LCT users (1)

Push-buttons bar (2)

Type and logical address of the selected NE

Fig.72 notes (1) For each user, it is reported in the column: User Name. Name of the LCT user. Profile. Profile of the LCT user: Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration. Read and Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance operations (MAN OP).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

385

Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the remote equipment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).

The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the LCT User Manager window. Timeout. Status of the Timeout option. Wording: No timeout. The option is disabled: the user is not automatically disconnected after a given period of time. <number>. The option is enabled: the user, if the program does not execute operation, is disconnected after the indicated period of time.

(2)

Push-button: Add User. It adds a LCT user. Modify User. It modifies the characteristics of the selected LCT user. Remove User. It deletes a LCT user. Refresh. It updates the information contained in the window. Close. It closes the window.

To add a new LCT user

It is possible to define in each list a maximum of 4 users for each profile (totally maximum 12 users). 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command. The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.72). 3. Press Add User. The User Management window opens. 4. Type in the User box the name of the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 8 characters). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present in the same list. Furthermore, the name of the user, once assigned, cannot be modified later. 5. Type in the Password box the access code of the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 8 characters). 6. Type again in the Confirm Password box the access code of the user. 7. In the Timeout area select the option: Timeout if you wish that the user, if he does not execute any operation, is disconnected after the period of time set in the box Sec. To modify the period of time, activate the Sec. box and type a value between 1 second and 43200 seconds (12h). No timeout if you wish that the user is not automatically disconnected after a given period of time. Read only. This user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration. Read and Write. This user can check the parameters and execute maintenance operations (MAN OP). Station Operator. This user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the remote equipment list, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).

8. In the Profile area, select the option relevant to the profile you wish to assign to the user:

9. Press Add.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

386

To modify the characteristics of the LCT users

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command. The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.72). 3. Select the user you wish to modify. 4. Press Modify User. The User Management window opens. 5. Apply the wished changes. The setting modality of the parameters are the same pointed out for the adding of a new user (pag.386). It is not possible to modify the name of the user. 6. Press Modify.

To delete a LCT user

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Equipment Users command. The LCT User Manager window opens (Fig.72). 3. Select the user you wish to delete. 4. Press Remove User and confirm.

User list (more info)

The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment. If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment. With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to an equipment have to be set by the NMS5UX-B system (see pag.386), the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT applications. Each equipment (managed by the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT), is equipped with two predefined users: SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT application with the following features: User name > System (unchangeable parameter). Timeout* > No Timeout (changeable parameter). Profile > System (unchangeable parameter) Password > Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter)

The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted. NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX-B system, with the following features: User name > NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter). Timeout* > No Timeout (changeable parameter). Profile > System (unchangeable parameter) Password > Predefined (changeable parameter)

The NMS5UX user can not be deleted. The password and the timeout of the predefined users can be changed only with the local management programs (SCT/LMT, WEB LCT). * Timeout. Time period when, if the program does not execute operations, its connection is automatically stopped. The program manages a polling process to verify the presence of the LCT-equipment connection. If the equipment does not answer to the polling for the set period (timeout), the user is disconnected and, as consequence, also the equipment is disconnected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

387

SNMP-LCT LOGGED USERS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot force the user logout. The SNMP-LCT Logged Users command displays the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment (pag.388) To force the disconnection (logout) of one user (pag.389)

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For the NEs of ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/ pag.49). For more info about the users (LCT and NMS5UX) go to pag.389

To display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment
1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Logged Users command. The Logged Users window opens, where the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to the NE when the command is selected is displayed (Fig.73). Fig.73 Logged Users window

Menu bar (1)

List of LCT users (2)

Type and logical address of the selected NE

Fig.73 notes (1) For each user, it is reported in the column: User Name. Name of the user.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

388

The NMS5UX wording identifies the user of the NMS5UX-B system or a remote user (different from LCT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). The other ones identify the LCT users. Profile. User profile. For the NMS5UX user, the relevant profile used in the NMS5UX-B interface is not displayed (Level parameter), but the profile with which the user is acknowledged by the controller of the equipment and by the SCT or WEB LCT program: System profile. Ip Address. IP address of the machine where the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program is running or the NMS5UX-B interface used by the user.

The information present in the table corresponds to the characteristics of the users connected to the equipment when the command is selected or the refresh is executed. (2) Menu: File > Exit. It closes the window. Action > Refresh Info. It updates the information contained in the window. Action > Force Logout. It forces the disconnection of the selected user. Help > On Usage. It opens the on-line manual. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

To force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user

If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the supervision system provides to automatically restore the connection of the user. It is possible to force the disconnection of an user even by means of the commands present in the equipment window. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-LCT Logged Users command. The Logged Users window opens (Fig.73). 3. Select the user you wish to disconnect. 4. Select the Action > Forced Logout command and confirm. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

LCT and NMS5UX users (more info)

LCT user User connected to the equipment via the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT management program. NMS5UX user User connected to the equipment via NMS5UX-B system (see pag.52). All the NMS5UX users who connect to an equipment, independently from their username/profile by which are known by the supervision system, are seen by the equipment controller as users with username NMS5UX and profile System.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

389

SNMP-REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE

System access User profile

Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only, Read-Write Entry Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Remote Element Table command manages/displays the remote equipment list of an SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To display the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment (pag.390) To add a station to the remote equipment list (pag.391) To rename a station of the remote equipment list (pag.392) To delete a station from the remote equipment list (pag.392) To add an equipment to the remote equipment list (pag.392) To add more equipment at the same type to the remote equipment list (pag.394) To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list (pag.395) To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list (pag.396) To move an equipment within the remote equipment list (pag.396) To save to a file the remote equipment list (pag.397) To restore from file the remote equipment list (pag.397)

The command is available only if it has been selected a single SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For the NEs of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/ pag.49). The ALFO equipment automatically generates the remote equipment list inserting all the equipment belonging to the same radio link. Then, for this equipment, the remote equipment list can be displayed but not modified. For more information about the remote equipment list go to pag.397.

To display the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens, where the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller of the selected equipment is displayed (Fig.74). Fig.74 Remote Element Table window

Menu bar (1)

Station (2) Equipment belonging to the station (3)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

390

Fig.74 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Load from file. It restores the remote equipment list from file. File > Save to file. It saves the remote equipment list to file. File > Close. It closes the window. Edit > Add > Station. It adds a station. Edit > Add > Single Element. It adds an equipment. Edit > Add > Multiple Element. It adds more equipment at the same time. Edit > Remove > Station. It deletes the station. Edit > Remove > Element. It deletes an equipment. Edit > Modify > Station. It modifies the name of the station. Edit > Modify > Element. It modifies the characteristics of an equipment. Edit > Exchange > Before. It moves an equipment over the previous one. Edit > Exchange > After. It moves an equipment under the next one. Edit > Move to station. It moves an equipment from a station to another one. Help > About Application. Version of the module that manages the considered functionality.

For each station, the Station/... column reports the name of the station. No particular meaning is given to the station; it is simply introduced to help the user in the localization of the equipment.

(3)

For each equipment, it is reported in the column: .../Equipment. Name of the equipment. The program automatically assigns the equipment name during the creation of the equipment itself. The name of the equipment, present in the remote equipment list, is not displayed in the map below the relevant symbol. In the map the equipment name, assigned by the user during the creation of the symbol, is pointed out. IP Address. IP address (SNMP agent) of the equipment. Element Type. Type of equipment: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user has required the connection to). Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by SCT/LMT or WEB LCT. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network. Node X. Equipment belonging to the ALplus or ALCplus2 local node. With ALplus local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment (ALplus - Nodal Matrix) interconnected by nodal bus, where the considered equipment is an element. In this case the value X can correspond to A, B or C and points out the subset. With ALCplus2 local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2) interconnected by a Nodal Bus (TDM traffic) and/or by LAN (Ethernet traffic), where the considered equipment is an element. In this case the value X can correspond to a number between 1 and 8 and points out the subset. Gosip Address. NSAP (Gosip) address. Parameter meaningful only for equipment inserted into an OSI network.

To add a station to the remote equipment list

It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations in the list. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

391

3. Select the Edit > Add > Station command. The Add New Station window opens. 4. Type, in the text field, the name you wish to assign to the station (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank cannot be used as first character of the name. 5. Press Ok. The new station is added at the bottom of the list of already existing station. 6. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.

To rename a station of the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the station you wish to rename. 4. Select the Edit > Modify > Station command. The Modify Station window opens. 5. Type, in the text field, the new name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different stations. Moreover, a number or a blank cannot be used as first character of the name. 6. Press Ok. The name of the station is modified. 7. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment

To delete a station from the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the station you wish to delete. The deletion of the station causes also the deletion of all the equipment associated to it. 4. Select the Edit > Remove > Station command and confirm. The station is deleted. 5. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.

To add an equipment to the remote equipment list

A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

392

The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to. An equipment can be associated only to a single station. 4. Select the Edit > Add > Single Element command. The Add Single Element window opens. The Apply to station field points out the station which the new equipment will be associated to. 5. Type, in the IP address box, the IP address of the equipment. It is not possible to create in the same list (even if in different stations) two equipment with the same IP Address. 6. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of element you wish to insert: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user has required the connection to). Element Manager/Remote Node. This option has a several meanings according to the type of equipment you wish to insert: ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) belonging to a remote ALplus node. In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.398. ALCplus2 equipment belonging to a remote ALCplus2 node. In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.399. All the types of equipment, except for the above mentioned one. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

7. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP (Gosip) address executing the following procedure: a. Activate the Gosip Address box. b. To change the part of System ID of the NSAP (Gosip) Address, press Settings. The Settings window opens. c. Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID d. Press OK e. To change the default part of the NSAP (Gosip) Address, press Setup Default. The Gosip Default Option window opens. f. To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s. g. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add a value to the list: Press Add. The Domain Settings window opens. Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination. Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain. Press OK. Select the value to be removed. Press Remove.

To remove a value from the list:

h. To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already pointed out for the Domain parameter.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

393

i.

Press OK.

8. Press OK. Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, with the characteristics of the new equipment. 9. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.

To add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list
A maximum of 100 equipment can be inserted in the list. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the station which you wish to associate the equipment to. An equipment can be associated only to a single station. 4. Select the Edit > Add > Multiple Element command. The Add Multiple Element window opens. The Apply to station field displays the station which the new equipment will be associated to. Under the field, all the equipment managed by NMS5UX-B are listed. For each equipment, the IP address and the logic address are listed in the order. The list can be filtered: a. Selecting the Filter push-button The Load Equipment window opens. b. Select one or more boxes, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the options: Match Logical Address box. Logic address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field. Match IP Address box. IP address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the IP Address of the NE in the text field. Match connection status box. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the push-button relevant to the wished status. Match equipment type box. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the push-button relevant to the type of wished equipment. c. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and does not close the window). The table displays only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. In the window there are also the Clear (it clears the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not executes the operation) push-buttons. 5. Select the equipment you wish to add to the remote equipment list. 6. In the Element Type area, select the option relevant to the type of elements you wish to insert: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user has required the connection to). Element Manager/Remote Node. This option has a several meanings according to the type of equipment you wish to insert: ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) belonging to a remote ALplus node. In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.398. ALCplus2 equipment belonging to a remote ALCplus2 node.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

394

In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.399. All the types of equipment, except for the above mentioned one. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

7. Press OK (executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (executes the command and does not close the window). Under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed, for each new equipment. 8. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment.

To modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the equipment you wish to modify. 4. Select the Edit > Modify > Element command. The Modify Element window opens. The Apply to station field displays the station where the equipment is present. 5. To modify the IP address, type the new value in the IP Address box. It is not possible to assign to the equipment an IP Address already present in the list. 6. To change the element type, select the desired option into the Element Type area: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. Remote link. Equipment managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user has required the connection to). Element Manager/Remote Node. This option has a several meanings according to the type of equipment you wish to insert: ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) belonging to a remote ALplus node. In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.398. ALCplus2 equipment belonging to a remote ALCplus2 node. In this case, it will not be necessary to insert in the remote equipment list all the element of the remote node but, inserting only one element and identifying it with the Remote Node type, the connection with all the elements of the remote node will be activated at the connection with the considered equipment. An example is reported to pag.399. All the types of equipment, except for the above mentioned one. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by the SCT/LMT or WEB LCT program. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

7. To modify the NSAP (Gosip) address: a. Activate the Gosip Address box. b. To change the part of System ID of the NSAP (Gosip) Address, press Settings. The Settings window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

395

c. Type into the boxes the value of the 6 bytes that compose System ID d. Press OK e. To change the default part of the NSAP (Gosip) Address, press Setup Default. The Gosip Default Option window opens. f. To change the AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved parameters, type, into the relevant boxes, the value of the corresponding byte/s. g. To change the Domain parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add a value to the list: Press Add. The Domain Settings window opens. Into the Label box, type a name for the domain under examination. Into the Hex value boxes, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain. Press OK. Select the value to be removed. Press Remove.

To remove a value from the list:

h. To change the Area parameter, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. To add or to remove a value from the list, execute the same procedures already pointed out for the Domain parameter. i. Press OK. 8. Press OK. The characteristics of the equipment are modified according to the new setting. 9. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment

To delete an equipment from the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the equipment you wish to delete. 4. Select the Edit > Remove > Element command and confirm. The equipment is deleted. 5. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment

To move an equipment within the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the equipment you wish to move. 4. To move an equipment from a station to the other: a. Select the Edit > Move to station command. The Move to station window opens. b. Select the station where you wish to move the equipment. c. Press Ok. The equipment is moved to the selected station.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

396

5. To move an equipment among the list of equipment of a station: Press the Edit > Exchange > Before command, to move the equipment over the previous NE. Press the Edit > Exchange > After command, to move the equipment under the next NE.

6. Press Apply and then confirm. The list is stored in the controller of the equipment

To save to a file the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Set or modify the remote equipment list. 4. Press File > Save To File. The Save to file window opens. 5. Type the name of the file in the proper box (with extension .rel) and set the path where you wish to save the file. 6. Press OK.

To restore from file the remote equipment list

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Table window opens (Fig.74). 3. Select the File > Load from File command. The Load from file window opens. 4. Select the file (with extension .rel) where the wished remote equipment list is stored. 5. Press OK. In the Remote Element Table window, the remote equipment list is displayed.

Remote equipment list (more info)

Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller. With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish to connect to. When the user requires the connection to any equipment present in the network (local equipment), the local management program: SCT/LMT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically sends the connection command to all the equipment present in the list. WEB LCT reads, at the connection of this equipment, its remote equipment list and automatically sends the connection command to the equipment of type Remote Link, present in the remote equipment list of the local equipment.

For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment into stations. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment. Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station. Besides the remote equipment to be connected, the user can insert into the remote equipment list also the following information: IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B system resides. Coupling between IP address and NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

397

Example of definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list

Suppose to have a network made by two ALplus nodes both of them composed by 3 ALplus equipment (Nodal Matrix) as depicted in Fig.75. Fig.75 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 1)

Equipment 1 172.18.10.1

Equipment 4 172.18.10.4

Equipment 2 172.18.10.2

Nodal BUS

Equipment 3 172.18.10.3

Equipment 5 172.18.10.5

Nodal Bus

Equipment 6 172.18.10.6

By means of the SCT application the ALplus nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name of the node, IP addresses and subset (A, B, C) ad depicted in Fig.76. To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login with an equipment of the ALplus node and, by means of the SCT application, to \define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The program will automatically configure the characteristics of the ALplus node even in the other two equipment (station, Equipment ID, Remote Element Table). Fig.76 - Definition of a remote ALplus node in the remote equipment list (example 2)

Equipment 1 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.1 Equip ID: Milan.A Equipment 2 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.2 Equip ID: Milan.B Equipment 3 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.3 Equip ID: Milan.C

Equipment 4 Station Name: Rome Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.4 Equip ID: Rome.A Equipment 5 Station Name: Rome Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.5 Equip ID: Rome.B Equipment 6 Station Name: Rome Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.6 Equip ID: Rome.C

Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus

Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, by means of SCT, all the network equipment connecting to Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured in the following way: 1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (pag.391). 2. Create under the station Milan an equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 assigning to it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (pag.392). 3. Create under the station Rome an equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4 assigning to it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node. 4. Save the remote equipment list into the controller of Equipment 1. At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connection with: Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality. Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

398

Example of definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list

Suppose to have a network made by two ALCplus2 nodes both of them composed by 3 ALCplus2 equipment as depicted in Fig.77. Fig.77 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 1)

Equipment 1 172.18.10.1
Nodal Bus/ LAN

Equipment 4 172.18.10.4
Nodal Bus/ LAN

Equipment 2 172.18.10.2

Equipment 3 172.18.10.3

Equipment 5 172.18.10.5

Equipment 6 172.18.10.6

By means of the SCT application the ALCplus2 nodes have been defined: assignment of the station, name of the node, IP addresses and subset (1, 2, 3) ad depicted in Fig.77. To do this, it is sufficient to activate the login with an equipment of the ALCplus2 node and, by means of the SCT application, to define the characteristics of the equipment composing the node. The program will automatically configure the characteristics of the ALCplus2 node even in the other two equipment (station, Equipment ID, Remote Element Table, etc.). Fig.78 - Definition of a remote ALCplus2 node in the remote equipment list (example 2)

Equipment 1 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.1 Equip ID: Milan.1 Equipment 2 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.2 Equip ID: Milan.2 Equipment 3 Station Name: Milan Node Name: Milan IP: 172.18.10.3 Equip ID: Milan.3

Equipment 4 Station Name: Rome Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.4 Equip ID: Rome.1 Equipment 5 Nodal Bus/ Station Name: Rome LAN Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.5 Equip ID: Rome.2 Equipment 6 Station Name: Rome Node Name: Rome IP: 172.18.10.6 Equip ID: Rome.3

Nodal Bus/ LAN

Now, suppose you wish to manage locally, by means of SCT, all the network equipment connecting to Equipment 1. To do this, the remote equipment list of the Equipment 1 must be configured in the following way: 1. Create the stations Milan and Rome (pag.391). 2. Create under the station Milan an equipment of the node Milan, for example Equipment 2 assigning to it as Element Type > Managed by SCT (pag.392). 3. Create under the station Rome an equipment of the node Rome, for example Equipment 4 assigning to it as Element Type > Element Managed/Remote Node. 4. Save the remote equipment list into the controller of Equipment 1. At the activation of the connection with Equipment 1, the program will automatically activate the connection with: Equipment 1, Equipment 2 and Equipment 3 in Connected/Login modality. Equipment 4, Equipment 5 and Equipment 6 in Connected/Monitor modality.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

399

SNMP-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more SNMP equipment. With detail it is possible: To update the equipment software (pag.400) To update the WEB LCT application (pag.402)

The command is available only if it has been selected one or more SNMP equipment of the same type, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1 and FAMxc. For more information about the update of the: Equipment software go to pag.403. WEB LCT application go to pag.403.

To update the equipment software (SNMP)

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Software Download window opens (Fig.79). 3. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory. To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file. 4. Set the type of download you wish to execute. Select the option: Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller. Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or operating code).

5. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software. 6. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is: Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box. It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected. Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time for Download area.

7. Press Start Dwl. If in the previous step, it has been: Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic address and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Waiting, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed. The operation takes some minutes. Before starting the updating of the controller of the NE, it executes a compatibility check between the software that must be sent and the one present in the controller itself.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

400

The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (pointed out by the first 2 characters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the specific type of NE. If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the updating of the software will not be executed. If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.82), in the Release box relevant to the updated memory bench, the new version of the software is pointed out. If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old version or the wording not loaded. Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment list for download area. Fig.79 Software Download window (SNMP)

Parameters to set for the updating of the equipment software

Push-buttons bar (1)

NEs selected in the map for which the updating of the equipment software with be executed (2)

Fig.79 notes (1) Push-button: (2) Start Dwl. It starts the software updating. Cancel. It closes the window. Scheduling. It displays the list of the NEs scheduled for the updating of the software (Fig.80). Help. It opens the on-line manual

For each equipment, there are, in order: Logic address. IP address. Type of NE

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

401

Status of the NE when the command has been selected: Con. The NE is in connected status. Dis. The NE is in disconnected status. Nev_Con. The NE is in disconnected status (never been connected). Unrea. The NE is in unreachable status. Mant. The NE is in maintenance status (operation in progress). Lom_Mon. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Monitoring modality. Lom_Conf. The LCT program is connected to the NE in Configuring modality. SwDl. The download of the software is in progress.

Double click on one NE: the RelSw window (Fig.82) opens, where the version of the software present in the memory benches of the NE is displayed. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value between 1 and 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

To update the WEB LCT application

The operation will be successful and is meaningful only if one or more equipment, supporting the WEB LCT application, is selected. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Software Download window opens (Fig.79). 3. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the Select file for download window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory. To press Read to display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file. 4. Select the Only different or not present option. 5. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is: Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box. It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected. Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time for Download area.

6. Press Start Dwl. If in the previous step, it has been: Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic address and the type of NE which is updating the WEB LCT, and the status of the operation (Waiting, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed. The operation takes some minutes. If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.82) in the Unit release bench list relevant to the updated memory bench, the WebServerLCT option will point out the new version of WEB LCT. Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment list for download area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

402

Equipment software (SNMP) (more info)

With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of the whole NE (software of the main controller and software of the peripheral units).

The equipment software is present in the main controller that have two memory benches (bench), one working and the other in stand-by. Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software. It is possible to update the software of only one memory bench at a time. The NMS5UX-B automatically updates the software of the memory bench not on progress or not present.

The updating of the software can be immediately executed (only if a single NE is selected) or can be scheduled for a given date/time (suggested option). In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and the system will execute the updating at the date/time scheduled by the user. In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions: The NE must be in connected status. The local management program in Configuration modality must not be connected to the NE. No other operation must be running.

If the updating of the software is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed. Even if the updating is scheduled and in the moment (date/time) when it was schedule the NE is not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular intervals, will verify the condition of the NE until: The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed. The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.

The files, for the software updating, are identified by the extension .dwl and by a name composed by 8 characters. In details: 1 character identifies the technology (S=SDH, P=PDH, M=PMP/IPBOX, K=CommServer). 2 character identifies the type of equipment (R=Radio, M=Multiplex, ComS=CommServer). 3 ... 6 character identify the product number. 7, 8 character identify the most meaningful digits of the version.

WEB LCT application (SNMP) (more info)

The WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation, etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal. WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.

The update of WEB LCT, as for the equipment software, can be executed immediately or scheduled for a given date/time. The update modality is the same described for the equipment software. The files, for the WEB LCT updating, are identified by the extension .dwl.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

403

SNMP-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating. WIth details it is possible: To display the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating (pag.404) To delete one or more equipment from the list (pag.405) To stop the updating of the software (pag.406) To save the list of the scheduled equipment (pag.406) To re-execute the software update (pag.406). To switch the memory bench (pag.407). To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment (pag.408).

For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.403.

To display the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating
1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens, where the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating and/or the switching of the memory benches of the controller are displayed (Fig.80). Fig.80 Scheduling download window (SNMP)
Menu bar (1) List of the NEs sheduled for the updating of the equipment software (2)

Fig.80 notes (1) Menu: File > Deleted All. It deletes all the NEs present in the list except for those for which the updating of the software is in progress. File > Deleted Select. It deletes the selected NEs except for those for which the updating of the software is in progress. File > Deleted Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed. File > Export. It saves the list of the scheduled equipment. File > Abort. It stops the procedure for the updating of the software.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

404

 (2)

File > Exit. It closes the window. Sort. It displays the list of criteria used to sort the list of NEs. The sign next to the option points out the criterion currently used. Filter > Filter. It filters the list of the equipment. Command > Bench Switch. It executes the switching of the memory benches of the equipment for which the sw update has been correctly executed (equipment in status Completed). Command > Retry interrupted. It re-executes the software update for those equipment which the update operation is failed for (equipment in status Interrupted). Help > Index. It opens the manual.

For each NE, it is reported in the column: Equipment. Logic address of the NE. Type. Type of NE. Scheduling Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the operation is scheduled. Start Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the operation is started. Duration. Duration (expressed in hour:minutes:seconds) of the operation. F. The presence of the x points out that, during the download, all the software of the controller of the equipment is updated. O. The presence of the x points out that, during the download the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or operating code) is updated. B. The presence of the x points out one of the following conditions: If the x is present, even for the option F, this means that, at the end of download, a switch of the memory bench is automatically executed or has been executed, in such a way that the bench whose software has been updated will be used. If the x is not present even for the option F, this means that only the switch of the memory bench will be executed or has been executed.

P. Column not managed. Status. Status of the operation of download and/or switching of the memory bench: Downloading. The operation is in progress. Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet. It is possible that, in the Time Scheduling field, a scheduling date/time previous to the current one is displayed. This means that the NE, when the operation has been scheduled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the operation. In this case, the system attempts the operation at regular time interval. Completed. The updating of the software has been successfully executed. Interrupted. The updating of the software has been interrupted or the operation is failed. In this case, it is suggested to execute or re-schedule the updating of the software. Bench Swh OK. The bench switching has been successfully executed. Bench Swh Err. The switching of the memory bench is failed.

File. Name of the file (with extension .dwl) used for the download.

The presence of the symbol - points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for the current status of the operation. For the NE objects of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address: <node name>.X, where X can assume the value A, B or C (ALplus Node object). <node name>.Y, where Y can assume a value from 1 to 8 (ALCplus2 Node object).

To delete one or more NEs from the list (SNMP)

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

405

2. To delete: All the NEs present in the list, except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status field - Downloading wording), select the File > Deleted All command. The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed wording), select the File > Deleted Completed command. The selected NEs except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status field - Downloading wording), select the equipment and then the File > Deleted Select command.

The equipment is removed from the list.

To stop the updating of the software (SNMP)

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80). 2. Select the equipment for which the updating of the software is in progress (Status field - Downloading wording). 3. Select the File > Abort command. The operation is stopped. In the Status column, for the selected NE, the Interrupted wording is displayed.

To save the list of the scheduled equipment

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80). 2. Select the File > Export command. The Export window opens. 3. Type, in the File box, the path and the name of the file where you wish to save the data. When the window is opened, the default path (/opt/nms5ux/data/export/<application name>) and a name with the following format are proposed: ExpSwDwl_<day>-<month>-<year>_<hour>-<minutes>.csv Where date and time refers to the moment when the Export window has been opened, for example ExpSwDwl_22-4-2010_11-30.csv. 4. Press OK.

To re-execute the software update

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80). 2. Select the equipment for which the operation of software update is failed (field Status - wording Interrupted). 3. Select the Command > Retry interrupted command. The WinRip window opens. 4. Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) when you wish to re-execute the software update. 5. Press Ok. In the Scheduling Download window, the selected records pass to status Waiting.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

406

To switch the memory bench

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80). 2. Select the equipment for which you wish to execute the switching of the memory benches. The operation will be successful only for the equipment for which the software updating has been correctly executed (field Status - wording Completed). 3. Select the Command > Bench Switch command. The Bench Switch window is displayed which shows the list of the NEs for which the switching of the memory bench must be executed (Fig.81). 4. If you wish that the switching is: Immediately executed, press Bench switch immediate. The operation starts. To stop the operation press Abort. At the end, the column Result points out the result of the operation. Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, press Bench switch scheduling. The WinRip window opens. Set the date (day, month, year) and the time (hour, minute) for which you wish to execute the operation. Press OK. In the Scheduling Download window, a record is added for each NE scheduled for the switching of the memory benches. Fig.81 Bench Switch window
NE for which the switching of the memory benches must be executed (1)

Fig.81 notes (1) For each equipment, it is displayed in the column: Equipment. Logical address. Ip. IP address. Type. NE type. Bench.... Name of the file and version of the software present on the memory bench 1 (Bench 1) and 2 (Bench 2). State.... Operating status of the memory bench 1 (State 1) and 2 (State 2): running. The software of the considered memory bench is running. loaded. The sw is present in the bench but, at the moment, is not running (standby). notLoaded. The software of the memory bench is not present. downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is in progress. Starting. The operation is in progress. Waiting. The operation has not been executed yet.

Result. Status of the operation of memory bench switching:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

407

Abort. The operation has been interrupted. Bench Swh OK. The operation has been successfully executed. Bench Swh Err. The operation is failed. Not Loaded. The operation is failed because one of the memory bench does not contain the software.

To filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment

1. Select the Options > SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download window opens (Fig.80). 2. To SORT the list, select the command: Order by > Logical Address. It sorts the list according to the logical address of the NE. Order by > Address. It sorts the list according to the IP address of the. Order by >Type. It sorts the list according to the NE type. Order by > Status. It sorts the list according to the status of the connection between NE and supervision system.

The sign next to the option points out the criterion currently in use. When the Scheduling Download window is opened, independently from the previous setting, the equipment is listed in alphabetical order according to the logical address of the NE. 3. To FILTER the list, select the Filter > Filter command The Filter window opens. The available criteria are the following: Name. Logic address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the address of the NE in the text field. It is possible to use the asterisk (*) as jolly character only at the end of the alphanumeric string. Type. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Status. Status of the operation. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. With details: 4. Press OK. The system displays in the Scheduling Download window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the Scheduling Download window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically deleted. Download. Equipment for which the operation has not been executed yet. Downloading. Equipment for which the operation is in progress. Completed. Equipment for which the software update has been successfully executed. Interrupted. Equipment for which the software update has been interrupted or is failed. Bench Swh OK. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches has been successfully executed. Bench Swh Err. Equipment for which the switching of the memory benches is failed.

Press Reset filter to cancel the activation of the filters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

408

SNMP-NE SW/FW RELEASE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of a SNMP equipment. With details it is possible: To display the software version of a SNMP equipment (pag.409) To update the software of a SNMP equipment (pag.410) To switch the operation of the memory benches of a SNMP equipment controller (pag.411) To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a SNMP equipment (pag.411)

The command is available only if it has been selected a SNMP equipment in connected status, except for the ELFO, SDH N+1, FAMxc, ALplus Node and ALCplus2 Node. For the NEs of ALplus Node or ALCplus2 Node type, the command is present in the nodal window (pag.48/ pag.49). For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.403.

To display the software version of a SNMP equipment

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The RelSw window opens, where the software version of a SNMP equipment is displayed (Fig.82). Fig.82 RelSw window

Logic address, IP address and type of selected NE Name of the file and version of the software of equipment present respectively on the memory benches 1 and 2 Operating status of the memory benches 1 and 2 (1)

List of the codes and of the FPGA files that form the software of equipment (2)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

409

Fig.82 notes (1) Label: (2) running. The software of the considered memory bench is running. loaded. The software is present in the bench but, at the moment, is not running (standby). not loaded. The software of the memory bench is not present. downloading. The updating of the software of the memory bench is in progress.

The list of the parts that constitute the software changes depending of the type of selected equipment. For each code or FPGA file, it is displayed in the column: Unit. Name of the card or of the part of NE where the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file) is present. Element. Name of the software. It generally points out the type of component: FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code cannot be updated, in fact it has not memory benches. FW_appl. Application code. conf_... or fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.

Actual release. Version of the code or FPGA file present in the controller (main or of peripheral unit). Release bench 1 and Release bench 2. Version of the software present respectively in the memory bench 1 and 2 of the main controller.

To update the software of a SNMP equipment

The system automatically updates the software of the not running or not present memory bench (Status box- loaded or not loaded wording). The operation cannot be executed when the updating of the software is already in progress (Status box downloading wording). 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The RelSw window opens (Fig.82). 3. Press Download. The Software Download window opens. 4. In the Selection file DWL box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the filename or press Select (the Select file for download window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/ftp directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/ftp directory. To display a brief description that illustrates the content of the selected file, press Read. 5. Set the type of download that you wish to execute. Select the option: Forced, to update the software of the equipment controller. Only different or not present, to update the software of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code).

6. Activate the Bench switch? box if you wish that, at the end of the download, a switching of the memory bench is automatically executed in order to use the bench with the updated software. 7. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is: Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box. Scheduled to be executed in a second moment, set the date/time in the Scheduling data time for Download area.

8. Press Start Dwl. If in the previous step, it has been:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

410

Activated the Immediate Download box, a window opens where the physical address, logic address and the type of NE which is updating the software, and the status of the operation (Waiting, Downloading, Complete, etc.) are displayed. The operation takes some minutes. Before starting the updating of the controller of the NE, it executes a compatibility check between the software that must be sent and the one present in the controller itself. The check consists in verifying the technology and the type of NE (pointed out by the first 2 characters of the file name). For some types of NEs, checks are executed also on the 3rd character of the filename. More information is reported in the equipment user manual relevant to the specific type of NE. If the parameters are compatible, the download starts. Otherwise, the updating of the software will not be executed. If the operation is successful, opening the RelSw window (Fig.82), in the Release box relevant to the updated memory bench, the new version of the software is pointed out. If it is not successful, the Status box relevant to the updated memory bench displays the old version or the wording not loaded.

Set a date/time of execution for the updating of the software, the Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment list for download area.

To switch the operation of the memory benches of a SNMP equipment controller

It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress and when the software is not present in a bench. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The RelSw window opens (Fig.82). 3. Press Switch bench. A window opens where the operations that the system executes during the benches switching are pointed out in form of message. At the end of the operation, the bench in running status is forced to loaded status and vice versa. The operation causes an automatic disconnection and re-connection of the NE. If the re-connection is not successful, the NE assumes the unreachable status and, at regular intervals, the supervision system will attempt the re-connection command.

To delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a SNMP equipment
It is not possible to delete the software present in the memory bench when the updating of the software is in progress. 1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The RelSw window opens (Fig.82). 3. Press Clear bench. A window is displayed where the operations, which the system executes during the deletion of the bench in standby, are pointed out (as messages). At the end of the operation, the bench which was in standby status (wording loaded) passes to the status not loaded. The relevant Release box will be empty.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

411

FAMXC-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more FAMxc. For more information about the update of the FAMxc equipment software go to pag.413.

To update the equipment software (FAMxc)

1. Select the FAMxc. 2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Insert window opens (Fig.83). 3. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Browse (the fileSelection... window opens) and select the file among the available ones. If the file you wish to use for the operation is not in the home/tftpdir directory, it is necessary to copy it in this directory as the supervision system needs, in order to execute correctly the download operation, to find the file for the updating in the home/tftpdir directory. 4. Set the date and time when you wish to schedule the operation in the Date/Time Scheduled for Download box. 5. Activate the Switch Bench and Restart box if you wish that, at the end of download, the memory bench is switched and the equipment is restarted automatically. The setting applies to all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If you wish to carry out a different setting for an equipment in the list: a. Select the equipment. b. Select the Action > Bench Info command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85). c. Activate/deactivate the Switch Bench and Restart box as you wish. d. Press Ok The wording Modified is pointed out in the record of the selected NE (area Equipment List). During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the parameter Switch Bench and Restart of the Insert will not be considered, but the setting of the same parameter in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered. 6. If enabled, type the access code of the equipment in the Password box. If the Superuser has set the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, in order to access the equipment it is not necessary to insert the code. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default box. The set password applies for all the equipment present in the Equipment List area. If an equipment has a different password, it is necessary to set it in the following way: a. Select the equipment. b. Select the Action > Bench Info command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85). c. Type the access code of the equipment in the Password box. d. Press Ok The wording Modified is pointed out in the record of the selected NE (area Equipment List). During the execution of the operation for the considered equipment, the setting of the password in the Insert will not be considered, but that set in the Equipment Bench Releases window will be considered. 7. Press OK. The Software Download window is closed. In the list of the scheduled NE for the download, a record is added for each NE present in the Equipment List.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

412

Fig.83 Insert window (FAMxc)

Parameters to set for the updating of the equipment software

NEs selected in the map for which the updating of the equipment software with be executed (1)

Fig.83 notes (1) For each equipment, there are, in order: Logic address Type of NE IP address

Equipment software (FAMxc) (more info)

With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of the whole NE. The equipment software is present in the main controller that have two memory benches (bench), one working and the other in stand-by. Each bench can house a version (also different) of equipment software. It is possible to update the equipment software of only one memory bench at a time. The NMS5UX-B automatically updates the software of the memory bench not on progress or not present. The update of the equipment software can be only scheduled and will be the system to carry out the update on the date/time scheduled by the user. The execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions: The NE must be in connected status. The local management program must not be connected to the NE. No other operation must be running.

If, in the moment (date/time) when the operation was schedule, the NE is not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular intervals, will verify the condition of the NE until: The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed. The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

413

FAMXC-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating. With details it is possible: To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating (pag.414) To delete one or more equipment from the list (pag.415)

For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.413.

To display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating
1. Select the Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window opens, where the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating is displayed (Fig.84). Fig.84 FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window (FAMxc)
Menu bar (1) List of the NEs sheduled for the updating of the equipment software (2)

Fig.84 notes (1) Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Command > Delete Completed. It deletes the NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed. Command > Delete Selected. It deletes the selected NEs except for those for which the updating of the software is in progress. Options > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window. Option > View Error. It displays the characteristics of the scheduled NE. In order: Logic address of the NE (Equipment). IP address of the server (Ip Server). Name of the file used for the download (File). Result of the operation (Error).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

414

(2)

For each NE, it is reported in the column: Equipment. Logic address of the NE. Type. Type of NE. Bench Switch. The wording: Yes, points out that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the restart of the equipment are automatically executed. No, points out that, at the end of download, the switch of the memory bench and the restart of the equipment are not executed.

Time Scheduling. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) for when the updating of the software is scheduled. Time start. Date (day/month/year) and time (hour:minutes:seconds) when the updating of the software is started. Duration. Duration (expressed in minutes, seconds) of the download operation. Status. Status of the download operation: Downloading. The updating of the software is in progress. Scheduled. The updating of the software has not been executed yet. It is possible that, in the Time Scheduling field, a scheduling date/time previous to the current one is displayed. This means that the NE, when the operation has been scheduled, was not in the right condition for the execution of the download. In this case, the system attempts the updating of the software at regular time interval. Completed. The updating of the software has been successfully executed. Incomplete. The updating of the software has been partially executed or the operation is failed. In this case, it is suggested to reschedule the updating of the software.

File. Name of the file used for the download.

To delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc)

1. Select the Options > FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The FAMxc Scheduled Software Download window opens (Fig.84). 2. To delete: The NEs for which the download procedure has been already executed (Status field - Completed wording), select the File > Deleted Completed command. The selected NEs except for those whose software updating is in progress (Status field - Downloading wording), select the equipment and then the File > Deleted Select command.

The equipment is removed from the list.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

415

FAMXC-NE SW/FW RELEASE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command displays the software version of a FAMxc. With details it is possible: To display the software version of a FAMxc (pag.416) To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc (pag.417)

The command is available only if it has been selected a FAMxc in connected status. For more information about the update of the equipment software of the FAMxc go to pag.413.

To display the software version of a FAMxc equipment

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens. 3. Press Read Info. The Equipment Bench Releases window points out the version of the equipment software, as displayed in Fig.85. Fig.85 Equipment Bench Releases window

Logic address of the selected equipment Version of the software present respectively on the memory bench 1 and 2 Memory bench currently in use Memory bench which will be used at next boot

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

416

To switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release command. The Equipment Bench Releases window opens (Fig.85). 3. Press Read Info to display the current settings. 4. Select the bench you wish to use at the restart of the equipment (option Bench1 or Bench2 - parameter Restart Bench Selection). At the end of the operation, the selected bench will be pointed out in the Netx Boot On Bench box. 5. Type in the Password box, if enabled, the access code of the equipment. If the Superuser has se the access code of the equipment in the configuration file of the system, it is not necessary to insert the code to access the equipment. It is sufficient to activate the Password Default box. 6. Press Restart. The equipment is restarted and the Equipment Bench Releases window is closed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

417

LEGACY-NE SW/FW DOWNLOAD

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-NE Sw/Fw Download command updates the software of one or more Legacy equipment. The command is available only if it has been selected one or more Legacy equipment of the same type. For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.419.

To update the equipment software (Legacy)

1. Select the equipment. 2. Select the Options > Legacy-NE Sw/Fw Download command. The Software Download window opens (Fig.86). 3. In the File Selection box, set the file you wish to use for the updating. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or press Select (the File Select window opens) and select the file among the available ones. 4. Set the execution modality of the download. If you wish that the updating is: Immediately executed, activate the Immediate Download box. It is possible to activate the box only if a single NE has been selected. Scheduled to be executed later, activate the Scheduled Download box and set the date/time into the successive boxes (day, month, year, hour, minutes).

5. Press Start Dwl. Before executing the update operation, the NE controller executes a compatibility check between the software that has to be forwarded and the one present into the controller itself. The check consists of checking the technology and the NE type. Only if the parameters result compatible ones, it is possible to execute the software update (do not execute the remaining part of the procedure). If the parameters result compatible ones, the system displays a confirmation window that points out the physical address, the logic address and the NE type for which it is on progress the software update. 6 Press Start Download. If at the preceding step, it has been: Activated the Immediate Download box, the system displays a window that points out (expressed by means of percentage) the operation execution progress. To stop the update procedure of the software, press Abort. Set an execution date/time for the update of the software. The Scheduled Download Viewer window opens (Fig.87) and, into the list of the scheduled equipment for the download, it adds one record for each NE present into the Selected Equipment area.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

418

Fig.86 Software Download window (Legacy)

Parameters to set for the updating of the equipment software NEs selected in the map for which the updating of the equipment software with be executed (2)

Push-buttons bar (1)

Fig.86 notes (1) Push-button: (2) Start Dwl. It starts the updating of the software. Cancel. It closes the window. Scheduling. It displays the list of the NEs scheduled for the updating of the sw (Fig.87). Logic address. Physical address. Type of NE Status of the NE when the command has been selected: Connected, The NE is in connected status. Disconnected. The NE is in disconnected status. Unreachable. The NE is in unreachable status.

For each equipment, there are, in order:

Equipment software (Legacy) (more info)

With equipment software we mean the set of all the software necessary for the management of the whole NE (software of the main controller and software of the peripheral units). The updating of the software can be immediately executed (only if a single NE is selected) or can be scheduled for a given date/time (suggested option). In the first case, the operation is executed in real time. In the second case, it is scheduled and the system will execute the updating at the date/time scheduled by the user. In both cases, the execution of the download for each selected NE is subjected to the following conditions: The NE must be in connected status. The local management program in Configuration modality must not be connected to the NE. No other operation must be running.

If the updating of the software is immediately executed and the NE is not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed. Even if the updating is scheduled and in the moment (date/time) when it was schedule the NE is not in one of the above mentioned conditions, the operation is not executed, but in this case the system, at regular intervals, will verify the condition of the NE until: The NE is in the correct condition and then the download is executed. The NE is removed from the list of NEs scheduled for the download.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

419

LEGACY-SCHEDULED SW DWL STATUS

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command displays the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating. With details it is possible: To display the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating (pag.420) To delete one or more equipment from the list (pag.421) To stop the updating of the software (pag.421)

The command is available only if the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment have been installed. For more information about the update of the equipment software go to pag.419.

To display the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating
1. Select the Options > Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download Viewer window opens, where the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating is displayed (Fig.87). Fig.87 Scheduling Download Viewer window (Legacy)

Menu bar (1) List of the NEs sheduled for the updating of equipment software (2)

Fig.87 notes (1) Menu: File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Remove. It deletes the selected NE with the exception of the one for which the software update is on progress (Downloading wording into the Status field). Options > View Download Info. It displays the details of the information relevant to the update of the selected software. The choice of the command opens the Swdl Information window that points out the following information: Logical Address. Logical address of the equipment. Equipment Type. Equipment type. Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment. Selected File. Path and file name used for the update. Selected Card. Card of the equipment involved into the operation. Software Release. Release of the software. Scheduled Time. Date/time relevant to the update programming of the software.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

420

Duration. Duration (expressed by means of hours/minutes/seconds) of the download operation. Download Status. Status of the download operation (refer to description of the Status field).

Options > Refresh. It refreshes the information present into the window. At the choice of the option, the system will refresh the date/time (present into the status bar of the window) and it will point out the time of the refresh execution.

Actions > Abort Download. It stops the update procedure of the software. The command is available only if it has been selected an equipment for which the system is executing the update of the software (Downloading wording into the Status field).

(2)

Help > On usage. It opens the on-line manual. Logical Addr. Logic address of the NE. Ph. Address. Physical address of the NE. Type. NE type. Scheduled Time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hours/minutes/seconds) relevant to the programmed update of the software. Start time. Date (day/month/year) and time (hours/minutes/seconds) relevant to the beginning of the update procedure for the software. Duration. Duration (expressed by hours/minutes/seconds) of the download operation. Status. Status of the download operation: Downloading. The update of the software is on progress. Waiting. The software update has not been yet executed. Completed. The update of the software has been successfully executed. Failed. The update of the software has not been completely executed or the operation is failed. In this case, it is advisable to execute or to program newly the update of the sw. Check Eq. Status. The status control of the equipment is on progress (operation executed before the download). Aborted. The update of the software has been interrupted.

For each NE, it is reported in the column:

The system can point out into the Status column the status of the operation and also a selfexplaining message. The presence of the symbol - points out that the information is not available because it is not a significant one for the current status of the operation.

To delete one or more equipment from the list (Legacy)

1. Select the Options > Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download Viewer window opens (Fig.87). 2. Select the equipment you wish to delete from the list, except those for which the software update is running (Status field - Downloading wording). 3. Select the Options > Remove command. The equipment is removed from the list.

To stop the updating of the software (Legacy)

1. Select the Options > Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status command. The Scheduling Download Viewer window opens (Fig.87). 2. Select an equipment for which the updating of the software is in progress (Status field - Downloading wording). 3. Select the Actions > Abort Download command. The operation is stopped.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

421

MISC

The Misc menu contains the following commands: Alarm History Backup (pag.423). It saves to disk and/or tape the alarm history stored in the Alarm History table. Alarm History Restore (pag.424). It restores the alarm history previously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old History table. Alarm History Delete Backup (pag.425). It deletes the alarm history saved on disk. Performance Monitoring Backup (pag.426). It saves to disk and/or tape the results of the PM measures stored in the Performance Monitoring table. Performance Monitoring Restore (pag.427). It restores the results of the PM measures previously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old Performance Monitoring table. Performance Monitoring Delete (pag.428). It deletes the results of the PM measures saved to disk. NMS5UX Global Database Backup (pag.429). It saves to disk and/or tape the information contained in the NMS5UX-B database. NMS5UX Global Database Restore (pag.430). It restores the information contained in the system database and previously saved to disk/tape.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

422

ALARM HISTORY BACKUP

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm History Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the Alarm History table relevant to the equipment present in all the maps.

To backup the alarm history

1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Backup command. The Alarm History Backup window opens. 2 Activate the: Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Alarm History table on tape (DAT tape). Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the machine disk (workstation or server).

If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape. 3 If the user has activated the: Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting can not be changed. Backup To Disk box, type, into the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save the contents of the table. Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case, the content of the file will be overwritten by the new data). The File name field points out the predefined path where the file is saved. The setting cannot be modified. 4. Press OK. The content of the table is saved to a file on the disk and/or tape. Then, to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (pag.424) and open the Old History Browser window (pag.279). To display the content of the Alarm History table open the Alarm History Browser window (pag.264).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

423

ALARM HISTORY RESTORE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm History Restore command restores the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) previously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old History table.

To restore the alarm history from disk

1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Restore command. The Alarm History Restore window opens. 2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to restore. The list shows the files present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same used by the system to automatically save the files during the backup procedure. 3. Press OK. If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens. The restored data will overwrite those present in the Old History table. Its contents can be displayed into the Old History Browser window (pag.279).

To restore the alarm history from tape

1. Open a windows terminal. At the command-line prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv. The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the pre-defined directory, the same one where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure. To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old History and to open the Old History Browser window (pag.279).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

424

ALARM HISTORY DELETE BACKUP

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The Alarm History Delete Backup command deletes the backup files, relevant to the signallings of alarm/status/event, saved by the Alarm History Backup command to the disk of the machine.

To delete the backup files of the alarm history

1. Select the Misc > Alarm History Delete Backup command. The Alarm History Delete window opens. 2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to delete. The list shows the files present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure. Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting files only in the predefined directory. 3. Press OK. If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

425

PERFORMANCE MONITORING BACKUP

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the results of the PM measures stored in the Performance Monitoring table relevant to the equipment present in all maps. The results are saved subdivided by month.

To save the PM measures (backup)

1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Backup command. The Pm Backup window opens. 2. In the Selected Month menu, select the month you wish to save. The last 6 months mapped in the database are available in the list. 3 Activate the: 4 Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the Performance Monitoring table on tape (DAT tape). Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the table on the disk of the workstation or server.

If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape. If the user has activated the: Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that the contents of the table will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting can not be changed. Backup To Disk box, type, into the text field, the name of the file where the user wants to save the contents of the table. Press Browser to select the name of an already existing file (in this case the contents of the file will be overwritten with the new data). Into the File name field, the system points out the pre-defined path where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed. 5. Activate the Delete Table box if you wish that the content of the Performance Monitoring table after the saving to file is automatically deleted. The operation is available only to the Superuser. 6. Press OK. If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens and the content of the table is saved to a file of the disk and/or tape. Then, in order to display the content of the file, it will be necessary to restore it (pag.427) and open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.177). To display the content of the Performance Monitoring table open the Graphic Performance Monitoring window (pag.173).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

426

PERFORMANCE MONITORING RESTORE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Restore command restores the results of the PM measures previously saved to disk/tape and copies it into the Old Performance Monitoring table.

To restore the PM measures from disk

1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Restore command. The Pm Restore window opens. 2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to restore. The list shows the files present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure. 3. Press OK. If the operation is successful, a confirmation window opens. The restored data will overwrite those present in the Old Performance Monitoring table. Its contents can be displayed into the Graphical Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.177).

To restore the PM measures from tape

1. Open a windows terminal. 2. At the command-line prompt of the windows terminal, type: cd/tar xv. The backup file is copied on the machine disk. With details, it is copied into the pre-defined directory, the same one where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure. To display the contents of the file, the use has to copy it into the Old Performance Monitoring and to open the Graphic Performance Monitoring - OLD window (pag.177).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

427

PERFORMANCE MONITORING DELETE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Privileged, Superuser

The Performance Monitoring Delete command deletes the backup files, relevant to the PM measures, saved by the Performance Monitoring Backup command on the disk of the machine.

To delete the backup files of the PM measures

1. Select the Misc > Performance Monitoring Delete command. The Pm Delete window opens. 2. Select, in the Files list, the name of the file you wish to delete. The list displays the file present in the predefined directory (displayed in the Selection box). It is the same where the system automatically saves the files during the backup procedure. Even if it is possible to set a different directory, the system allows deleting the files only in the predefined directory. 3. Press OK. If the operation is successful, a confirmation message opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

428

NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE BACKUP

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The NMS5UX Global Database Backup command saves to disk and/or tape the information contained in the NMS5UX-B database where the data relevant to all the maps and all the existing equipment are stored.

To save the database (backup)

1. Select the Misc > NMS5UX Global Database Backup command. The Database Backup window opens. 2 Activate the: Backup To Disk box, if the user wants to save the database on the machine disk (workstation or server). On the side of the box, it is pointed out the pre-defined path where the system saves the file. This setting can not be changed. Backup To Tape box, if the user wants to save the contents of the database on the DAT tape. The wording [/dev/rmt/Om], placed on the side if the box, points out that the contents of the database will be overwritten on the possible data already present on the DAT. This setting can not be changed. If the user activates both the boxes, the system saves the data as on disk as on tape. 3 If the user has activated the Backup To Tape box, insert the tape into the DAT drive of the machine. Then, it will be possible to restore the information saved executing the procedure of restore of the database (pag.430).

4. Press OK.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

429

NMS5UX GLOBAL DATABASE RESTORE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The NMS5UX Global Database Restore command restores the information contained in the system database and previously saved to disk/tape.

To restore the database

The restore of the data cannot be executed if the NMS5UX-B system is running. Before closing the UX Map Manager window: 1. Select the NMS5UX Global Database Restore command. A page of help illustrating the procedure to follow to restore the database opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

430

RING MANAGER

The Ring Manager menu is available only if the Ring Manager application have been installed. For the use of the Ring Manager application refer to the specific documentation. The RM-Add Ring, RM-Delete Ring and RM-Modify/View Ring commands are used to represent graphically the Ring objects in the maps and to provide to NMS5UX-B system the parameters to manage and control them. Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation (pag.78) where the modalities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described. The Ring objects are used to identify subnetworks of PDH and SDH equipment which implement Paths. For an easy description, in this manual the wording Ring will be used to point out these subnetworks, while the Ring objects will be simply defined Ring objects.

The Ring Manager menu contains the following commands: Edit > RM-Add Ring (pag.432). It creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. Edit > RM-Delete Ring (pag.433). It deletes a Ring symbol from the map. Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring (pag.434). It displays/modifies the characteristics of a Ring object. Fault > RM-Network Alarm History (pag.435). It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm (pag.443). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary (pag.449). It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. Fault > RM-Element Alarm History (pag.454). It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment present in the specific Ring. Fault > RM-Element Current Alarm (pag.455). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment present in the specific Ring. Fault > RM-Element Alarm Summary (pag.456). It displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the equipment present in the specific Ring. Locate > RM-Ring Browser (pag.457). It displays the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system. Locate > RM-Path Browser (pag.459). It displays the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map. Locate > RM-Equipment Browser (pag.472). It displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

431

EDIT > RM-ADD RING

System access User profile

ReadWrite Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Add Ring command creates Ring objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects (pag.82).

To create Ring objects

It is possible to create all the wished Ring objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the Ring. 2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Add Ring command. The Add Ring window opens. 3. Type the name of the Ring (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32 characters) in the Label box. The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol. 4. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The Ring is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area. If the created Ring symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and the characteristics of the existing object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

432

EDIT > RM-DELETE RING

System access User profile

ReadWrite Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Delete Ring command deletes a Ring symbol from the map.

To delete a Ring object from the map

If a Ring object is present only in one map, can be deleted only if it does not contain objects (equipment, Link, Path, etc.) If the same Ring object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains objects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty. 1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the Ring object you wish to delete. 2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Delete Ring command or press the right mouse button, select Delete and confirm. The object is removed from the map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

433

EDIT > RM-MODIFY/VIEW RING

System access User profile

Reading Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only ReadWrite Entry, Normal Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Modify/View Ring command displays/modifies the characteristics of a Ring object.

To verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object

It is not possible to assign the same name to two different Ring objects. If the same Ring object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values of such a Ring object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant to the same object into the other map. 1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the wished Ring object. 2. Select the Ring Manager > Edit > RM-Modify/View Ring command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The Ring Properties window opens. Box/area: Label. Ring name. Type. Ring symbol. Comment. Additional information.

It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.432. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the UX Map Manager window, the Ring assumes the new characteristics.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

434

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The RM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. With details it is possible: To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system (pag.435) To save the alarms list (pag.437) To delete the alarms (pag.437) To mark the alarms (pag.438) To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (pag.438). To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.438) To filter the alarms list (pag.439) To sort the alarms list (pag.440) To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.441)

As help to the description of the command, see: Modality of the updating of data (pag.442) Modality of recording the alarms (pag.442)

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens, where the alarm history stored in the Ring Manager database, of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the sNMS5UX-B is displayed (Fig.88). At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms greater than 5000. For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the newest to the oldest one, until 5000. The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some records or modify the filters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

435

Fig.88 RM - Alarm History window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.88 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Save. It saves to text file the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window. Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database. Actions > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Actions > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5UX-B and Ring Manager. View > Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records. View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms. Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event and if the signalling has been detected or is cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red No background No background No background No background No background No background Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Description Detected event signalling Detected status signalling Detected alarm with Warning severity Detected alarm with Minor severity Detected alarm with Major severity Detected alarm with Critical severity Cleared event signalling Cleared status signalling Cleared alarm with Warning severity Cleared alarm with Minor severity Cleared alarm with Major severity Cleared alarm with Critical severity

For each alarm, it is displayed in the column:

Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked. If the X character is present the record has been marked. Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to the record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail of the acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described at pag.441.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

436

SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing. Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication. In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signalling refers to an event generated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration alignment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5UX-B, the start or the stop of anyone of the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform.

Type. Type of Network Element. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node name>.C. The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. (3) The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. , indicates that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , indicates that the data are dynamically updated.

To save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. To save to a file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

The Save File window opens. 3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. 4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. To delete from the list and from the database of supervision system: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Delete > All Alarms command.

The records are deleted.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

437

To mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. After a record has been marked, the operation cannot be undone. Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter cannot be modified. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.

The Acknowledge Alarm window opens. The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed. 3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max 15 characters); it can be used later as search criterion. The setting of this parameter is optional. 4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press Ok. The record will be marked with the letter X. If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters are for all the records. If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).

To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Alarm History)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. Select the Actions > Alarm Synchronization command. The information present in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are re-aligned to that present in the database of NMS5UX-B.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol. symbol.

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

438

To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. Select the View > Filter command. The Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. ACTIVE, the detected signallings will be displayed. CLEARED, the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. ALL, the detected signallings only and the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match Path. Alarms of the equipment implementing specific Paths. It is possible to set the Path by means of one of the following ways: In the RM - Path Browser window (Fig.94), select one or more Path and press Add Path from Path Browser. Type the name of the Path in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Ring. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific Rings. To set the criterion, in the Ring List area, select one or more Rings and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link. It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways: Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Link from Map. Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

439

It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Equipment From Map. Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field). It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways: Type the wished string in the text field Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made. Select a record in the RM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from selected Alarm.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to specify: The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the RM - Alarm History window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the RM - Alarm History window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.

To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. Select the View > Sort Criteria command. The Sort Criteria window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Manager database. SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

440

CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order.

4. Select in the Order area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment box (second sorting criterion). 6. Press OK (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the sorting and does not close the window). The RM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Continue in one of the following ways: Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. A pop-up window opens. Select the View > Acknowledge Information command. The Acknowledge Information window opens. The content of both the windows is the same and is depicted in Fig.89. Fig.89 Acknowledge Information (RM - Alarm History) window

Identification Code (1)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected (2) (3)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected and cleared (2) (3)

Fig.89 notes (1) (2) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge. Option: (3) User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record. Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hours:minutes:seconds>. Comment. Additional information.

If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in detected-cleared status, the data present in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

441

Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Alarm History)

The information present in the RM - Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the automatic updating is active (pag.438). At the opening of the RM - Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic updating of the information is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser). The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a RM - Alarm History window does not influence the displaying of the information in the other open RM - Alarm History windows or in the RM Current Alarms window.

Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History)

The alarms are stored in the database managed by Ring Manager application (database of Ring Manager). The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000). When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Superuser - default 1000). During this period, it is possible to manually delete the alarms (pag.437). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the database.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

442

FAULT > RM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. With details it is possible: To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system (pag.443) To save the alarms list (pag.444) To mark the alarms (pag.445) Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (pag.445) To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.445) To filter the alarms list (pag.445) To sort the alarms list (pag.447) To display the acknowledge information of a alarm (pag.448)

As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of the updating of data (pag.448)

To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system is displayed (Fig.90). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. Fig.90 RM - Current Alarms window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.90 notes (1) Menu: File > Save. It saves to text file the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

443

 (2)

Actions > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Actions > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5UX-B and Ring Manager. View > Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records. View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms.

For each alarm, it is displayed in the column: Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red Ack. Marking status Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical of the record. Description Event signallings Status signalling Alarm with Warning severity Alarm with Minor severity Alarm with Major severity Alarm with Critical severity

If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the X character is present, the alarm has been marked. Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication. In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signalling refers to an event generated by the Ring Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration alignment between the databases of Ring Manager and NMS5UX-B, the start or the stop of anyone of the platform processes of Ring Manager and the stop of all the platform. Type. Type of Network Element. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

For the NE objects of ALplus Node type, the detail of the equipment of the nodal system is pointed out. This equipment is identified by the logic address <node name>.A, <node name>.B, <node name>.C. (3) The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. , points out that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , points out that the data are dynamically updated.

To save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). 2. To save to file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.

The Save File window opens. 3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. 4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

444

To mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm)

After having marked a record, the operation cannot be cancelled. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.

The Acknowledge Alarm window opens. The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed. 3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max 15 characters); it can be used later as search criterion. The setting of this parameter is optional. 4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press Ok. The record will be marked with the letter X. If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters applies for all the records.

To realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Current Alarm)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). 2. Select the Actions > Alarm Synchronization command. The information present in the database of Ring Manager and relevant to the alarms are realigned to that present in the database of NMS5UX-B.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol. symbol.

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the

To filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

445

2. Select the View > Filter command. The Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths. It is possible to set the Path by means of one of the following ways: In the RM - Path Browser window (Fig.94), select one or more Path and press Add Path from Path Browser. Type the name of the Path in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Ring. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific Rings. To set the criterion, in the Ring List area, select one or more Rings and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link. It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways: Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Link from Map. Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element. It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Equipment From Map. Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

446

It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways: Type the wished string in the text field Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made Select a record in the RM - Current Alarm window and press Get Message from selected Alarm.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the box: Match Acknowledged, the marked records will be displayed. Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet marked will be displayed.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the RM - Current Alarms window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the RM - Current Alarm window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.

To sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). 2. Select the View > Sort Criteria command. The Sort Criteria window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the Ring Manager database. SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time. CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order.

4. Select in the Order area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment box (second sorting criterion). 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The RM - Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

447

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.90). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Continue in one of the following ways: Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. A pop-up window opens. Select the View > Acknowledge Information command. The Acknowledge Information window opens. The content of both the windows is the same and is depicted in Fig.91. Fig.91 Acknowledge Information (RM - Current Alarms) window

Identification Code (1)

Detailed information of acknowledge (2)

Area not meaningful in this context

Fig.91 notes (1) (2) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge. Option: User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record. Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minute:second>. Comment. Additional information.

Modality of the updating of data (RM-Network Current Alarm)

The information present in the RM - Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the automatic updating is active (pag.445). At the opening of the RM - Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic updating of the information is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

448

FAULT > RM-NETWORK ALARM SUMMARY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Network Alarm Summary display/manage the summary of the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system. With details it is possible: To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings (pag.449) To filter the alarm list (pag.450) To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (pag.452) To save the set filters to a file (pag.452) To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (pag.453) To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (pag.453) To reset the indication of status change (pag.453) To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (pag.453)

To display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens, where the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings is displayed (Fig.92). At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. In the window the information updating is dynamic. Fig.92 RM - Alarm Summary window
Title bar (1) Menu bar (2) Indication of "status change (3) Number of alarms detected but not cleared yet (6) Number of alarms detected and cleared (7)

Number of alarms subdivided according type and severity (4)

Criterion used to subdivide the alarms (5)

Status bar (8)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

449

Fig.92 notes (1) (2) By default, the window title is RM - Alarm Summary. It can be changed as you wish (see pag.453). Menu: (3) File > Load. It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. File > Save. It saves the set filters to a file. File > Delete. It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Window Title. It changes the title of the window. Options > Clear Flag. It resets the indication of status change. View > Filter. It filters the alarms list.

The presence of the flag next to the record points out that, from when the RM - Alarm Summary window has been opened or from the last selection of the Options > Clear Flag command, a change occurred: an alarm has been detected or cleared. It is possible that, in the RM - Alarm Summary window, there are not one or more records relevant to the type of signallings/severity levels. Their presence is subjected to the activation of filters. Record: Critical. Alarms with Critical severity. Major. Alarms with Major severity. Minor. Alarms with Minor severity. Warning. Alarms with Warning severity. Status. Status signallings. Normal. Event signallings. Total. All the signallings (alarms, status, events). Active (Critical record). Detected alarms with Critical severity. Active (Major record). Detected alarms with Major severity. Active (Minor record). Detected alarms with Minor severity. Active (Warning record). Detected alarms with Warning severity. Active (Status record). Detected status signallings. Active (Normal record). Detected event signallings. Active (Total record). Total number of detected signallings. Cleared (Critical record). Detected/cleared alarms with Critical severity. Cleared (Major record). Detected/cleared alarms with Major severity. Cleared (Minor record). Detected/cleared alarms with Minor severity. Cleared (Warning record). Detected/cleared alarms with Warning severity. Cleared (Status record). Detected/cleared status signallings. Cleared (Normal record). Detected/cleared event signallings. Cleared (Total record). Total number of detected/cleared signallings.

(4) (5)

(6)

Option:

(7)

Option:

(8)

xx of yy filed. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records.

To filter the alarm list (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the View > Filter command. The Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

450

Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. ACTIVE, the detected signallings will be displayed. CLEARED, the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. ALL, the detected signallings only and the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match Path. Alarms of the equipment that implement specific Paths. It is possible to set the Path by means of one of the following ways: In the RM - Path Browser window (Fig.94), select one or more Path and press Add Path from Path Browser. Type the name of the Path in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Ring. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific Rings. To set the criterion, in the Ring List area, select one or more Rings and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link. It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways: Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Link from Map. Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element. It is possible to set the logic address by means of one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add Equipment From Map. Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field). To set the criterion, type the wished string in the text field.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

451

Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made. Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to specify: The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the RM - Alarm Summary window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the RM - Alarm Summary window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.

To open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the File > Load command. The Load Filter window opens. 3. Select the wished file in the Files list. 4. Press OK. The filter contained in the RM - Alarm Summary window is applied.

To save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the File > Save command. The Save Filter window opens. 3. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box. 4. Press OK. The filter currently applied to the window and the window title are saved to the file.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

452

To delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the File > Delete command. The Delete Filter window opens. 3. Select the wished file in the Files list. 4. Press OK. The file is removed from the disk.

To display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the option relevant to the type/severity of signalling, for which you wish to display the relevant list stored in the alarm history. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88), where only the alarms of the selected type and severity, whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. For example, if the Active option (Minor record) is selected, the RM - Alarm History window opens, with displayed only the active alarms with Minor severity whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day. To display the remaining of the alarms, it is sufficient to change the filter.

To reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the Options > Clear Flag command. The flags are removed.

To modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary)
1. Select the Ring Manager > Fault > RM-Network Alarm Summary command. The RM - Alarm Summary window opens (Fig.92). 2. Select the Options > Window Title command. The Window Title window opens. 3. Type, in the text field, the new title for the RM - Alarm Summary window. 4. Press OK. The window immediately gets the new title.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

453

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The RM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the Ring Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the selected Ring. The choice of the command opens the <Ring name> Alarm History window.

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. RM-Network Alarm History (pag.435). The RM-Element Alarm History command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

454

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) active in the equipment present ONLY to the selected Ring. The choice of the command opens the <Ring name> Current Alarm window.

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. RM-Network Current Alarm (pag.443). The RM-Element Current Alarm command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

455

FAULT > RM-ELEMENT ALARM SUMMARY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Element Alarm Summary displays/manages the summary of the alarm history of the equipment present ONLY to the selected Ring. The choice of the command opens the RM - Alarm Summary window.

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. RM-Network Alarm Summary (pag.449). The RM-Element Alarm Summary command is available only if it has been selected a single Ring in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

456

LOCATE > RM-RING BROWSER

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Ring Browser displays the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B. With detail it is possible: To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B (pag.457) To open the Ring Manager window (pag.458) To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring (pag.458)

To display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Ring Browser command. The Ring Browser window opens, where the list of the Rings managed by the supervision system NMS5UX-B is displayed (Fig.93). Fig.93 Ring Browser window

Menu bar (1) Ring list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.93 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Find ring. It searches and highlights in the map the symbol of a Ring Options > Open ring. It opens the Ring Manager window.

For each Ring the name corresponding to the name of the relevant Ring symbol in the map is pointed out. The list of the Rings is in alphabetical order.

(3)

The Ring number option points out the total number of Rings.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

457

To open the Ring Manager window

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Ring Browser command. The Ring Browser window opens (Fig.93). 2. Select the Ring. 3. Select the Options > Open ring command. The Ring Manager window of the selected Ring, opens. If the message Cannot open ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to open the Ring Manager window as the selected Ring is not present in the current map. The Ring Manager window can be opened also by a double click on the Ring record.

To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Ring Browser command. The Ring Browser window opens (Fig.93). 2. Select the Ring you wish to highlight. 3. Select the Options > Find ring command. In the UX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected Ring is highlighted. If the message Cannot highlight ring created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to highlight the symbol as the selected Ring is not present in the current map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

458

LOCATE > RM-PATH BROWSER

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry *, Normal *, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The user with Entry profile cannot modify/save the information relevant to a Path and modify the Path configuration (single or protected). The user with Entry or Normal profile cannot delete the Paths, add the protection to a Path and activate/ deactivate the management of a Path. The RM-Path Browser display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map. With details it is possible: To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map (pag.459) To save the list of the Path (pag.461) To delete one or more Paths (pag.461) To delete the protection of a Path (pag.462) To add the protection to a Path (pag.462) To activate the management of a Path (pag.462) To deactivate the management of a Path (pag.463) To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection (pag.463) To display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path (pag.463) To display the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment implementing a Path (pag.463) To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path (pag.463) To display/modify the configuration of a Path (pag.465) To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected (pag.468) To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained (pag.470) To search and highlight in the map, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path (pag.470) To filter/sort the list of the Path (pag.470)

The Path terms indicates a bidirectional route between a source node and a destination node and is identified by an input channel on the source node and an output channel on the destination node. For more information refer to the Ring Manager documentation.

To display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens, where the he list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map is displayed (Fig.94). Fig.94 RM - Path Browser window

Menu bar (1) Summarizing bar of the status (2)

Path list (3)

Status bar (4)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

459

Fig.94 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Save. It saves the list of the Path File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. File > Close. It closes the window. Edit > Select All. It selects all the displayed Paths. Edit > Delete Path. It deletes one or more Path from the list and database. Edit > Delete Path Protection. It delete from the list and database, the protection of one or more Paths. Edit > Add Path Protection. It adds the protection to a Path. Edit > Path on line. It activates the management of a Path. Edit > Path off line. It deactivates the management of a Path. Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A. It switches the names of the Paths associated in a protection. Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path and related to the Path. Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment implementing a Path and related to a Path. Options > Path: Information. It displays/modifies/saves the information relevant to a Path Options > Path: Configuration Parameters. It displays/modifies the configuration of a Path. Options > Path: Protection Parameters. It displays/modifies the configuration of a Path protected. Options > Path: Highlight. It searches and highlights a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained. Options > Ring: Highlight. It searches and highlights in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path. View > Filter. It filters/sorts the list of the Path

The name of each status a Path can assume (except for the status Disabled which is grouped together with the status Warning) is next to a box pointing out the number of Paths present in the list with the specific status. For each box, if the displayed number is 0, the box is grey. When the number is different from 0, the background of the box assumes the color associated to the status. For the description of the different statuses and relevant colours, see note (3). The selection of a box allows filtering the list of Path using, as criterion, the selected status. When the filter activated, the bar displays the Clear Severity Filter push-button. Selecting it, you can remove the filter and display all the Paths in the list.

(3)

For each Path, it is pointed out in the column: Path Status. Status of the Path. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Wording Red Red Orange Not Actuated Failure Incomplete Description Path for which the actuation is failed The traffic on the Path is blocked. Paths for which the actuation of one of the two routes (A or B) is failed. Value is meaningful only for protected Paths. The traffic on the main route of the Path transits regularly.The stand-by is not available. Value is meaningful only for protected Paths. The alarm information is not available for at least one of the two NEs implementing the Path. The input or output channel of the Path is disabled. The traffic on the Path transits regularly. The Path is not managed

Yellow

Degraded

Light blue Light blue Green Brown

Warning Disabled Running Off line

Path Name. Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or modification. The user can assign to the Path the wished name or name the Path, according to Recc. ITUT M.1400, with the following format <logic address of source NE (max 12 characters)> -

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

460

<logic address of destination NE (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection progressive number (max 2 characters)>. The figure reports some examples. (4) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filter. Activation of one or more filters. Source. The node source of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant input channel). Destination. The node destination of the Path (equipment logical address and relevant output channel). Protection. Protection status of the Path.

A double click on a Path displays the RM: Path Description window (Fig.95).

To save the list of the Path

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. To save to file: A group of Paths, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command. The displayed Paths, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

The Save File window opens. 3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. 4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To delete one or more Paths

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. It is not possible to delete: A Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the successful realization of the Path and then delete the Path. A managed Path (On line), if the system has detected a condition of Configuration Mismatch. First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager manual) and then delete the Path. A Path with at least one of the NEs implementing the Path in status disconnected, unreachable, maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality or if a NMS5UX user has opened the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window). Force the Path in Off line status or wait for all the equipment implementing the Path are in connected status and then delete the Path.

The deletion of an unmanaged Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from the DB of Ring Manager, while the deletion of a managed Path (On line) involves the removal of the Path from the DB and the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the equipment implementing the considered Path. If a protected Path is selected, this operation deletes the whole Path (paths A and B).

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the record you wish to delete. 3. Select the Edit > Delete Path command and confirm. The records are deleted from the list, from the supervision system database and from the equipment if in connected status.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

461

To delete the protection of a Path

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. It is not possible to delete: A route (A/B) of a Path in Not Actuated status. Force the Path in Off line status or wait for the successful realization of the Path and then delete the protection. A route (A/B) of a managed Path (On line) if the system has detected a condition of Configuration Mismatch. First remove the mismatch condition (refer to Ring Manager documentation) and then delete the protection. A route (A/B) of a Path, if at least one of the NEs implementing the connection A or B is in status disconnected, unreachable, maintenance, connected with LCT present in Configuration modality or if a NMS5UX user has opened the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window). Force the Path in Off line status or wait for all the equipment implementing the route (A/B) are in connected status and then delete the protection.

The deletion of a protection of an unmanaged Path (Off line) involves the removal of the Path only from the database of Ring Manager, while the deletion of the protection of a managed Path (On line) involves the removal of the protection from the DB and the removal of the relevant cross-connections from the equipment implementing the considered protection.

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the wished protected Path (Protection option - Protected value). 3. Select the Edit > Delete Path Protection > PATH-A or PATH-B command (according to the route you want to delete) and confirm.

To add the protection to a Path

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. The operation executed on a managed Path (On line) involves the creation of the protection in the database of Ring Manager and the creation of the relevant cross-connections for the equipment implementing the considered protection. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path you wish to protect (Protection option - Not protected value). 3. Select the Edit > Add Path Protection command and confirm. If the operation is successful, the value Protected is displayed in the record of the considered Path (option Protection). If the operation fails, an error message is displayed.

To activate the management of a Path

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path not managed (Path Status option - Off line value). 3. Select the Edit > Path on line command and confirm. The status assumed by the managed Path is pointed out in the record of the considered Path (option Path Status - value Running, Warning, etc.). An error message is displayed if troubles occur during the operation. For instance, if an equipment implementing the Path is in disconnected status, at the end of the operation the Path will pass to Not Actuated status and a message will point out that it was not possible to realize the Path because the equipment (logic address) is disconnected.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

462

To deactivate the management of a Path

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path managed (Path Status option - Not Actuated, Failure, Incomplete, Degraded, Warning, Disabled or Running value). 3. Select the Edit > Path off line command and confirm. At the end of the operation, the Path is not managed by the system anymore (option Path Status value Off line).

To switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the protected Path (Protection option - Protected value) whose names of the two paths (A/B) you wish to switch. 3. Select the Edit > Naming Switch A/B -> B/A command. The path named A is renamed as B and vice versa. To display the new situation, it is necessary to open the Ring Manager window containing the considered Path.

To display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path(s) for which you wish to display the current alarms in the relevant equipment. 3. Select the Fault > Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarm window opens (Fig.90) with Match Path filter active. The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported to pag.443.

To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path(s) for which you wish to display the alarm history in the relevant equipment. 3. Select the Fault > Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.88) with Match Path and After (alarms whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day) filters active. The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported to pag.435.

To display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged, advanced or normal profile. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

463

The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Execute one of the following operations: Double click on the wished Path. Select the wished Path and then the Options > Path: Information command.

The RM: Path Description window opens where the info relevant to the Path are displayed (Fig.95). Here below are pointed out the operations which can be executed with the items present in the window. To change the name of the Path a. Into the Path Name text field, type the new value (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 maximum 100 characters). b. Press Apply. To save on file the characteristics of the Path a. Select the File > Save Path Information command. The Save File window opens. b. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the info must be saved. c. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor. To display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path a. Select the Fault > Current Alarm command. The RM - Current Alarm window (Fig.90) opens with Match Path filter active. The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported to pag.443. To display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path a. Select the Fault > Alarm History command. The RM - Alarm History window (Fig.88) opens with Match Path and After (alarms whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day) filters active. The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are reported to pag.435. Fig.95 RM Path Description window

Menu bar (1)

Name of the Path (2) Source and destination equipment (3)

Type of Path (4)

Description of the Path (5)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

464

Fig.95 notes (1) Menu: File > Save Path Information. It saves the characteristics of the Path. File > Close. It closes the window. Fault > Current Alarm. It displays the alarms active in the equipment implementing the Path. Fault > Alarm History. It displays the history of the alarms relevant to the equipment implementing the Path.

(2)

Path name assigned by the user to the path during its creation or modification. The user can assign the wished name to the Path or name the Path, according to the Recc. ITU-T M.1400, using the following format <source NE logic address (max 12 characters)> - <destination NE logic address (max 12 characters) <connection type>s<connection progressive number (max 2 characters)>.

(3)

Option: Source. Logical address of the source equipment of the Path and relevant input channel. Destination. Logical address of the destination NE of the Path and relevant output channel.

The options are read only. (4) The green box points out the Path type: (5) Protected. Protected Path. Single. Unprotected Path. Loop. Presence of a cross-connection re-closed on itself (loop).

Each record present in the list represents an equipment implementing the Path. For protected paths in the list, the equipment implementing the PATH-A and the PATH-B are displayed. For each equipment, it is displayed in the column: Status. Status of creation of the cross-connection between input channel and output channel on the equipment: Actuated. Connection actuated. Not Actuated. Connection not actuated yet. Off line. Connection not managed (Path in Off line status).

Equipment. Logical address of the equipment. In Channel. Input channel of the Path on the equipment. Out Channel. Output channel of the Path on the equipment. Message. This field displays, for the not actuated connections (option Status - value Not Actuated) the cause of the missed actuation: Not Connected. Equipment in disconnected status. Maintenance Status. Equipment in maintenance status. Unreachable. Equipment in unreachable status LCT in Configuration Mode. Equipment in connected status which the LCT program in Configuration modality is connected to. NMS5UX in Configuration Mode. Equipment for which the NMS5UX user has opened the relevant equipment graphic interface (Equipment window).

To display/modify the configuration of a Path

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged, advanced or normal profile. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the wished Path. 3. Select the Options > Path: Configuration Parameters command.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

465

The Path: Configuration Parameters - <nome del Path> window opens where the configuration of the Path is displayed (Fig.96). Depending on the equipment type (source/destination), the window will display some configuration parameters relevant to the tributary channel of input to the source equipment of the Path (area Source NE) and to the tributary of output from the destination equipment of the Path (area Destination NE). Here below are displayed the operations which can be executed using the items present in the window. To activate/deactivate the tributary a. Into the Tributary Enable box, set the use of the tributary: Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected. Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not inhibit the alarms. Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

b. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. To activate/deactivate the tributary loops Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). a. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated). The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated and vice versa). b. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated. To modify the J2 Path Trace parameters a. Into the Trace Type box, set the Path Trace status: Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled. Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.

b. Into the Trace Sent box, type the new characters string in transmission. c. Into the Trace Expected box, type the new characters string in reception. d. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. To modify the Signal Label parameters a. Into the Trace Expected box, set the specification which the received Signal Label value is referred to. b. Into the Trace Sent box, set the specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred to. c. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

466

Fig.96 Path Configuration Parameters window

Menu bar (1)

Characteristics of the Path source equipment (2)

Characteristics of Path destination equipment (2)

Configuration parameters of the tributary channel of input to the Path source equipment (3)

Configuration parameters of the tributary channel of output from the Path destination equipment (3)

Push-buttons bar (4)

Fig.96 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window.

Option: Source NE/Destination NE. Respectively source equipment/destination equipment of the Path. Channel. Tributary channel used. NE Name. Logic address of the equipment. NE Type. Equipment type. The Virtual... label points out the virtual NE objects (Ring Manager). IP Address. IP address. The Virtual... label points out the virtual NE objects (NMS5UX-B). IDU Type. IDU type (for example 2RU, etc.) Configuration. Configuration type (for example Drop Insert, Terminal, etc.) Capacity. Equipment capacity. IDU Nb. Number of equipment constituting the node (only for NEs of ALplus Node type).

The list of displayed options depends on the equipment type.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

467

(3)

Option: 2Mbit/s Tributary Tributary Enable. Used status of the tributary: Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm becomes active if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected. Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this case, the controller does not inhibit the alarms. Disable No Inv. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this case, the alarms are inhibited and LOS alarm is NOT given if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

Tributary Loop. Activation status of the loop:

Loop on line side is active

Loop on internal side is active

Loop is inactive

J2 Path Trace Trace Type. Path Trace status: Disable. The control of the Path Trace is disabled. Enable. The control of the Path Trace is enabled.

Trace Sent. Transmitted string of control characters Trace Expected. The string of characters to be controlled in reception. Trace Expected. Specification, which the received Signal Label value is referred to. Trace Sent. Specification which the transmitted Signal Label value is referred to.

Signal Label

The list of displayed options depends on the equipment type. (4) Push-button: Apply. It executes the changes made to the configuration parameters. Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Cancel. It closes the window.

To display/modify the configuration of a Path protected

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged, advanced or normal profile. 1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path protected (Protection option - Protected value). 3. Select the Options > Path: Protection Parameters command. The Path: Protection Parameters window opens where the configuration of a Path protected is displayed (Fig.97). Here below are listed the operations which can be executed using the items present in the window. To modify the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). a. In the Forced Switch box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set: Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms. Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service. Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

468

b. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting. To modify the management of the preferential Path a. In the Preferential box relevant to the wished equipment (source/destination), set: Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one. Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the Path A. Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the Path-B.

b. Press Apply. At the end a message is displayed with the result of the operation. Fig.97 Path Protection Parameters window
Output channels of Paths A and B from the source NE (2) Current status of the Path A and Path B (3) Input channels of Paths A and B in the destination E (2)

Menu bar (1) Logic address of the destination NE Output channel of the Path in the destination NE (2)

Logic address of the source NE Input channel of Path in NE source (2)

Push-buttons bar (4)

Modality used to manage the function of Preferential Path for the source NE (5)

Modality used to manage the switch between Path A and B for the source NE (6)

Modality used to manage the switch between the Paths A and B for the destination NE (6)

Modality used to manage the function of preferential Path for the destination NE (5)

Fig.97 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Close. It closes the window.

Remember that the Path is a BIDIRECTIONAL route. In figure, for explanation clearness, we consider an hypothetical route entering in the input channel of the source equipment and exiting from the output channel of the destination equipment. The status of the switch is pointed out when the NE is connected to the management system. Push-button: Apply. It applies the changes made to the configuration parameters. Refresh. It updates the data present in the window.

(3) (4)

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

469

 (5) Value:

Cancel. It closes the window.

Not Revertive, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a Path in a preferential manner with respect to the other one. Revertive PATH-A, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the Path A. Revertive PATH-B, without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the Path-B.

(6)

Value: Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms. Force PATH-A. The equipment is forced to use the Path A for the service. Force PATH-B. The equipment is forced to use the Path B for the service.

To search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path you wish to search and highlight. 3. Continue in one of the following ways: Select the Options > Path: Highlight command. Press the right mouse button and select Highlight Selected Path.

If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected Path. The Path is highlighted in the window.

To search and highlight in the map window, the Ring symbol in which it is present a Path
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the Path. 3. Select the Options > Ring: Highlight command. In the map window the Ring symbol, in which it is present a Path, is highlighted.

To filter/sort the list of the Path

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Path Browser command. The RM - Path Browser window opens (Fig.94). 2. Select the View > Filter command. The Path Browser: Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: Match Path Status. Status of the Path (the color of the box, when active, reflects the color associated to the status). Activating the box: Not Actuated (red), the Paths, which the realization is failed for, will be displayed. Failure (red), the Paths with locked traffic will be displayed.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

470

Incomplete (orange), the Paths, which the realization of one of the two routes (A or B) is failed for, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected Paths. Degraded (yellow), the Paths, whose traffic on the mail route regularly transits while the stand-by route is not available, will be displayed. Value meaningful only for protected Paths. Warning (light blue), will the displayed the Paths for which: No alarm information is available for, at least, one of the equipment implementing the Path (status Warning). The input or output channel of the Path itself is disabled (status Disabled).

Running (green), the Paths, whose traffic regularly transits, will be displayed. Off Line (brown), the not managed Paths will be displayed.

Match Path on Ring. Paths present in the specific Rings. To set the criterion, select one or more Rings in the area on the right and press Add. The values set in this way are inserted in the area on the left. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All.

Match Path Through Equipment. Path implemented by specific equipment. It is possible to set the equipment by means of one of the following ways: Select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add From Map. Type the logical address in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Through Equipment box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Delete push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Delete All. Match Path Through Link. Paths passing through specific Links. It is possible to set the Link by means of one of the following ways: Select one or more Link, directly in the Ring Manager window and press Add from Map. Type the name of the Link in the text field and press Add.

The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Path Thought Link box. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Delete push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Delete All. Sort by. Criterion used to sort the list in increasing alphabetic order: numbers from 0 to 9, letters from A to Z). To set the criterion, activate the option: Path Name. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the Path name. Path Source. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the source NE. Path Destination. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the logic address of the destination NE. Path Protection. The Paths will be sorted with respect to the protection.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the RM - Path Browser window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons. When the RM - Path Browser window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

471

LOCATE > RM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The RM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map. With details it is possible: To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map (pag.472) To filter the equipment list (pag.473) To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window (pag.474)

To display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Equipment Browser command. The RM - Equipment Browser window opens where the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map is displayed (Fig.98). Fig.98 RM - Equipment Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Equipment list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.98 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Find equipment. It search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window. View > Filter. It updates the information contained in the window.

For each equipment, the following columns report: Name. Logical address of the equipment. Type. Type of equipment. The wording Virtual points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (Ring Manager). Ring. Ring name in which the equipment is present. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B. Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

472

The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of different severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed. Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. Points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5UX-B or Ring Manager). The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the RM - Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated. The presence of the - symbol points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for the status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to. A double click on an equipment record opens the Ring Manager window containing the equipment. The equipment is highlighted in the Ring Manager window. (3) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filter. Activation of one or more filters. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser)

1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Equipment Browser command. The RM - Equipment Browser window opens(Fig.98). 2. Select the View > Filter command. The Eq. Browser: Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: Match Name. Logic address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field. The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters. Match Type. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Match Ring. Equipment present in the specific Rings of the current map. To set the criterion, in the right area, select one or more Rings and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the left area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment. To set as criterion the equipment: Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the text fields. Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the RM - Equipment Browser window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons. When the RM - Equipment Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically deleted.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

473

To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window
1. Select the Ring Manager > Locate > RM-Equipment Browser command. The RM - Equipment Browser window opens (Fig.98). 2. Select the equipment you wish to highlight. 3. Select the Options > Find equipment command. If not already open, the Ring Manager window is displayed containing the selected equipment. The equipment is highlighted in the window. The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the RM - Equipment Browser window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

474

VLAN MANAGER

The VLAN Manager menu is available only if the VLAN Manager application have been installed. For the use of the VLAN Manager application refer to the specific documentation. The VM-Add VLAN Map, VM-Delete VLAN Map and VM-Modify/View VLAN Map commands are used to represent graphically the VLAN Map objects in the maps and to provide to NMS5UX-B system the parameters to manage and control them. Before using them, it is suggested to read the Graphic network representation (pag.78) where the modalities to configure correctly and rapidly one's supervision system are described. The VLAN Map objects are used to identify subnetworks of radio equipment with Lan Ethernet tributaries which implement virtual LAN paths (VLAN path).

The VLAN Manager menu contains the following commands: Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map (pag.476). It creates VLAN Map objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map (pag.477). It deletes a VLAN Map symbol from the map. Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map (pag.478). It displays/modifies the characteristics of a VLAN Map object. Fault > VM-Network Alarm History (pag.479). It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system. Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm (pag.486). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system. Fault > VM-Element Alarm History (pag.492). It displays/manages the alarm history of the equipment present in the specific VLAN Map. Fault > VM-Element Current Alarm (pag.493). It displays/manages the alarms active in the equipment present in the specific VLAN Map. Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser (pag.494). It displays the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system. Locate > VM-Equipment Browser (pag.496). It displays the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

475

EDIT > VM-ADD VLAN MAP

System access User profile

ReadWrite Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-Add VLAN Map command creates VLAN Map objects for the graphic representation of the network in the map. Before creating an object, it is suggested to read the par. Rules for the creation of the objects (pag.82).

To create VLAN Map objects

It is possible to create all the wished VLAN Map objects. 1. In the UX Map Manager window, move to the point of the map (container or main window) where you wish to create the VLAN Map. 2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Add VLAN Map command. The Add VLAN Manager Map window opens. 3. Type the name of the VLAN Map (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 character and maximum 32 characters) in the Label box. The name will be displayed under the object symbol and will constitute the name of the window that is opened at the double selection of the symbol. 4. In the Comment area, type possible information relevant to the object (max 100 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The VLAN Map is displayed in the New Object Area of the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). Move the symbol in any point of the View area. If the created VLAN Map symbol is already present in a map, it automatically will acquire the status and the characteristics of the existing object.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

476

EDIT > VM-DELETE VLAN MAP

System access User profile

ReadWrite Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-Delete VLAN Map command deletes a VLAN Map symbol from the map.

To delete a VLAN Map object from the map

If a VLAN Map object is present only in one map, can be deleted only if it does not contain objects (equipment, Link, Vlan path, etc.) If the same VLAN Map object is present in more maps, it is possible to delete the symbol even if it contains objects, except for the last copy for which the above mentioned rule is valid: it can be deleted only if empty. 1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the VLAN Map object you wish to delete. 2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Delete VLAN Map command or press the right mouse button, select Delete and confirm. The object is removed from the map.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

477

EDIT > VM-MODIFY/VIEW VLAN MAP

System access User profile

Reading Reading/Writing Reading Reading/Writing

Read Only ReadWrite Entry, Normal Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-Modify/View VLAN Map command displays/modifies the characteristics of a VLAN Map object.

To verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object

It is not possible to assign the same name to two different VLAN Map objects. If the same VLAN Map object has been created into two different maps, at the changing of the parameter values of such a VLAN Map object into a map, the system automatically changes the values of the parameters relevant to the same object into the other map. 1. Into the UX Map Manager window select the wished VLAN Map object. 2. Select the VLAN Manager > Edit > VM-Modify/View VLAN Map command or press the right mouse button and select Modify/View. The VLAN Manager Properties window opens. Box/area: Label. VLAN Map name. Type. VLAN Map symbol. Comment. Additional information.

It is possible to change the Label and Comment parameters. The setting mode of the parameters is the same one pointed out to pag.476. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). In the UX Map Manager window, the VLAN Map assumes the new characteristics.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

478

FAULT > VM-NETWORK ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The VM-Network Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the VLAN Manager database, of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system. With details it is possible: To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system (pag.479) To save the alarms list (pag.481) To delete the alarms (pag.481) To mark the alarms (pag.481) To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (pag.482). To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.482) To filter the alarms list (pag.482) To sort the alarms list (pag.484) To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (pag.484)

As help to the description of the command, see: Modality of the updating of data (pag.485) Modality of recording the alarms (pag.485)

To display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens, where the alarm history stored in the VLAN Manager database, of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the sNMS5UX-B is displayed (Fig.99). At the opening of the window a filter is applied to the alarms list: only the alarms, whose detection date is successive to the midnight of the current day, are displayed. Besides, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. A warning message could be displayed, informing that the database contains a number of alarms greater than 5000. For this cause, the window will display only the records, in chronological order from the newest to the oldest one, until 5000. The 5000 limit is not a memory limit, but simply a limit in the displaying of the alarms. In order to read the alarms successive to 5000, it is sufficient to delete some records or modify the filters.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

479

Fig.99 VM - Alarm History window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.99 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Save. It saves to text file the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window. Actions > Delete. It deletes one or more records from the list and database. Actions > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Actions > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5UX-B and VLAN Manager. View > Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records. View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms. Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event and if the signalling has been detected or is cleared; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Wording Description Green Normal Detected event signalling Blue Status Detected status signalling Light blue Warning Detected alarm with Warning severity Yellow Minor Detected alarm with Minor severity Orange Major Detected alarm with Major severity Red Critical Detected alarm with Critical severity No background Normal Cleared event signalling No background Status Cleared status signalling No background Warning Cleared alarm with Warning severity No background Minor Cleared alarm with Minor severity No background Major Cleared alarm with Major severity No background Critical Cleared alarm with Critical severity Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked. If the X character is present the record has been marked. Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In any moment, it is possible to display the acknowledge information of an alarm moving to the record and pressing the right mouse button. A pop-up window is displayed with the detail of the acknowledge. The content of the window is the same described at pag.484. SET Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection.

For each alarm, it is displayed in the column:

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

480

CLEAR Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm clearing. Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication. In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signalling refers to an event generated by the VLAN Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration alignment between the databases of VLAN Manager and NMS5UX-B, the start or the stop of anyone of the platform processes of VLAN Manager and the stop of all the platform.

Type. Type of Network Element. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. (3) The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total record (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. , indicates that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , indicates that the data are dynamically updated.

To save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. To save to a file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If no filter is active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database.

The Save File window opens. 3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. 4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

To delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. 1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. To delete from the list and from the database of supervision system: A group of alarms, select the records and the Actions > Delete > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Delete > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Delete > All Alarms command.

The records are deleted.

To mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)

Operation available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. After a record has been marked, the operation cannot be undone. Each alarm can be acknowledged twice: the first time when the alarm is detected. When the alarm clears, the character X is removed from the record and the user can acknowledge it the second time. In this second

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

481

case (if already set during the first acknowledge), the value of the Trouble Identification Code parameter cannot be modified. 1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If the filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.

The Acknowledge Alarm window opens. The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed. 3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max 15 characters); it can be used later as search criterion. The setting of this parameter is optional. 4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press Ok. The record will be marked with the letter X. If more records are selected for the operation, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters are for all the records. If one or more detected and cleared alarms are selected, the setting of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters applies both for the set event (SET) and for the clear event (CLEAR).

To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Alarm History)
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. Select the Actions > Alarm Synchronization command. The information present in the database of VLAN Manager and relevant to the alarms are re-aligned to that present in the database of NMS5UX-B.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol. symbol.

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the

To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

482

2. Select the View > Filter command. The Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event), activation status of the signalling and, for the alarms, their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. ACTIVE, the detected signallings will be displayed. CLEARED, the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. ALL, the detected signallings only and the detected and cleared signallings will be displayed. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarm. Activating the box.

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match VLAN. Criterion not available in this context. Match VLAN Map. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps. To set the criterion, in the VLAN Map List area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link. To set the criterion, select one or more Link, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press Add Link from Map. The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box. It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element. To set the criterion, select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map. The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box. It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field). It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways: Type the wished string in the text field. Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made. Select a record in the VM - Alarm History window and press Get Message from selected Alarm.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the Match Acknowledged box, the marked records will be displayed. Furthermore, it is possible to specify: The identifying code assigned by the user to the record during the marking, activating the TIC box and typing the code. The username of the NMS5UX user who executed the marking, activating the User box and typing the username.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

483

Activating the Match Unacknowledged box, the record not yet marked will be displayed. 3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the VM - Alarm History window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the VM - Alarm History window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared. In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.

To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. Select the View > Sort Criteria command. The Sort Criteria window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the VLAN Manager database. SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time. CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order.

4. Select in the Order area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment box (second sorting criterion). 6. Press OK (it executes the sorting and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the sorting and does not close the window). The VM - Alarm History window will list the records in the set order.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Alarm History command. The VM - Alarm History window opens (Fig.99). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Continue in one of the following ways: Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. A pop-up window opens.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

484

Select the View > Acknowledge Information command. The Acknowledge Information window opens.

The content of both the windows is the same and is depicted in Fig.100. Fig.100 Acknowledge Information (VM - Alarm History) window

Identification Code (1)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected (2) (3)

Detailed information of the acknowledge when the signal was in status: detected and cleared (2) (3)

Fig.100 notes (1) (2) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge. Option: (3) User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record. Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minutes:seconds>. Comment. Additional information.

If the alarm has been acknowledged the first time when it was in detected-cleared status, the data present in the SET:... and CLEAR:... areas are the same.

Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Alarm History)

The information present in the VM - Alarm History window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the automatic updating is active (pag.482). At the opening of the VM - Alarm History window, the procedure of automatic updating of the information is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser). The setting of the filters or the criteria used to sort the records in a VM - Alarm History window does not influence the displaying of the information in the other open VM - Alarm History windows or in the VM Current Alarms window.

Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History)

The alarms are stored in the database managed by VLAN Manager application (database of VLAN Manager). The application stores to disk all the alarms up to a limit N (configurable by Superuser - default 50000). When this limit is reached, the system automatically removes the oldest X alarms (X configurable by Superuser - default 1000). During this period, it is possible to manually delete the alarms (pag.481). It is suggested to periodically delete and/or store to file the less meaningful records, so to avoid the saturation of the database.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

485

FAULT > VM-NETWORK CURRENT ALARM

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM - Network Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system. With details it is possible: To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system (pag.486) To save the alarms list (pag.487) To mark the alarms (pag.488) To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (pag.488) To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (pag.488) To filter the alarms list (pag.488) To sort the alarms list (pag.490) To display the acknowledge information of a alarm (pag.490)

As help to the description of the command, see par. Modality of the updating of data (pag.491)

To display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens, where the list of the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system is displayed (Fig.101). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. Fig.101 VM - Current Alarms window

Menu bar (1)

Alarms list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.101 notes (1) Menu: File > Save. It saves to text file the alarms list. File > Close. It closes the window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

486

 (2)

Actions > Acknowledge. It marks one or more records, in such a way that the system memorizes that the user has seen the alarms. Actions > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. Actions > Alarm Synchronization. It re-aligns the alarms table between NMS5UX-B and VLAN Manager. View > Filter. It filters the alarms list. View > Sort Criteria. It sorts the list of records. View > Acknowledge Information. It displays the acknowledge information of the alarms.

For each alarm, it is displayed in the column: Severity. Type of signalling: alarm, status and event; for the alarms also the severity is displayed. The parameter is represented by a coloured box and by a wording, in detail: Background colour Green Blue Light blue Yellow Orange Red Wording Normal Status Warning Minor Major Critical Description Event signallings Status signalling Alarm with Warning severity Alarm with Minor severity Alarm with Major severity Alarm with Critical severity

Ack. Marking status of the record. If the field is empty, the alarm has not been marked; if the X character is present, the alarm has been marked.

Date/Time. Date and time of the alarm detection. The date/time is set by the element that generated the alarm; in the most cases it is the NE controller. Address. Logic address of the alarmed Network Element or System indication. In the column Address is displayed the System label when the signalling refers to an event generated by the VLAN Manager application. The events of this type are the loss of configuration alignment between the databases of VLAN Manager and NMS5UX-B, the start or the stop of anyone of the platform processes of VLAN Manager and the stop of all the platform.

(3)

Type. Type of Network Element. Message. Alphanumeric string that specifies the nature of the alarm.

The symbol: Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filters:... Activation of one or more filters. , points out that the data are not dynamically updated: they are freezed. , points out that the data are dynamically updated.

To save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). 2. To save to file: A group of alarms, select the records and then the File > Save > Selected command. The displayed alarms, select the File > Save > Filtered command. If filters are not active, the displayed records corresponds to the records stored in the database.

The Save File window opens. 3. Type, in the Selection box, the path and the name of the file where the information must be saved. 4. Press Ok. The files are saved in text format and can be opened using any text editor.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

487

To mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm)

After having marked a record, the operation cannot be cancelled. 1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). 2. To mark: A group of alarms, select the records and then the Actions > Acknowledge > Selected Alarms command. The displayed alarms, select the Actions > Acknowledge > Filtered Alarms command. If filters are not active, the displayed records correspond to the records stored in the database. All the alarms of the database, select the Actions > Acknowledge > All Alarms command.

The Acknowledge Alarm window opens. The User box displays the username of the NMS5UX user who required the marking of the records. The value of the box is automatically set to the username of the NMS5UX user who opened the map. The value cannot be changed. 3. Type in the Trouble Identification Code box a code identifying the records (alphanumeric string of max 15 characters); it can be used later as search criterion. The setting of this parameter is optional. 4. Type in the Comment box some additional information (alphanumeric string of max 500 characters). The setting of this parameter is optional. 5. Press Ok. The record will be marked with the letter X. If more records are selected for the operation, the settings of the Trouble Identification Code and Comment parameters applies for all the records.

To realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Current Alarm)
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). 2. Select the Actions > Alarm Synchronization command. The information present in the database of VLAN Manager and relevant to the alarms are realigned to that present in the database of NMS5UX-B.

To activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). At the opening of the window, by default, the automatic updating of the information is inactive. 2. To activate the automatic updating of the data, select the symbol. symbol.

3. To deactivate again the automatic updating of the data, select the

To filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

488

2. Select the View > Filter command. The Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box enables the criterion or expands the window displaying a section that contains the following options: Match Severity. Type of signalling (alarm/status/event) and for the alarms their severity (the colour of the box, when it is active, reflects the colour associated to the severity of the alarm or the type of signalling). Activating the box/option: Critical (red), the alarms with Critical severity will be displayed. Major (orange), the alarms with Major severity will be displayed. Minor (yellow), the alarms with Minor severity will be displayed. Warning (light blue), the alarms with Warning severity will be displayed. Status (blue), the status signallings will be displayed. Normal (green), the event signallings will be displayed. Occurred After, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or after that displayed next to the option. Occurred Before, the list displays only the records whose recording date is equal or before that displayed next to the option.

Occurred After and Occurred Before. Date/time of the alarms. Activating the box:

To modify the date/time displayed next to the specific option, move the indicator of the scrolling bar or click on the arrows located on the sides of the bar. In the box located over the bar, selecting the Coarse Granularity item, it is possible to modify the date/time with step of one hour, while selecting the Fine Granularity item with step of one second. Activating the boxes at the same time and setting properly the date/time, it is possible to determine a time interval. Match VLAN. Criterion not available in this context. Match VLAN Map. Alarms of the equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps. To set the criterion, in the VLAN Map List area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the Match List area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Link. Alarms of the equipment connected from the specific Link. To set the criterion, select one or more Link, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press Add Link from Map. The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Link box. It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Equipment. Logical address of the Network Element. To set the criterion, select the symbol or the symbols of the wished NEs, directly in the VLAN Manager Map window and press Add Equipment From Map. The set values in this way will be inserted in the area next to the Match Equipment box. It is possible to delete all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Message. Description of the alarm (Message field). It is possible to set the criterion by means of one of the following ways: Type the wished string in the text field Activating the Case Sensitive box, distinction will be made between upper and lower case; deactivating the box, no distinction will be made Select a record in the VM - Current Alarm window and press Get Message from selected Alarm.

Match Acknowledged and Match Unacknowledged. Marking status of the alarms. Activating the box: Match Acknowledged, the marked records will be displayed. Match Unacknowledged, the record not yet marked will be displayed.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the VM - Current Alarms window only the record that satisfy specific criteria. Each time that the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. When the VM - Current Alarm window is closed, the possible activation of the filters is automatically cleared.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

489

In the window, there are the push-buttons: Save.... It saves the set criteria to a file. On the choice of the push-button, the Save Filter window opens. Type the name you wish to assign to the file in the Selection box and press OK. Load.... It opens the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Load Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Delete....It deletes the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained. On the choice of the push-button, the Delete Filter window opens. Select the wished file in the Files list and press OK. Clear. It clears the activation of all the filters. Cancel. It closes the window and does not execute the operation.

To sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). 2. Select the View > Sort Criteria command. The Sort Criteria window opens. 3. Select, in the Sort by area, the first sorting criterion: Registration, the alarms will be sorted according to the date/time of recording in the VLAN Manager database. SET Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the detection date/time. CLEAR Time, the alarms will be sorted according to the clearing date/time. The alarms not cleared yet will be considered with clearing date/time equal to 0. Last on TOP; the first record of the table will correspond to the newest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in descending order. Last on BOTTOM; the first record of the table will correspond to the oldest alarm; the successive ones will be listed in ascending order.

4. Select in the Order area, the option:

5. If you wish that the alarms are sorted also according to their address, activate the Group Equipment box (second sorting criterion). 6. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The VM - Current Alarms window will list the records in the set order.

To display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Fault > VM-Network Current Alarm command. The VM - Current Alarms window opens (Fig.101). 2. Select the record which you wish to display the detail of the acknowledge for. 3. Continue in one of the following ways: Press and keep pressed the right mouse button. A pop-up window opens. Select the View > Acknowledge Information command. The Acknowledge Information window opens. The content of both the windows is the same and is depicted in Fig.102.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

490

Fig.102 Acknowledge Information (VM - Current Alarms) window

Identification Code (1)

Detailed information of acknowledge (2)

Area not meaningful in this context

Fig.102 notes (1) (2) Identification code of the record assigned by the user during the alarm acknowledge. Option: User. Username of the NMS5UX user who executed the acknowledgement of the record. Time. Moment when the record has been acknowledged <day-month-year hour:minutes:seconds>. Comment. Additional information.

Modality of the updating of data (VM-Network Current Alarm)

The information present in the VM - Current Alarm window are dynamically updated only if the procedure for the automatic updating is active (pag.488). At the opening of the VM - Current Alarm window, the procedure of automatic updating of the information is, by default inactive (the default setting can be modified by the Superuser).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

491

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT ALARM HISTORY

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry*, Normal*, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

* The Entry or Normal user cannot delete or mark the alarms. The VM-Element Alarm History command displays/manages the history of the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) stored in the VLAN Manager database, relevant the equipment present ONLY to the selected VLAN Map. The choice of the command opens the <VLAN Map name> Alarm History window.

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. VM-Network Alarm History (pag.479). The VM-Element Alarm History command is available only if it has been selected a single VLAN Map in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

492

FAULT > VM-ELEMENT CURRENT ALARM

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-Element Current Alarm command displays/manages the alarm/status/event signallings (alarms) active in the equipment present ONLY to the selected VLAN Map. The choice of the command opens the <VLAN Map name> Current Alarm window.

The description of the window and the operations that can be executed are the same reported in the par. VM-Network Current Alarm (pag.486). The VM-Element Current Alarm command is available only if it has been selected a single VLAN Map in the UX Map Manager window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

493

LOCATE > VM-VLAN MAP BROWSER

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-VLAN Map Browser displays the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B. With detail it is possible: To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B (pag.494) To open the VLAN Manager Map window (pag.495) To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map (pag.495) To filter the list of the VLAN Map (pag.495)

To display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser command. The VLAN Map Browser window opens, where the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system NMS5UX-B is displayed (Fig.103). Fig.103 VLAN Map Browser window

Menu bar (1)

VLAN Map list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.103 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Find VLAN Map. It searches and highlights in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map Options > Open VLAN Map. It opens the VLAN Manager Map window.

For each VLAN Map the name corresponding to the name of the relevant VLAN Map symbol in the map is pointed out. The list of the VLAN Map is in alphabetical order.

(3)

Field: VLAN Map Nb: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filter. Box for the activation of the filter (see pag.495).

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

494

To open the VLAN Manager Map window

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser command. The VLAN Map Browser window opens (Fig.103). 2. Select the VLAN Map. 3. Select the Options > Open VLAN Map command. The VLAN Manager Map window of the selected VLAN Map, opens. If the message Cannot open VLAN Map created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to open the VLAN Manager Map window as the selected VLAN Map is not present in the current map. The VLAN Manager Map window can be opened also by a double click on the VLAN Map record.

To search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser command. The VLAN Map Browser window opens (Fig.103). 2. Select the VLAN Map you wish to highlight. 3. Select the Options > Find VLAN Map command. In the UX Map Manager window, the symbol of the selected VLAN Map is highlighted. If the message Cannot highlight VLAN Map created in another map is displayed, it is not possible to highlight the symbol as the selected VLAN Map is not present in the current map.

To filter the list of the VLAN Map

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-VLAN Map Browser command. The VLAN Map Browser window opens (Fig.103). 2. Type the letters/numbers present in the name of the wished VLAN Map objects in the text box (status bar). 3. Press Filter. The VLAN Map Browser window displayed only the VLAN Map whose name contains the set letters/numbers.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

495

LOCATE > VM-EQUIPMENT BROWSER

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The VM-Equipment Browser command displays the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map. With details it is possible: To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map (pag.496) To filter the equipment list (pag.497) To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window (pag.498)

To display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-Equipment Browser command. The VM - Equipment Browser window opens where the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map is displayed (Fig.104). Fig.104 VM - Equipment Browser window

Menu bar (1)

Equipment list (2)

Status bar (3)

Fig.104 notes (1) Menu: (2) File > Refresh. It updates the data present in the window. File > Close. It closes the window. Options > Find equipment. It search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window. View > Filter. It updates the information contained in the window.

For each equipment, the following columns report: Name. Logical address of the equipment. Type. Type of equipment. The wording Virtual Switch points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (VLAN Manager). VLAN Map. VLAN Map name in which the equipment is present. Status. Status of the connection between the equipment and NMS5UX-B.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

496

Alarm. Functional status (alarms) of the equipment. The severity level of the alarm present in the equipment opens. When more alarms of different severity are present, the level relevant to the more serious alarm is displayed.

Physical Address. Physical address of the equipment. The wording VIRTUAL EQ. Points out that the record refers to a virtual NE (NMS5UX-B).

The information corresponds to the characteristics/operating status of the equipment when the VM - Equipment Browser window has been opened or updated. The presence of the - symbol points out that the information is not available as not meaningful for the status and/or the type of equipment, which is referred to. A double click on an equipment record opens the VLAN Manager Map window containing the equipment. (3) Field: xx of yy. Number of displayed records (xx) and number of total records (yy). If no filter is active, the number of displayed records corresponds to the number of total records. Filter. Activation of one or more filters. Date and time when the window has been opened or updated.

To filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser)

1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-Equipment Browser command. The VM - Equipment Browser window opens(Fig.104). 2. Select the View > Filter command. The Eq. Browser: Filter window opens. Select one or more boxes present in the window, according to the criteria you wish to use. The activation of each box expands the window displaying a section containing the following options: Match Name. Logic address of the NE. To set the criteria, type the logical address of the NE in the text field. The text field for the typing of the equipment name is case sensitive. Then pay attention to the typing of the upper-case letters and of the lower-case letters. Match Type. Equipment type. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the type of wished equipment. Match VLAN Manager Map. Equipment present in the specific VLAN Maps of the current map. To set the criterion, in the right area, select one or more VLAN Maps and press Add. The set values in this way will be inserted in the left area. It is possible to delete a single item from the list pressing, after having highlighted it, the Remove Selected push-button or all the items contemporarily pressing Remove All. Match Status. Status of the connection between the NE and NMS5UX-B. To set the criterion, select the option relevant to the wished status. Match Physical Address. Type (real or virtual) and physical address of equipment. To set as criterion the equipment: Real, activate the IP Equipment option and type the IP address of the wished NE in the text fields. Virtual, activate the Virtual Equipment option.

3. Press OK (it executes the command and closes the window) or Apply (it executes the command and does not close the window). The system displays in the VM - Equipment Browser window only the records that satisfy the activated criteria. Each time the list is filtered, all the records are considered, both the displayed and the hidden ones. In the window there are also the Clear (it removes the activation of the filters and displays the complete list) and Cancel (it closes the window and does not execute the operation) push-buttons. When the VM - Equipment Browser window closes, the possible activation of filters is automatically deleted.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

497

To search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window
1. Select the VLAN Manager > Locate > VM-Equipment Browser command. The VM - Equipment Browser window opens (Fig.104). 2. Select the equipment you wish to highlight. 3. Select the Options > Find equipment command. If not already open, the VLAN Manager Map window is displayed containing the selected equipment. The operation can be executed even by a double click on the equipment record in the VM - Equipment Browser window.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

498

HELP

The Help menu contains the following commands: About NMS5UX-B (pag.500). It displays the version of the NMS5UX-B system present on one's machine. License Information (pag.501). It displays the details of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system. Display Legend (pag.502). It displays the legend of the colours which the objects present in the UX Map Manager window can assume. NMS5UX Software Module (pag.503). It displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package. System Administrator (pag.505). It opens the NMS5UX-B system administrator manual. Overview (pag.506). It opens the NMS5UX-B user manual. Manager (pag.507). It opens the equipment user manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

499

ABOUT NMS5UX-B

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The About NMS5UX-B command displays the version of the NMS5UX-B system present on one's machine.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

500

LICENSE INFORMATION

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The License Information command displays the details of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system.

To display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system
1. Select the Help > License Information command. The License Information window opens. Into the following fields, it points out: Codeword. Version of the codewords present on its own NMS5UX-B system. Max User. Maximum number of NMS5UX users that can open the NMS5UX-B graphical interface (using the same map or different maps). Max Network Element. Maximum number of equipment that can be managed at the same time by NMS5UX-B system. Expiration Time. Possible expiring date of the codewords. The wording - points out that the codewords do not have an expiring date. Network Element Type. Types of the equipment managed by its own NMS5UX-B system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

501

DISPLAY LEGEND

System access User profile

Read Only, ReadWrite Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Display Legend command displays the legend of the colours which the objects present in the UX Map Manager window can assume.

To display the legend of the colours which the objects can assume
1. Select the Help > Display Legend command. The Display Legend window is displayed where are pointed out the colours which the objects of the UX Map Manager window can assume. Each colour represents a status or alarm condition which, colours being equal, can vary depending on the type of object which is referred to. Tab.4, for each object, points out the colours which the relevant icon can assume and the description of the condition they represent.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

502

NMS5UX SOFTWARE MODULE

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The NMS5UX Software Module command displays the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UXB software package. With details it is possible: To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package (pag.503) To print the programs list (pag.504). To end possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained appended (pag.504)

To verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package
1. Select the Help > NMS5UX Software Module command. The NMS5UX Version window opens, where the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package is displayed (Fig.105). Fig.105 NMS5UX Version window

Menu bar (1)

Programs list (2)

Fig.105 notes (1) Menu: File > Print. It prints the content of the widow on the default printer. File > Exit. It closes the window. Command > Check legacy processes. It allows ending possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained appended.

(2)

Column: Program. Program name. Version. Program version. Dimension. Program dimensions expressed through byte. Date. Issuing date of the program. Path. Program path on the server/workstation.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

503

To print the list of programs

1. Select the Help > NMS5UX Software Module command. The NMS5UX Version window opens (Fig.105). 2. Select the File > Print command. The content of the window printed on the default printer.

To end possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained appended
1. Select the Help > NMS5UX Software Module command. The NMS5UX Version window opens (Fig.105). 2. Select the Command > Check legacy processes command. Possible processes, relevant to the only Legacy equipment are terminated.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

504

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Superuser

The System Administrator command opens the NMS5UX-B system administrator manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

505

OVERVIEW

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The Overview command opens the NMS5UX-B user manual.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

506

 MANAGER

System access User profile

Read Only, Read-Write Entry, Normal, Advanced, Privileged, Superuser

The <equipment type> Manager command opens the user manual relevant to the specific equipment type. In the Help menu, only the manuals of the equipment managed by one's NMS5UX-B will be available.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

507

APPENDICES

MENUS AND COMMANDS

Tab.16 points out the menus and the commands present in the UX Map Manager window (Fig.1). For each command, the access to the map and the user profile necessary for the availability of the command in the window, are reported. In detail Map access column. Wording: RO/RW. Command available both in the map with Read Only access and in the map with Read-Write access. RW. Command available only in the map with Read-Write access. S. Command available to the Superuser. P. Command available to the user with privileged profile. A. Command available to the user with advanced profile. N. Command available to the user with normal profile. E. Command available to the user with entry profile.

User profile column. Wording:

The list of the menus/commands in table is the DEFAULT one present at the installation of the NMS5UXB system. The list can be configured by the Superuser. For more information refer to NMS5UX Administrator Manual. Some commands are optional ones. Then, such commands can be absent into the specific menu of its own NMS5UX-B system.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

508

Fig.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Tab.16 Menus/commands (UX Map Manager window) Menus Refresh Map Properties Map Submap Properties Import/Export Change Map Exit Commands Map access RO/RW RW RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW User profile SPANE SPA SPA SPA SP
1

SPANE

1 2 3 4 5

The Privileged user cannot delete the map. Menu/command present only if installed the modules for the management of the Legacy equipment. For the subject profile/map access it is possible only to verify the parameters. For the subject profile/map access it is possible both to verify and to modify the parameters. Optional command.

6 The recording data, if changed, can be saved only by the Superuser and by the users with privileged and advanced profile. 7 8 9 The Action > Bench Switch command is not available to the entry user. The entry user can only verify the data. The Actions > Map Structure Rebuild command is available only to Superuser.

The Commands > SNMP-Command Executor command is available only to the Superuser and to the users with privileged or advanced profile. For the Superuser, the list refers to all the NEs of all the maps managed by NMS5UX-B. For the privileged, advanced, normal, entry profile, the list refers only to the NEs of ones map. 10 The Action > Delete and Action > Acknowledge commands are not available to normal and entry users. 11 The Action > Delete Records command is not available to the normal and entry user. For the Superuser, the operations refer to all the users of all the maps managed by NMS5UX-B. For the privileged and advanced profile, the operations refer only to the users of one's map 12 The privileged, advanced, normal and entry users can only acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mails.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

509

Menus

Commands Container SNMP Managed SNMP Managed (Virtual) Legacy Protocol Managed 2 Legacy Protocol Managed (Virtual) Generic Symbol Link Label Network From File Delete
2

Map access RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW

User profile SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA

Network Element Add

Edit

Network Element Container Modify/View Generic Symbol Link Label Information Graphical Symbol Properties Find Arrange Symbols Vertical Horizontal

RO RO RO RO RO

3 3 3 3 3

RW RW RW RW RW

4 4 4 4 4

NE NE NE NE NE

3 3 3 3 3

SPA SPA SPA SPA SPA

4 4 4 4 4

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RW RW RW RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

SPANE SPANE SPANE SPA SPA SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPAN

Generate Info for WEB Set Current Window Geometry For All Containers Show/Hide Map Tree View Show/Hide Platform Status Show/Hide Link Label Performance Monitoring Read Performance Monitoring Performance Old Performance Monitoring Export Performance Monitoring View/Modify P.M. Status

13 14 15 16 17 18

The privileged, advanced, normal and entry users can only modify one's password. The Action > Force Logout and Action > Forced Exit commands are available only to Superuser. The Action > Force Logout command is not available to the normal and entry user. The activation of the Delete Table box is available only to Superuser. Menu present only if installed the modules for the management of the Ring Manager application. Menu present only if installed the modules for the management of the VLAN Manager application.

19 The Path: Information, Path: Configuration Parameters and Path: Protection Parameters commands are not available to entry users. The Delete Path, Delete Path Protection, Add Path Protection, Path on line and Path off line are not available to normal and entry users.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

510

Menus Equipment Info Radio Certificate

Commands

Map access RO/RW RO/RW

2

User profile SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPAN SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPAN SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPAN SPANE SPANE SPAN S
9 8 7 8 6

Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory SNMP-Software Inventory

2

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

Configuration SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration SNMP-NE PPP Interfaces SNMP-NE Routing Table SNMP-Hw Inventory
5

SNMP-NE Backup/Restore Legacy-Alarm Average Locate Equipment List Locate Proxy Equipment List Line Test
5 2

Network Element Container Network Element Container Network Element Container

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

Connect

Disconnect SNMP-Force NE Disconnect SNMP-Ping Legacy - Reset&Connect

2

Network Element Container Network Element Container Network Element Container

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

Command

Alarm Re-alignment

Configuration Upload

SNMP-Configuration Download Communication Server Board Connect Disconnect

SNMP-Reset Equipment Controller PMP Clear Alarm Table

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

511

Menus

Commands Network Alarm History Network Current alarms Old alarm history NE Alarm history

Map access RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

User profile SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPA SPANE SP SPANE SPANE SPA SPA S S SPAN SPANE SPANE SP SPANE SPANE SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN
15 8 13 14 8 8 11 12 8 10 10

Fault

NE Current alarms SNMP-NE History Log SNMP-NE Command Log Alarm Summary SNMP-Event Statistics Transaction Log Alarm Notification via e-mail SNMP-Command Executor SNMP-NE Monitoring

Tools

SNMP-Auto Discovery SNMP-Rmon SNMP-XML Export 5 NMS5UX History View NMS5UX Statistics SNMP-XML Export Mgmt SNMP-XML File Mgmt
2

Legacy-Network Alarm Hysteresis SNMP-Network Severity Code SNMP-Equipment Severity Code NMS5UX System Users NMS5UX Logged Users SNMP-LCT Equipment Users SNMP-LCT Logged Users Options SNMP-Remote Element Table SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Download SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status SNMP-NE Sw/Fw Release FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Download FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status FAMxc-NE Sw/Fw Release Legacy-NE Sw/Fw Download
2

RO/RW
2

Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status

RO/RW

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

512

Menus

Commands Alarm History Backup Alarm History Restore Alarm History Delete Backup

Map access RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RW RW RO
3

User profile SPA SP SP SPA SP SP S S SPA SPA

16

Misc

Performance Monitoring Backup Performance Monitoring Restore Performance Monitoring Delete NMS5UX Global Database Backup NMS5UX Global Database Restore RM-Add Ring Edit RM-Delete Ring RM-Modify/View Ring RM-Network Alarm History RM-Network Current Alarm

RW

NE

SPA

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RW RW RO

3

SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPA SPA

10

Ring Manager

17

Fault

RM-Network Alarm Summary RM-Element Alarm History RM-Element Current Alarm RM-Element Alarm Summary RM-Ring Browser

10

Locate

RM-Path Browser RM-Equipment Browser VM-Add VLAN Map

19

Edit

VM-Delete VLAN Map VM-Modify/View VLAN Map VM-Network Alarm History

RW

NE

SPA

RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW RO/RW

SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE SPANE S SPANE S S SPANE SPANE

10

VLAN Manager

18

Fault

VM-Network Current Alarm VM-Element Alarm History VM-Element Current Alarm

10

Locate

VM-VLAN Map Browser VM-Equipment Browser

About NMS5UX-B License Information Display Legend Help NMS5UX Software Module System Administrator Overview Manager

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

513

OPERATIONS INDEX

A
Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (entry, normal, advanced, privileged user) (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ...........................................................................317 Acknowledge an operator and re-enable him to receive e-mail (Superuser) (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ............................................................................................................................315 Acquire the configuration of one or more equipment ........................................................... 236, 254 Acquire the configuration of the equipment of one or more containers ...........................................254 Activate a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) .................................................................................323 Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ...................................345 Activate an Ethernet port for the count of the RMON statistics ......................................................339 Activate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type ....183 Activate the management of a Path ..........................................................................................462 Activate/deactivate an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) .....................................................315 Activate/deactivate one or more PM measures at the same time ...................................................230 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (Network Alarm History) .............................268 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (Network Current Alarms) ..........................275 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................438 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (RM-Network Current Alarm) ......................445 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Alarm History) .......................482 Activate/deactivate the automatic updating of the data (VM-Network Current Alarm) ......................488 Activate/deactivate the tributary (Path Browser) .........................................................................466 Activate/deactivate the tributary loops (Path Browser) ................................................................466 Add a new LCT user ................................................................................................................386 Add a NMS5UX user ................................................................................................................374 Add a NMS5UX user (manual login to UX Map Manager window - active) ........................................376 Add a station to the remote equipment list ................................................................................391 Add an equipment to the remote equipment list .........................................................................392 Add an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ..........................................................................313 Add more equipment at the same time to the remote equipment list .............................................394 Add the protection to a Path ....................................................................................................462 Add/modify/delete the informative notes of a NE symbol .............................................................161 Add/remove a prefix to the logical address of an equipment .........................................................227 Align the symbols ...................................................................................................................164 Assign the parameters to monitor to an equipment (create a measure) (SNMP-NE Monitoring) .........322 Associate/remove the background to a container ........................................................................139

B
Backup the alarm history .........................................................................................................423

C
Capture the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port in a specific instant ..............................................340 Change the name of the Path (Path Browser) .............................................................................464 Check the database information necessary to the RAN .................................................................165 Close the open map and opening another one ............................................................................145 Close the UX Map Manager window ...........................................................................................147 Compare the objects of a map/container with the objects of a different map/container ....................143

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

514

Compare the objects, previously saved to file, with the objects of a map/container .........................144 Connect one or more CommServer-S ................................................................................ 237, 259 Connect one or more equipment ....................................................................................... 234, 244 Connect the equipment of one or more containers ......................................................................244 Copy the alarms list into a text editor (Old Alarm History) ............................................................281 Copy the alarms list to a text editor (Network Alarm History) .......................................................267 Copy the objects of a map/container to a different map/container .................................................140 Copy the objects, previously saved to file, into a map/container ...................................................142 Create a Command Log (SNMP equipment) ................................................................................292 Create a filter relevant to the type of alarms whose detection must be notified to the operator via e-mail (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ...................................................................................315 Create a NE Log (SNMP equipment) ..........................................................................................288 Create a new map ..................................................................................................................374 Create an object ..................................................................................................................... 36 Create Container objects .........................................................................................................149 Create Container, NE (SNMP), Link and Label objects described in a file .........................................155 Create Generic Symbols (graphic symbols) ................................................................................154 Create Label objects (wordings) ...............................................................................................155 Create Link objects (connection) ..............................................................................................154 Create manually the object of an equipment present in the Auto Discovery table ............................336 Create more Command Logs at the same time (SNMP equipment) ................................................293 Create more NE Logs at the same time (SNMP equipment) ..........................................................288 Create NE object managed with SNMP protocol ..........................................................................150 Create NE objects managed with Legacy protocol .......................................................................152 Create Ring objects ................................................................................................................432 Create virtual NE objects managed with Legacy protocol ..............................................................153 Create virtual NE objects managed with SNMP protocol ...............................................................152 Create VLAN Map objects ........................................................................................................476

D
Deactivate a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) .............................................................................323 Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the history of the RMON statistics ............................345 Deactivate an Ethernet port from the count of the RMON statistics ................................................340 Deactivate at the same time one or more PM measures for one or more equipment of the same type 183 Deactivate the management of a Path .......................................................................................463 Deactivate the NE Wake Up modality ........................................................................................333 Deactivate the Network Scan modality ......................................................................................332 Deactivate the periodic saving of the data to file (SNMP-HW Inventory) .........................................212 Default Gateway (NE SNMP) Delete ..............................................................................................................................207 Display .................................................................................................................... 202, 205 Set, modify ......................................................................................................................207 Delete a Command Log (SNMP equipment) ................................................................................294 Delete a file (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ...........................................................................................325 Delete a LCT user ...................................................................................................................387 Delete a map .........................................................................................................................146 Delete a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ...................................................................................323 Delete a NE Log (SNMP equipment) ..........................................................................................289 Delete a NMS5UX user ............................................................................................................375 Delete a Ring object from the map ...........................................................................................433 Delete a station from the remote equipment list .........................................................................392 Delete a VLAN Map object from the map ....................................................................................477 Delete all the Command Logs of a SNMP equipment ....................................................................294 Delete all the NE Logs of a SNMP equipment ..............................................................................289 Delete an equipment from the remote equipment list ..................................................................396 Delete an object ...................................................................................................................... 36

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

515

Delete an object from the map .................................................................................................156 Delete an operator (Alarm Notification via e-mail) .......................................................................315 Delete and rewrite the equipment table .....................................................................................227 Delete one or more equipment from the Auto Discovery table ......................................................335 Delete one or more equipment from the list (FAMxc-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ..............................415 Delete one or more equipment from the list (Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .............................421 Delete one or more equipment from the list (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...............................405 Delete one or more Paths ........................................................................................................461 Delete the alarms (Network Alarm History) ................................................................................267 Delete the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................................437 Delete the alarms (SNMP-Event Statistics) .................................................................................303 Delete the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) ..........................................................................481 Delete the alarms stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment ...................................................290 Delete the backup files of the alarm history ...............................................................................425 Delete the backup files of the PM measures ...............................................................................428 Delete the file where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................................................................................453 Delete the list of operations stored in the controller of a SNMP equipment ......................................294 Delete the operation (Transaction Log) ......................................................................................307 Delete the protection of a Path .................................................................................................462 Delete the software present in the memory bench in standby of a SNMP equipment ........................411 Disable an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) .............................................................347 Disconnect one or more CommServer-S ............................................................................ 238, 259 Disconnect one or more equipment ................................................................................... 235, 246 Disconnect the equipment of one or more containers ..................................................................246 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (Network Alarm History) .....................................268 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (Old Alarm History) ...........................................284 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Alarm History) ...............................441 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (RM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................448 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Alarm History) ...............................484 Display the acknowledge information of an alarm (VM-Network Current Alarm) ..............................490 Display the active alarms in the equipment implementing a Path ..................................................463 Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the map .....................................................264 Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system 435 Display the alarm history of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system .................................................................................................................................479 Display the alarm history present in the Old History table ............................................................279 Display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing a Path ......................................463 Display the alarm history relevant to the equipment implementing the Path (Path Browser) .............464 Display the alarms active in the equipment implementing a Path (Path Browser) .............................464 Display the alarms active in the equipment of the map ................................................................273 Display the alarms active in the equipment present in the Rings managed by the supervision system 443 Display the alarms active in the equipment present in the VLAN Maps managed by the supervision system .................................................................................................................................486 Display the alarms stored in the alarm history ............................................................................298 Display the alarms stored in the alarm history (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ................................453 Display the backup files of the SNMP equipment present in the open map ......................................213 Display the characteristics of a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ....................................................323 Display the characteristics of the user who opened the map .........................................................377 Display the content of a Command Log (SNMP equipment) ..........................................................293 Display the content of a file of SNMP commands .........................................................................319 Display the content of a NE Log (SNMP equipment) .....................................................................289 Display the detail of the codewords relevant to its own supervisory system ....................................501 Display the equipment with Logical Address and Station Id different ..............................................202 Display the files of scheduled SNMP commands ..........................................................................320 Display the hardware of the SNMP equipment present in the open map .........................................209 Display the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port .......................................................342

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

516

Display the LCT users list of a SNMP equipment ..........................................................................385 Display the legend of the colours which the objects present in the UX Map Manager window can assume ...........................................................................................................................502 Display the list of all the operators enabled to the reception of the alarm notification via e-mail ........312 Display the list of the active NMS5UX-B applications ...................................................................382 Display the list of the Command Log of a SNMP equipment ..........................................................291 Display the list of the equipment ..............................................................................................222 Display the list of the equipment detected by Auto Discovery (Auto Discovery table) .......................333 Display the list of the equipment managed by the Proxy Agent .....................................................239 Display the list of the equipment present in the Rings of the current map ......................................472 Display the list of the equipment present in the VLAN Maps of the current map ...............................496 Display the list of the FAMxc scheduled for the software updating .................................................414 Display the list of the Legacy equipment scheduled for the software updating .................................420 Display the list of the measures (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ................................................................321 Display the list of the NE Log of a SNMP equipment ....................................................................287 Display the list of the NMS5UX users present in all the existing maps ............................................373 Display the list of the NMS5UX users who have a map open .........................................................379 Display the list of the operations executed by the NMS5UX users ..................................................305 Display the list of the Path present in the Rings of the current map ...............................................459 Display the list of the Rings managed by the NMS5UX-B ..............................................................457 Display the list of the SNMP equipment scheduled for the software updating ..................................404 Display the list of the users (LCT and NMS5UX) connected to a SNMP equipment ............................388 Display the list of the VLAN Maps managed by the NMS5UX-B ......................................................494 Display the mean of the alarms per second received by the NMS5UX-B system and sent by the Legacy equipment .............................................................................................................219 Display the remote equipment list of a SNMP equipment ..............................................................390 Display the results of a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ...............................................................324 Display the results of a measure stored into a file (SNMP-NE Monitoring) .......................................325 Display the software version of a FAMxc equipment ....................................................................416 Display the software version of a SNMP equipment .....................................................................409 Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by alarm ..............................................................302 Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by equipment ........................................................302 Display the statistics of the alarms subdivided by time interval .....................................................300 Display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the map .................................................................................................................295 Display the summary of the alarm history subdivided for the severity relevant to the equipment present in the Rings ................................................................................................................449 Display the value of the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (Legacy equipment) ...............366 Display/hide the Map area ................................................................................................. 33, 168 Display/hide the names of the Link objects ................................................................................170 Display/hide the platform status bar .......................................................................................... 46 Display/modify the certificate of conformity of a radio equipment .................................................233 Display/modify the configuration of a Path .................................................................................465 Display/modify the configuration of a Path protected ...................................................................468 Display/modify/save the information relevant to a Path ...............................................................463

E
Enable and define the criteria for the activation/deactivation of an alarm relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) ...................................................................................................................346 Enable/disable the alarms and to send of the traps and/or to modify the local severity of the alarms of a SNMP equipment ..........................................................................................371 End possible processes, relevant only to the Legacy equipment that have remained appended ..........504 Execute series of SNMP commands stored on file ........................................................................318 Execute the Line Test for one or more equipment .......................................................................242 Execute the Line Test for the equipment of one or more containers ...............................................242 Execute the Ping of a SNMP equipment ............................................................................. 202, 249

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

517

Execute the software reset of an SNMP equipment ......................................................................261

F
Filter the alarms (SNMP-Event Statistics) ...................................................................................303 Filter the alarms list (Alarm Summary) ......................................................................................297 Filter the alarms list (Network Alarm History) .............................................................................269 Filter the alarms list (Network Current Alarms) ...........................................................................276 Filter the alarms list (Old Alarm History) ....................................................................................281 Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................................439 Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................................450 Filter the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................445 Filter the alarms list (SNMP-Equipment Severity Code) ................................................................372 Filter the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .......................................................................482 Filter the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................488 Filter the equipment list (RM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................................473 Filter the equipment list (VM-Equipment Browser) ......................................................................497 Filter the list of operation (Transaction Log) ...............................................................................307 Filter the list of the VLAN Map ..................................................................................................495 Filter the NMS5UX users list (NMS5UX Logged Users) ..................................................................381 Filter the NMS5UX-B applications list (NMS5UX Logged Users) ......................................................383 Filter/order the list of the equipment/units (SNMP-Equipment Port Configuration) ...........................202 Filter/order the list of the equipment/units (SNMP-Software Inventory) .........................................198 Filter/order the list of the objects (Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory) .............................................189 Filter/order the list of the objects (Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory) ...............................................193 Filter/sort the list of equipment (Equipment List Locate) ..............................................................225 Filter/sort the list of the Path ...................................................................................................470 Filter/sort the list of the scheduled equipment (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ............................408 Force the closure of an NMS5UX-B application ............................................................................383 Force the disconnection (logout) of a LCT user ...........................................................................389 Force the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user .....................................................................381 Force the software disconnection of one or more SNMP equipment ................................................248

H
Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Network Alarm History) ....................................270 Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Network Current Alarms) ..................................277 Highlight in the map the symbol of an equipment (Old Alarm History) ...........................................283

L
Lock/unlock a backup file ........................................................................................................216

M
Mark the alarms (Network Alarm History) ..................................................................................267 Mark the alarms (Network Current Alarms) ................................................................................275 Mark the alarms (RM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................................438 Mark the alarms (RM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................................445 Mark the alarms (VM-Network Alarm History) .............................................................................481 Mark the alarms (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............................................................................488 Modality of recording of the alarms ...........................................................................................272 Modality of recording of the alarms (RM-Alarm History window) ....................................................442 Modality of recording of the alarms (VM-Alarm History window) ....................................................485 Modality of the updating of data (RM-Alarm History window) ........................................................442

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

518

Modality of the updating of data (RM-Current Alarms window) ......................................................448 Modality of the updating of data (VM-Alarm History window) ........................................................485 Modality of the updating of data (VM-Current Alarms window) ......................................................491 Modify an object ..................................................................................................................... 36 Modify the characteristics of an equipment of the remote equipment list ........................................395 Modify the characteristics of the LCT users .................................................................................387 Modify the characteristics of the NMS5UX users ..........................................................................375 Modify the characteristics of the operators (Alarm Notification via e-mail) ......................................314 Modify the hysteresis parameters of the fleeting alarms (Legacy equipment) ..................................367 Modify the identification code of the unit ...................................................................................192 Modify the J2 Path Trace parameters (Path Browser) ...................................................................466 Modify the Logical Address of an equipment to its Station Id or vice versa ......................................202 Modify the management of the preferential Path (Path Browser) ...................................................469 Modify the management of the switching between the Path A and Path B .......................................468 Modify the password associated to ones NMS5UX user ................................................................378 Modify the Signal Label parameters (Path Browser) .....................................................................466 Modify the size of the symbols .................................................................................................138 Modify the title of the RM - Alarm Summary window (RM-Network Alarm Summary) .......................453 Move an equipment within the remote equipment list ..................................................................396 Move an object ....................................................................................................................... 36

N
Network severity of the alarms relevant to a specific SNMP equipment type Modify .............................................................................................................................369 Verify ..............................................................................................................................368

O
Open the equipment window ............................................................................................ 197, 226 Open the file, where a previously saved specific setting of filters is contained (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ....................................................................................................................452 Open the Ring Manager window ...............................................................................................458 Open the VLAN Manager Map window ........................................................................................495

P
PPP communication ports (NE SNMP) Display .................................................................................................................... 201, 204 Print the list of programs (NMS5UX Software module) .................................................................504

R
Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Alarm History) .............438 Realign the alarm table of Ring Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (RM-Network Current Alarm) .............445 Realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Alarm History) ............482 Realign the alarm table of VLAN Manager to that of NMS5UX-B (VM-Network Current Alarm) ............488 Re-align the alarms of one or more equipment ................................................................... 235, 252 Re-align the alarms of the equipment of one or more containers ...................................................252 Re-execute the software update (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...............................................406 Rename a station of the remote equipment list ...........................................................................392 Require the closure of an NMS5UX-B application .........................................................................383 Require the disconnection (logout) of a NMS5UX user .................................................................380 Require the updating of the data to the controller of an equipment ...............................................198 Reset and connect one or more Legacy equipment ....................................................... 202, 237, 250

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

519

Reset and connect the Legacy equipment of one or more containers .............................................250 Reset the indication of status change (Alarm Summary) ..............................................................299 Reset the indication of status change (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ............................................453 Restore from file the remote equipment list ...............................................................................397 Restore the alarm history from disk ..........................................................................................424 Restore the alarm history from tape ..........................................................................................424 Restore the database ..............................................................................................................430 Restore the PM measures from disk ..........................................................................................427 Restore the PM measures from tape ..........................................................................................427 Retrieve a given Auto Discovery configuration from file ...............................................................333 Routing Table (NE SNMP) Add an element .................................................................................................................206 Delete an element .............................................................................................................207 Display .................................................................................................................... 202, 205

S
Save a given Auto Discovery configuration to file ........................................................................333 Save on file the characteristics of the Path (Path Browser) ...........................................................464 Save on file the results of the PM measures of one or more equipment of the same type .......... 179, 229 Save periodically the data to file (SNMP-HW Inventory) ...............................................................212 Save the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................................437 Save the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................444 Save the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) ........................................................................481 Save the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) .......................................................................487 Save the data to file (SNMP-HW Inventory) ...............................................................................211 Save the database (backup) ....................................................................................................429 Save the equipment configuration to a file (configuration backup) .................................................216 Save the history of the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port ..........................................................345 Save the list of the Path ..........................................................................................................461 Save the list of the scheduled equipment (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...................................406 Save the objects of a map/container to a file .............................................................................142 Save the PM measures (backup) ..............................................................................................426 Save the results of a measure (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ..................................................................324 Save the results of a measure stored into a file (SNMP-NE Monitoring) ..........................................325 Save the RMON statistics of an Ethernet port captured in a specific instant to file ............................341 Save the set filters to a file (RM-Network Alarm Summary) ..........................................................452 Save to a file the remote equipment list ....................................................................................397 Save to file or print the conformity certificate of a radio ...............................................................187 Save/print the alarms list (Network Alarm History) .....................................................................266 Save/print the alarms list (Network Current Alarms) ...................................................................275 Save/print the alarms list (Old Alarm History) ............................................................................281 Save/print the list of equipment (Equipment List Locate) .............................................................224 Save/print the list of operations (Transaction Log) ......................................................................306 Save/print the list of the equipment/units (SNMP-Software Inventory) ..........................................196 Save/print the list of the objects (Legacy-Hw/Sw Edition Inventory) ..............................................189 Save/print the list of the objects (Legacy-Physical Unit Inventory) ................................................192 Search a symbol in the map ....................................................................................................163 Search an equipment in the Auto Discovery table .......................................................................335 Search and highlight a Path in the Ring Manager window in which it is contained ............................470 Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a Ring .................................................................458 Search and highlight in the map the symbol of a VLAN Map .........................................................495 Search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant Ring Manager window ..........................474 Search and highlight the equipment symbol in the relevant VLAN Manager Map window ...................498 Send a message to one or all the NMS5UX users ........................................................................381 Set the automatic updating of the data (Alarm Summary) ...........................................................299 Set the execution parameters and activate the NE Wake Up modality ............................................332

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

520

Set the execution parameters and activate the Network Scan modality ..........................................330 Set the size of the containers windows ......................................................................................166 Sort the alarms list (Network Alarm History) ..............................................................................271 Sort the alarms list (Old Alarm History) .....................................................................................284 Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................................440 Sort the alarms list (RM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................................447 Sort the alarms list (VM-Network Alarm History) .........................................................................484 Sort the alarms list (VM-Network Current Alarm) ........................................................................490 Start the Command Executor application ...................................................................................238 Stop the updating of the software (Legacy-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) ...........................................421 Stop the updating of the software (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .............................................406 Switch the memory bench (SNMP-Scheduled Sw Dwl Status) .......................................................407 Switch the names of the Paths associated in a protection .............................................................463 Switch the operation of the memory benches and to restart a FAMxc .............................................417 Switch the operation of the memory benches of a SNMP equipment controller ........................ 197, 411

T
Transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more real SNMP equipment .............................................................................................................................256 Transfer the configuration of a SNMP equipment (virtual or real) to one or more virtual SNMP equipment .............................................................................................................................258 Transfer the configuration of an equipment to another equipment of the same type ........................236 Transfer the configuration present into a backup file to an equipment (configuration restore) ...........216 Transfer to the PMP the default table of the alarms .....................................................................262

U
Update the equipment software (FAMxc) ........................................................................... 231, 412 Update the equipment software (Legacy) ...................................................................................418 Update the equipment software (SNMP) .............................................................. 197, 230, 400, 410 Update the results of the PM measures of an equipment ..............................................................172 Update the UX Map Manager window ........................................................................................137 Update the WEB LCT application ...............................................................................................402

V
Verify in which map the symbol of an equipment is present ..........................................................227 Verify the alarms characteristics (status, sending status of the trap, local severity) of a SNMP equipment .............................................................................................................................370 Verify the characteristics and the functional status of an equipment ..............................................185 Verify the configuration/functional status of an equipment ............................................ 197, 271, 278 Verify the configuration/operating status of an equipment ...........................................................226 Verify the enabling and the criteria for the activation/deactivation of alarms relevant to a counter (RMON statistics) .....................................................................................................346 Verify the graphic parameters assigned by the system to the symbol ............................................162 Verify the hardware and software version of the objects relevant to the Legacy equipment present into the open map .......................................................................................................188 Verify the information (marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence, Incorrect Upload and the notes) of a symbol ..............................................................................160 Verify the LCT/NMS5UX users connected to an equipment ...........................................................233 Verify the list of the programs that constitute the NMS5UX-B software package ..............................503 Verify the marking status of the alarms, of the signalling of LCT presence and Incorrect Upload of an equipment .....................................................................................................................226 Verify the objects list of the Legacy equipment present into the open map .....................................191 Verify the operating status of the PM measure points of one or more NEs of the same type ..............181 Verify the reach ability of the equipment (Line Test) ...................................................................234

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

521

Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment ................................................................228 Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters .....................................................173 Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in daily records (24 hours) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table .........................................................................177 Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) and, for each record, verifying the values of the control parameters ..............................................176 Verify the results of the PM measures of an equipment, subdivided in primary records (15 minutes) present in the Old Performance Monitoring table .........................................................................178 Verify the settings of the communication ports of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ....200 Verify the software version of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ...............................194 Verify the statistics of an Ethernet port of a SNMP equipment (RMON statistics) ..............................337 Verify the status and the configuration of Auto Discovery (Network Scan and/or NE Wake Up modality) ............................................................................................................328 Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Network Alarm History) ...............................270 Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Network Current Alarms) .............................277 Verify the time interval between two different alarms (Old Alarm History) ......................................283 Verify the units list (where a controller or a FPGA is present) of the SNMP equipment present into the open map ..................................................................................................................196 Verify/modify the data registration (conformity certificate) of a radio ............................................187 Verify/modify the LCT users list of an equipment ........................................................................233 Verify/modify the parameters of a Container object ....................................................................157 Verify/modify the parameters of a Generic Symbol object ............................................................158 Verify/modify the parameters of a Label object ...........................................................................159 Verify/modify the parameters of a Link object ............................................................................159 Verify/modify the parameters of a Network Element object ..........................................................157 Verify/modify the parameters of a Ring object ............................................................................434 Verify/modify the parameters of a VLAN Map object ....................................................................478 Verify/modify the Proxy configuration parameters of an equipment ...............................................240 Verify/modify the status/severity of the alarms and the status of the trap sending of an equipment ..232

X
XML Convert a XML file into a HTML file .......................................................................................358 Create a cronjob ...............................................................................................................356 Delete one or more cronjob ................................................................................................356 Delete one or more XML, Log or HTML files ...........................................................................360 Display the active cronjobs .................................................................................................355 Display the content of a XML, Log or HTML file ......................................................................358 Display the list of HTML files obtained from the conversion of XML files .....................................358 Display the list of the Log files relevant to the creation of XML files ..........................................357 Display the list of the XML files present in a given directory .....................................................356 Save the complete equipment configuration into a file ............................................................353 To send email with one or more XML, Log or HTML files in attachment ......................................360

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

522

ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

523

NMS5UX-B 6.4.7 - MN.00247.E - 001

524